Technical Specification

VOLUME - IX
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR BMC – ICOMC BUILDING
Technical Specification Page 1

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Description

1 CIVIL
2 CIVIL FINISHES
3 PUBLIC HEALTH ENGINEERING

4 ELECTRIC SERVICES
5 BOREWELL & WATER TREATMENT PLANT, UNDER GROUND TANK, STP

6 STROM WATER DRAINAGE
7 LANDSCAPE
8 LIFT
9 FIRE FIGHTING
10 HVAC
11 LIST OF RELEVANT INDIAN STANDARDS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION – CIVIL
1 Excavation
1.2 Subsurface Investigation

Contractor shall be deemed to have visited the site prior to submitting his Bid and made all necessary
inspection and investigations and to have decided for himself the means of access and working space, the
nature of the ground and subsoil, if any, level of water table, extent of rock demolitions, alterations,
support of neighboring properties, etc.
a. Related work
a) Clearing, grubbing and removing all vegetation from the site.
b) Excavation including getting out, and necessary dressing to make surface ready to receive blinding.
c) Filling and back filling and compaction of fills
d) Removal and disposal of surplus material.
e) Stone soling to roads and paving.
The Contractor shall provide all labour, equipment, materials and any incidentals necessary to complete
all aspects of work included in the drawings and specifications.
b. Applicable Standards:
The following standards shall be followed:
a. IS: 3764-Safety Code for Excavation Work.
b. IS: 1498- Classification and identification of soils for general engineering purposes.
c. British Standard 1377-Methods of test for Soils for Civil Engineering Purposes.
d. British Standard 5930- Code of Practice for Site Investigations.
e. SP27 Handbook of method of measurement of building works.
f. Local Building Regulations and Statutory Regulations.
c. Definitions
 Clear: The removal of trees, scrub and artificial obstructions including fences, concrete slabs,
kerb and channel, remains of old buildings and the like.
 Grub: The removal of tree stumps and roots.
 Top soil: Topsoil is all surface soils, which have sufficient humus to support plant growth without
resort to artificial fertilization.
 Cut: A general term for ‘in place’ material removed by digging from the ground. The term
‘excavation’ or derivatives thereof may be used interchangeably.
 Fill: A general term for material spread and compacted over the ground to make up finished
levels or levels to sub-grade. The term ‘Embankment’ or derivatives thereof may be used
interchangeably.
 Sub-Grade: The finished, trimmed and prepared surface of the earth works after completion of
all cut and fills operations. The term ‘formation level’ or derivatives thereof may be used
interchangeably.
 Sub-Base: A selected filling layer spread and compacted over the sub-grade to make up levels to
the underside of the base course or floor slab.

 Base course: A selected filling layer spread and compacted to levels immediately below road
wearing course.
 Spoil: Excess cut material remaining at the end of filling operations.
 Bulk Earthworks: Earthworks to create, by excavation and/or filling and compacting, building
platforms, road formations, parking areas, reservoir, embankments, drainage canals or any other
formation where the unimpeded use of large earthmoving equipment is possible. This is distinct
from backfill of trenches, foundations or other earthworks immediately adjacent to completed or
partially completed structures.
1.3 Site Preparation

1.3.1 Site Inspection – Preamble
Any Site details or site information included in the Contract documents or Drawings are provided for the
Contractor’s guidance only. The information provided may not be a complete or accurate description of
conditions existing below the surface of the ground. The correctness of the information is not guaranteed
and the Contractor shall be responsible to make its own interpretation of sub-surface conditions.
The Contractor shall visit the site, examine the boreholes, and decide for himself the nature of the ground
and the subsoil to be excavated. No claim for extra payment will be entertained because of any
misunderstanding, incorrect information, assumptions, or ignorance of existing conditions.
1.3.2 Site Quality Control
The Contractor shall provide in his quality assurance programme information to show that a system will
be used to ensure that all works carried out under this section (including any done by sub - Contractor)
will comply with all the requirements of this section.
1.4 Antiquities
Any ancient carvings, relics, coins or other curiosities discovered during the excavation or other work shall
remain the property of the owner and shall be handed over to the owner as required under the General
Conditions of Contract.
1.5 Setting Out and Clearing of the Site - Rates to Include.
The Contractor shall set out the building or other involved works after clearing the site and get the same
approved from employers representatives. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to install
substantial reference marks, bench marks etc and maintain them as long as required by the Project
Manager/Client. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for proper setting out, alignment,
elevation and dimension of each and all parts of the work.
1.6 Benchmarks and Setting Out
The Contractor shall engage a qualified surveyor to establish permanent benchmarks in suitable locations
around the site. These benchmarks shall enable the Contractor to set out the location of all buildings,
paths, roads, utility lines, storm water drains and all other portions of the Contract work.
If an error in setting out causes some portion of the work to be constructed in the wrong location, or to
the wrong dimensions, the Contractor shall make good the incorrect work at his own expense to the
satisfaction of the Project Manager/Client. The Contractor shall be liable for any consequential loss
experienced by the Client.
1.7 Excavation Classification
a. Excavate foundation from existing ground level to the formation levels shown in drawing.
b. Excavation to pit working level.
c. Earthworks outside property line.

d. Excavation, compaction and backfill to plinth and service trenches.
1.7.1 Related Works
a. Site clearance, layout and preparation
b. Dewatering, shoring and strutting.
c. Cast-in-Situ Concrete
1.8 Method of Excavation - Rates to Include:

If the excavation is carried out to a greater depth than specified, extra depth shall be made up by filling
with lean concrete in a ratio of 1:4:8 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand: 8 stone graded aggregate of 40 mm size)
or as directed by the employers representatives. The cost of such extra excavation and of the filling
therein as specified shall be borne by the Contractor. No extra claims whatsoever will be entertained in
this regard. The bottom of excavation shall be trimmed, leveled, rammed and sides dressed and trimmed
in accordance with the drawings/directions of the Project Manager/Client. The Contractor shall ensure
that excavation is to be carried out as indicated on the drawings with sufficient working space to permit
erection of forms, shoring, inspection of foundations and any other activity likely to be carried out below
ground level. All ramps for excavation except one will be cleared before completion (unless specifically
noted otherwise) and made good before final completion. One ramp as directed by the Project
Manager/Client will be left to enable access for the other Contractor. Contractor shall advise Project
Manager/Client when excavation is ready to receive concrete. No concrete shall be placed in foundation
until the Contractor has achieved Project Manager/Client’s approval that a secure foundation has been
prepared.
The Contractor shall ensure proper methods are adopted to control the creation of Dust. Method
adopted shall be approved by the Project Manager/Client.
1.9 Excavation and Preparation for Concreting:

Excavation shall include removal of all materials of whatever nature at all depths and whether wet or dry
necessary for the construction foundation and substructure (including mass excavation for underground
reservoir where applicable) exactly in accordance with lines, levels grades and curves shown in the
drawing or as directed by the Project Manager/Client. The bottom of excavation shall be leveled both
longitudinally and transversely or Sloped as directed by the Project Manager/Client.
Should the Contractor excavate to a greater depth or width than shown on the drawings, as directed by
the employers representatives he shall at his own expense fill the extra depth or width in cement
concrete in proportion as directed by the Project Manager/Client but in no case with concrete of mix
leaner than 1:4:8 cement concrete.
The Contractor shall report to the Project Manager/Client when the excavations are ready to receive
concrete. No concrete shall be placed in foundations until the Contractor has obtained Project
Manager/Client approval in case, the excavation is done through different strata of soil and if the same is
payable as per provision in the Schedule of Quantities the Contractor shall get the dimensions of the
strata decided by the Project Manager/Client for payment. If no specific provisions are made in the
Schedule of Quantities it will be presumed that excavation shall be in all types of soil and other material
and the Contractor's rate shall cover for the same.

After the excavation is passed by the Project Manager/Client and before laying the concrete, the
Contractor shall get the depth and dimensions of excavation and levels (and nature of strata as
applicable as per Schedule of Quantities like hard rock, soft rock etc) and measurements recorded from
the Project Manager/Client. Excavated pit should have adequate clearance from the face of concrete and
all faces to have adequate working space.
1.10 Stacking of Excavated Materials:

All materials excavated will remain the property of the Project Manager/Client and rate for excavation
includes sorting out of useful materials and stacking them on site as directed but with a safe distance
from the edge of excavation to avoid collapse/ shielding of excavated area. Materials suitable and useful
for back filling, plinth filling or leveling of the plot or other use shall be stacked in convenient place but not
in such a way as to obstruct free movement of men, animals and vehicles or encroach on the area
required for constructional purposes.
1.11 Disposal / Carting of Surplus Earth

Top layer of hard soil free from vegetation, spoils, rocks, boulders for a quantity of approximately 15% of
the total excavated earth quantity shall be stocked at locations as directed by the Project Manager/Client
for re-use up to a distance of 300m from the periphery of the buildings. The remaining excavated earth,
except for the hard rock excavated, shall be disposed off including lifting out, transportation to locations
approved by local bodies, Government agencies or as directed by the Project Manager/Client, as the case
may be.
The Contractor is responsible for finding suitable dumping yard and for the removal of all sub grade
obstructions, whether indicated or not, wherever it is likely to interfere with execution and completion of
the Project is deemed to be included in its rates. Project document to be maintained as per Client/Project
Manager instructions.
All surplus and unusable earth shall be carted out and disposed off outside the Site but at a location
approved by local authority and confirming to their specifications. The Contractor shall quote its rate for
disposing off or carting away the item considering requirements and standards of the local authority with
whose permission surplus and unusable earth shall have to be disposed off.
1.12 Dewatering:
Rate for excavation shall include bailing or pumping out water which may accumulate in the excavation
during the progress of work either from seepage, rain water or any other cause and for diverting surface
flow, if any by bunds or other means. Pumping out water shall be done in such approved manner as to
preclude the possibility of any damage to the foundation trench, concrete or masonry or any adjacent
structure inside or outside the wall front. When water is met in foundation trenches or in tank excavation,
pumping out water shall be from auxiliary pit of adequate size dug slightly outside the building
excavations. The depth of auxiliary pit shall be more than the working foundation trenches / levels. The
auxiliary pit shall be refilled with approved excavated materials after the dewatering is over.
The Contractor shall adopt an appropriate method of dewatering work and shall submit its proposal for
carrying out the dewatering work for the approval of the Project Manager/Client. The water shall be

pumped continuously to keep the water level at a minimum of two 2’ (feet) below the lowest point of
excavation level. The operation shall be continued until the entire excavation has been completed so as
to ensure the excavation is always dry. Scope of work under this contract to be carried till handing over of
project. Dewatering at site shall be carried out by the contractor without any additional cost
Adequate number of pumps shall be deployed to ensure a continuous dewatering process. Power / Fuel
required for the operation of pumps etc shall be provided and paid for by the Contractor. Electrically
operated pumps are to be used to control sound pollution.
Softening of the bottom of excavation will not be allowed. If softening occurs due to weather or any
other source, the Contractor shall remove the affected area and replace as specified and directed by the
Project Manager/Client at no extra cost.
Necessary grading, trenching and temporary sumps shall be made around excavations as required to
prevent water runoff into excavation and to ensure proper protection to slopes from erosion.
The excavation shall be kept free from water:
a. During inspection and measurement

b. From start to completion of concreting till they come above existing ground.
c. Till the Project Manager/Client considers that the concrete is sufficiently set.
d. Till the underground reservoir is tested for water tightness.
1.13 Shoring and Strutting

The Contractor shall uphold the faces of excavation work to retain the earth, if required, at locations
where considered necessary. Shoring and strutting shall be erected depending on nature of soil and the
work. The arrangement of shoring and strutting including sizes and spacing of member used shall be
approved by the Project Manager/Client. All such necessary work, including but not limited to making /
preserving / maintaining adequate slopes, necessary precautions, etc for ensuring safety of workmen
below natural ground level shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. No extra charges shall be
admissible on this account. Similarly the Contractor shall be responsible to protect the bottom of
excavation from weather.
1.14 Protection
The excavated area shall be surrounded by strong barricaded safety barriers made of wooden posts three
to four (3 to 4) inches in diameter and cross planks/ runners/corrugated sheets shall be erected to a
height of 1.2m all around the excavation with reflective tapes and necessary lighting at night all as shown
on drawings. The Contractor shall take all necessary measures for the safety of the excavation, persons
working, tools and plants working in and near the excavation pits, property and people in the vicinity.
Protection and maintenance of all bench marks axis points and other similar reference points if disturbed
and/ or damaged, to be replaced by the Contractor at no extra cost to the Client.

Location of existing utility lines; if shown on the drawings, is only approximate and only for interpretation.
The Contractor shall be responsible of their protection during the duration of the Contract without
causing any damage, dislocation, injury and/ or interruption to these utility services. If so, to be replaced/
restored to their original status at the Contractor's own cost.
All the temporary roads, constructions etc shall be made and maintained according to the provisions of
this Contract and as per the instructions of the Project Manager/Client upon the completion of this
Contract, the Contractor shall remove after getting the approval from the Project Manager/Client all such
temporary roads, structures, etc. and restore the area in its original condition without any extra cost.
Sufficient safety signs /board to be placed in the site premises and all the safety precautions should be
strictly maintained.
1.15 Earthwork – Fills

1.15.1 General filling:
1. Deposit in horizontal layers not exceeding 300 mm thick before compaction.
2. Where material is dry, wet each layer to its optimum moisture content for compaction purposes.
3. Where material is wet, delay compaction and placement of additional fill until optimum moisture
content is attained.
1.15.2 Structural filling:
Deposit in horizontal layers not exceeding 200 mm thick before compaction. Each layer shall be uniformly
moist and at the optimum moisture content for compaction purposes.
1.15.3 Crushed stone:
Deposit in horizontal layers not exceeding 200 mm thick so that it is free from lenses, pockets, streaks and
other imperfections. Consolidate using hand tamping, vibratory tampers or other approved methods.
1.15.4 Testing of fill materials:
i) Tests shall be executed by an independent testing agency.
ii) In executing tests comply with the following IS Standards.
a. Sampling
b. Sample preparation
c. Sieve analysis
d. Liquid limits
e. Plastic limit and plasticity index
f. Moisture content
g. Moisture density relationship
h. Sand equivalent
i. Specific gravity
j. Sand core density
k. Rubber balloon density
l. Classification
iii) Carry out moisture density tests on representative samples prior to placing.
iv) Carry out gradation of materials prior to placing as the work proceeds.
v) Carry out site density tests of materials as the work proceeds and as follows:

1.15.5 Frequency of Tests
Structural Fill:
 One test for each 500 sqm. Placed.
 One test whenever there is a change of gradation or placement conditions.
General Fill:
 One test for each 3000 sqm. placed.
 One test whenever there is a change of gradation or placement conditions.
 Execute site density tests for compaction at a minimum depth of 100 mm below compacted
surface.
 Execute a full compaction test or a one-point compaction test in conjunction with each site
density determination.
 Execute a gradation test with each site density test and whenever there is an apparent change in
material being placed.
 Execute the following site density tests and laboratory moisture density tests to evaluate
compaction achieved
(i) One test for every 200-400 sqm of backfill in trenches or surrounding structures.
(ii) One test for every full shift of compaction operations on mass earthwork.
1.15.6 General and Structural Fill:
 To conform to gradation of well graded soil.
 To be free from plastic fines and weakly elemented lumps of sand.
 To be homogeneous and at the optimum moisture content for compaction purposes when placed.
1.15.7 Crushed stone:

To consist of either:
 Durable crushed rock comprising angular fragments obtained by breaking and crushing solid or
shattered natural rock, or
 Durable crushed gravel stone obtained by artificial crushing of gravel, boulders, or fieldstone.
 Rubble soling 20 cm in height consisting of random granite stone/ available laterite stone including
filling in voids with durable crushed rock comprising angular fragments and consolidating with
mechanical ramming.
1.15.8 Water
Water used for compacting fill or for washing crushed stone shall be clean and free from oil, grease,
organic matter, suspended sediments and other deleterious substances.
1.15.9 Adjacent excavations:
Where an excavation encroaches below a line drawn at an angle of 60 Deg. from the horizontal from the
nearest formation level of another higher excavation, the lower excavation, all work within it and
backfilling thereto shall be completed before the higher excavation is done.
Excavated formations:
1. In made up ground excavate foundations down to a natural bearing formation of undisturbed
subsoil, unless otherwise instructed.

2. Obtain instructions if a natural bearing formation of undisturbed subsoil:
 Is obtained at a lesser depth than shown on the Drawings
 Is not obtained at the depth shown on the drawings.
3. If, after inspection, formation becomes unsuitable for any reason, excavate further and backfill
with approved material all at the Contractor's expense.
1.15.10 Treatment of formations generally:

Trim excavations to required profiles and levels. Remove all loose material.
1.15.11 Excess excavation:
Backfill any excavations taken wider or deeper than required with mass concrete. Where such excess
excavation is carried out without approval, necessary extra backfilling shall be at the Contractor's
expense.
1.15.12 Compaction Requirement
The required compaction of fills which are deemed to be part of bulk earthworks shall be achieved by a
minimum number of passes of compaction plant. This plant shall unless the Project Manager/Client
specifically allows in writing, include type
a. For primary compaction, and may include either or both types.
b. Of the following listed types for the final compaction of the surface.
1. Vibratory roller of either double or single vibrating drum of not more than 3.2 tonne mass per
meter of roll width having a vibration frequency of not less than 37 Hz. Vibrating roller not
exceeding the above weight limit but of frequency less than 37 Hz are approved providing the
nominal amplitude does not exceed that shown relative to the weight in tones per meter roll width
in figure1 any other vibrating roller specifically approved by the Project manager. Vibrating rollers
of less than 1 tonne per meter of roll width shall not be used to compact any layer of fill of more
than 175mm of un-compacted thickness.
2. Three wheel steel- tired rollers having rear rolls each at least 0.50m wide and having not less than
4.5 tonne per meter of roll width.
3. Pneumatic tyred roller having a minimum weight when operating of not less than seven tonne,
spread over at least seven pneumatic tyred wheels.
For filling in inaccessible places or against structures, hand tamping or small vibratory compaction
equipment may be used with the approval of the Project Manager/Client.
 Care must be taken during compaction to ensure that no gaps are formed between adjacent
layers.
 Fill material shall be compacted to attain the densities as called for in the specifications.
 As filling proceeds, test to verify the compaction being achieved shall be conducted. Tests shall
be done at a minimum frequency no less than one test per 150 cum. of fill volume. Testing
locations shall be distributed evenly throughout the fill volume and each layer area. The
locations shall be to the satisfaction of the Project Manager/Client and copies of the results of
all tests shall be submitted to them whether successful or not.
 In the event that tests do not verify the minimum compaction requirements, the whole of the
area for which the test is representative shall be reworked and retested, unless otherwise
directed by the Project Manager/Client.

 Where the Project Manager/Client is of the opinion that a specific area within an embankment
cannot compact to the specified density, he shall order alternative improvement works.
The following references shall be used to confirm compliance:

Sampling BS 5930 (or as updated), IS 2720
Field Dry Density: BS 1377: Clause 4.4 Test 15 (or as updated) “Determination
of the dry density of soil on the site – Sand replacement
test”
Standard Maximum BS 1377: Clause 4.1 Test 12 (or as updated)
Dry Density: “Determination of dry density / moisture content
relationship” using 2. Kg rammer
Moisture Content: BS 1377: Clause 2.1 Test 1 (or as updated)
‘Determination of the moisture content – Standard”

1. Remove all suitable and excess material from areas to be filled.
2. Surface of ground with a gradient exceeding 1 in 5, which is to receive filling must have horizontal
benches cut to match the depths of compacted layers of filling.
3. Do not place fill until the formation has been inspected by the Project Manager/Client. Give the
Project Manager/Client at least 24 hours notice of when formations will be ready for inspection.
Compact filling after grading and leveling surfaces. Compact filling in layers, adding any necessary extra
fill and water, to attain the minimum dry densities as tabulated in the table appended at the end of this
Section.
Backfilling and compaction shall be undertaken under full-time presence of the Contractor’s Supervisor,
and each layer shall be got checked by the Project Manager/Client. Further layers are not to be placed
without the approval of the Project Manager/Client.
Compact filling using vibratory plate, roller or other approved (mechanical) equipment, making the
required number of passes with the equipment to obtain specified densities. Each trip of equipment
shall overlap the previous trip by 500mm.
If selected earth kept aside as per the provisions is not sufficient for the back filling, the Contractor,
with its own cost, shall bring in good quality earth, murrum etc. from borrow pits, either approved at
the site and/ or elsewhere by the Project Manager/Client. The cost of developing and reinstating the
same after use as per the directions of the Project Manager/Client and/or local laws prevailing for such
borrow pits, loading, transporting and re-handling of earth/ murrum etc. deemed to have been
included in its rates by the Contractor.
The Contractor at its own cost rectify and / or restore the damage (s) occurred due to improper backfill
and compaction done by it.
If any settlement occurs due to improper backfill and compaction and/ or cracks developing in the sub-
structure/ super structure works due to the same, the Contractor shall make good its damages/ defects
at no extra cost to the Client.
The Contractor at its own cost protect by bracing the basement walls till the proper back filling and
compaction are completed with the satisfaction of the Project Manager/Client and complying with the
conditions of the Contract and Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall also undertake and
execute the patching of the basement wall after removal of such bracing at no extra cost.

All the back filling and compaction works shall be of acceptable standard to both the Project
Manager/Client and the Structural Engineer.
The Contractor shall include in its rates the cost of removal of debris/ rubbish etc. from the bottom of
the basement wall prior to back filling.
Schedule: Curve No. 1: To be referred.
Table for compaction requirements
Fill Materials Min. Min. Min.
Passes Energy* Compaction
General Fill 3 4550 Kg 90%
Structural Fill:
Confined spaces 4 1150 Kg 95%
Open spaces 3 4450 Kg 95%
Crushed stone:
Confined spaces 4 1150 Kg -
Open spaces 3 4450 Kg -
Catch 3 4450 Kg 95%
Notes:
a. Forces applied for compaction shall be dynamic or impact loads.
b. Specified percentages of compaction shall be related to the maximum dry density at the optimum
moisture content as established by and verified on site by.
c. Correct field density to account for stone material larger than 19 mm in accordance with suggested
methods.
1.16 Rates to Include for Excavation Items

Apart from other factors mentioned elsewhere in this Contract, rates for the item of excavation shall
also include for the following:
a. Clearing site.
b. Setting out works as required.
c. Providing shoring and shuttering to avoid sliding of soil and to protect adjacent structures and
subsequently by removing the same.
d. Collection of excavated spoil and Sorting out useful excavated materials and conveying beyond
the structure and stacking them neatly on the site for back filling or re-use as directed.
e. Bailing and pumping out water as required and directed.
f. Excavation at all depth (unless otherwise specified in the Schedule of Quantities) and removal of
all materials of whatever nature wet or dry and necessary for the construction of foundation
underground reservoir etc and preparing bed for laying concrete.
g. Necessary protection including labour, materials, and equipment to ensure safety and protection
against risk or accident.
h. Drilling of small holes as directed to explore the nature of substratum if necessary.
1.17 Measurement for Excavation

Excavation for foundation of columns, beams, walls and the like shall be measured and paid net as per
drawing, dimensions of concrete (bed concrete where so specified) at the lowest level in regard to
length and breadth and depth shall be computed from the concerned excavation levels and ground

levels taken before excavation. Any additional excavation required for working space, planking
dewatering and strutting etc. shall not be measured and paid for separately but rates quoted for
excavation shall include for all these factors. No increase in bulk after excavation shall be made.
Prior to start of Project the Contractor shall verify and approve the block levels and benchmarks
established for the entire Site and sign in acceptance of the same. In case of any discrepancy the same
shall be checked and will be recorded and agreed after cross verification at the Site jointly by the
Contractor and the Project Manager/Client. The above established benchmarks and ground levels will
be the basis for computing the quantum of excavation.
After site clearance a joint survey by the Contractor and the Project Manager/Client will be carried out
to establish ground levels before excavation which will be the basis for computing quantities.
On completion of excavation, a joint survey will be carried out at the Contractor’s cost to establish the
excavated levels and ascertain if the work is as per Drawings and Specifications with respect to depth
and area. The portions excavated for working space, slopes as shown on drawings will not be measured
for payment. Extra portions excavated, due to the Contractor’s working method, if any, will not be
measured or paid. No extra claims whatsoever will be entertained in this respect.
The method adopted for computing volumes shall be as per Simpson’s Rule. Deductions for rock
excavation quantity computed as specified will be made from excavation in soil.
1.18 Rates to include for Backfilling Item
Apart from other factors mentioned elsewhere in this Contract, rates for the item of backfilling item of
work shall also include for the following:
a. Backfilling the trenches alongside masonry or concrete with approved excavated materials up to
the natural ground level in layers as specified including watering and ramming.
b. Earth filling in plinth: If there is approved surplus earth after backfilling the sides of excavations, the
same will be used for plinth filling if required. Any additional approved earth if required for plinth
filling the same shall be brought on the site, by the Contractor from outside. No borrow pits shall
be opened on the Site; Filling in plinth shall be done in layers of 15cm thick each layer being
consolidated by ramming and watering. The payment of back filling item shall be made on
measurement of finished consolidated quantity.
1.19 Soling used as sub-base

1.19.1 Location
Soling shall be constructed under floors and other areas where shown n the drawings.

1.19.2 Soling Materials
The size of stones to used soling shall not be more than 120mm, nor less than 50 mm when measured
in any direction, and their height shall be equal to the proposed soling course depth of 75mm +/-25mm.
1.19.3 Preparation of the Sub-grade before laying soling

The top level of the sub-grade shall be lower than the level of the underside of the floor or other
structure, to be built over it, by a distance equal to the combine depth of soling and metalling (due
allowance being made for consolidation). The depth of the soling shall be 75mm but to achieve this
finished depth, an initial loose layer of approximately 100mm will be necessary.
1.19.4 Laying and packing the soling stones

A layer of sand or small size gravel 50mm thick shall be spread and consolidated on the sub-grade
surface prepared.
The stones for soling shall be of a height equal to the required thickness of soling. Their length or
breadth shall not be greater than twice the soling thickness. This means that the stones would pass
through a ring 180mm in diameter but not a ring 100mm in diameter.
Soling stone shall be hand packed as close as possible with their broadest side downward and greatest
length across the road. Gauge pegs shall be driven at close intervals to indicate the required thickness
of the soling. The joints between stones shall be placed at the edges of the area to be covered. All
interstices between stones shall be wedged in with smaller stones, well driven into achieve tight
packing and complete filling of the interstices.
1.19.5 Consolidation of the soling

The soling shall be thoroughly consolidated with mechanical rollers of 8 to 10 tonne weight starting at
the edges and working towards the center. If the soling is to have a cross fall the rolling shall
commence at the lowest edge and work over and up to the upper edge. Rollers shall pass over the
same surface at least 8 times to ensure that the soling is well consolidated. The top surface shall be
checked frequently to make sure that it conforms to the design grade and level.
Vibratory compactors may be used, if approved by the Consultants / Project Manager/Client instead of
mechanical rollers. For areas where access is difficult or restricted heavy hand rammers and hand
rollers may be used if approval for this has been obtained from the Consultants / Project
Manager/Client.
2. CAST IN-SITU CONCRETE

Related Work
a. Concrete Formwork
b. Concrete Reinforcement
c. Concrete Finishing
d. Sealants
2.1. a Applicable Standards

IS - 299 Specification for Ordinary, rapid hardening and low heat Portland Cement
IS - 455 Specification for Portland blast furnace slag Cement
IS - 1489 Specification for Portland Pozzolona Cement
IS - 4031 Method of physical tests for hydraulic Cement
IS - 650 Specification for Standard sand for testing of Cement
IS - 383 Specification for Coarse and Fine aggregate for use in mass concrete
IS - 515 Specification for natural and manufactured aggregate for use in mass concrete.
IS - 2387 Method of test for aggregates for concrete.
IS - 516 Methods of test for strength of concrete.
IS - 1199 Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete
IS - 3025 Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water used in industry.
IS - 2645 Specification for integral cement water proofing compounds
IS - 1791 Specification for batch type concrete mixers
IS - 2438 Specification for roller pan mixer
IS - 2505 Specification for concrete vibrators, immersion type
IS - 2506 Specification for screed board concrete vibrator
IS - 2514 Specification for concrete vibrating tables
IS - 3344 Specification for pan vibrators
IS - 4656 Specification for form vibrators
IS - 2722 Specification for portable swing weigh batchers for concrete (single & double bucket type)
IS - 456 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete
IS - 1343 Code of practice for pre-stressed concrete
IS - 457 Code of practice for general construction of plain and reinforced concrete for dams and
other massive structures.
IS - 3370 Code of practice for concrete (Part I to IV structures for storage of liquids
IS - 3935 Code of practice for composite construction
IS - 3201 Criteria for design and construction of precast concrete trusses.
IS - 2204 Code of practice for construction of reinforced concrete shell roof.
IS - 2210 Criteria for the design of R.C. shell structures and folded plates.
IS - 3558 Code of practice for use of immersion vibrators for consolidating concrete
IS - 3414 Code of practice for design and installation of joints in buildings
IS - 2571 Code of practice for laying in-situ cement concrete flooring
IS - 1904 Code of practice for design and construction of foundations in soils
IS - 2950 Code of practice for design and construction of Raft foundations
IS - 13920 Code of practice for ductile detailing of reinforcement concrete structure subjected to
seismic forces.
Definitions
a. Water / Cement Ratio:
The ratio by weight of water to cement in a mix expressed as a decimal fraction. Water being that
which is free to combine with cement, including free water in aggregate but excluding that.
b. Hot Weather:
o
Shade air temperature of 37 C and higher.

Quality Assurance
a. Supervising staff shall have qualifications and experience specified in the Contract.
b. The following tests shall be carried out by the approved agency:
 Testing preliminary test cubes;
 Testing work test cubes;
 Testing in situ concrete at site by hammer test, ultrasonic tests and core tests.
c. Standards: Comply with the following codes, specifications and standards and as shown on the
drawings.
 IS 456: 2000 - Specifications for plain and reinforced concrete.
 ii.IS 269:1976 or latest amendment - Specifications for ordinary and low heat Portland cement.
Quality
All materials used in the works shall be of best quality of their respective kind as specified herein,
obtained from suppliers and sources approved by the Structural Consultant and shall comply strictly to
tests instructed by the Structural Consultant / Project Manager/Client, and where tests are not laid out,
with the requirements of the latest issue of the relevant Indian Standard.
Test Certificate
All manufacturer’s test certificates, proof sheets, etc showing that the materials have been tested in
accordance with the requirements of the specification and of the approved Indian Standard(s) are to be
supplied free of charge on request to the Project Manager/Client.
Cement
Cement shall be of Portland type /PPC and shall comply of IS: 269. The cement used shall be of approved
manufacture and the sources of supply shall not be changed without approval of the Consultants / Project
Manager/Client.
It shall be received in bags of 50 kg each confirming to IS 2580,IS 11652, or IS-11633- or IS-12174. The
bags shall be marked with the manufacturer’s name or its registered trademark, if any, type of cement
and grade legibly and each batch shall be accompanied by a Test Certificate from the factory.
Samples shall be taken immediately on receipt of cement at about one sample per 1000 bags. Tests shall
be carried out on fineness, initial and final setting time and compressive strength as per IS:4031 and result
verified by the Project Manager/Client before use in the permanent works. Samples shall be taken
immediately on receipt of cement at site. Sampling shall be as per IS 3535.
Stacking and Storage of Cement

Cement shall be stored in such location so as to prevent deterioration due to moisture. A dry and
waterproof shed called as “cement godown” shall be best suited for this. Bags shall be stacked on rigid
waterproof platforms about 15 to 20 cm clear above the floor. Flooring of the shed shall consist of the
two layers of dry bricks laid on a well consolidated earth to avoid contact of cement bags with the floor. It
shall also be 35 to 45 cm clear from the surrounding walls. A maximum high stack of Ten (10) bags is
permitted. The bags, shall be arranged in header and stretcher fashion. Stacks shall be so arranged that
the first batches are used first, and so that they permit easy access for inspection and handling.

The size and dimensions of the cement godown shall get to be approved, before its construction, from the
Project Manager/Client.
For extra safety during monsoon, or when cement is expected to be stored for an unusually long period,
each stack shall be completely enclosed by a waterproofing membrane, such as polyethylene which shall
cover the top of the stack. Care shall be taken to see that the stored cement is not damaged at any time
during the use.
Storage of the cement at the Site shall be at the Contractor’s expense and risk. Any damage occurring to
cement due to faulty storage in the cement godown or on account of negligence on its part, shall be the
liability of the Contractor.
Aggregate
a. To be crushed naturally occurring materials conforming to IS: 383-All physical properties and
grading parameters must conform to this code.
b. Aggregate, 95% of which shall be retained on 4.75 mm test sieve.
c. Aggregate shall be from crush granite, quartzite, trap, and basalt quarries.
d. Free from soft friable thin porous laminated or flaky pieces.
e. Free and clean from dust and foreign matters, namely injurious amounts of disintegrated pieces,
alkali, vegetable matters and other deleterious substances.
f. Shall be chemically inert when mixed with cement.
g. The aggregate shall not contain any material that will attack the reinforcement. The maximum
quantities of deleterious materials in coarse aggregates shall not exceed the limits laid down as per
IS:2386 (Part I & II)
h. Shall be angular in shape
i. Maximum size of the aggregate shall be 20mm.
j. Shall have a minimum Specific gravity of 2.6(Standard surface dry basis)
k. When stone aggregate or gravel is brought to the site single sized (ungraded), it shall be mixed with
single sized aggregates of different sizes in the proportion to be determined by the field tests to
obtain graded aggregate or specified nominal size. The Contractor is deemed to have included the
cost for above in its rates.
Course aggregates shall be measured in stacks and adjustment shall be made by deducting seven and half
(7.5) per cent of gross measurements of stacks in respect of aggregate of nominal size 40 mm and above.
No deduction from the gross measurements of the stacks is to be made in respect of aggregates of
nominal size below 40 mm.
Course aggregates brought to site shall be washed clean if required and as directed by the Project
Manager/Client.
Fine Aggregate
a. Shall be washed dry sand and shall confirm to IS: 383 between Grading Zone I and II for structural
concrete.
b. Shall pass through IS sieve 4.75mm test sieve leaving a residue not more than 5%

c. Shall not contain any traces of silt, and the sand shall be thoroughly washed with water so as to
bring the percentage of silt content within the prescribed limit. Nothing extra is payable to
Contractor on this account.
d. Fine aggregates shall be so stacked as to prevent dust and foreign matter getting mixed up with it
as far as practically possible.
e. Since fine aggregates bulk to a substantial extent when partially wet, measurements shall be taken
when the stacks are dry or an appropriate allowance has been made for bulking.
Water
a. Water for mixing shall be from potable supply system.
b. Water shall be tested in accordance with IS:3025. Maximum permissible limits of deleterious
materials in water shall be as given in IS:456.
c. The pH value of water shall not be less than 6 and more than 9.
d. Water which may erode or discolour concrete or which has got more than 1000 ppm of chloride
content shall not be used.
e. The Contractor shall make its own arrangements for storing of water if necessary in drums, tanks or
cisterns to the satisfaction of Project Manager/Client. Care shall be taken to ensure that water is
not contaminated anyway.
Expansion and Contraction Joints

a. Joint filler shall be Bitumen impregnated shalitex board 25mm or CAPCELL-HD100 supreme board
(aerated plastic) for expansion joint.
b. Poly sulphIide /polyurethane based joint sealants shall be provided in expansion joint.
c. Sliding type neoprene bearing pad of structural grade for expansion joints.
d. Extruded aluminium sections with EPDM profile sections with extruded polystyrene sections and
sealants.
Miscellaneous
a. Chemical curing compound of approved make to form a membrane or surface which will
disintegrate and flake from that surface over a period of days commencing at least 7 days after
application.
b. Vapour barrier and separation layer to underside of concrete slab, as and when necessary, and
grade 10 mil (.25 mm) thick polyethylene sheets with laps 100mm on sides and ends.
Proportioning, Batching & Mixing of Concrete

Proportioning
a. Aggregate
The proportions, which shall be decided by conducting preliminary tests shall be by weight.
These proportions of cement, fine and coarse aggregates shall be maintained during subsequent
concrete batching by means of weight batchers conforming to I.S. 2722 capable of controlling the
weights within one percent of the desired value. Except where it can be shown to the
satisfaction of the Project Manager/Client that supply of properly graded aggregate of uniform
quality can be maintained over the period of work, the grading of aggregate shall be controlled

by obtaining the coarse aggregate in different sizes and blending training the coarse aggregate in
different sizes and blending them in the right proportions. The different sizes shall be stocked in
separate stockpiles. The grading of coarse and fine aggregate shall be checked as per IS 383 or as
determined by Project Manager/Client to ensure proper grading in accordance with the samples
used in preliminary mix designs. The material shall be stockpiles well in advance of use.
b. Cement
The cement shall be considered by weight, for design mix.
c. Water
Only such quantity of water shall be added to the cement and aggregates in the concrete mix as
to ensure dense concrete, specified surface finish, satisfactory workability, consistent with the
strength stipulated for each class of concrete. The water added to the mix shall be such as not to
cause segregation of materials or the collection of excessive free water on the surface of the con-
crete.
d. Definition of Water/Cement Ratio
The water cement (W/C) ratio is defined as the weight of water in the mix (including the surface
moisture of the aggregates) divided by the weight of cement in the mix.
e. Water/Cement Ratio
The actual water cement ratio to be adopted shall be determined in each instance by Contractor
and approved by the Project Manager/Client.
f. Proportioning by Water/Cement Ratio
The W/C ratio specified for use by Project Manager/Client shall be maintained. Contractor shall
determine the water content of the aggregates as frequently as desired by the Project
Manager/Client as the work progresses and as specified in IS 2386 (Part III) and the amount of
mixing water added at the mixer shall be adjusted as directed by the Project Manager/Client so
as to maintain the specified W/C ratio. To allow for the variation in their moisture content,
suitable adjustments in the weights of aggregates shall also be made.
Batching and mixing of concrete

a. The proportions of the materials for the concrete mix as established by the preliminary test for
mix design shall be followed for all the concrete in the works and shall not be changed except
when specifically permitted by the Project Manager/Client.
b. If approved by the Project Manager/Client concrete may be produced by volume batching the
ingredients except the cement. Fine and coarse aggregate shall be proportioned volumetrically
by subsequent conversion of the weights of volumes knowing their bulk densities as stipulated in
Para 9.2.2 or I.S. 456. All concrete shall be mixed in mechanically operated batch mixers
complying with I.S. 1791 of approved make with suitable provisions of correctly controlling water
delivered to the drum. The quality of water actually entering the drum shall be checked with
reading of gauge or valve setting before starting the job. The test shall be made while mixer is
running. The volume of the mix material shall not exceed the manufacturer's rated mixer
capacity. The batch shall be charged into the mixer so that some water will enter the drum in
advance of cement and aggregates. All water shall be in the drum by the end of 15 seconds of
the specified mixing time. Each batch shall be mixed until the concrete is uniform in colour for
the minimum period of 2 minutes after all the materials and water is in the drum. The entire
contents of the drum shall be adjusted in one operation before the raw materials for succeeding

batches are fed into the drum. The entire contents of the drum shall be adjusted in one
operation before the raw materials for succeeding batches are fed into the drum. The weighing
gauge of mix shall be periodically checked or as directed by the Project Manager/Client. The
Contractor should carry our rectifications immediately if found necessary.
Mixer and the weight batcher shall be maintained in clean and serviceable condition. The
accuracy of the weight batcher shall be periodically checked. Both mixer and the weight batcher
shall be set up level on firm base and the hopper shall be loaded evenly. The needle shall be
adjusted to zero when the hopper is empty. Fine and coarse aggregates shall be weighed
separately.
Each time the work stops, the mixer shall be cleaned out and the next commencing he mixing,
the first batch shall have 10% additional cement to allow for striking in the drum.
Batching Aggregate by Volume
a. Obtain approval before using this method.
b. Batch cement by weight and water by either weight or volume.
c. Measure aggregate in metal container whose depth is not less than their greater width and the size
of which is such as to enable the whole to be easily checked.
d. Concrete shall be mixed in concrete mixers until a uniform distribution of the material, and a
uniform colour and consistency is obtained.
e. Concrete mixing shall in no case be less than two minutes.
f. Each batch shall be so charged into the mixer that approximately 10% of the water enters the drum
before the cement and aggregate. Water shall be added gradually while the drum is in motion, so
that all the water is in the drum until the first quarter of the minimum time.
g. The amount of concrete mixed in drum shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer and the
whole of the material shall be removed before a fresh batch enters the drum.
h. Do not modify the mixed concrete either by addition of water or cement or other means.
Cleanliness
Clean mixer and handling plant by washing with clean water at the end of the work and at intervals of 30
minutes during mixing.
If old concrete mix remains in the mixer drum, rotate the drum with clean aggregate and water before
mixing the cement.
Planning of Concrete
a. Consultant shall be informed 24 hrs in advance before the pour of each concrete to allow for
inspection of reinforcement, sizes and levels of the members to be concreted, concrete cover,
cleanliness, filling of gaps and wide and supporting props.
b. Ensure that the spaces to revive concrete are clear free from debris and free from water.
c. Transportation: Use approved method to identify that the grade of concrete to be placed in
proposed location.
d. Use suitable stools, walkways, barrow runs, for traffic over reinforcement or freshly placed
concrete.
e. Clean the transportation equipment immediately after use or whenever cement and aggregate is
used by using clean water.
Following issues are to be noted while planning of concrete pours:

 Slabs: to be cast in strips and not in alternate bays.

 Walls: to be cast in successive pours working away in both directions from the center with not
shrinkage gaps except for final closure.
 Starters: shall be the same as for the main member and shall be vibrated / rammed into place and
prepared as for other joints. Starters to be cast for walls monolithically with foundation. In case of
columns, they can be cast after concreting of foundation / slab.
Ordinary Concrete
a. Ordinary cement concrete where specified shall be used
b. Proportions 1:3:6, 1:2:4, 1:1.5:3, etc., in the specification refers to the quantity of cement by
volume, dry coarse sand by volume, quantity of coarse aggregate by volume.
c. Cement shall be weighed based on 1 cum. of cement weighs 1440 kgs or 1 full bag of cement 50 kgs
corresponding to 35 lts. by volume.
d. Correction factors to be applied for bulking of sand when the sand is either wet or moist
e. Water cement ratio used shall be just sufficient for the workability of concrete.
f. Minimum strength of concrete shall be obtained as below:
S No Proportion of concrete Preliminary tests Work tests

1. 1:3:6 135 kg/sq.cm. 100 kg/sq.cm.
2. 1:2:4 200 kg/sq.cm. 150 kg/sq.cm.
3. 1:1.5:3 265 kg/sq.cm. 200 kg/sq.cm.
g. Comprehensive strength of concrete shall be obtained by testing 15 cm. cubes at 28 days curing.
h. Testing: 6 cubes shall be taken from any mix, 3 of them to be tested at 7 days, 3 at 28 days.
i. Strength of concrete at 7 days shall be 2/3rds of the strength of concrete at 28 days.
j. Strength of concrete at 28 days shall be as mentioned in table above and the criteria for accepting
concrete is only the strength of concrete at 28 days.
Reinforced Cement Concrete

RCC comprises of formwork, reinforcement and concrete. Payment of Reinforced Cement Concrete shall
be item wise as specified in the BOQ. Concrete shall be classified by its compressive strength at the 28th
day. The concrete grade shall be as designated in Table 2 of IS: 456.
Bill of Quantities shall specify various types of concrete aimed to be used in the Project. It shall be the
Contractor’s responsibility to carry out Design mixes and approval of the same from the Clients
Representative well in advance of the actual pouring of concrete at the Site in the permanent works.
The basic aim of Mix Design shall be to find the most economic proportion of cement, aggregate and
water which will give the desired target mean strength of concrete, workability and durability for
specified grade of concrete. Also it is important that the Mix should be easily worked with the help of
equipment available at the Site. The operations involved are measurement of materials, their mixing,
placing, compacting, finishing required and curing. The design shall be carried out strictly to IS
Specifications and IS Codes of Practice, namely IS: 456- and S P –23-

In order to ensure that not more than the specified proportions of test results are likely to fall below the
characteristic strength, the concrete mix has to be designed for higher average compressive strength for a
specified grade of concrete is defined a target mean strength.
Design Mix and Trial Mixes

Design Mix and weigh batching will be done as approved by the Project Manager/Client. The Contractor
shall submit to the Project Manager/Client the tentative Mix Design it proposes to use at the site.
On receipt of the above, the Project Manager/Client may immediately order to carry out work or site test
before the final approval. This shall be done with the mixer, weigh batches, etc. and materials actually
used in the Project.
This shall give the Contractor additional chance to check for itself actual workability and make sure that
the mix proposed by it will be satisfactory with regards to slump, water-cement ratio and workability.
Test cubes shall be of size 150mm x 150mm x 150mm. These are to be legibly marked with location and
date of concreting. Where concrete (in works) is to be vibrated or not vibrated, the cubes are to be cast
as per IS Standards.
Where the concrete in the works is un-compacted, pour the concrete into the mould in three layers and
compact each layer with a 16mm dia tamping rod.
Six (6) cubes shall be taken from each of the three batches to test the mix. Cube shall be cast, stored,
cured, transported and tested as per IS:516-1959. The test may be carried out at the Site or at laboratory
as approved by the Project Manager/Client.
Trial mix
a. Within 7 days of signing the Contract and before commencing work on site, prepare trial mixes
for each type of concrete and submit 6 preliminary test cubes from each mix to the testing
authority.
b. The testing authority shall test three test cubes at 7 days and three at 28 days for each type of
mix where the difference between the higher and the lowest test results from any one trial mix
at 7 days exceeds 15% of the average and any cube weaker than the minimum requirement,
make a further trial mix, increasing the proportion of cement if necessary to obtain the required
strength.
c. If any test results from any one-trail mix fail to exceed the minimum strength at 28 days:
i. Remove from site materials from which the trial mix was prepared.
ii. Provide new materials and prepare and test further trial mixes until specified requirements are
achieved.
The Design Mix shall hold good so long as the materials continue to be of the same quality and from the
same source. Minor adjustments are to be done daily based on the tests of materials used.
Compression strength on 150mm. Cubes

Grade of concrete at 28 Preliminary test minimum
Work test minimum kg/sq.cm.
days kg/sq.cm
(1) (2) (3)
M10 135 100
M15 200 150
M20 260 200
M25 320 250
M30 380 300
M35 440 350
M40 500 400
Control concrete shall be proportioned to obtain the required strength by conducting lab tests using the
coarse aggregate, sand and cement based on the design mix.
Control concrete shall have suitable workability for proper consolidation.
At places having heavy reinforcement when compacting concrete is a problem, the control concrete shall
be designed with special care to the required strength and workability at no extra cost.
Testing facilities to access the moisture content of aggregate at frequent intervals, testing of concrete
cubes and testing of aggregate shall be done at the site by establishing testing laboratories.
Concrete shall be weighed batched. The dials of weigh-batching units shall be checked with standard
weights periodically.
Under special circumstances the conversion of weights to volumes will be allowed by the Consultants /
The minimum cement content to be used for the job is as per IS:456
Further the Contractor has to provide and maintain all the equipment and stock at the Site throughout to
carry out the following tests in a small Site laboratory or get these tests done from approved laboratories
without extra cost to the Contract.
 Grading of aggregate
 Silt content of sand
 Moisture content of aggregate
 Slump test of concrete mix
 Concrete cube test
The Contractor shall maintain full records for all above tests in a register. The format of the records shall
be prepared in consultation with the Project Manager/Client. It shall have full access to the Contractor’s
site laboratory. The Contractor shall include charges for these in its rates and no extra whatsoever shall
be payable on this account of designing, testing, maintaining laboratory, etc.

Assumed Standard Deviation
Where sufficient test results for a particular grade of concrete are not available, the value of standard
deviation given in Table below may be assumed.
Grade of Concrete Assumed Standard

Deviation N/Sq.mm
M 10 2.3
M 15 3.5
M 20 4.6
M 25 5.3
M 30 6.0
M 35 6.3
M 40 6.6
However, when adequate post records for a similar grade exists and justify to the designer a value of
standard deviation different from the shown in table above, it shall be permissible to use that value.
Standard Deviation Based on Test Results
i. Number of test results - Total number of test results required to constitute an acceptable record
for calculation of standard deviation shall be not less than 30. Attempts should be made to
obtain the 30 test results, as early as possible, when a mix is used for the first time.
ii. Standard deviation to be brought up to date -The calculation of the standard deviation shall be
brought up to date after every change of mix design and at least once a month.
Determination of Standard Deviation

i. Concrete of each grade shall be analyzed separately to determine its standard deviation.
ii. The standard deviation of concrete to a given grade shall be calculated using the following
formula from the results of individual tests of concrete of that grade obtained as specified for
test strength of sample.
iii. Estimated standard deviation S=Square root of (sum of squared deviations of the individual
strength of n samples divided by n-1) where n = number of sample test results.
iv. When significant changes are made in the production of concrete batches (for example changes
in the materials used. mix design, equipment of technical control), the standard deviation value
shall be separately calculated for such batches of concrete.
Mixing of Concrete
Weigh Batching shall be followed if mixed at the site for all structural concrete works. The Contractor
shall provide Concrete Batch Mixers, Vibrators, Weigh Batchers conforming to relevant IS Specifications
and from approved and recognized manufacturers. The capacity and number of mixers and vibrators
required at the Site from time to time shall be to the approval of Project Manager/Client. No equipment
from the site shall be removed without the prior written approval of the Project Manager/Client. The
Contractor shall maintain a platform weighing scale of capacity 300 kg with fraction of 100 gm at the site.

The machine will have to be got calibrated by the Contractor once in every two weeks or after 200 cum of
concrete whichever is earlier, and records of these calibrations shall be maintained. The dials of the
weigh batchers shall be checked with standard weights periodically.
Consistency
The concrete which will flow freely into the forms and around the reinforcement without any segregation
of coarse aggregates shall be used. The consistency shall depend upon the type of vibrator etc. to be
used. The controlling factor for the same is the Slump Test.
When considered necessary by the Project Manager/Client, the workability of the concrete shall be
ascertained by compacting factor test and VEE BEE consistometer method as per IS:1199-1959. The
computing of values of workability of concrete by above two methods, IS:456-2000 have to be referred to.
Temperature of Concrete
The placing temperature of concrete shall not be more than 38 degrees Celsius. If it is more, the Project
Manager/Client may order addition of ice or chilled water to the concrete. Also the Contractor shall take
following precautions:
 Mixer and Weigh Batcher shall be painted white color.
 Aggregate storing bin shall not be exposed to the sun.
 Water shall be sprinkled on aggregate well before concreting to keep the temperature low.
Similarly, during the cold weather, concreting shall not be done when the temperature falls below 4.5
Degrees Celsius. The concrete placed shall be protected against by suitable covering. The concrete
damaged by frost shall be removed and work redone with no extra cost.
Shrinkage Cracks
Concreting shall be avoided in very warm weather. Under such circumstances, the placed concrete shall
be covered with damp hessian cloth within two hours of placing of concrete.
To achieve good result the concrete shall be immediately covered with a plastic sheet and not allowed to
any direct wind contact to eliminate shrinkage cracks.
Workmanship
All works shall be true to level, plumb and square and all corners and edges in all cases shall be unbroken
and neat.
Any work not to the satisfaction of the Project Manager/Client or the Design Consultant will be rejected
and the same should be rectified or removed and replaced with work of the required standard of
workmanship at no extra cost.
Transportation
Concrete shall be transported with the help of pumps of sufficient capacity to achieve necessary heights
wherever required from the mixer to the place of laying as rapidly as possible by methods which will

prevent the segregation or loss of any of the ingredients and maintaining the required workability. The
pumps can be either compressor type or boom type. All the pumping equipments have to be maintained
and kept operational by the Contractor. Concrete shall be laid within 120 minutes from the time of
batching as per IS.
Placing of Concrete
Placing of concrete shall be done using pumps only at all levels. The pumps shall be of sufficient capacity
to achieve necessary heights wherever required.
The slump of concrete placed with the help of pumps shall not be more than 120mm unless otherwise
instructed by the Project Manager/Client. Concreting shall commence only after formwork is approved
reinforcement is recorded and permission to proceed with concreting has been approved in writing from
the Project Manager/Client.
Formwork should be clean, free from dust, pieces of wood or any other foreign material. It should be
treated by form releasing agent prior to the laying of reinforcement and concrete, based on sample
approved by the Project Manager/Client prior to start of construction at Site. Concrete shall be as gently
deposited as is practically possible, in its final position to avoid re handling and shall be so deposited that
segregation of aggregates do not occur. In case of deep trenches and footings, it may be done with the
help of chutes. Concrete from wheelbarrows shall not be dumped away from the face of concrete already
been placed. It shall be dumped into the face of concrete already in place. Concrete shall be laid during
normal working hours. Concreting at night or on holidays shall be permitted only on the written approval
of the Project Manager/Client. No concreting shall be done within half an hour of the closing time of the
day, unless permitted by the Project Manager/Client.
For concreting of slabs and beams wooden plant or catwalks of chequered MS plates or bamboo mats or
any other suitable materials supported directly on the centering by means of wooden blocks or lugs shall
be provided to convey the concrete to the place of final deposition without disturbing the reinforcement
in anyway. In no case labour or any other persons are allowed to walk over the reinforcement.
In case of columns and walls, it is desirable to place concrete without any construction joints. The
progress of concreting in the vertical direction, shall be restricted to one meter per hour.
Concrete pouring shall be done by using appropriate methods like funnel system/chutes for vertical
elements, flexible hoses for horizontal elements etc.
Compaction of Concrete
Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted into a dense mass as depositing shall proceed by means of
suitable vibrators. The vibrator shall maintain the entire concrete under treatment in an adequate state of
agitation and shall continue during whole period occupied by placing of concrete. Care should be taken
not to over-vibrate the concrete. While vibrating no holes should be visible in concreting. Compaction
should be completed before the initial setting time. Compaction shall be done till air bubbles cease to
appear. Concrete already set shall not be disturbed by successive vibration.

Hand tamping shall not be permitted. But only in exceptional cases, depending on the thickness of the
members and feasibility of vibrating the same, the Project Manager/Client may permit hand tamping.
Hand tamping or compaction shall be done with the help of tamping rods so that concrete is thoroughly
compacted and completely worked around the reinforcement embedded fixtures, and into the corners of
the form look.
The layers of concrete shall be so placed that the bottom layer does not finally set before the top layers
are placed. The vibrators are so applied so that the centre of mass being compacted at the time of placing
of concrete.
Vibrator shall be of immersion type with frequency of 100 Hz minimum when operating in concrete, or
the exterior with a frequency of 50 Hz minimum.
Care shall be taken to ensure that at no time the vibrators and /or vibration action is used to push the
concrete ahead. Vibrators shall be applied systematically to overlap zones of influence.
It shall be ensured that the needle vibrators are not applied directly on the reinforcement on the
formwork which may destroy the bond between concrete and reinforcement.
When electric vibrators are in use the standby petrol, diesel or kerosene vibrator should always be
available at the concreting point.
Construction Joints
Construction joint shall be avoided as far as possible. If provided, concreting shall be carried out
continuously up to the construction joints as directed by the Project Manager/Client and/or at the
location and arrangement shown in the structural drawings. However, the number of such joints shall be
kept to a minimum and they shall be as straight as possible. Swelling bars or per formed plastic adhesive
water stops shall be used for construction joints at water retaining members
Proposed location of construction joints shall be submitted by the Contractor well in advance for approval
of Project Manager/Client/Structural Consultant. The joints shall be at places where shear force is nil or at
a minimum (normally at 1/3rd to 1/4th point of a span) and these shall be straight and at right angles to
the direction of the main reinforcement. Stop ends provided shall be with necessary slots for
reinforcement bars to pass freely without bending or other obstructions. They should be supported firmly
so that the concrete can be properly vibrated and compacted at these points.
Before commencement of concreting after a break, adjacent concrete stopper and surfaces shall be
cleaned, chipped free of any loose mortar and roughened to expose the aggregate and than brushed and
cleaned. The concrete surface shall be sprayed with water for 24 hours before casting and kept wet until
casting.
All construction joints in concrete shall be treated with bonding agent prior to pour next layer of approved
makes at no extra cost. Water swelling bars at construction joints in basement works shall be paid extra.
No construction joints are allowed in casting footings including stepped foundation .Starters shall be of
min 100mm high with necessary frame work and steels.

Horizontal joints in walls
Form horizontal joints in walls designed to be continuous with floor slabs at the top of an integrally cast
kickers minimum 25mm high. No other horizontal joints will be allowed.
Form horizontal joints in walls other than in (a) above
a) At the top of footings
b) At the top of slabs
c) At a minimum 20mm above the soffit of beam or girders connecting into columns.
d) 15mm above soffit of suspended floors.
Construction joints in ground slabs

a) To comply with IS codes
b) To align with column or grid lines where practicable.
Isolation joints
a) Form diamond shaped or circular separations around columns.
b) Ensure all edges of slabs are isolated from adjoining construction.
Control joints
a) Ace at 4 - 7 meter in width for one panel.
b) Form by either:
i. Sawing a continuous straight line in the top of the slab
ii. Grooving fresh concrete with hand grooves
iii. Placing strips of wood, metal or pre-moulded joint material at joint locations. Top edges
of strips shall be flush with concrete.
iv. Control joints shall be extended 1/5 to 1/4 times slab thickness into the slab.
Construction joints in suspended slabs

a) Locate near the middle of slabs, beams, or girders, unless a beam intersects a girder at the middle
location, in which case offset joints in girders a distance equal to twice the width of the beam.
b) Make provision for transfer of shear and other forces through construction joints.
Vertical joints in walls
Space not exceeding 5m centers and also locate where abrupt changes in thickness or height occur, at
least 2m from corner.
Expansion Joint
As indicated in drawing or as directed by the Structural Consultant / Project Manager/Client.
Curing
Curing of concrete is most important. There shall be no compromise on this activity as it is for the
Contractor to arrange for everything necessary to make sure that the concrete is cured to the complete
satisfaction of the Project Manager/Client. As said above after concrete has begun to harden, i.e. about 1
to 2 hours after laying. It shall be protected from quick drying with moist or damp hessian cloth or any
other material approved by the Project Manager/Client. After 24 hours of laying of concrete, the surface
shall be cured by flooding with water or covering with moist hessian cloth for period of 7 days to keep it
moist. For the next seven days surface shall be kept wet all the time by sprinkling water continuously.

In order to properly monitor the curing activity, the Contractor shall write legibly with paint, the date of
casting the concrete of each member of the structure which shall remain clearly visible atleast till the
completion of curing atleast. Chemical curing is not allowed at site.
Finishing
Concrete surface shall be finished keeping in mind the next operation to be carried out over the surface.
For guidance the following points shall be noted:
 Roof shall be trowelled even and smooth with a wooden float, before the concrete begins to set.
 Surface that will receive plaster shall be roughened immediately.
 Surfaces that will be in contact with masonry shall be roughened immediately
 Surfaces that will receive floor finishes, tiling, etc. shall be roughened while it is still green.
 Every care shall be taken not to disturb the freshly laid concrete.
 For Ramps and Basements concrete shall be broom-finished.
On finishing standards and quality / workmanship, the decision of the Project Manager/Client shall be
final and binding on all parties.
Inspection and Corrective Measures
Immediately on removal of formwork, the RCC surface shall be examined by the Project Manager/Client.
Till such time, no remedial measures shall be carried out by the Contractor. All remedial actions including
breaking, if any, shall be on the instructions of the Project Manager/Client. In case of any violation of this
rule, the concrete poured stands rejected. The decision of the Project Manager/Client in this regard shall
be final and binding to all parties.
Sagged, bulged, patched, honeycombed work to an extent detrimental to structural safety or architectural
concept shall stand to be rejected and Contractor shall rectify by breaking or redoing, if required, as
directed by the Project Manager/Client/Structural Consultant and all expenses incurred due to this shall
be to the Contractor’s account.
Surface defects minor in nature may be accepted as a special case by the Project
Manager/Client/Structural Consultants whose decision in this matter is final and binding on the
Contractor. Once accepted, the defects shall be rectified as follows and all expenses incurred due to the
rectification process, shall be to the Contractor’s account.
(a) Surface defects which require repair when forms are removed, usually consist of bulges due to the
movement of forms, ridges at form joint, honey combed areas, damage, resulting from the stripping
of forms and bolt holes, bulges and ridges are removed by careful chipping or tooling and the surface
is then rubbed with a grinding stone. Honey combed and other defective areas must be clipped out,
the edges being cut as straight as possible and perpendicularly to the surface, or preferably slightly
undercut to provide a key at the edge of the patch.
(b) If permitted in writing by the Client’ Representative/ Structural Consultant, shallow patches are first
to be treated with a coat of thin grout composed of one part of cement and one part of fine sand
added with polymer modified cementitious material as per manufacturer’s specification, and then
filled with mortar (mixed with non-shrink additives) similar to that used in concrete. The mortar is
placed in layers not more than 10 mm thick and each layer is given scratch finish to secure a bond
with the succeeding layer. The laid layer is finished to match with the surrounding concrete by
floating, rubbing or tooling on formed surfaces by pressing the form material against the patch while
the mortar is still plastic.

(c) Or as an alternative to paragraph (b) above, as directed by the Project Manager/Client/Structural
Consultant, the patch-work shall be treated with epoxy based proprietary items like non-shrinking
grouts etc. available in the market. In such cases, the methodology as indicated by the manufacturer
of the item shall be followed. It permitted in writing by the Project Manager/Client/Structural
Consultant.
(d) Large and deep patches require filling up with concrete held in place with try forms. Such patches
are reinforced and carefully drawled to the hardened concrete.
(e) Or as an alternative to paragraph (d) above, epoxy based proprietary items like grouts as directed by
the Project Manager/Client / Structural Consultants, shall be used. The methodology as specified by
the manufacturers of the proprietary item shall be strictly adhered to.
(f) Holes left by bolts are to be filled with non-shrink grouts, as specified and directed by the Project
Manager/Client/ Structural Consultants carefully packed in to places in small amounts. The mortar is
mixed as dry as possible to allow enough water to go into it, so that it will be tightly compacted when
forced into the place.
(g) Tie-rod holes extending right through the concrete may be filled with mortar or non-shrink grout, as
the case may be, a pressure gun similar to the gun used for greasing motorcars.
(h) Normally, patches appear darker than the surrounding concrete when uniform surface colour is
important, this defect shall be remedied by adding 10 to 20 percent of while portland cement to the
patching mortar, the actual quantity being determined by trial.
(i) The same amount of care shall be taken to avoid the material in the patches as with the whole
structure. Curing shall be started immediately after packing is done to prevent early drying. A
membrane curing compound is these cases will be most convenient.
Cracks
Cracks observed shall be examined. It shall be kept under observation and a record shall be maintained
for a period of 45 days. It shall be shown to the Project Manager/Client/the Structural Consultant and the
following procedure shall be followed:
 Cracks not propagating/developing further and according to the Structural Consultant not
detrimental to the strength of the construction shall be grouted with non-shrinking epoxy based
cement slurry or as directed by the Project Manager/Client/Structural Consultant.
 Cracks developing further and felt detrimental to the strength of construction shall be tested as per
the relevant Indian Standards.
 Based on results, the structural Consultant in consultation with the Project Manager/Client shall
order remedial measures or order the Contractor to dismantle construction, cart away the debris,
replace the construction and carry out all the consequent works thereto as directed/specified.
 Cost of above shall be borne by the Contractor if the failure is on its part unless it is due to a design
fault, decided at the discretion of the Project Manager/Client.
Decision of the Project Manager/Client in the matter shall be final and binding on all parties. This decision
shall not be open for arbitration.
Quantum of Cube Testing
The minimum frequency of cube testing shall be as follows. Each set of sample shall consist of 6 cubes.
Concrete Quantity Number of Sample sets
Up to 5 cum a day 1
5 cum to 15 cum a day 2

More than 50 cum per day 4 + one additional for each 50 cum or part thereof.
Three cubes shall be tested on the 7th day and three cubes on the 28th day.
Acceptance of Work
It shall be in accordance with in IS:456-2000, SP-23 and SP-24. The guidance brief is elaborated below.
Part or element of work shall be deemed to be accepted, provided the results of the 28th day cube testing
confirm to the criteria stated as under:
 The average of the three consecutive cubes strength shall not be less than specified strength.
 No individual cube strength shall be less than 90% of the specified strength.
 If the individual cube strength exhibit more than 133% of the specified strength such a cube shall be
specified as freak and the criteria in above two points shall be applied to remaining two cubes and
their acceptability determined.
 If cubes fail at 7 days, defective concrete can be dismantled, removed and replaced without awaiting
28 day test results.
 If the concrete tests fail to meet the acceptance strength required for respective grades of concrete,
the Project Manager/Client may take one of the following actions:
 Instruct Contractor to carry out such additional tests (e.g. Core tests, load tests, ultrasound, etc.)
and/or remedial measures to ensure the soundness of the structure at the Contractor’s expense
 The work will be rejected and any consequential action as needed shall be taken at the Contractor’s
expense, including cutting out and replacing a part or whole of work.
Concreting under Special Conditions

During hot or cold weather concreting should be done as per the procedure set out in IS:7861 Part I or
IS:7861 Part II or as directed by the Project Manager/Client.
Fixtures
Any fixture, steel angles, holdfasts etc shall be embedded according to the drawing or as instructed by the
Precast Concrete
Ready Mix Concrete
Reference - IS 4926-1976 or amended
Terminology
 Ready Mixed Concrete - Concrete delivered at site or into the purchaser's vehicle in a plastic
condition and requiring no further treatment before being placed in the position in which it is to
set and harden. All provisions for good workmanship, quality control and treatment, as stated in
previous clauses shall be applicable.
 Agitation - The process of continuing the mixing of concrete at a reduced speed during
transportation to prevent segregation.
 Agitator - Truck mounted equipment designed to agitate concrete during transportation to the
site of delivery.
 Truck mixer - A mixer generally mounted on a self-propelled chassis capable of mixing the
ingredients of concrete and of agitating the mixed concrete during transportation.

Types
 Concrete-mix - Concrete shall be produced by completely mixing cement, aggregates,
admixtures, if any and water at a stationary central mixing plant and delivered in containers
fitted with agitating devices.
Materials
 Cement - The cement used shall be ordinary Portland cement or low heat Portland cement
conforming to IS-269* or Portland slag cement conforming to IS 455-or Portland-pozzolana
cement conforming to IS: 1489-or rapid hardening Portland cement conforming to IS 8041E-as
may be specified by Consultant at the time of placing the order. If the type is not specified
ordinary Portland cement shall be used.
 Fly ash when used for partial replacement of cement, shall conform to the requirements of IS:
3812 (part I
 Water used for concrete shall conform to the requirement of IS: 456.
 Admixtures shall only be used when so agreed to between the purchases and the manufacturer.
The admixtures shall conform to the requirements of IS 456 and their nature, quantities and
methods of use shall also be specified. Fly ash when used as an admixture for concrete shall
conform to IS: 3812 (Part II
 Measurement and Storage of Materials - Measurement and storage of materials shall be done in
accordance with the requirements of IS: 456.No redozing and admixture at site is permitted.
Basis of Supply
The ready mixed concrete shall be manufactured and supplied on the following basis. Specified strength
based on 28-day compressive strength of 15-cm cubes tested in accordance with IS: 456
When the concrete is manufactured and supplied on the basis of specified strength, the responsibility for
the design of mix shall be that of the manufacturer.
General Requirement
 In addition to the requirements specified in this standard and subject to such modifications as
may be agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer at the time of placing order, the
ready-mixed concrete shall generally comply with the requirements of IS: 456
 The minimum quantity of cement and the details regarding proportioning and works control shall
be as per Clauses above.
 When a truck mixer or agitator is used for mixing a transportation of concrete, no water from the
truck-water system or from elsewhere shall be added after the initial introduction of the mixing
water for the batch, except when on arrival at the site of the work, the slump of the concrete is
less than that specified; such additional water to bring the slump within required limits shall be
injected into the mixer under such pressure and direction of floor that the requirements for
uniformity specified in Appendix A are met.
 Unless otherwise agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier, when a truck mixer of
agitator is used for transporting concrete, the concrete shall be delivered to the site of the work
and discharge shall be complete within 1.5 hours (when the prevailing atmospheric temperature
is above 20°C) and within 2 hours (when the prevailing atmospheric temperature is at or below
20°C) of adding the mixing water to the dry mix of cement and aggregate or of adding the
cement to the aggregate, whichever is earlier.

 Temperature - The temperature of the concrete at the place and time of delivery shall be not less
than 5°C. Unless otherwise required by the purchaser, no concrete shall be delivered, when the
site temperature is less than 2.5°C and the thermometer reading is falling.
 The temperature of the concrete shall not exceed 50C above the prevailing shade temperature,
when the shade temperature is over 200C. The temperature of concrete mass on delivery shall
not exceed 400C.
 Sampling and testing: Adequate facilities shall be provided by the manufacturer for the purchaser
to inspect the materials used, the process of manufacture and the methods of delivery of
concrete. He shall also provide adequate facilities for the purchaser to take samples of the
materials used.
 Sampling and testing - Unless otherwise agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier, the
sampling and testing of concrete shall be done in accordance with relevant requirements of IS:
456-, IS: 1199-and IS: 516-
 Consistency or workability - The tests for consistency or workability shall be carried out in
accordance with requirements of IS: 1199- or by such other method as may be agreed to
between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
 Strength Test - The compressive strength and flexural strength tests shall be carried our in
accordance with the requirements of IS: 516- and the acceptance criteria for concrete whether
supplied on the basis of specified strength or on the basis of mix proportion, shall conform to the
requirements of Table 5 and other related requirements of IS: 456-.
 Cubes casted at site shall be given the criteria for acceptance of concrete and RMC vehicle shall
be allowed only with the computerized batching sheets.
 Cost of Testing - Unless otherwise agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer, the
cost of the tests carried out in accordance with the requirements of this specification shall be
borne as follows:
 By the manufacturer if the results show that the concrete does not comply with the
requirements of this standard.
 By the purchaser if the results show that the concrete complies with the requirements of this
standard.
 Manufacturer's Records and Certificates - The manufacturer shall keep batch records of the
quantities by mass of all the solid materials, of the total amount of water used in mixing and of
the results of all tests. If required by the purchaser, the manufacturer shall furnish certificates, at
agreed intervals, giving this information.
The concrete quality shall meet all requirements and Specifications of concrete as stated hereof. Contractor shall
be allowed to use own Batching Plant or procure concrete, but Quality Tests will be the responsibility of the
Contractor and off-site Batching Plants shall be open for inspection to the Project Manager/Client throughout the
Project.
Admixtures
General
Admixtures may be used in concrete only with the approval of Consultant / Project Manager/Client based
upon evidence that, with the passage of time, neither the compressive strength not its durability get
reduced. Calcium chloride shall not be used for accelerating set of the cement for any concrete

containing reinforcement, or embodied steel parts. When calcium chloride is permitted to be used, such
as in mass concrete works, it shall be dissolved in water and added to percent of the weight of the cement
in each batch of concrete. When admixtures are used, the designed concrete mix shall be corrected
accordingly. Admixture shall be used as per manufacturer's instructions and in the manner and with the
control specified by Consultant / Project Manager/Client.
Air Entraining Agent

Where specified and approved by Consultant / Project Manager/Client, neutralized vinsol resin or any
other approved air entering agent may be used to produce the specified amount of air in the concrete mix
and these agents shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Standard 6 - 260, Air Entering admixtures for
concrete. The recommended total air content of the concrete is 4% plus or minus 1%. The method of
measuring air content shall be as per IS 1199.
Retarding Admixtures
Where specified and approved by Consultants / Project Manager/Client retarding agents shall be added to
the concrete mix in quantities specified by Consultants / Project Manager/Client.
Water Reducing Admixtures

Where specified and approved by Consultants / Project Manager/Client water reducing lignosulfonate
mixture shall be added in quantities specified. The admixtures shall be added in the form of a solution.
Water Proofing Agent

Where specified and approved by Consultants / Project Manager/Client, chloride and sulphide free
waterproofing agent shall be added in quantities specified.
Other Admixtures
 The Consultants / Project Manager/Client may at his discretion instruct the Contractor to use any
other admixtures in the concrete.
 If the Contractor so wishes to use admixtures, then the following should be adhered to (subject
or Project Manager/Client's approval).
 No reduction will be allowed to target mean strength when compared to admixture free
concrete of the same class.
 Dosage of admixture shall be strictly in accordance with IS 456 and the manufacturers
instruction.
 The following information about the admixture shall be submitted to the Consultants / Project
Manager/Client for record and approval.
- Long and short term effects of the admixture in the concrete.
- Effect of admixture of concrete permeability.
- Effects of over and under dosage.
- Shortage life and special storage requirements.
 The Contractor when requested shall provide the services of a full time field technician of the
admixture manufacturer to advise the proper addition of the admixture to the concrete or
adjustment of concrete mix proportions to meet changing conditions.
 The Contractor shall furnish a statement of responsibility from the admixture manufacturer for
their products.

 If the use of admixture is approved by the Consultants / Project Manager/Client, it shall be
constructed as a constructing part of the concrete without any extra payment.
Measurement
Formwork and reinforcement shall be paid separately. Volume of concrete measured shall include that
occupied by:
 Reinforcement of other metal sections

 Cast in components more than 0.01 m3 in
 Rebates or internal each less than 0.005 m2 is 0005 sectioned area
 Pockets and holes not exceeding 0.01 m3 in volume
All works shall be measured in the Decimal system.

 Dimensions shall be measured to the nearest 0.01 meter except for thickness of slabs that shall
be measured to the 0.005 meter.
 Areas shall be worked out to the nearest 0.01 Sqm.
 Cubic contents shall be worked out to the nearest 0.01 cum.
The price of concrete shall include all labour, material, equipment, mixing, pumping, gangways, tools,
transporting, hoisting to any height and lowering to any depth, pouring or laying, consolidating, leaving
pockets, holes, disconnecting them till the next operation or completion of work, hacking the surface, to
provide key for providing further work including cleaning wetting surfaces, etc preparing construction
joints as described, and all other activities required as per good construction practice.
Unit rates shall allow for chamfers, grooves, lines etc. in reinforced concrete members as well as
necessary slope, drops, drip models etc.
No deductions shall be made for:

 Ends of dissimilar materials (for example beams, posts, girders, corbels, purlins and steps) up to
500 sq cm. in section.
 Opening up to 0.1 sq m.
 Volume occupied by drainage, water, pipes, conduits, etc. not exceeding 100 sq cm. each in
cross-section.
 Small voids not exceeding 40 sq cm. in cross-section.
 Small moulds, drip moulds, chamfers, splays, rounded or covered angles, beads, grooves, rebates
up to 10 cm in depth and width.
Minimum cement content per cubic meter of cement concrete has been specified in each item of cement
concrete work; however, if cement is required to be used so as to obtain the minimum strength specified
for the grade of cement concrete, the Contractor will not be paid for extra cement used.

Scope of Works
The following item are not intended to exclude any other items of works required by the Design
Consultants, or that may be required by local code or good construction practice. The following work shall
be included by the Contractor in its Tender and Contract Sum as they may not have been detailed
specifically on the architectural and engineering drawings and specifications but we required in order that
a complete job in every respect can be.
 The supply, maintenance and removal of all temporary rungs, and ramping as necessary on the
site
 Placing of concrete will be pumps only or as approved by the Project Manager/Client.
 All finishes and to the concrete work as shown or specified.
 Allowed for the removal of constructions encountered.
 The excavation and concrete construction of all sump pits, manholes, drains under slabs, etc as
described in the specifications and shown on the drawings.
 Formwork, reinforcing, embedded items and layout for concrete tank cradles.
 All roof mechanical and other building services equipment pads and kerbs at the HVAC and
Electrical openings, concrete including dowels, formwork and roughing of concrete
 All fire grading and removal of standing water before the placing of concrete.
 Included for all below slab, surface water and drainage, including brickfill, within the Tender.
 Points and in steel below slabs lightening protection systems as detailed. The Contractor, in the
preparation of his Tender, is to allow for watertight construction.
 Allow for keeping the works clear and tidy at all times and for the removal of debris arising from
the works, and to be disposed off at locations designated by the Project Manager/Client, and
frequent removed off the site. Any surplus concrete deposited at the workfront of on the site
(concrete droppings) must be removed by the Contractor at its own expense.
 Provisions, hoisting, distribution and fixing of all embedded items required.
 Leaving all necessary holes and pockets for steel work beams for lifts and for making good after
installation by other Contractors. Casting in all slots and inserts for fixings to guides and runners
to lift shafts.
 All trench drain box-cut with necessary recesses and casting in all anchor bolts and providing and
installing trench drains and other embedded items as shown on the drawings.
 Include design mix weight and storage box for samples and test cylinders.
 Levelling of the floors to proper elevations as shown on the drawings to the tolerances and
cambers and slopes specified including all changes of slab elevation.
 All means of transportation of concrete.
 Providing and casting into concrete slots to receive masonry or blockwork ties to support all such
walls as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Project Manager/Client.
 Forming holes to riser ducts.
 Forming necessary cutouts at pipe locations to accommodate electrical, plumbing, sprinkler and
electrical services.
 Forming in the concrete members chases for any asphalt "track-in" and/or flashing and the like.
 Provide grout for lift saddle and floor closures prior to setting (setting by others).
 Grout pumps and other mechanical equipment as required.

 Provide temporary shoring and strutting as required due to the operations of the Contractor.
 Provide and maintain ladders until stairs are usable.
 Provide adequate lighting at all areas
 Erect sufficient safety signs, posters and maintain high level of safety during the entire
construction period.
3 Reinforcement
3.1 Related Works
A. Concrete Formwork
B. Cast in-situ Concrete
3.1.a Applicable Standards

IS - 432 Specification for Mild steel and medium tensile bars and hard drawn steel wire.
IS - 1139 Specification for hot rolled mild steel, medium tensile steel and high yield
strength steel deformed bars for concrete reinforcement.
IS - 1566 Specification for plain hard drawn steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement
IS - 1785 Specification for plain hard drawn steel wire for pre-stressed concrete.
IS - 1786 Specification for cold twisted steel high strength deformed bars for concrete
reinforcement.
IS - 2080 Specification for high tensile steel bars used in pre-stressed concrete
IS - 2751 Code of practice for welding of mild steel structures are folded plates
IS - 2502 Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete reinforcement
IS - 280 Specifications for annealed binding wire
IS 1139 Specifications for high yield strength deformed bars
Steel Grades
Reinforcements for concrete from “grade” of steel indicated below, conforming to the relevant Indian
Standard and their latest amendments mentioned:
Grade Description Conforming to

Fe 500 High strength deformed / ribbed steel IS 1786
Type of Reinforcing steel is to be of Thermo-Mechanically Treated Ribbed bars (TMT)
BIS Certification
Material received at the Site shall have BIS Certification mark. Such bundle or coil containing the bars
shall be suitably marked with BIS Certification mark. Bars shall also be marked to identify categories. This
shall be done as per IS: 1387.
In case bars are without BIS Certification mark, the manufacturer shall give a certificate stating the
process of manufacture, chemical composition and mechanical properties. Each certificate shall indicate
the number or identification mark of the cart to which it applies, corresponding to the number or
identification mark to be found on the material.

All reinforcements shall be free from loose mill scale, excessive rust, loose rust, pitting, oil, grease, paint,
mud or any other foreign deleterious material present on the surface. Cleaning should be done to the
satisfaction of the Project Manager/Client.
Each batch of steel brought to the Site shall be tested prior to use. Cost of all tests shall be borne by the
Contractor.
Material acceptable as per IS Specifications will be allowed into the Project. All rejected material shall be
removed from the Site by the Contractor within 30 days of its rejection. If the same is not done, the
Project Manager/Client can get work done by third party at the Contractor’s risk and cost shall impose a
penalty of Rs 500 (Rupees Five Hundred only) per metric ton per day. This will be without any appeal and
shall not be subjected to arbitration.
Storage
Reinforcement bars received at the Site shall be stored on hard, concreted platform and clear of the
ground to a minimum of 200 mm with the use of timber sleepers or any other means. Reinforcements
shall be kept covered by tarpaulins or plastic to avoid excessive corrosion or any other contamination. It
is advised to follow storage methods as described in IS: 4082.
Reinforcement steel shall be stored in such a manner as to avoid distortion and to prevent deterioration
and corrosion. Prior to assembly of reinforcement on no account any oily substance shall be used for
removing the rust.
Quality Assurance
a. Supervisory staff shall have qualification and experience in the above field.
b. Welders qualified and having approved certificates for welding shall be employed.
Handling
a. Bend test requirements shall conform to the following and shall be based on 1800 bends of full
size bars around pins.
Bar diameter (mm) Pin diameter for test bend
10, 12,16 3.5 x bar dia
20, 22, 25 5.0 x bar dia
28, 30, 32 7.0 x bar dia
b. Spacers shall be of any of the following:
i. Wire
ii. Precast concrete
iii. Moulded plastic
Spacer material shall be of durable quality and shall not lead to corrosion of reinforcement or
spilling of concrete. Precast concrete spacers shall be of the same mix as that of surrounding
concrete.
c. Tying wire shall be of 18 G black annealed mild steel wire or other approved type double fold to
tie the reinforcements confirming to is 280.

d. Cover blocks shall be non-corrosive material such as plastic, but not wooden or broken bricks or
stone. Specially made concrete blocks shall be used. Such cover blocks shall be cast from
concrete and not from cement mortar; strength of these blocks shall be equal to the concrete in
use.
e. Tying wire shall be of 18G black annealed mild steel wire or other approved type double fold to
tie the reinforcements. It shall be face from rust, oil, paint, grease, loose mill seales or any other
deleterious material undesirable for concrete or reinforcement or which may prevent adhesion
of concrete to reinforcement.
Unit Weights: Unit weights payable per meter shall be as per IS:456
Execution
Cutting and Bending
a. Flame cut and hot bending is absolutely forbidden.
b. Cut and bend reinforcement to approved shop drawings and details shall be used.
c. Bars to be cold-bend, either mechanically or by hand, but to correct radius using proper tools,
machine and platform and confirming to IS 2502-
d. Do not rebend without approval. In case of re bending, care shall be taken that the rating of
bend is not less than 4 x bar dia at construction joints for plain steel bars and 6 x bar dia for high
strength bars.
e. Reinforcement projecting from concrete shall not be bent without approval.
Bar bending schedule to be submitted for approval of the Structural Consultant to the Project
Manager/Client prior to commencement of any cutting, bending and binding of steel at site.
f. Cracked end of bars shall not be used on this Project.
g. Bars should be inspected for visible defects such as cracks, brittleness, excessive rust, loose mills
scale, etc.
Welding
a. Do not weld reinforcement unless authorized by the Consultants / Project Manager/Client and
recommended by the manufacturers.
b. Site welding shall be done with suitable safeguards and techniques.
c. Welding, if approved, may be used for:
i. Lapping reinforcement in position
ii. Fixing reinforcement to other steel members.
d. The length of run deposited in a single pass shall not exceed 5 x bar diameters. If a longer welded
length is required divide into sections with the space between runs not less than 5 x bar
diameters.
e. Welded joints:
i. Shall not be made at bends in reinforcement.
ii. Stagger joints in parallel bars of principal reinforcement unless otherwise approved.
iii. The distance between staggered joints shall not be less than the end anchorage length joints.
Mechanical Splicing
a. To comply with ISI 456-. ACI 318- and ACI 439-3R-83

b. Use as indicated in structural drawings.
c. Consultant has to approve mechanical splices before using it at site.
Inspection
a. Ensure that the reinforcement placing is checked by Project Manager/Client.
b. Ensure that the Formwork to receive the reinforcement is clean and free from debris.
c. Cracked end of bars to be cut out.
Anchoring
Anchoring of bars and stirrups shall be provided exactly as detailed in the structural drawings or as
directed by Project Manager/Client/Structural Consultant.
In case of reinforcement steel in tension, deformed bars may be used without end anchorage provided
the development length requirement is satisfied. Hocks shall normally be provided for plain bars in
tension. Development length of the bars shall be determined as per relevant clauses of IS: 456 -
The anchorage length of straight bar in compression shall be equal to the Development length of the bars
in compression as specified in relevant clause of IS: 456 -
Lapping of Bars
Laps shall be strictly as per the structural drawing or as directed by the Project Manager/Client/Structural
Consultant. For general guidance the following principles shall be followed as given in IS: 456 -
 As far as possible bars of the maximum length available shall be used.

 Laps shown on drawings or otherwise specified by the Structural Consultant will be based on the
Contractor using bars of maximum length.
 In case Contractor wishes to use bars of shorter length, laps shall be provided at the Contractor’s
expense in the manner and the locations approved by the Structural Consultant.
 Splices shall be provided as far as possible away from the sections of maximum stress and be
staggered.
 Not more than half of the bars shall be spliced at a section
 If more than half of the bars shall be spliced at a section, special case shall be ensured such as
increasing length of lap or closer spacing of stirrups around the length of splice.
 Lap splice shall not be used for bars having diameter larger than 36 mm. For larger diameters
bars it may be welded. Lap length including anchorage value of hooks in flexural tension shall be
La (as defined in Article 26.2.1 of IS: 456-2000) or 30 times the diameter of the bar whichever is
greater and for direct tension 2La or 30 times the diameter of the bar whichever is greater. The
straight length of lap shall not be greater than 15D or 20 cm, whereas D is the diameter of the
bar.
 Lap length in compression shall be equal to the development length in compression calculated as
described in relevant clause of IS: 456-or as specified in the structural drawing but not less than
24 times the diameter of the bar.
 Overlapping bars shall not touch each other and these shall be kept apart with concrete between
them by 25mm or 1.25 times the maximum size of the coarse aggregate, whichever is greater.

 When above is not possible, the overlapping bars shall be bound together at intervals not
exceeding twice the diameter of such bars with two strands of annealed binding wise of 0.90mm
to 1.6mm diameter twisted together tightly.
 As and when necessary welded laps shall be proved as specified by the Structural Consultant.
Securing Reinforcement
a. Adequately secure with tying wire or approved steel clips.
b. Bend the tying wires well back clear of forms.
Concrete Cover
a. Shall be in accordance with ISI: 456- and as per the instructions in structural drawings.
Spacers Chairs and Other Supports

a. Provide necessary supports to maintain reinforcement in its correct position.
b. Provide spacer bars of same diameter as longitudinal bars but not less than 25mm
diameter between two layers at 1.5 mm centers except where bundled bars are detailed.
Precautionary Measures
a. Do not insert bars into placed concrete.
b. Do not damage forms and form linings, if any when fixing reinforcement.
Adjustment and Cleaning

a. Check reinforcement prior to and during placing concrete with particular attention to the top
reinforcement in Cantilever sections.
b. Ensure that reinforcement is clean and free from corrosive pitting, loose rust, loose mill scale, oil
and other substances, which may adversely affect reinforcement concrete or the bond between the two.
c. Protect the projecting reinforcement from weather where the rust staining of exposed concrete
surfaces may occur.
Measurements
Reinforcement shall be measured as follows:
 Length of different diameters of bars actually used including laps shall be measured nearest to a
centimeter and their weights calculated as shown on the drawings or as instructed by the
Structural Consultant
 Weights per meter shall be as mentioned
 Rolling margin to be considered in quoted rates.
 The Contractor shall account for all these in its quoted rate.
 Rate build-up shall include, in addition to cost of material (ie will not be measured and paid for
separately):
- PVC Cover blocks of required thickness for keeping reinforcement bars in position
- Unauthorized overlaps (allowed for Contractor’s convenience), spacer bars, chairs and
ties.
- Cutting, bending, placing and fixing in position in any size and shape and placing in
position as per detailed drawings

- Binding wire as approved (will not be measured and hence not paid separately)
- Wastage
- Cleaning of bare reinforcement
- Welding where required as shown in drawings and specifications
Approved Makes
Reinforcement bars shall be procured from one of the following manufacturers only unless the
same is approved by Consultants. (Reinforcement bars from other sources will not be approved)
4.0 Formwork
4.1 Related Work
 Concrete
 Reinforcement
4.2 Applicable Standards

IS - 303 Specification for Plywood for general purposes
IS - 4990 Specification for plywood for concrete shuttering work
IS - 1629 Rules for grading of cut size of timber
IS - 2750 Specification for steel scaffoldings.
IS - 4014 Code of practice for steel tubular, scaffolding
4.3 Section Includes
Design, Fabrication, erection and striking of formwork for in - situ concrete
4.4 Quality Assurance

Design and construction shall be executed and supervised by fully qualified personnel.
In accordance with quality assurance programme, the Contractor shall provide the Consultants / Project
Manager/Client with information demonstrating that a system will be used to ensure that the work
carried out under this section (including that done by sub-Contractors) will comply with the requirements
of the specifications.
4.5 Formwork
Related Work
 Concrete Form Work
 Concrete Reinforcement
 Cast - in situ Concrete
4.6 Quality Assurance

a. Supervisory staff shall have qualification and experience in the above field.
c. IS Standards – Note: Latest amendments shall be followed.
4.7 Design Criteria

Formwork system shall be executed and designed by a specialist qualified to the shapes, lines, forms and
dimensions shown on drawings. The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager/Client a method
statement backed by design calculations. Required drawings and sketches shall be enclosed along with

the statement for the proposed area to be taken up for working at a time. The number of repetitions
expected, type of material used, etc shall be detailed therein.
Formwork shall start only after written approval from the Project Manager/Client & Structural Consultant
has been received. Approval of the proposal in submitted form an acceptance of modification does not
relieve the Contractor of its obligation to achieve its required line finish within accepted tolerance limits in
terms of quality of works completed and safety. Neither will it diminish the Contractor’s responsibility for
the satisfactory performance of formwork.
Basic points to be understood in designing the formwork are stated below:
a) Erected Form work shall be watertight, shall conform to shape, lines, dimensions, verticality, rigid during
placing, vibrating and configuring the concrete
b) Formwork system shall be of 12mm thick water resistant Ply board, and shall be continuous, straight and
without any warping.
c) Design of formwork shall take into account:
 Height of pour
 Thickness of member
 Rate of pour
 Concrete slump
 Texture of finish
 Placing temperature
 Concrete density
 Construction joints
 Wind load
 Method of Discharge
d) Form work design shall have
 Dimensional tolerance
 De mountable without shock, disturbance or damage to concrete
e) All construction joints in beams and slabs shall be provided as shown in drawings.
f) Ties shall be provided where required
g) Cambers shall be provided where shown.
h) Props / supports of extra ceiling height shall be specially designed.
4.8 Form Work Material
Plywood shuttering shall be considered for all the elements

d) Form material shall have strength adequate to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without
excessive and adjustable bow or deflection.
e) Factory fabricated, adjustable length removable or snap of metal form ties, design to prevent from
deflection and to prevent spilling concrete surfaces on removal.
f) Ties shall be such that

 A portion remaining within the concrete shall be at least 38mm from the outer concrete
surface.
 That will not leave a hole larger than 25mm dia meter on the concrete surface.
g) Form coating compound that will not bond with, stain, not adversely effect concrete for required
bond or adhesion not hamper the wetting of surface to be covered with water or curing compound.
h) Shuttering scheme for retaining wall, shear walls etc shall be of Doka or equivalent.
All propping and centering shall be of adjustable steel supports (built-up sections of rolled steel) and
tubular props to full height without joints, and with sufficient bracing to take into account the
construction loads, namely full load of concrete with any live load and impact load likely to occur during
concreting.
4.9 Workmanship
Formwork shall be classified based on the ultimate finishes required of the concrete surface as:
 Textured or decorative finish
 Fair-faced finish
 Rough finish
The Contractor shall account for all material and labour to achieve the above finishes to the satisfaction of
the Project Manager/Client in his quoted price.
Guidelines for Good Workmanship

Following are a few points as guidelines for good workmanship in formwork and shall be accounted for in
his quoted price.
 Erection of formwork may be from pre-moulded, pre-fabricated, pre-assembled plates or form
reasonable enough to transport and erect at site to correct lines and levels as set at site.
 Supports shall be firm and maintained in position by nails, cross bracing, tie-rods, locking bolts,
nuts, etc. It shall be rigid and stiff so as to retain its shape during and after concreting.
 Joints shall be water-tight and no cement slurry shall be allowed to get through
 Pre-fabricated or site forms shall be assembled so as to de-shutter without any jerk to the green
concrete. For this double wedges shall be used. The wedges shall be nailed. The heads left with,
allowing easy removal while de-shuttering.
 Pre-fabricated or site formwork shall be sufficient thickness with supporting spans in both
directions. These shall be standardised in size for easy replacement and universal use at site
 Props shall be of steel only. Its spacing shall be as per design. It shall be vertical and plumbed.
Base shall be of proper steel plate or timber plank for equal distribution of load
 In case of multi-storied buildings, any upper floor shall be suitably supported on at least one floor
below the same, or as approved by the Project Manager/Client.
 Props shall be adequately cross-braced horizontally
 At the design and erection stage following additional points shall be considered and be
incorporated into the setting
 Opening of cleaning prior to the start of concreting

 Pouring points shall avoid high drops and provide easy access to vibrating needles
 Surfaces shall be treated with suitable releasing oil or emulsion prior to the reinforcement laying.
Such releasing oil shall be got approved from the Project Manager/Client.
 Ensure that forms and adjacent surfaces are thoroughly cleaned to receive concrete and debris.
 Locate construction joints in a manner so as not to impair strength and appearance of structure.
Following points shall be observed very carefully:
 Joints of formwork shall be watertight. It is easy to check from the bottom and make sure no light
is visible
 Props shall be on solid base, plumbed, in straight line, braced horizontally and cross
 Tie-bars, bracing and spacers in beams, walls and columns shall be at correct place/location and
fully tight
 Wedges shall be fully secured and nailed with heads left out for easy removal
 All saw dust, dirt, shavings and any other unwanted material shall be cleaned and hosed out
 Provision shall be made for watching formwork while concreting and any other platform needed
for movement of workers without any disturbance to the reinforcement
 Provision is made for traffic on formwork: not to bear directly on reinforcing steel.
 Number of reuses shall be decided by the Project Manager/Client on examining the condition of
formwork after each use. If during concreting any weakness develops or formwork shows any
distress, the work shall be stopped and remedial action taken.
4.10 Finishing Formed Surfaces

The Contractor shall:
- Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other projections completely removed or smoothed.
- To smooth concrete where fins and other projections have formed moisten concrete surface within
a day after forms have been removed and rub with carborundum brick until surface is a uniform
colour and texture within the projection limits.
- Not apply cement ground other than that produced by the rubbing process.
- Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to the
satisfaction of the superintendent.
- Surface defects shall include colour and texture irregularities, cracks, spills, air bubbles,
honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projection on the surface, stain and form tie holes.
The Contractor shall:

- Undercut voids larger than 25mm diameter and fill with fresh concrete after thoroughly wetting
concrete surfaces.
- Fill small holes and irregularities using 2:1 (Portland cement to fine sand by volume) grout mixed
with approved bonding admixture according to manufacturer’s specification.
- Blend standard Portland cement with white Portland cement if necessary so that final colour of
dry grout will match adjacent surfaces.
- After applying grout to repair area, wipe with Hessian cloth to match adjacent texture and within
the specified surface tolerances.

- Keep concrete patch damp with fog *spray for at least 36 hours.
4.11 Measurements
Formwork shall be measured as the area (in square meters) of shuttering in contact with the concrete
including covers, angles, splays, mitres, bevels, etc. for which no special rate shall be allowed.
 It shall be measured to the nearest centimeter and the area worked out correct to two decimal
places
 No deduction shall be made for openings up to 0.4 square meter in plan
 Area of voids shall be deducted from the face area of shuttering.
 No deductions shall be made from formwork of main beams where a secondary beam intersects
it. Formwork for secondary beams shall be measured up to sides of the main beams.
 No deduction shall be made from the formwork to column casings at intersection of beams.
 Lapping of formwork with previously laid out concrete will not be measured and will not be paid
for.
 The quoted rate shall be applicable for all working conditions and at all heights and depths or lifts
specified in the drawings. The rate shall include the cost of materials and labour for various
operations involved including, but not limited to the following:
 Provision of formwork, its erection and treatment of the concrete surface immediately after
removal of the formwork
 Holes to be made in the formwork for inserting electrical conduits, piping for plumbing works, etc
 Centering, bracing, tightening with bolts and nuts, staging, etc.
 Splayed edges, notchings, allowance for overlaps, centering, shuttering, strutting, bolting, nailing,
welding, casing striking and removal.
 Filling to form stop chamfered edges or splayed external angles to footings, beams, columns and
the like.
 Temporary openings in the forms for pouring concrete and removing rubbish.
 Dressing with oil/approved emulsion to prevent adhesion of concrete with shuttering.
 Raking or cutting.
 Fixing inserts and openings at the correct line and level and at any stage to support the same at
the directed height and place.
 Platforms if any to check forms while concreting is in progress.
 Filling and making joints watertight to the satisfaction of the Project Manager/Client.
 Cleaning of the shuttering.
 Cleaning the complete floor immediately on deshuttering complete to enable the start of next
activity.
 Cleaning and washing of the complete floor during and after concreting to avoid any damage to
finished surface. It will be responsibility of the Contractor to protect and retain all finished
surfaces.
Should there be any laitance due to concreting of upper floors or other construction activities within the
said floor the Contractor shall be responsible to do all that is required to bring the finish back to the
original or as specified in the Technical Specification/ directed by the Project Manager/Client.

No payment shall be made for temporary formwork used in concreting nor for formwork required for
joints or buttheads, in floors or elsewhere whether such joints are to be covered late with concrete or
mastic or other material.
4.12 Tolerances
Tolerance is a specified permissible variation from lines, grades or dimensions given in drawings. No
tolerances are specified for horizontal or vertical encroachments beyond the legal boundaries. Unless
otherwise specified, tolerances given in the following sections shall be permitted.
4.12.1 Tolerance for RCC Buildings

Variation from plumb should be as follows:
 In the lines and surface of columns, walls, and other vertical members, viz inside face of lift shaft, etc.
3 mm per 3.0 meter but not exceeding 10mm for the full height of the building.
 For exposed corner column and other conspicuous lines
In any bay up to 5 m maximum 3 mm
In 10 m or more bays 5 mm
 Soffits of slabs, ceilings and beams
2.5 m bays 3 mm
5.0 m bays 3 mm
10.0 m or more 10 mm
 Lintels, sills, parapets, grooves and other conspicuous lines
In any bay up to 5 m maximum 3 mm
In 10 m or more 5 mm
 Variation of the linear building lines from established positions in plan and related position of
columns, wall and partitions
In bay up to 5 m maximum 5 mm
In 10 m or more 10 mm
 Deviation from dimensions of footing / foundation:

(i) Dimension in plan (+) 50mm
(ii) Eccentricity in plan: 0.02 times the width of the footings in the direction of deviation but not
more than 50mm
(iii) Thickness: (+) 0.05 times the specified thickness.
(iv) Surface of foundation against ground: -5mm, +10mm
(v) Top surface of foundations, bases, piers: +5mm, -20mm
 Variation in sizes and location of sleeves, opening in walls and floors to be 5 mm (except for anchor
bolts)
 Variation in cross-sectional dimension of columns and beams and thickness of slabs and walls -5 mm,
+10 mm
 Variation in steps
In a flight of stairs Risers Treads

In flight of stairs 3 mm 5 mm
In consecutive steps 1.5 mm 3 mm
All the tolerances mentioned above shall apply to concrete dimensions only, and not to positioning of
vertical steel or dowels.
4.13 Removal of Formwork:

Formwork shall not be struck until the concrete has reached a strength at least twice the stress to which
the concrete may be subjected at the time of removal of formwork.
 Formwork shall be removed carefully without jarring the concrete and curing of the concrete shall
commence immediately. Sudden shocks / vibrations during removal of wedges shall be avoided.
Where finished edges have re-entrant angles, remove formwork as early as possible to avoid
shrinkage cracks.
 Concrete surfaces to be exposed shall where required by the Project Manager/Client, be rubbed
with carborandum stone to give a smooth and even finish.
 Where concrete requires plastering or other finish later, the concrete surface shall be hacked as
directed.
 No extra charge will be allowed to the Contractor for such work.
4.14 Minimum time Requirements

For other cements the stripping time shall be suitably modified in consultation with the Project
Manager/Client. For precast moulds the stripping time shall be 24 hours.
Striking time shall be as follows:
Type of Formwork Minimum period before striking

(excluding the day of casting)
i. Walls, columns 12 hrs

ii. Vertical faces 12 hrs
iii Removal of formwork with props fully left under
spanning over 6m 7 days
iv Between ribs not more than 1 to 2 m 7 days
v. Ribs, joists, beams, soffits
- Up 3m clear span - Beams 7 days
- Between 3m to 6m - Beams 14 days
- Above 6m clear span beams 21 days
vi. One way floor slabs - up to 3m 7 days
vii. One way floor slabs - between 3m to 6m 10 days
viii One way floor slabs - over 6m 14 days
ix Beams and Girder Sides 12 days
x. Removal of props below slabs spanning over 6m 21 days

Striking of Formwork within the time limits listed above is subject to successful crushing of cubes
compressive strength results. However re-shuttering and re-propping can be done if the required strength
is attained as per the instructions of Structural Consultant / Project Manager/Client.
4.15 Cleaning and Oiling of Forms

The contactor shall ensure that the surface of the forms that will touch the concrete shall be free from
encrustations of mortar, grout, or other foreign material. Temporary openings shall be left at the bottom
of formwork to enable sawdust, shavings, wire off-cuts and other foreign material to be removed from
the interior of the forms before the concrete is placed. Compressed air shall be used to clean the
complete formwork and remove all traces of duct and debris before pouring concrete the temporary
holes shall then be closed.
The surface of the forms to be in contact with the concrete shall be coated with a reliable coating that will
effectively prevent the adherence of concrete and will not stain the concrete surfaces. After each use, the
surfaces of forms which have been in contact with concrete shall be cleaned of mortar and any other
material sticking to them, then well wetted and treated with form oil approved by the Project
Manager/Client.
The Contractor shall provide commercial form release agent that will not bond with, stain or adversely
affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces.
4.16 Openings / Inserts

Contractor shall provide all required openings, pockets, inserts as detailed in drawings. The Contractor
shall provide required material and labour for fixing and supporting during concreting. In its quoted price,
it is imperative to consider that all openings and pockets shall be de-shuttered with care and all corners of
openings shall be preserved, ie shall be in correct line and level. After concreting the openings shall be
secured against any accident by proper covering and guard rail, warning notice, lighting, etc for which no
extra cost is payable to the Contractor.
5. Structural Steel
General
Description
Extent and Intent
The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labour operation, equipment, tools and plant and incidentals
necessary and required for the completion of all metal work in connection items of metal work as called
for in the drawings. The drawings and specifications cover the major requirements only. The supplying of
additional fastenings, accessory features and other items not mentioned specifically herein but which are
necessary to make a complete installation shall be a part of the Contract. Works Include anchorages in
cast-in-situ concrete.
Related Work
i. Grouting base plates and bearing plates
ii. Metal fabricators
iii. Roofing sheets

Applicable Standards
IS-800-- Structural Steel for general purpose
IS-226-- Structural Steel (standard quality) (fifth revision)
IS-456-- Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete (third revision)
IS-696-- Code of practice for general engineering drawings (second revision)
IS-786-- (Supplement) SI supplement to Indian Standard conversion factors and conversion tables (first
revision)
IS-812-- Glossary of terms relating to welding and cutting of Metals
IS-813-- Scheme of symbols for welding
IS-814 Covered electrodes for metal arc welding of structural steels: 814 (Part 1)-1974 Part 1 for
welding products other than sheets (fourth revision)
IS-816-- Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for general construction in mild steel (first revision)
IS-817-- Code of practice for training and testing of metal arc welders (revised)
IS-819-- Code of practice for resistance spot welding for light assemblies In mild steel
IS-875-- Code of practice for structural safety of buildings: Loading standards (revised)
IS-919-- Recommendations for limits and fits for engineering (revised)
IS-961-- Structural steel (high tensile) (second revision)
IS-962-- Code of practice for architectural and building drawings (first revision)
IS-1024-- Code of practice for use of welding in bridges and structures subject to dynamic loading (first
revision)
IS-1030-- Carbon steel castings for general engineering purposes (second revision)
IS-1148-- Hot-rolled steel rivet bars (up to 40 mm diameter) for structural purposes (second revision)
IS-1149-- High tensile steel rivet bars for structural purposes
IS-1261-- Code of practice for seam welding in mild steel
IS-1278-- Filler rods and wires for gas welding (second revision)
IS-1323-- Code of practice for oxyacetylene welding for structural work in mild steel (revised)
IS-1363- Black hexagon bolts, nuts and lock nuts (diameter 6 to 39 mm) and black hexagon screws
(diameter 6 to 24 mm) (first revision)
IS-1364-- Precision and semi-precision hexagon bolts, screws, nuts and lock nuts (diameter range 6 to 39
mm) (first revision)
IS-1367-- Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners (first revision)
IS-1393-- Code of practice for training and testing of oxy-acetylene welders
IS-1395-- Molybdenum and chromium molybdenum vanadium low alloy steel electrodes for metal arc
welding (second revision)
IS-1477 Code of practice for painting of ferrous metals in buildings: 1477 (Part 1)-1971 Part 1
Pretreatment (first revision)(Part 2)-1971 Part 2 Painting
IS-1929-- Rivets for general purposes (12 to 48 mm diameter)
IS-1977-- Structural steel (ordinary quality) (second revision)
IS-2062-- Weld able structural steel (third revision)
IS-2155-- Rivets for general purposes (below 12 mm diameter)
IS-3613-- Acceptance tests for wire-flux combinations for submerged-arc welding of structural steels
(first revision)
IS-3757-- High-tensile friction grip bolts (first revision)

IS-4000-- Code of practice for assembly of structural joints using high tensile friction grip fasteners
IS-5369-- General requirements for plain washers and lock washers (first revision)
IS-5370-- Plain washers with outside diameter 3 x inside diameter
IS-6419-- Welding rods and bare electrodes for gas shielded arc welding of structural steel
IS-6623-- High tensile friction grip nuts
IS-6649-- High tensile friction grip washers
IS-7205-- Safety code for erection of structural steel work
IS-7215-- Tolerances for fabrication of steel structures
IS-7280-- Bare wire electrodes for submerged arc welding of structural steels
IS-8500-- Weld able structural steel (medium and high strength qualities)
Shop Drawings Include

a. Shop drawings for trusses, bracings, purlins, columns, ties, base plates, crane girders, etc.
b. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing and locations of structural members, connections, attachments,
fasteners, cambers, loads and designs of joints.
c. Indicate welded connections using standard welding symbols and net weld lengths.
d. Indicate the method of erection, shop and field joints.
e. Indicate and identify all transportable parts and sub assemblies, associates with special erection
instructions, if any.
f. Provide design calculations for splices, joints, other details not specifically detailed in design drawings
on fabrication drawings considering standard detailing practices and developing full member
strengths.
g. Submit 3 sets of shop drawings to Project Manager/Client for approval.
h. Allow three weeks for Project Manager/Client to approve Shop Drawings.
Products
Materials
a. Structural steel members.
b. Structural tubing.
c. Bolts, nuts and washers.
d. Welding materials.
e. Primer.
f. Shear studs.
g. Electrodes
All metal materials shall be free from defects impairing strength, durability and appearance and they shall
have structural properties that comply fully with the standards set. All ferrous metal shall be free from
rust, scale and other defects. All non-ferrous metal shall have uniform finished surfaces, machined and
buffed, free from defects. All sections shall conform accurately to sizes and shapes required.
Fabrication
a. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with IS Specifications 800 Section V and approved
shop drawings.
b. Defective material used shall be replaced by the Contractor.

c. Fabricated items delivered at site shall be suitably protected from any damages.
Finish
Clean, prepare and shop rime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces to be field welded or
bolted or in contact with concrete.
Execution
a. Erect structural steel in accordance with IS Specifications.
b. Make provision for erection loads and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain the structure in
proper plumb and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent
bracing.
c. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Project Manager/Client.
d. After erection, prime welds, abrasions and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact
with concrete.
e. Members shall be cut mechanically by saw or shear or by oxy acetylene flame and not by electric
metal arc.
f. Cut edges shall be ground as per IS 823.
g. Cutting tolerances shall be
 Members connected at bolt ends: + or - 1 mm.
 Other members: + or - 3 mm.
h. All bolt holes shall be drilled and to the sizes specified in drawings.
 Tolerance for spacing between two holes: + or - 1 mm.
 Tolerance between two perpendiculars of any oval hole: + or - 1 mm.
 Bolt holes for field joints shall be drilled in the shop to the required diameters and tested.
i. Drilling holes for standard sizes if varies can be reamed to next higher sizes. The tolerance for hole
reaming shall not exceed 15% of the total number of holes for one joint.
Preparation of members for welding

a. Proper jigs and fixtures shall be used to ensure correct positioning of structural members during
assembly.
b. Sharp edges, rusting of cutting edges, notches, irregularities, and fissures due to faulty cutting
shall be chipped and ground.
c. Edge preparation for welding shall be done properly taking care of cleaning, providing dry
surface, removing grease, dust or dirt, foreign matter, etc.
d. Finished dimensions of structure shall be ensured after taking into account the shrinkage and
distortions during welding.
Welding
Personnel:
a. Welders shall be fully trained, experienced and certified by the recognized welding institutes.
b. Welders’ qualification tests shall be as per ASME SEC IX and approved by Project Manager/Client.
Execution:
a. Welding shall be done in accordance with IS 823.

b. Welded parts shall be marked with welders’ identification.
c. Protect the welded parts, electrode wires against wind and rain.
d. Discontinued seams shall be melted before resuming welding operation.
e. Welding seams shall be cooled slowly and not by any other quick methods.
f. Before welding a second layer over the existing layer of weld, the layer shall be cleaned metal bright
by light chipping and wire brushing.
g. Execution shall proceed in strict compliance with Section 2/ 7 Safety Procedures.
Approval:
a. Welded parts shall not have any deformations.
b. Welded joints should compensate for Contractions due to welding.
c. Defective welds must be rectified.
d. Weld seams shall correspond to design shapes and dimensions.
e. Weld seams shall not have cracks, fusion, under cuts, rough surfaces, burns, blowholes, and
incomplete penetration.
f. Approval of finished elements, inspections and tests shall be as per Annexure
Bolting
Material
a. Bolts, nuts shall be in accordance with IS 1367 and tested as per IS 1608.
b. Washers shall be as per IS 2016.
Preparation
a. Members shall be assembled for bolting with proper jigs and fixtures to sustain the assemblies
without deformation and bending.
b. All sharp edges, shavings, rust, dirt, etc. shall be removed before assembly.
c. Before assembly the contacting surfaces of the members shall be cleaned and given a coat of primer.
d. Temporarily the assembly shall be done and checked for co-axiality of the holes after which the
assembly shall be finally bolted.
Execution
 Bolts shall be fixed after all the defects have been rectified and approved by Project Manager/Client.
 Bolts shall be tightened from the centre of joint towards the edge.
Identification
 Structural members prior to dispatch for erection shall be marked with weather proof light coloured
paint. The size and thickness of members shall be so chosen as to facilitate easy identification.
 Structural members small in size shall be bundled or crated and shall be marked with metal tags for
bundles and painted on crates for identification with particulars of the bundle / crate size, weight,
etc.
Shop - approvals
Pre Assembly

Pre assembly of bolted structures shall be done for all elements as well as for the entire structure in
conformity with the 'holes for field joints'. Steel structures having same type of welding the shop test
pre assembly shall be performed at least one member out of ten members.
Inspection
a. Contractor to provide facilities for Project Manager/Client to inspect the steel assembly, welding,
bolting, painting etc. at any time during fabrication of members.
b. Project Manager/Client shall have the access to the fabrication shop at all times for satisfying himself
regarding the fabrication of steel items to the drawings and specifications.
c. Shop approval by the Consultants / Project Manager/Client is only mandatory.
d. Contractor to bear all the expenses for testing required by the Consultants / Project Manager/Client
for satisfying regarding the quality of workmanship.
e. Contractor to furnish necessary tools, gauges, instruments, technical and non-technical personnel for
shop tests at his own cost.
Approvals
Intermediate approvals
a. For part of the work that cannot be inspected later.
b. For part of the work that will be difficult to perform inspection and even if done results are not
satisfactory.
Partial approvals
a. To the structural steel members and assemblies before the primer coat is applied.
b. of materials used for fabrication.
c. of test erection.
d. of markings.
e. of fillet joints.
f. of plain surfaces.
g. of special features such as rollers, etc.
Final approval
a. To all elements and assemblies of steel structures after having a shop primer coat and ready for
delivery.
b. Includes partial approval
c. Of shop primer coat.
d. Of mode of loading and transport.
e. Of storage of materials.
Approved Fabricators
All metal work fabricated shall be approved by the Structural Consultant / Project Manager/Client. The
entire work shall be carried out by workmen skilled in this kind of work in a shop fully equipped to carry
out all phases of fabrication in accordance with the best-accepted trade practices.
Painting

Preparation:
a. Surface to receive primer coat shall be sand blasted free of dust, oil, rust, etc.toSA2.5 grade
b. Surfaces not accessible to painting shall be filled with approved type of oil and putty.
c. Surface shall be completely dry.
d. Surfaces where water or aggressive agents may collect during transportation, storage, erection and
operation shall be filled with putty and provided with drainage holes.
e. Structural steel members are inspected and approved.
f. Welds are approved.
g. After satisfying the above criteria the surfaces are to be provided with one coat of red oxide / zinc
chromate primer to the satisfaction of Project Manager/Client before the material is dispatched for
erection.
Do not prime the following areas:

a. Surfaces to receive weld at site.
b. Surfaces bearing markings.
c. Surfaces as indicated in drawings.
d. Planned surfaces shall receive a coat of hot oil or any approved resistant lubricant only.
e. To coat the surfaces with hot oil to holes for links.
f. To give a coat of cement wash for any members either embedded or in contact with concrete.
g. To give a bituminous coat for members in contact with ground, gravel, brickwork and moisture.
h. Contractor to give a further coat of red oxide paint after erection and placing in position of the
assembly if called for by the Project Manager/Client.
Packing, Transportation, Delivery:

a. Structural steel members shall be marked and approved in shop before packing and loading for
transportation.
b. Adequate packing must be done for all the steel members to protect them against warping during
loading and unloading.
c. Suitable lifting devises to be used for loading and unloading.
d. Additional steel bracing to be provided for all slender projecting members to prevent any warping
during transportation loading and unloading.
e. Loading and transportation shall be done as per the transportation rules.
f. To provide additional splice joints where required in consultation with Consultants / Project
Manager/Client in case the members to be transported are beyond the limitations of transporting
system.
g. To secure all small parts including gusset plates fish plates by securing them with wire to their
respective parts.
h. To crate all bolts, nuts and washers.
i. All structural parts to be delivered in the order required for construction and as per instructions of
Project Manager/Client and shall accompany the following documents.
- Quality and quantity of structure or members.
- Location of members in the structure
- Description of structure
- Identification number

Building/job symbol
Storage and Preparation of Members Prior to Erection
a. Place for storage of steel member shall be prepared in advance and got approved by the Project
Manager/Client.
b. To provide concrete platform at the site for preliminary erection work.
c. To verify the quality of material obtained at site and for workmanship to the specifications and
drawings.
d. To verify whether the parts obtained at site is free from defects due to loading, unloading
transportation.
e. To avoid warping of members during unloading by taking sufficient precautionary measures.
f. To store the members as per the symbol and markings and in order of erection.
g. To place the steel members at least 150mm above the platform on wooden or steel locks for
protection against direct contact with ground and to permit drainage of water.
h. To equip for rectification of members like straightening at site and to provide sufficient space for
the same.
i. To see that the parts are clean before erection.
Field Erection
a. To get approvals of foundation, columns, column pedestals or other related structure on which the
structural steel members are to be erected.
b. To get approvals of the members receiving structural steel members regarding their levels,
dimensions, alignments and verticality well in advance.
c. To carry out any minor discrepancies at no additional cost.
d. To get approvals of pockets, bolt locations, levels of base plates before erection.
e. Erection to commence after satisfying the above conditions.
f. Erection to be done in an organised way so that any individual member is not subjected to instability
during the erection time.
g. Precautionary measures to be taken during erection of trusses, purlins and other steel members by
providing proper bracing.
h. Faulty erections done without caring for safety of members and of personal shall be made good at no
additional cost.
i. Contractor is not relieved of his responsibilities, guarantees even after the Project Manager/Client
approves the fabrication, erection, etc., at any stage of work.
j. Contractor is solely responsible for the correctness accuracy and quality of the fabrication, erection
and final approvals to be obtained by the Project Manager/Client.
Erection and Tolerance

a. To check and inspect before, during and after erection.
1. Damage during transportation.
2. Alignment of structure.
3. Erection sequence
4. Progress
5. Workmanship

b. To erect members as per the predetermined plan approved by the Project Manager/Client.
c. To position and level the structure including aligning and to plumb the stanchion and fixing every
member in position with bolts, erection bolts, weld as per design and drawings.
d. To inform the Project Manager/Client of any variation, deviation in location of foundations, anchor
bolts which shall deviate the prefabricated members.
e. Structural Consultants / Project Manager/Client to give suitable solutions in case of above deviations
well in advance for the Contractor to proceed with the fabrication of members including any
modifications necessary.
f. Contractor to rectify any minor deviations in foundations, location of steel bolts and orientation of
bolt hole positions at no extra cost.
g. To erect structural steel members ensuring that the system is stable against inherent weight, wind
and any erected trusses.
h. To anchor and fasten the erection joints after duly checking the plan, elevation positions of the
members with reference to the drawings after the approval of Project Manager/Client.
i. To fasten bolts to the final position with bolt heads and nuts resting on the member and on tapered
washers with members having a sloping surface.
Final Acceptance and Handing Over the Structure

a. Contractor to submit As-built shop drawings for the approval of the Structural Consultant / Project
Manager/Client, as per the stipulation given in Conditions of Contract.
b. Documents to be submitted for final acceptance are as follows:
1. Shop acceptance drawings
2. Quality certificate for structural members, plates, flats, bolts.
3. Quality certificate for material used for fabrication including electrodes, welding wire, bolts,
nuts, washers, etc.,
4. List of welders who welded the structures and their certificates for having undergone a welding
course.
5. Acceptance and intermediate control procedure adopted during the process of fabrication,
assembly, transportation, delivery and erection or structure.
Measurements
a. Payment of structural steel members including bolts, nuts, washers, gusset plates, etc., will be done
on weight basis.
b. The weight of members will be assessed from the final fabricated and approved drawings and the
respective Bill of Materials prepared by the Contractor and approved the Structural Consultant /
c. The weight of members shall be as per IS handbook.
d. Sections different than mentioned in IS handbook shall be taken as per manufacturers’ information.
e. No rolling tolerance will be allowed.
f. Built up of members will be paid as per the actual weight of the members.
g. Gusset plates shall be paid to the nearest rectangle enclosing the shape and no deduction shall be
made for any skew cuts.
h. Welds, bolts, anchors, washers, etc will not be measured and paid for separately.

i. Payment do not include any other related temporary works connected with this work including
welds, shims, wedge plates, etc.
j. Rates to include any trimming, straightening, edge preparation, preparation and approval of shop
drawings, and one coat of red oxide / zinc chromate primer and also including any handling, re-
handling, loading and unloading, transportation to the site of work and returning surplus material to
the Project Manager/Client at the place requested by him.
k. Rate to include necessary scaffolding, temporary support, tool and tackles, touching up primer coat
grouting etc.
Grouting
a. To level, align and plumb the structural steel work and the base of stanchions by providing steel
shim plates.
b. To align anchor bolts in foundation to the required level, location and orientation by using
templates.
c. To clean the underside of base plates, pockets to receive grout by using compressed air.
d. To use cement mortar 1:2, 1 of cement and 2 of sand, non-shrink grout under base plates.
e. To use grade M 30 concrete to fill up the grout pockets left for fixing anchor bolts.
f. To pour the grout under a sufficient head and tam until the voids are thoroughly filled and the grout
overflows.
Tolerances
a. Steel work for line and level ± 3mm
b. For structural steel for plumb 3.5mm for 10M and not more than 7mm for 30M
c. To follow any tolerance criteria provided on the drawings.
d. To provide tolerances for all structural steel members as per IS code other than what is mentioned
in a, b and c.
ANNEXURE - A
Inspection of test Coverage Procedure Evaluation findings &

remedy of Defect
Inspection of weld All welds Naked Eye or Lens All faulty welds shall be
seam rectified
Checking of Sizes At least one Ordinary measuring Should faulty weld be found all
for each Weld instruments (rule, welds shall be checked & all
templates) defects shall be rectified.
Mechanical tests for As per
welding procedure ASME SEC IX
Performance &
electrodes

ANNEXURE - B
INADMISSIBLE WELD DEFECTS AND TOLERANCE ALLOWED FOR WELDS
Defects Detailing of Allowed Cause of defects Mode of
sketching of tolerances & finding
defect remedy of defects defects
Unsatisfactory Uneven width At discretion cut Uneven welding External
appearance rugged seam weld & reweld progress, voltage (visual
fluctuations, varying inspection
arc length, negligence
inexperienced welded
Unsatisfactory Shallow or No variance from Negligence Visual
shape jutting welds design shape shall inspection
be allowed template
checking
Incomplete weld Not allowed fill in Template
weld checking
Molten metal flow Not allowed fill in Excessive melting, ions Visual
weld wrong handling of electrodes inspection
Pits Not allowed cut Wrong welding Visual
& reweld technique inspection
Surface cracks Not allowed cut & Grerat stresses, sudden Visual
reweld cooling, wrong type of inspection
electrodes
Defects Detailing of Allowed Cause of defects Mode of

sketching of tolerances & finding
defect remedy of defects defects
Incorrect sectional B1 = ±2mm Negligence Template
dimensions B2 = ±2mm checking
B = ±1mm
A) Depth weld C = ±1mm
Chisel & grid
Insufficient For weld Negligence Rule checking
lengths
11+5mm, for
12+10mm for
shorter seams
cur & reweld or
complete to
length
Back cuts If 0.5mm for Burnt material, Visual
10mm & C1mm excessive melting inspection

for 10mm
replace relevant
members
Surface porosities Max 5% of seam Frequent interruptions Visual
area cut & re- or welding electrodes inspection
weld inadequately covered
6. POST - TENSIONED SLABS / BEAMS
6.1 INTRODUCTION
Post – tensioning of the slabs /beams be carried out in accordance with Below . – flat holded post –
tensioning system shall be adopted the processing shall consist of stands of 12.7 mm ( 0.5 “) dia and
contained in a flat sheet metal duct. Each strand is anchored by means of a barrel and wedge and
individually stressed by means of a nonstrand jack, which occupies limited space. The pre – stressing force is
transferred to the concrete by a flat anchor plate casting . By use of flat duct the static depth of slab is
more efficiently utilized compared to a round duct for same number of strands.
6.2 Sheathing
The sheathing ducts shall be of the spiral - corrugated type. Unless otherwise specified , the material shall
be Cold Rolled Cold Annealed (CRCA) Mild Steel conforming to IS 513 intended for mechanical treatment
and surface refining but not for quench hardening or tempering. The material shall be bright finished. The
thickness of sheathing shall be shown on the drawing, but shall not be less than 0.3 mm.
The sheathing ducts shall be manufactured at the project site using appropriate machines or in the
factory and dispatched to site as per suitable programme so as to minimize period of site storage. Where
sheathing duct joints are unavoidable, such joints shall be made slurry tight by the use of corrugated
threaded sleeve couplers, which may be lightly screwed onto the outer side of the ducts.
The length of the coupler shall not be less than 150 mm but should be increased up to 200 mm wherever
practicable. The joints between the ends of the coupler and the duct shall be sealed with adhesive
sealing tape to present penetration of cement slurry during concreting. The couplers of adjacent ducts
should be staggered wherever practicable . As far as possible, couplers should not be located in curved
zones.
The finished duct shall be flattered to form an oblong section out of the round pipes by a suitable
machine . The size of the flat duct shall be 70 mm x 26.2 mm for 405 size anchorages (4 nos. of 0.5” strand )
The sheathing duct of round pipes shall be periodically tested as per the recommendations of the SRC 18
– 1995 for acceptance.
6.3 Cona – Flat Anchorages

Cona – Flat Anchorages unit shall consist of a flat cone costing with 4 nos of Barrel and wedges
for gripping of the 4 nos. 0.3” MT strand. The Flat cona shall be of grey iron casting confirming to
DIN 1691 OR equivalent . The barrel shall be manufactured from HT alloy steel of CK 45 as per
DIN 1720 or equivalent. For 405 Cona – Flat tendon, the overall thickness of the cone casting shall
not exceed 75 mm preferably. Test certificates for the anchorages materials shall be submitted by
the system supplier.

No damaged anchorage shall be used. Steel parts shall be protected from corrosion at all times.
Threaded parts shall be protected by greased wrappings and tapped holes shall be protected by
suitable plugs until used. The anchorage components shall be kept free from matter loose rust
and any other deleterious coating.
All bearing surfaces of the anchorage shall be cleaned prior to concreting and tensioning . Anchor cone
shall be securely positioned and maintained during concreting such that the centerline of the duct passes
axially through the anchorage assembly. The anchorages shall be recessed from the concrete surface by
minimum cover of 100 mm or as per construction drawings which ever is higher.
At the fixed end of tendon, Cona – flat loop anchorage for 405 shall be supplied as per system supplier’s
detail.
Un –tensioned steel reinforcement , and anchorage shall conform to details of pro-stressing system and as
shown on the drawing.
6.4 Strand
12.7 mm ( 0.5”) dia HT strand shall conform to class 2 of IS : 6006. The normal cross – sectional area of
the 7 ply 12.7 mm dia strand shall be 98.7 mm2 with minimum breaking load of 183.7 KN rest certificate
of manufacturer shall be supplied along with each lot dispatched to site.
6.5 Cleaning
Tendon shall be free from loose rust, oil, grease, tar, paint , mud or any other deleterious substance.
6.6 Straightening.
High tensile steel strand shall be supplied in coils of sufficiently larger diameter such that tendon shall
retain their physical properties and shall be straight as it unwinds from the coil. Tendons of any type
that are damaged , kinked or bent shall not be used.
The packing of pre- stressing strand shall be removed fast prior to marking of cable for placement in
ducts. Proper platform shall be provided to facilitate uncoiling of strand without damage to steel. Care shall
be taken to avoid the possibility of the such coming into contact with the ground.
6.7 Post – Tensioning

Pre – stressing tendon shall be accurately profiled and maintained in position, both vertically and
horizontally, as per drawings. Tendon shall be so arranged that they have a smooth profile. Without sudden
bends and kinks. The positioning of pre-stressed cables shall be such as to facilitate easy placement and
vibration of concrete in between the tendons. All stressing and fixed anchorages shall be allowed. The
minimum spacing between the tendons and edge distance shall be as per recommendation of the system
supplier and / or as per drawings.
Sheathing shall be placed in correct position and profiles suitable ladders / spacers made from 4 or 5 mm
dia rod may be provided at intervals of approximately 1.0 m. Sheathing shall be tied rigidly with such ladders
/ spacers bars so that they do not get disturbed during concreting. The method of supporting and fixing
shall be such that profile of cables is not disturbed during vibrations, by pressure of wet concrete, by

workmen or by construction traffic. Where possible tendons shall not be handled with care to avoid damage
or contamination to either the tendon or the sheathing. Any tendons damaged or contaminated shall be
replace. In general, the work shall conform to IS 1343 or equivalent.
6. 8 Cutting of strands
Cutting and trimming of strands shall be done by suitable mechanical or flame cutters. When a flame
cutter is used, care shall be taken to ensure that the flame does not come in contact with other stressed
steel. The location of flame cutting of wire or strand shall be kept beyond 100 mm of where the tendon
will be gripped by the anchorage or jacks. The ends of pre-stressing steel projecting beyond the anchorage
shall be cut after the grout has set.
Design Brief for Pre-stressed Slab / Beam

Governing Code: IS 1343
If Alternate Code is being planned to be used, copy of the code is to be submitted and any deviations from IS code
to be highlighted.
Material:
Concrete Grade : M35 and above
Reinforcement : TMT Fe 500
Strands : LR strands as per IS 6006
Additional Precautions
 It is proposed that the strands are permanently anchored in concrete during casting.
 The post tensioning force (actual) must be limited in such a way that accidental breaking of strand is
catered for.
 Additional stresses during concreting of upper slab shall be considered to enable no back propping of
second or subsequent lower levels slabs beneath concreting slab.
Approvals:
 Design mix of concrete
 Approval of strands-Testing to be done by independent agency to confirm codal norms.
 Methodology of pre-stressing, construction sequence, minimum and maximum concrete pour
 Designs to be submitted to consultants for their approval and perusal much before actual
commencement of works at site.
 Designs to be wetted by consultants and if need be modified as per consultants requirements.
 Design in soft /hard copy to be submitted to consultants and if required to forward and support to
the local authorities for approval.
 A copy of the stress details done at site shall be submitted to consultants for their perusal.
 Safety measures at site to be spelled and incorporated in work order.
 Co-ordination with consultants, architects, project managers, civil contractor and PMC team is
required at all times.
 Local technical representative should be available for any clarifications
 Final as built drawings to be submitted to consultant’s incl .soft and hard copies.

6. Miscellaneous Works
6.1. Anti Termite Treatment
6.2. Specifications for Anti Termite Treatment
All the buildings shall be adequately protected against attack by sub terrain termites by suitable chemical
treatment measures. The work shall be carried out by a specialist pest control agency approved by
Consultants / Project Manager/Client. The work to be carried out by the specialist firm shall carry a
guarantee for the satisfactory performance of the treatment for a min. Period of ten (10) years.
The treatment shall be carried out generally in accordance with the stipulation laid down by IS 6313 - Part
II latest edition (Code of practice for anti termite measures in buildings and part II re constructional
chemical treatment measures) subject to the min. Requirement given in this specification.
6.3. Minimum Specifications

The earth filling immediately under the stone soling (under floors) bottom and side fills of all foundations
(excepting foundations) and soil along external perimeter of all buildings shall be chemically treated
against termites. The chemical to be used for the treatment shall be Imdachloropid 30.5 SC, Dildrin,
Aldrin, Heptachlor or Chlordane or as specified conforming of the requirement and concentration laid
down in IS 6313 (Part II) - latest edition.
6.4. Application
The chemical solution shall be prepared by mixing the chemical with the appropriate quantity of water to
obtain a chemical emulsion of the correct concentration as stipulated above. The prepared emulsion shall
be applied as described below.
6.5. Column Pits, Wall Trenches, etc

The bottom surface and sides of the excavations (up to a height of 30cm from the bottom) made for
column foundations, wall foundations etc., (excepting RCC foundations) shall be treated with the chemical
2
emulsion at the rate of 5 ltr/m of surface area.
6.6. Treatment to Backfill

After the column foundations, wall foundations etc., are constructed, the back fill in immediate contact
2
with the foundation structure shall be treated at the rate of 7.5 ltr/m of the surface of the substructure
for each side if water is used for ramming operation completely by rodding earth at 15cm centers close to
the wall face and spraying the chemical with the above dose. The chemical emulsion shall be directed
towards the masonry wall surfaces so that the earth in contact with these surfaces is well treated with the
chemicals.
In the case of RCC walls and columns, the treatment shall start at the depth of 50 cm. below natural
ground level.
From this depth the back fill around the RCC columns, walls, etc., shall be treated at the rate of 15 ltr/m2
of the surface.
1.1 Top Surface of Plinth Filling
The top surface of the plinth fill (just below the stone soling) shall be treated with chemical emulsion at
the rate of 5 ltr/m2 of the surface before the stone lay. If the filled earth has been well consolidated and

does not permit the emulsion to seep through, holes up to 50 to 75mm deep at 150mm centers both
ways may be made with crowbars to facilitate saturation of the soil with the chemical emulsion.
1.2 Junction of Wall and Floor
A channel size of 3x3 cm shall be made at all the junction of walls and columns with the floor (before
laying soling) and rod wholes made in the channels up to the ground level at 15cm centers. The solution
is poured into the channels at the rate of 15 ltr/m2 of the vertical surface and allowed to soak through the
holes fully so that the soil is in contact with the chemical. The soil shall be tamped back into the channel
and consolidation to the original conditions.
1.3 External Perimeter of Building
After the building is complete, holes shall be made along the external perimeter of the building at
intervals 15cms and depth of 30cms and the emulsions shall be allowed to soak through these holes fully
at the rate of 5 ltr/m2 of the perimeter wall.
1.4 Soil Surrounding Pipes
Wherever any service pipes enter the soil inside the area of the foundations of any building, the solid
surrounding the point of entry of each pipe at the foundation, floor etc., shall be fully soaked with the
chemical solution for a distance of at least 1mtr. From the point of such entry.
1.5 Expansion Joints
Soil beneath the expansion joints at ground floor level shall be specially treated as directed. The joints
itself shall also be treated as directed by the Consultants / Project Manager/Client.
1.6 Treatment Under Apron
The soil below the concrete for stone aprons to be provided around the perimeter walls of all buildings
shall also be treated with the chemical solutions at the rate of 5 ltr/m2.
1.7 Treatment Over DPC
Top of concrete damp proof course in external and internal walls shall be given a liberal coat of
chemical solution when the concrete is still green.
1.8 Spraying Equipment
To facilitate proper penetration of the chemical into the soil, a pressure pump of adequate capacity and
sprayers shall be employed to apply the solution.
1.9 Measurements
The measurements shall be made in square meter on the basis of plinth area of the building at ground
floor only for all operations described in schedule of quantities. Nothing extra shall be measured.
The rate shall include cost of all material and labour involved in all operations described above.
1.10 Code of Practice:
Notwithstanding the above the specialist Contractor will ensure that all requirements in accordance
with the relevant Indian Codes are met with regards to materials, application, handling and storage.
1.11 Guarantee:
On completion of the treatment in all respects, a guarantee that the building is safe from subterranean
species of termite infestation for a period of 10 years is required on stamp paper in a format which shall
be approved by the Client who shall have the final decision. In the event of re-infestation of the said
structure at any time during guarantee period, an undertaking is required to carry out such treatment
as may be necessary to render the structure free from termite infestation without any extra cost
including any remedial work, resulting sleeves, cutout etc.
1.12 Admixtures and Additives

 Chemical admixtures are not to be used until permitted by the Consultants. In case their use is
permitted, the type, amount and method of use of any admixture proposed by the Contractor shall
be submitted to Consultants for approval.
 The Contractor shall further provide the following information concerning each admixture to
Consultants.
 Normal dosage and detrimental effects, if any, of under dosage and over dosage.
 The chemical names of main ingredients in the admixture
 The Chloride iron content, if any, expressed as a percentage by weight of admixture.
 Whether or not the admixture leads to the entrainment of air when used in the manufacturer’s
recommended dosage.
 Where two or more admixtures are proposed to be used in any one mix, the manufacturer’s
written confirmation of their compatibility.
 In reinforced concrete, the chloride iron of any admixtures used shall not exceed 2 percent by
weight of the admixtures in accordance with IS 6925 and the total chloride iron in all admixtures
used in concrete mix shall not exceed 0.03 % by weight of cement
 The admixtures when used shall conform to IS 9103 “The suitability of all admixtures shall be
verified by trial mixtures”.
 The addition of calcium chloride to concrete containing embedded metal will not be permitted
under any circumstances.
 Retarding admixtures when used shall be based on lingosulphonates with due considerations to IS
7861
 Water proofing admixtures shall comply with IS 2645.
1.13 Grouts
1.13.1 Grouting
 Grouting shall be done in 1:2 cement mortar (one part cement and two parts coarse sand) of
thickness 3’’ (75mm) or less, or as directed. Where the thickness is more than 3’’ (75 mm) thick
grouting shall be done in plain or reinforced cement with coarse aggregate 3/8” and down gauge.
The mix of concrete will be as shown in the relevant drawings as directed.
 The base plate shall be temporarily supported on steel wedges and properly aligned before
grouting. Forms shall be built around the base and wet mortar shall be placed under pressure
around and under the base. To ensure that no air pockets are left after grouting additions holes
may have to be cut if directed in the base plate so that pressure grouting can be carried out
thorough these holes also and proper inspection of the grout can be ascertained. The wedges shall
be removed after the grouting has set and recess shall be properly pointed.
 Grouting of machine foundations shall be done only after taking the written instructions form the
Consultants / Project Manager/Client.
 The grouting work is included in the respective item of concrete and the rate for these items and
inclusive of proper pressure grouting after preparations of surfaces to be grouted, necessary form
work providing and removing necessary wedges, cutting holes in the base plate to ensure that the
air pockets are left etc. No extra rate will be paid for grouting or any work that will be necessary to
carry out and ensure proper grouting entirely to the satisfaction of the Consultants / Project
Manager/Client. If however a concrete mix richer than the foundation is specified for grouting, only

the difference of the quantity of cement used in richer mix of grout and the mix of the footing shall
be paid.
1.13.2 Special Grouts

Where so specified non-shrinking grouts such as ‘Conbextra’, ‘shrinkkomp’ or ‘Ferro grout’ shall be used
as per the instructions and specifications of the manufacturers.
1.14 Precast Concrete
1.14.1 Precast Nominal Mix Concrete
General
All precast concrete shall be cast over vibrating tables or by using form vibrators. The concrete mix
shall conform in all respect to “ Various Concretes” described in the appropriate paragraph under this
section.
Exposed precast surfaces shall be finished as called for on the drawing or as directed by the Consultants
/ Project Manager/Client. All surfaces coming in contact with in situ concrete shall be wire brushed and
hosed down until the aggregate is free from cement slurry. Castellation shall be provided wherever
called for. Leaving grouting holes, grooves, inserts, projections reinforcements, lifting hooks etc., to
conform to the erection procedure. All edges and delicate projection likely to be damaged during
erection shall be protected by means of wooden cover fillets, until placed in position.
1.14.2 Precast Jali Blocks Louvers, Shelves, etc

 All precast jali shall be exactly of the size and pattern shown on the drawings and shall be made face up
in the following manner. All units shall be integrally cast, steel formwork shall be used for making jalis.
 Provided in the formwork as shown in the drawings.
 Stiff plastic concrete 1:1.5:3 shall be used with coarse aggregate 12mm and down size.
 The precast units shall not be removed from the forms for three days. Precast work shall be cured under
cover and shall be kept under water for fifteen days before placing in position.
 Samples of each part shall be approved by the Project Manager/Client before proceeding with the work.
 Unit may require wetting before bedding. The concrete base shall be wetted and coated with slurry and
minimum of mixing water shall be used in the bedding mortar, which shall be Portland cement and sand
1:3.
 The section shall apply also to pre-stressed precast controlled concrete work.
 For all precast controlled concrete work a specially equipped site factory, with casting yard, pre-
tensioning beds of individual moulds for vibrating plants, cement store, concrete laboratory erection
equipment, etc., are to be provided. The Contractor is deemed to have included in his rates all the
above provisions needed for a workman like construction in precast controlled concrete. All precast
design mix concrete shall be weigh batched.
1.14.3 Placing and Compacting of Concrete

All precautions in handling and placing of high strength concrete mixes apply. The concrete placed shall
be compacted thoroughly by using pin, vibrators, shutter vibrators or other suitable means. No
construction joints shall be allowed in precast design mix concrete work. Un-shuttered top surfaces are
to be finished smooth with trowel.

During the period of initial setting special precautions are to be taken to keep precast members
sufficiently moist to protect them against vibrations and any adverse loading
1.15 Waterproofing
Alternatives
1. Cement Based Waterproofing
2. Membrane Type
1.15.1 Cement Based Waterproofing

Related Works
a) Includes de-watering, soling, PCC 1:3:6, drains.
b) Concreting for retaining walls, slab casting at toilets, terraces.
c) Overhead tanks, sump tanks.
Material
a. Cement - @ 5 bags/100 Sft
b. Sand - Shall be clean river sand
c. Water Proofing Admixture - By approved Manufacturer
d. Aggregates - 20mm size
e. Brick bats
Execution
Box Method
A. Basement
a First layer shall be laid after cleaning, brushing the PCC layer/ blinding concrete.
b. First coat of waterproof plaster is done with CM 1:3 & approved waterproofing admixture as per
manufacturer’s specification to be used with cement and 20mm size aggregates are embedded
over the surface evenly. Weight of aggregates shall be 20kgs/Sqm.
c. Second layer of waterproof admixture mixed mortar shall be applied a day after the first coat to
the thickness of the aggregate.
d. Grouting shall be done at selected points with cement slurry mixed with waterproof admixture
e. Third layer or finishing coat is done with waterproof admixture mixed cement mortar and surface
is finished smooth. Curing shall be carried out for a minimum period of 7 days.
f. Total thickness of water proofing layers shall be not less than 50mm.
B. Retaining Wall
a. Shall be done in two layers of waterproof plastering leaving 2 hours gap between each coat.
b. Total thickness shall not exceed 35mm or 1.5” thick.
c. Water proof admixture to be used as per manufacturer’s specification with CM 1:3.
d. Grouting wherever necessary and at construction joints shall be carried out.
e. Curing shall be done till 7 days.
f. Back filling shall be done carefully with specified material. Care to take not to puncture the layer.
C. Roof
Surface Method
Part - 1

a. RCC surface to be cleaned brushed and watered.
b. First coat of bituminous water proof coating (two part highly purified Coal tar and
polyurethane polymer) shall be applied after necessary grouting at construction joints and
honey comb areas with cement grout
c. Nylon fine mesh/ Geo-fabric shall be fixed with minimum overlap of 100mm
d. First coat of bituminous water proof coating (two part highly purified Coal tar and
polyurethane polymer) shall be applied over fabric layer
e. Treatment shall continue along the parapet for a height of 300mm above the finished level.
Part - 2
a. RCC surface to be cleaned brushed and watered.
b. Cement slurry with waterproof compound shall be provided over the cleaned surface.
c. Brick coba shall be laid for necessary gradient for easy flow of rainwater (joints shall be
filled with CM 1:1 with water proof compound)
or
d. Metal coba shall be laid for specified thickness and necessary gradient for easy flow of rain-
water with CM 1:1 with waterproof compound
e. Coba to be covered with joint less water proof plaster with CM 1:2 with water proof
compound as per manufacturer’s specification finish shall be smooth.
f. Impression markings of 300mm x 300mm square to be done with 3mm rod.
g. Parapet to be treated for a height of 600mm in shape of round water.
h. Curing shall be carried for 7 days.
D. Sump, OH Tank and Toilets

a. RCC surface to be cleaned, brushed and watered
b. Toilets: Water proofing for floor shall be of 35mm thick, for walls shall be 25mm thick with
CM 1:4
c. For OH Tank and UG Sump thickness of plaster shall be 35mm in two layers
d. Waterproofing admixture shall be as per the manufacturer’s specification.
e. Grouting shall be done with cement slurry wherever required and honeycombing in concrete
is found.
f. Curing shall be done for a minimum period of 7 days.
1.15.2 MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING

DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Work of this section includes “membrane type” waterproofing of foundations, retaining walls,
basement walls and roof.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer:
 Provide products of manufacturers with not less than 10 years of successful experience in supplying
the principal materials for the required work.
 The manufacturer shall preferable holder of the ISO 9001:2000 quality certificate with a validity
period of at least two years.

 The materials need to be used previously in similar climate areas.
Installation Company:
 Before starting the installation the contractor shall deliver a certificate, recognizing the installation
company as an approved applicator.
 Before awarding the works, the contractor must present all necessary certificates that allow the
company to perform waterproofing works.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data:
Prior to delivering any waterproofing material the contractor shall submit two copies of specifications,
installation instructions and general recommendations by the manufacturer of waterproofing materials.
Sample Installations:
Construct sample installations of waterproofing before proceeding with the work. Size of samples shall
be adequate to represent completed work and be retained for the duration of the waterproofing work
as minimum standards.
QA/QC-procedure
 All parties concerned will check materials prior to installation.
 The QA/QC-procedure of the manufacturer is implemented and where necessary adapted to the
requirements of the project.
 During the works a QA/QC engineer of the manufacturer will control the works and carry out
inspections.
 All materials need to be certified compatible by the manufacturer.
 All materials are delivered with a certificate of origin.
 All related waterproofing materials need to be delivered by the same manufacturer.
 The applicator needs to provide the proof of its certification by the manufacturer.
Storage, handling & safety

 Materials delivered to site must be stored in a covered area.
 All membranes must be stored vertically with the overlap side at the bottom.
 Membranes shall not be dropped and shall be secured while lifting.
 A fire-extinguisher must be available on-site during installation.
 Worker’s safety shall be ensured by providing proper access and safety gear.
Completion
 The contractor shall deliver a clean site and wastage will be dumped at an authorized location.
 At the delivery of the works, the owner will receive an original and signed 10 year, insurance-
backed warranty for waterproofing and root resistance
 A final quality inspection will take place and hand-over documents signed by all responsible parties
1.15.3 SUB STRUCTURE WATERPROOFING

MATERIALS
Waterproofing Membrane:
Underground waterproofing with a special mixture of elastomeric modified oxidized bituminous
membrane. The membrane shall be reinforced with a reinforcement layer of non-woven polyester of
minimum 200 g/m². The upper surface is finished with calibrated granules of 1 to 2 mm, pressed
mechanically into the bitumen. The under surface is finished with a polyethylene foil of 12 micron
thickness. The total membrane thickness is as mentioned in the BOQ
Primer:
Bituminous, solvent based primer, modified with elastomers.
The primer will be used at all vertical areas and details.
Specific gravity : +/- 0,95 kg/l (at 20 C)
Kinematic viscosity : 46 mm²/s (at 40°C)
Drying time : 3 to 5 hours (depending on weather conditions)
The technical properties of the membrane shall have or exceed the following characteristics:
No. PROPERTY RESULT TEST METHOD

1 Heat resistance (°C) 120 UEAtc
2 Breaking strength:
Longitudinal (N/5 cm) ≥ 900 UEAtc
Transversal (N/5 cm) ≥ 700
3 Elongation
Longitudinal (%) ≥ 45 UEAtc
Transversal (%) ≥ 45
4 Puncture strength (N) 720 ASTM D4833-88
5 Peel strength (N) 830 ASTM D4545-86
6 Puncture resistance
Static L3 UEAtc
Dynamic L3
7 Flexibility at low temperature (°C) - 15 UEAtc
8 Thickness (mm) ≥3.5 UEAtc
9 Weight (kg/m²) ≥4.5 UEAtc
10 Roll dimension (m) 1 x 10 UEAtc
11 Roll weight (kg) 45 UEAtc
12 Minimum pre-manufactured overlap 100 UEAtc
width (mm)
13 Water tightness 250 lb (1117 N) ASTM E154
> 60 KPa UEAtc
14 Granule finishing (mm) 1-2 UEAtc

INSPECTION
The Contractor must satisfy himself that satisfactory conditions exist for carrying out the waterproofing
work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the installer.
INSTALLATION
Preparation
 Ground water level needs to be kept under raft concrete level by the contractor.
 The raft/lean concrete surface has to be free of standing water, debris and mud.
 All rough construction-joints or other rough particles need to be made smooth.
 All honeycomb-areas of the concrete wall must be repaired according to specification.
 Tie-rod holes need to be filled according to specification.
 All formwork and nails need to be removed.
Details
 The details of the waterproofing comprises of material specifications, installation procedures.
 Waterproofing of details is in conformity with the instructions and detail drawings issued
Application
 The works need to be done according to the rules of good craftsmanship.
 The vertical areas of beam, pile-cap and wall, receive the primer.
 The primer must be dry before waterproofing application can start.
 The membrane is either loose laid on the raft/lean concrete. Only the prefabricated overlaps are
torched or fully torched and bonded
 The membrane is torched fully bonded to all vertical areas of beams and pile-caps.
 Side-overlaps have a width of 100mm.
 The overlap of the head joint is 150mm. Head-overlaps cannot be next to each other.
 If required, a protection screed neds be applied on top of the membrane.
Waterproofing of grade slab, foundations and plinth beams

 The foundations are prepared to receive waterproofing by levelling the edge. A 150mm area on the
lean concrete around the member is coated with a solvent based bituminous primer at 300 g/m².
 A first layer is torched around the member and on top of the PCC. The width of this reinforcement
slab of membrane is 150mm.
 On top of the PCC the elastomer modified bituminous membrane with granular topping shall be
placed loose-laid and the pre-fabricated overlaps heat welded.
 The top of the membrane is finished at the factory by granules that create a perfect bonding when
the concrete is poured on top of the membrane.
 Side lapping of 100 mm and head lapping of 150 mm.
 At the sides of the bottom slab, the membrane will continue for 250 mm. This extra membrane is
necessary to connect the waterproofing of the ground slab, with the waterproofing at the wall.

Waterproofing at the sides (walls)
 The wall receives a solvent based primer of 300 g/m².
 A corner-strip of 3mm polyester reinforced membrane with sand finishing is torched into the
corner. 150 mm on top of the membrane of the ground slab and 150 mm against the wall. This strip
has a width of 300mm.
 The elastomer modified bituminous membrane with granular topping shall be torched fully bonded
to the wall.
 At high walls the membrane shall be mechanically fixed at the overlaps.
1.15.4 ROOF WATERPROOFING

MATERIALS
Waterproofing Membrane:
A flexible waterproof membrane. The upper coating consists of a mixture of penetration bitumen,
improved with Amorphous Poly Alpha Olefins (APAO superior than APP). The under coating consists of a
mixture of penetration bitumen, improved with Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS). The membrane is
reinforced with a layer of non-woven polyester of minimum 175 g/m², reinforced with a glass-fiber grill
of 8 g/m². The upper surface is finished with colored slates, pressed mechanically into the bitumen. The
under surface is finished with a polyethylene foil.
Primer:
The primer will be used at all vertical areas and details.
The technical properties of the membrane shall have or exceed the following characteristics:
Test Test Method Average values

Reinforcement UEATC A, BDA PO1 175 g / m² non-woven polyester
8 g / m² glass-fibre grill
Tensile strength longitudinal ASTM D412 ≥ 1000 N
Tensile strength transversal ASTM D412 ≥ 880 N
Ultimate elongation (Long.) ASTM D412 > 50 %
Ultimate elongation (Trans.) ASTM D412 > 50 %
Cold flexibility ASTM D146 APAO - 15°C
SBS - 20°C
Softening point (R&B) ASTM D36-84, APAO > 150°C
NBN T52-031 SBS > 120°C
Puncture resistance SP 2190 Ø 10 mm
Max. load penetration SP 2190 250 N
Water vapor permeability BS 3177 0,118 g / m²
Total thickness UEATC A, BDA PO1 4.3 mm

UV-resistance ASTM D4355-92 100 %
Roll size UEATC A 10 m x 1m
Roll weight UEATC A ± 48 kg
Warranty
 The roof waterproofing is covered by an international, insurance backed warranty, issued to the
owner.
 The warranty certificate has to mention the insurance policy number and project data.
 The warranty covers product defaults and includes the following elements:
o Removal of the default waterproofing.
o Hiring of necessary labour to perform the reparation
o Hiring of necessary equipment to perform the works (e.g.: scaffolding)
o New product installation
 The approved applicator issues an installation warranty.
 Warranty period is Ten (10) years.
INSTALLATION
Preparation
 The roof needs a minimum slope of 1%. The slope is achieved prior to the waterproofing works. In
case of a screed to fall, the minimum thickness of the screed must be 25mm.
 Verify that the roof surface is clean, dry, smooth and free of oil and grease.
 Treat honeycomb areas prior to the start of the waterproofing works.
 All complementary items like roof drains, pipes, ducts and vents are solidly set.
Primer
 Apply primer at a rate of 300 g/m².
 Allow the primer to dry for at least 4 hours.
 Add an additional layer of primer if first layer got stained.
Drains & other details

 All details are in conformity with the instructions
 The execution of the waterproofing comprises drains, vertical walls, concrete curbs, roof
penetrations, leaf catchers and roof edges.
Application
 Inclusion of humidity must at all times be avoided.
 The roof receives the primer and is allowed to dry.
 The membrane is torched fully bonded to the concrete roof slab.
 Overlaps will follow the slope of the roof to prevent water stagnation.
 Side-overlaps have a width of min 70mm.
 Head-overlaps cannot be next to each other. The overlap of the head joint is 100mm.

1.15.5 ROOF GARDEN WATERPROOFING (If applicable)
A. System description
 Waterproofing system for areas with vegetation like roof garden or planter boxes.
 One layer anti-root membrane system, pre-manufactured preferably from an ISO 9001:2000
controlled factory.
 Drainage layer with geo-textile covering topped with soil OR Duo Drain, Tailor made subsoil
drainage technology.
B. Quality Assurance
 A quality assurance engineer of the manufacturer inspects the works on-site.
 A QA/QC flow-chart has to be submitted before the works start. Quality assurance
documents include:
o Concrete condition form
o Installation inspection form
o Job Safety Analysis
 The details are performed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction.
C. Warranty
 The products and installation needs to be covered by an international, insurance backed
warranty, issued by the manufacturer to the owner.
 The warranty certificate has to mention the insurance policy number and project data.
 The warranty covers product defaults and includes the following elements:
o Removal of the default waterproofing.
o Hiring of necessary labor to perform the reparation
o Hiring of necessary equipment to perform the works
o product installation
 The approved applicator issues an installation warranty.
 Warranty period is minimum TEN (10) years.
D. Installation Company
 Before starting the installation the CONTRACTOR needs to deliver a certificate, recognizing
the installation company as an approved applicator.
 Before awarding the works, the installation company must present all necessary certificates
that allow the company to perform waterproofing works.
E. Materials
 All materials have to be delivered with a certificate of origin of the manufacturer. This
certificate indicates the quantity and type of products.
 All waterproofing materials should originate from one and the same manufacturer.
 The compatibility of primer, waterproofing and drainage layer is to be guaranteed.

Test Test Method Testing values
Reinforcement UEATC A, BDA PO1 175 g/m² non-woven polyester
8 g / m² glass-fiber grill
Root resistance DIN 4062 Root-resistant
Tensile strength ASTM D412 ≥ 1000 N
longitudinal
Tensile strength ASTM D412 ≥ 880 N
transversal
Ultimate elongation ASTM D412 > 50 %
(Long.)
Ultimate elongation ASTM D412 > 50 %
(Trans.)
Cold flexibility ASTM D146 APAO - 15°C
SBS - 20°C
Softening point (R&B) ASTM D36-84, APAO > 150°C
NBN T52-031 SBS > 120°C
Puncture resistance SP 2190 Ø 10 mm
Max. load penetration SP 2190 250 N
Water vapour BS 3177 0,118 g / m²
permeability
Total thickness UEATC A, BDA PO1 4.3 mm
UV-resistance ASTM D4355-92 100 %
Roll size UEATC A 1 m x 10 m
Roll weight UEATC A ± 48 kg
Primer
Anti-Root Waterproofing membrane

A flexible anti-root waterproofing membrane with the upper coating consisting of a mixture of
penetration bitumen, improved with Amorphous Poly Alpha Olefins (APAO) superior than APP. The
under coating consists of a mixture of penetration bitumen, improved with Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene
(SBS). The bitumen-coating is mixed with root-resistant products. The membrane has to comply with
root-resistance test. The membrane is reinforced with a layer of non-woven polyester of minimum 175
g/m², reinforced with a glass-fiber grill of 8 g/m². The upper surface is finished with colored slates /
granules, pressed mechanically into the bitumen. The under surface is finished with a polyethylene foil.
The membrane is treated with an anti-root additive.

Technical data waterproofing membrane:
Drainage layer + geo-textile filter
 A mixture of pebble stones/ granules of different diameters.
 Minimum thickness 2”.
 Polyester fleece of minimum 150g/m².
Or
Tailor made subsoil drainage technology
Product shall exhibit following characteristics:
 Fast installation
 Lightweight
 High water flow capacity
 High compressive strength
 Simple joints
 Flexible
 No on-site fabrication
 No aggregates required
F TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications Test Methods Units Drain

Core Properties
Core Structure - - Single cuspated
Core Material - - profile
Std. Compressive Strength Nominal kN/m² HDPE
Width Nominal mm 200
Std. Thickness Nominal mm 1000
Free Surface Area % 10
Flow Rate / m-width >90
@Gradient, 200 kPa Pressure ASTM D 4716 Lit. /min
60
Geotextile Filter Properties
Structure - - Non-woven
Material - - spunbonded
Grab Tensile Strength ASTM D 4632 N PP/PET
Tear Strength ASTM D 4533 N 400
Permeability ASTM D 4491 m/s 150
Packing Details
Roll Length Nominal m 25
Roll Diameter Nominal m 0.850
G. Storage, handling & safety

 Materials delivered to site must be stored in a covered area.
 All membranes must be stored vertically with the overlap side at the bottom.
 Membranes shall not be dropped and secured while lifting.
 A fire-extinguisher must be available on-site during application.
 Make sure that the worker’s safety is ensured.
H. Application
Preparation
 The planter area needs a minimum slope of 1%. The slope is achieved prior to the
waterproofing works. In case of a screed to fall, the minimum thickness of the screed must
be 25mm.
 Verify that the concrete surface is clean, dry, smooth and free of oil and grease.
 Treat honeycomb areas prior to the start of the waterproofing works.
 All complementary items like floor drains and scupper drains are solidly set.
Drains & other details

 The execution of the waterproofing comprises drains, vertical walls, leaf catchers and edges.
Primer
 Apply primer at a rate of 300 g/m².
 Allow the primer to dry for at least 4 hours.
 Add an additional layer of primer if first layer got stained.
Waterproofing
 Inclusion of humidity must at all times be avoided.
 The concrete receives the primer and is allowed to dry.
 The membrane is torched fully bonded to the concrete roof slab.
 Side-overlaps shall be min 70mm. Head overlaps are 100mm
 Head joints cannot be next to each other.
I. Completion
 The contractor shall deliver a clean site and wastage will be dumped at an authorized
location.
 At the delivery of the works, the owner will receive an original and signed 10 year,
insurance-backed warranty for waterproofing and root resistance.
Optional Method
RCC surface to be cleaned, brushed and watered. Water stagnation test shall be done for terrace slabs.
RCC surface shall be Coated with compatible Multiplas primer / Cold sticker / Multiplas blown bitumen
of grade 85/25 or 90/15. Waterproofing treatment with polymeric standard waterproofing membrane
of 4kg/Sqm or 4mm thick (Multiplas standard) shall be provided as per the manufacturer's specification
approved by Clients with an overlap of 10cms.Then membrane shall be bound by torch application with

10cms overlap where required. Topping shall be done with laying of 10mm thick thermo Cole sheet
with necessary adhesive / hot blown bitumen. Over thermo Cole sheet brick coba /Grano concrete /
Lightweight concrete shall be laid to slope and curing shall be done.
1.15.6 Expansion Joints, Water Stops, Pre-molded Joint Fillers, Flashings
1.15.6.1 Expansion Joints

Expansion joints shall be provided with filler boards and backer rods. Silicon sealant of approved
make shall be provided at floor tops and gap filler at soffit of slab. The joint width shall be uniform
throughout and special care shall be taken to ensure proper bonding at expansion joints and the
same shall be carried under approvals from Management Contractor / Professional Team. Expansion
joint covers also can be provided as per the recommendation of Consultants
The filler board specs shall be as follows:
A SEMI RIGID UV RESISTANT CLOSED CELLED POLYETHYLENE LAMINATED FOAM IN SHEET FORM
IDEAL FOR FILLING EXPANSION JOINT.
S.No. Parameters Unit Tri Board Test
1. Water Absorption % 0.012 ASTM – D 3575
2. Density Kg/Cumt. 100 Min Do
3. Thermal conductive Kca/mh°c. 0.038 Do

4. Recovery at 50% % 98 max Do
compression
5. Tensile Strength Kg/ Sq Cm 1.8 Min Do
6. Fire Effect 60 Min Do
7. Weathering Thermoplastic
Resistance material
8. Weathering test No Effect
9. Chemical resistance No Effect As – 1530- 460.2-
1982.
Option - 2
Expansion joints shall be provided with 20 gauge copper strips/m.s. hot dip galvanized strips of 250
mm width at locations shown on drawings or as approved by Consultants / Project Manager/Client.
The strips shall be bent to the shape indicated on the drawing and embedded properly in masonry.
The joint width shall be uniform throughout and special care shall be taken to ensure proper bonding
at expansion joints. Expansion joints shall be continuous and where two or more strips meet, they
shall be lapped to the extent of 75 mm and joints properly soldered. The expansion joints shall be
filled with pre moulded joint fillers and sealed with mastic compound. For purposes of measurement,
the laps provided will be neglected. Wherever an expansion joint between the existing part and new
part is proposed the rate quoted shall be inclusive of making necessary connections with existing
part.

1.15.6.2 Water Stops
Water stops shall be of 20 Gauge GI Sheet (230mm wide) of approved make. These shall be provided
at locations indicated on drawings. Water stops shall be lapped 100 mm and heat sealed to obtain
continuity. Water stops shall be cleaned thoroughly of all concrete and mortar coating as directed
before resuming concrete work. Water stops shall be in long lengths to avoid joints as far as possible.
1.15.6.3 Joint Filler

Premoulded joint fillers shall be of a non-deteriorating and resilient type. A sample of material shall
be approved by the Consultants / Project Manager/Client before being brought to site. Installation
shall be carried out properly and as directed.
1.15.6.4 Flashings
Metal or tar felt flashing shall be fixed as directed by the Consultants / Project Manager/Client. Metal
flashing where provided shall be welded/ soldered to obtain continuity. Tar felt flashing shall be
lapped for a minimum length of 150 mm. Flashing shall be measured and paid for in linear meters for
the specified width disregarding laps or joints.
1.15.7 Specification For Laminated Neoprene Pad

The scope of this specification shall apply to laminated free elastomeric bearings.
1.15.7.1 Material
Chloroprene shall only be used in the manufacture of bearing.
Grades of raw elastomer of proven use in elastomeric bearings, with low crystallization rates and
adequate shelf life (e.g. Neoprene, WRT, Bayprene 110 or equivalent) shall be used. No reclaimed
rubber or vulcanized wastes shall be used.
The raw elastomer content of the compound shall not be lower than 60%. The ash content shall not
exceed 5% (as per test conducted in accordance with ASTM D-297)
Properties of Elastomer
The elastomer shall conform to all properties specified in the following table.
Sl Property Unit Test method I.S Value of the
No specification reference characteristic
specified.
1.0 Physical properties
1.1 Hardness IRHD IS : 3400 (Part II) 60 ± 5
1.2 Minimum tensile strength

Mpa IS : 3400 (Part I) 17
1.3 Minimum elongation at break

% IS : 3400 (Part I) 400

2.0 Maximum compression set
% IS : 3400 (Part X)
Duration Temperature
(h) (C)
C.R. (+0 to 100 ± 1 35
24-2)
3.0 Maximum compression set IS : 3400 (Part IV)
%
C.R. (70) 100 ± 1
3.1 Maximum change in hardness
IRHD + 15
3.2 Maximum change in tensile strength

% - 15
3.3 Maximum change in elongation

% - 40
Shear modules of the elastomer bearing shall not be less than 0.8Mpa nor greater than 1.20Mpa.
The adhesive strength of elastomer to steel plates (determined as per IS 3400: Part XIV method A)
shall not be less than 7 kN/m
1.15.7.2 Design Parameters of Elastomer Bearings.

The thickness of all internal layers of elastomer "hi" shall be as specified in the Bill of Quantities.
Thickness of outer layers shall be he = hi/2 subject to a maximum of 6mm and side cover shall be
6mm for all bearings.
Elastomer bearing shall satisfy the criteria enumerated in Clause No. 916.3.3, 916.3.5 & 916.3.6 of IRC
83 (Part II) – 1987
1.15.7.3 Fabrication
o Bearing with steel laminates shall be cast as a single unit in a mould and vulcanized under heat
and pressure. Casting of elements in separate units and subsequent bonding is not permitted
nor shall cutting from large size cast be permitted.
o Bearings of similar size shall be produced by identical process and in one lot as for as practicable.
o The moulds used shall have standard surface finish adequate to produce bearings free from any
surface blemishes.
o Steel plates for laminates shall be sand blasted, clean of all mill scales and shall be free from all
contaminates prior to bonding by vulcanization. Rusted plates with pitting shall not be used. All
edges of plates shall be rounded.
o Spacers used in mould to ensure cover and location of laminates shall be of minimum size and
number practicable. Any hole at surface or in edge cover shall be filled in subsequently.
o Care shall be taken to ensure uniform vulcanizing conditions and homogeneity of elostomer
through the surface and body of the bearing.

The bearings shall be fabricated with the tolerance specified in the following table.
Sl No Items Tolerances
1. Overall plan dimensions -0, +6mm
2. Total bearing thickness -0, +5%
3. Parallelism
a. Of top surface of bearing with respect to the 1 in 200
bottom surface as datum.
b. Of one side surface with respect o the other as 1 in 100
datum
4. a. Thickness of individual internal layer of ± 20% (max of 2 mm)
elastomer
b. Thickness of individual outer layer - 0, + 1mm
5. a. Plan dimensions of laminates -3mm, +0
b. Thickness of laminate ± 10%
c. Parallelism of laminate with respect to bearing 1 to 100
base as datum
The vulcanizing equipment press should be such that between the platens of the press the pressure
and temperature are uniform and capable of being maintained at constant values as required for
effecting an uniform vulcanization of the bearing.
The moulding dies utilized for manufacturing the bearings should be so set inside the platen of the
press so that the pressure development during vulcanization of the product is evenly distributed and
the thickness maintained at all places is within acceptable tolerance limits taking into consideration,
the shrinkage allowance of vulcanization.
The raw compound which has been introduced inside the metal dies for vulcanization should be
accurately weighed each time and it must be ensured that sufficient quantity has been put inside the
die for proper flow of material at every place so that a homogeneous and compact bearing is
produced without any sign of sponginess or deficiency of material at any place.
Before any vulcanization of any batch of production is used for producing vulcanized bearings, test
pieces in the form of standard slab and buttons should be prepared in accordance with prescribed
standards and salient properties tested and recorded regularly against each batch of production to
monitor the quality of the products.
1.15.8 Quality Control Certificate

1.15.8.1 The manufacturer shall certify for each lot of bearing under acceptance:
a. That an adequate system of continuous quality control was operated in his plant.
b. That the entire process remained in control during the production of the lot of bearings under
acceptance as verified from the quality control records / charts which shall be open to inspection
of the Consultants / Project Manager/Client on demand.

5.21.8.2 A certified copy of the results of process control testing done an samples of elastomer used in the
production of the lot shall be appended and shall include at least the following information.
5.21.8.3 Composition of the compound- raw elastomer and ash content, the grade of raw clastomer used
(include name, source, age on shelf), test results of hardness, tensile strength, elongation at break
compression set, accelerated ageing etc.,
6. FLYASH BRICK MASONRY

These bricks shall be machine molded and prepare in plant by appropriate proportion of flyash and lime. The flyash
bricks shall confirm to IS 12894 .the shall be sound, compact and uniform shape ,free from visible cracks ,warpage
and organic matters .The brick shall be solid with or without frog and of 100/80 mm in length ,40mm in width and
10to 20mm deep one of its flat side as per IS 12894 . The brick shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp
corners and shall be uniforms in shape and colour .Flyash shall confirm to IS 3812 and lime shall conform to class
‘c’ hydrated lime of IS 712.
Classification
Bricks shall be classified on the basis of their minimum compressive strength as given below:
Class designation Average compressive strength
Not less than Less than
N/mm2 (Kgf/cm2) N/mm2 (Kgf/cm2)
7.5(75) 7.5 (75) 10 100
The brick shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp corner and shall be uniform in colour and emit clear
ringing sound when stuck.
Water Absorption:
The average water absorption of bricks when tested in accordance with the procedure laid down shall not be more
than 20% by weight.
Soaking of Bricks:
Bricks shall be soaked in water before use for a period for the water to just penetrate the whole depth of the
bricks. Alternatively bricks may be adequately soaked in stacks by profusely spraying with clean water at regular
intervals for a period not less than six hours. When the brick are soaked they shall be removed from the tank
sufficiently early so that at the time of laying they are skin-dry. Such soaked bricks shall be stacked on a clean place
where they are not again spolled by dirt earth etc.
Laying:
Bricks shall be laid in English bond unless otherwise specified for brickwork in half brick wall, brick shall be laid in
stretcher bond. Half or cut bricks shall not be used except as closer where necessary to complete the bond .Closer
in such cases shall be cut to required size and used near the ends of the wall .Header bond shall be used
preferably in all courses in all courses
Bricks shall be laid with frog (where provided) up. However, when top course is exposed, bricks shall be laid with
frog down. For the bricks to be laid with frog down, the frog shall be filled with mortar before placing the brick in
position.

In case of walls one brick thick and under, one face shall be kept even and in proper plane, while the other face
may be slightly rough. In case of walls more than one brick thick, both the faces shall be kept even and in proper
plane.
Care shall be taken during construction that edges of jambs, sills and projections are not damaged in case of rain.
New built work shall be covered with gunny bags or tarpoulin so as to prevent the mortar from being washed
away. Damage, if any, shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Authority’s Engineer.
Finishing of Joints:
The face of brick work may be finished flush or by pointing. In flush finishing either the face joints of the mortar
shall be worked out while still green to give a finished surface flush with the face of the brick work or the joints
shall be squarely raked out to a depth of 1 cm while the mortar is still green for subsequently plastering. The faces
of brick work shall be cleaned with wire brush so as to remove any splashes of mortar during the course of raising
the brick work. In pointing, the joints shall be squarely raked out to a depth of 1.5 cm while the mortar is still green
and raked joints shall be brushed to remove dust and loose particles and well wetted, and shall be later refilled
with mortar to give ruled finish. Some such finishes are ‘flush’, ‘weathered’, ruled, etc.
Curing
The brick work shall be constantly kept moist on all faces for a minimum period of seven days. Brick work done
during the day shall be suitably marked indicating the date on which the work is done so as to keep a watch on the
curing period.
Scaffolding
Scaffolding shall be strong to withstand all dead, live and impact loads which are likely to come on them.
Scaffolding shall be provided to allow easy approach to every part of the work.
Single Scaffolding:
Where plastering, pointing or any other finishing has been indicated for brick work, single scaffolding may be
provided, unless otherwise specified. In single scaffolding, one end of the put-logs/pole shall rest in the hole
provided in the header course of brick masonry. Not more than one header for each put-log/pole shall be left out.
Such holes shall not be allowed in the case of pillars, brick work less than one metre in length between the
openings or near the skew backs of arches or immediately under or near the structural member supported by the
walls. The holes for putlogs/poles shall be made good with brick work and wall finishing as specified.
Double Scaffolding:
Where the brick work or tile work is to be exposed and not to be finished with plastering etc. double scaffolding
having two independent supports, clear of the work, shall be provided.
Measurements
Brick work shall be measured in cubic metres unless otherwise specified. Any extra work over the specified
dimensions shall be ignored. Brick work shall be measured separately in the following stages:
(a) From foundation to Plinth level
(b) Plinth (floor one) level to floor two level
Note : (i) Brick work in parapet walls, mumty, lift machine room and water tanks constructed on the roof upto 1.2
m height above roof shall be measured together with the corresponding work of the floor next below.

Rate
The rate shall include the cost of materials and labour required for all the operations
7. EXTERNAL SUBGRADE WORK
7.1. SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirements for the materials and construction of soling, water bound
macadam course and bituminous surface treatment of roads.
7.2. APPLICABLE CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS

The following specifications, standards and codes are made a part of this specification. All standards, tentative
specifications, codes of practices referred to herein shall be the latest edition including all applicable official
amendments and revision. In case where the requirements of this specification conflict with the requirements
of those referred to herein, this specification shall govern.
IS:73 : Specification for paving bitumen
IS:215 : Specification for Road Tar
IS:217 : Specification for Cutback bitumen
IS:454 : Specification for Dig boi type Cutback Bitumen
IS:460 : Specification for Test Sieves
(part 1 to 3)
IS:1077 : Common burnt clay building bricks specification
IS:1124 : Method of test for determination of water absorption apparent specific gravity and
porosity of natural building stones.
IS:1195 : Specification for Bitumen mastic for flooring,.
IS:1196 : Code of practice for laying bitumen mastic flooring.
IS : 1834 : Specification for Hot Applied Sealing Compounds for Joint in concrete.
IS : 2380 : Method of test for aggregates for concrete
IS : 2720 : Methods of Test for Soils : Part 5(Part 5)
Determination of Liquid and plastic limit.
IS : 6241 : Method of test for determination of stripping value of road aggregates/
IRC : 16 : Specification for priming of base course with bituminous primers.
IRC : 17 : Tentative specification for single coat bituminous surface dressing.
IRC : 19 : Standard specifications and code of practice for water bound macadam.
IRC : 29 : Specifications for bituminous concrete (Asphaltic concrete) for road pavement.
Ministry of
Surface trans-
Port ( road Wing) : Specification for road and bridge works.
7.3. Construction sequence

It is the intent of this specification that the water bound mecadam road be constructed first. This shall than be
opened to traffic as directed by Project Manager. After such period of time as decided by Project Manager,
preferably when the major construction and / or erection activities within plant limits are over, Contractor shall
rectify all defects, wear and tear, etc. and surface the road with bituminous treatment as specified hereunder

MATERIALS
General
All materials shall be obtained from local sources and shall be subject to Consultants / Project Manager’s approval
prior to use.
Soling Stone
It shall be clean, sound, dense, hard, tough, durable stone of uniform quality free from unsound material cracks,
decay and weathering. Water absorption shall not be more than 5 percent. The stone shall be in the smallest
dimension equal to thickness of the soling course specified with a tolerance of 25 mm. Soling stone shall be
sufficiently flat bedded. The height of the soling stone shall be equal to the specified thickness of soling. The
length and breadth shall not exceed twice the specified thickness. Contractor to note that available laterite stone
of specified strength at site shall be used as sling material in co-ordination with Project Manager
Stone Aggregate/Metal
Coarse aggregate, stone chippings shall consist of natural or crushed stone, clean, hard tough, durable and free
from excess of flat, elongated, soft and disintegrated particles, dirt, salt, alkali, vegetable matter, adherent
coatings, organic and other objectionable matter, and shall conform to the physical requirements given in Tables 1
or 2 hereunder, as applicable. Aggregate for bituminous wearing courses shall in addition have good hydrophobic
properties i.e. capacity of retaining the film of bituminous material applied to the stone in all weather conditions
and especially in wet conditions. Basalt, dolerites are good in this respect; granite, quartzite are comparatively
poor.
TABLE – 1
PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF COARSE AGGREGATE FOR WATER BOUND MACADAM (SUB BASE / BASE COURSE)
Sl.No. Test Requirements Test Method

1 Los Angles Abrasion Value* 50 % (max.) IS:2386 (Part – IV)
or
Aggregate Impact Value* 40 % (max.) IS : 2386 (Part IV)

Or
IS:5640***
2 Flakiness Index ** 15% (max.) IS:2386 (Part I)
(*) Aggregate may satisfy requirements of either of two tests.

(**) Requirements of flakiness index shall be enforced only in case of crushed broken stone.
(***) Aggregates like brick metal, kankar, laterite etc., which get softened in presence of
water shall be tested for impact value under wet conditions in accordance with IS:5640.
TABLE – 2
PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF AGGREGATES FOR BITUMINOUS WEARING COURSE
Sl.No. Test Requirements Test Method

1 Los Angles Abrasion Value* or 40 % (max.) IS:2386 (Part – IV)
Aggregate Impact Value* 30 % (max.) IS : 2386 (Part IV)
2 Flakiness Index ** 35% (max.) IS:2386 (Part I)

3 Stripping Value 25% (max.) IS:6241
4 Water absorption 2% IS:2386 (Part III)
5 Soundness
Loss with Sodium Sulphate – 5 cycles 12 % (max.) IS:2386 (Part V)
Loss with Magnesium Sulphate – 5 Cycles
(*) Aggregates may satisfy requirements of either of two tests.
(**) Requirement of flakiness index shall be enforced only in case of crushed broken stone.
The coarse aggregate for water bound Macadam shall conform to one of the gradings given in
Table-3 below:
TABLE – 3
GRADING REQUIREMENTS OF COARSE AGGREGATES FOR WATER BOUND MACADAM
Grading Size Range Sieve Designation Percent by Weight
no. Passing the sieve
1 90 mm to 45 mm 125 mm 100
90 mm 90 – 100
63 mm 25 – 60
40 mm 0 – 15
22.4 mm 0–5
2 63 mm to 45 mm 40 mm 100
63 mm 90 – 100
53 mm 25 – 60
45 mm 0 – 15
22.4 mm 0–5
3 53 mm to 22.4 mm 63 mm 100
53 mm 95 – 100
45 mm 65 – 90
22.4 mm 0 – 10
11.2 mm 0–5
SCREENING FOR WATER BOUND MACADAM

Screenings to fill voids in the coarse aggregate shall consist of the same materials as the coarse aggregate.
However, where permitted, predominantly non plastic material such as moorum or gravel (other than river borne
material) may be used for this purpose provided liquid limit and plasticity index of such material is below 20 and 6
respectively and fraction passing 75 micron sieve does not exceed 10 percent.
Screenings shall conform to the gradings set forth in table-4. Screenings of Type-A in Table 4 shall be used with
coarse aggregate of grading 1 in Table-3. Screenings of Type A or B, as directed, shall be used with coarse
aggregates of grading 2. Type B screenings shall be used with coarse aggregates of grading 3.

TABLE – 4
GRADINGS FOR SCREENINGS
Grading Size screenings Sieve Designation % by weight passing the sieve
classification
A 12.5 mm 12.5 mm 100
10.0 mm 90 – 100
4.75 mm 10 – 30
150 micron 0–8
B 10 mm 10 mm 100
4.75 mm 85 – 100
150 micron 10 – 30
The use of screening shall be omitted in the case of soft aggregates such as brick metal, kankar, laterites
etc. as they are likely to get crushed to a certain extent under rollers.
Binding Material
Binding material shall comprise of a suitable material, approved by Project Manager, having plasticity
index value of less than 6 as determined in accordance with IS:2720 (part V)
Application of binding material may not be necessary when the screenings used are of crushable type
such as moorum or gravel.
9.1 Moorum / kankar / Gravel / Sand

9.10.1 Moorum shall contain low plasticity binder material mixed with hard granular particles such as
sand and or gravel. Moorum shall be sound and hard of a quality not affected by weather, to be
screened at the quarry and free from all impurities. Large lumps shall all be broken at the quarry
and moorum delivered at site must pass in every direction through a 63mm ring. Moorum shall
not contain more than 5% to 8% of fines passing a 75 micron sieve.
9.10.2 Gravel shall be composed of large, coarse, silicious grains, sharp and gritty to the tough,
thoroughly free from dirt, organic and deleterious matter. It shall be hard, tough, dense and
shall not contain particles bigger than 12mm and more than 10% silt.
9.10.3 Sand used for blinding the bituminous road surgace shall be coarse, sharp, gritty, clean, granular
material. Only material passing through 4.75 mm sieve and retained on 75 micron sieve shall be
used.
9.2 Bituminous Materials

Bituminous materials shall conform to IS:73, IS:215, IS:217 or IS:454 as applicable and be of the grade
specified in this specification.
EARTHWORK
9.12.1 Earthwork in Excavation
9.12.2.1 In general the excavation shall be in accordance to specifications mentioned herein “Excavation”

9.12.2.2 Profiles of road excavation shall be laid at 50m intervals to conform to the required alignment, sections,
grades and side slopes and the lines of cuts shall be clearly marked.
9.12.2.3 Contractor shall on no account excavate beyond the slopes or below the specified grade unless so
directed by the Consultants / Project Manager in writing. If excavation is done below the specified level
or outside the section it shall not be paid for and the Contractor shall be required to fill up at his own
cost such extra excavation with approved materials, in layers of 150 to 200mm, watered and
compacted as specified for the sub-grade.
9.12.2.4 The excavation shall be finished neatly, smoothly and evenly to the correct lines, grades, sections and
side slopes as shown in the drawings or directed by Project Manager.
9.12.2.5 Earth work in Embankment
9.12.2.5.1 The embankment shall be formed of earth obtained from approved source.
9.12.2.5.2 The ground over which embankment is to be formed shall be cleared of all brushwood, loose stones,
vegetation, bushes, stumps, and all other objectionable mater and materials so removed shall be
burnt off or disposed off as directed by Project Manager. The cost of this clearing, burning and
disposal shall be included in the unit rates quoted for embankment construction.
9.12.2.5.3 Profiles of embankment shall be set up with stout poles to mark the centre and edges of the
formation with the top levels of formation clearly marked by paint or cut and the slopes with strings
and pegs at every 10 meters on straight portions. Toe line may be marked with pick marks.
9.12.2.5.4 Before placing any embankment materials the top 150mm of soil strata receiving it shall be scarified
and watered and compacted with one pass of 12 T roller.
9.12.2.5.5 Embankment material shall be placed in successive horizontal layers of 200mm depth extending to
the full width of the embankment including the slopes at the level of the particular layer and 300mm
more on both sides to allow compaction of the full specified section. Before placing the next layer
the surface of the under layer shall be moistured and scarified with pick axes or spades to provide a
satisfactory bond with the next layer. The extra loose stuff at the edges shall be trimmed later after
completion of the bank work at no extra cost leaving the correct section fully compacted.
9.12.2.5.6 When boulders, broken stones and similar hard materials are mixed up with the embankment
materials care shall be taken to see that they are distributed uniformly into the bank and that no
hollows are left near them. No stone or hard material shall project above the top of any layer. Each
layer of embankment shall be watered, leveled and compacted as specified before the succeeding
layer is placed. The surface of the embankment shall at all times during construction be maintained
at such a cross fall as will shed water and prevent ponding.
9.12.2.5.7 If the embankment materials contains less than the optimum moisture, water shall be added to the
loose layers of the embankment to bring the moisture uniformly up to requirement. If the material
contains more than the required moisture if shall be allowed to dry until the moisture is reduced to
the required extent.
9.12.2.5.8 The moistured /dried loose layers shall be compacted with a power roller of 12 tonnes. The roller
shall pass at least twice over the same area, once in the forward move and the second time in
backward move.
9.12.2.5.9 To allow for subsequent settlement the finished level of the embankment shall be kept higher than
the specified level by one centimeter for every meter of the height of the bank.
9.12.2.5.10 Embankment shall be finished and dressed smooth and even to conform to the alignment, levels,
cross sections, and dimensions shown on drawings with due allowance for shrinkage. Any damage
caused by rain or any other reasons shall be made good in the finishing operation.

9.3 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE
9.13.1 Immediately prior to the laying of the soling the sub-grade shall be cleaned of all foreign substances,
vegetation etc. Any roots or soft yielding patches that appear shall be corrected and the sub-grade
dressed off parallel to the finished profile. The camber of sub-grade shall conform in shape to that of the
finished road surface. Camber boards shall be used to get the required section.
9.13.2 The prepared sub-grade shall be lightly sprinkled with water, if necessary, and rolled with power roller of
not less than 12 tonnes, till the soil is evenly consolidated to 95% of proctor density with 2% variation in
optimum 5 runs on the sub-grade. Roller shall pass minimum 5 runs on the sub-grade. Rolling shall
commence at the edges and progress towards the centre longitudinally. Each pass of the roller shall
uniformly overlap not less than one third of the track made in the preceding pass. Any undulations in the
surface that develop due to rolling shall be made good with approved earth and sub-grade re rolled.
9.4 SOLING
9.14.1 Soling shall not be constructed on a wet sub-grade with available approved Laterite stones at site /
Approved soling material brought from outside.
9.14.2 Unless otherwise specified, the width of the soling shall be 200mm more on either side than that of the
water bound macadam wearing course and the finished thickness of the soling course shall be 200mm.
9.14.3 The soling stones shall be laid with the largest face downwards and in contact with each other. The stones
shall break the joint as far as possible. The height of the soling stone shall be equal to specified thickness
of soling.
9.14.4 As the laying of rubble advances the soling shall be hand packed by wedging and packing with 80 mm
metal in the joints of the soling and driving them by hammer in place so as to fill the voids as completely
as possible. This operation of hand packing shall be laid and had packed true to grade and section and
these shall be often checked by boning rods, template boards and fish line etc. The grades, sections etc.
of the soling shall correspond to those of the surfacing coming on it. The soling thus laid shall be finished
by knocking out projecting stones and filing depressions by chips to come up to the grade and camber.
9.14.5 The quality of the 80mm metal shall be same as specified for the soling and the longest dimension shall
not be more than 100mm and the shortest dimension not less than 50mm.
9.14.6 The soling after it is properly laid and hand packed including filling of voids with 80mm metal shall be
rolled dry with 12T power roller to refusal i.e. till the stones in the soling course cease to move under the
roller and no more compaction can be achieved. Rolling shall start at the edges and work towards the
centre. The roller shall run over the same surface of rolling for at least 8 times still the soling course is
well consolidated. The surface shall be checked by templates and in case of unevenness high spots shall
be knocked our and depressions filled by spalls and re-compacted fully. Bunds shall be laid along the
edges and compacted before starting rolling on soling to prevent spreading of stones.
9.14.7 Gravel shall be spread in thin layers over the above prepared soling surface, swept into the interstices
with brooms, watered lightly to assist the filling of voids. Spreading of gravel, sweeping and watering
shall continue till the interstices are completely filled. At all times only enough water shall be sprinkled to
force the gravel into the voids and never so much as to soften the sub grade. The process of gravel filling
shall be accompanied by rolling as for dry rolling and soling with a power roller weighing not less than 12
tonnes starting at edge and working towards the centre. The roller shall run over the same surface for at
least eight times. Each pass of the roller shall uniformly overlap not less than one third of the track made

in the preceding pass. The surface shall be checked with templates of approved design (to be provided by
Contractor) and high and low spots corrected by removing soling and repacking.
9.14.8 Measurements shall be made for the finished work in square meters of the actual plan area covered with
the soling stone. The rate shall include the cost of all materials, labour, plant and equipment required in
all the operations described in 7.1 to 7.7 above including soling stone and gravel.
9.5 WATER BOUND MACADAM COURSE

9.15.4.1 The surface over which water bound macadam is to be laid shall be prepared to the specified grade
and camber and made free of dust and other extraneous material. Any ruts or soft yielding places
shall be corrected in an approved manner and rolled until firm. To prevent the spreading of the
course aggregate during rolling, if necessary, two parallel mud walls 200mm wide and of height
equal to un compacted Macadam course shall be made along the outer edges of the Macadam
course having a clear distance between them equal to the width to be metalled.
9.15.4.2 W.B.M. Sub-Base Course of specified thickness shall be provided in lieu of a soling course where
specified in the schedule of quantities. The course aggregate for this shall conform to
requirements of sub-base in Table-1 and its grading shall conform to Grading 1 of Table 3 and
screening to type B of Table-4. The total consolidated thickness of the sub-base course shall be as
specified in the schedule of quantities/drawings.
9.15.5 W.B.M. Base Course: The coarse aggregate for this shall normally conform to requirements for Base in
Table-1 and its grading shall confirm to Grading 3 of Table 3 and screening to type B of Table 4. The total
consolidated thickness of the base course shall be as specified.
9.15.6 Spreading Coarse Aggregate

9.15.6.1 The coarse aggregate shall be spread uniformly and evenly upon the prepared surface in such
quantities that the thickness of each compacted layer does not exceed 75mm or as otherwise
specified. In no case, however, shall the thickness of each compacted layer exceed 100mm.
9.15.6.2 The spreading shall be done from stockpiles by raking the stacks with rakes so as to leave behind
mud and dust. In no case shall the aggregate be dumped in heaps directly on the surface prepared
to receive the aggregate not shall hauling over un-compacted or partially compacted sub-
base/base be permitted. The surface of the aggregates spread shall be fully checked with
templates and all high or low spots remedied by removing or adding aggregate as may be required.
No segregation of large or fine aggregates shall be allowed and the coarse aggregate as spread shall
be of uniform gradation with no pockets of fine material. The surface shall be checked frequently
with a straight edge while spreading and rolling so as to ensure a finished surface as per approved
plan. The coarse aggregate shall not normally be spread in lengths exceeding 3 days average work
ahead of the rolling and bonding of the proceeding section.
9.15.7 Rolling
9.15.7.1 Following the spreading of the coarse aggregate, rolling shall be started with three wheeled power
rollers of not less than 12 tonne capacity or tandem or vibratory roller of approved type. Rolling
shall begin from the edges and gradually progress towards the centre. First the edges/edge shall
be compacted with roller running forward and backward and then move inwards parallel to the
centre line of the road, in successive passes uniformly lapping preceding tracks by at least one half

width. Rolling shall be discontinued when the aggregates are partially compacted with sufficient
void space in them to permit application of screenings. During rolling slight sprinkling of water may
be done, if necessary. Rolling shall not be done when the sub grade is soft or yielding or when it
causes a wave-like motion in the sub grade or sub-base. The rolled surface shall be checked
transversely and longitudinally with templates and all undulations shall be corrected by loosening
the surface, adding or removing necessary amounts of aggregate and re rolling until the entire
surface conforms to desired camber and grade. In no case shall the use of screening be permitted
to make up depressions. Material which crushed excessively during compaction or becomes
segregated shall be removed and replaced with suitable aggregates. It shall be ensured that
shoulders are also built-up simultaneously along with water bound macadam course.
9.15.8 Application of screenings.

9.15.8.1 After the coarse aggregate has been rolled in accordance, screenings to completely fill the
interestices shall be applied gradually over the surface. These shall not be damp or wet at the time
of application. Dry rolling shall be done while the screenings are being spread so that vibrations of
the roller cause them to settle into the voids of the coarse aggregate. The screenings shall not be
dumped in piles but be spread uniformly in successive thin layers. Screenings shall be applied at a
slow and uniform rate (in three or more applications) so as to ensure filling of all voids. This shall
be accompanied by dry rolling and brooming with mechanical brooms, hand brooms or both. In no
case shall screenings be applied as fast and thick as to form cakes and ridges on the surface in such
a manner as would prevent filling of voids or prevent the direct bearing of the roller on the coarse
aggregate. These operations shall continue until no more screenings can be forced into the voids
of the coarse aggregate. Spreading, rolling and brooming of screenings shall be carried out in only
such lengths of the road, which could be completed within one day’s operation.
9.15.9 Sprinkling and Grouting

9.15.9.1 After the screenings have been applied, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with water, swept
and rolled. Hand brooms shall be used to sweep the wet screenings into voids and to distribute
them evenly. The sprinkling, sweeping and rolling operations shall be continued, with additional
screenings applied as necessary, until the coarse aggregate has been thoroughly keyed, well
bonded and firmly set in its full depth and a grout has been formed of screenings. Care shall be
taken to see that the sub-grade or sub-base does not get damaged due to the addition of excessive
quantities of water during construction. In case the sub grade or sub-base gets damaged, the
Contractor shall, without additional compensation rectify the damaged portion.
9.15.10 Application of Binding Material

9.15.10.1 After the application of screenings in accordance, the binding material where it is required to be
used, shall be applied successively in two or more thin layers at a slow and uniform rate. After
each application, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with water, the resulting slurry swept in
with hand brooms or mechanical brooms to fill the voids properly and rolled, during which water
shall be applied to the wheels of the rollers, if necessary, to wash down the binding material
sticking to them. These operations shall continue until the resulting slurry after filling of voids,
forms a wave ahead of the wheels of the moving roller.

9.15.11 Setting and drying
9.15.11.1 After the final compaction of water bound macadam course it shall be allowed to dry overnight.
Next morning hungry spots shall be filled with screenings or binding material as directed, lightly
sprinkled with water if necessary and rolled. No traffic shall be allowed on the road until the
macadam has set.
9.15.12 Multiple layered course

9.15.12.1 When the total consolidated thickness of the water bound macadam course is more than 100mm,
it shall be constructed in layers. Each layer shall be constructed as per all the operations described
in the above clauses. The same degree of quality control and refinement shall be used for
constructing each layer.
9.15.13 Measurements and rates
9.15.13.1 The measurements shall be made for the finished work in sqm. Length and width shall be
measured correct to a cm. For the water bound macadam surface.
9.15.13.2 The rate shall include the cost of all materials, labour, plant and equipment involved in all the
operations described above including the coarse aggregates, screenings and binding material.
9.16 BITUMINOUS SURFACE

9.16.1 This work shall consist of constructing in a single course of 40mm thick premixed asphalatic carpet
to the following specifications on a previously prepared base, to serve as a wearing coat.
9.16.2 Materials
9.16.2.1 Binder
This shall be paving bitumen of suitable penetration grade within the range S-35 to S-90 or A 35 to
A 90 (30-40 ro 80/100) as per Indian Standard for Paving Bitumen IS:73. The actual grade of
bitumen to be used shall be decided by the Consultants / Project Manager appropriate to the
region, traffic, rainfall and other environmental conditions.
9.16.2.2 Course aggregate
It shall be crushed material retained on 2.36mm (No.8 ASTM) sieve and shall be crushed stone or
gravel (Shingle) and satisfy the physical requirements set forth in Table 2.
9.16.2.3 Fine aggregates
The fine aggregates shall be the fraction passing 2.8 mm sieve and retained on 90 micron sieve
consisting of crusher run screenings, natural sand or mixture of both. These shall be clean, hard,
durable, uncoated dry and free from any injurious, soft or flaky pieces and organic or deleterious
substances.
9.16.2.4 Filler
The filler shall be an inert material, the whole of which passing 710 micron, sieve, at least 90 %
passing 180 micron sieve and not less than 70 percent passing 90 micron sieve. The filler shall be
stone dust, cement, hydrated lime, fly ash or any other non-plastic mineral matter approved by the
Consultants / Project Manager.
9.16.3 Mineral Aggregate Gradation

The mineral aggregates including mineral filler shall be so graded or combined as to confirm to the
either of the limits set forth in Table 5 below:

TABLE 5
MINERAL AGGREGATE GRADATION FOR BITUMINOUS CONCRETE
PERCENT BY WEIGHT PASSING THE SIEVE
SIEVE SIZE GRADING -1 GRADING – 2
20 mm --- - 100
12.5 mm - 100 80-100
10 mm 80 – 100 70 – 90
4.75 mm (No. 4 ASTM) 55 – 75 50 – 70
2.36 mm (No. 8 ASTM) 35 – 50 35 – 50
600 micron (No. 30 ASTM) 18 – 29 18 – 29
300 micron ( No. 50 ASTM) 13 – 23 13 – 23
150 micron (No.100 ASTM) 8 – 16 8 – 16
75 micron (No.200 ASTM) 4 – 10 4 – 10
9.16.4 Mix Design

Apart from conformity with the grading and quality requirements of individual ingredients, the
asphaltic concrete mix shall meet the requirements set forth in table – 6 hereunder.
9.16.5 Weather and seasonal limitations
Asphalt concrete shall not be laid during rainy weather or when the base course is damp or wet.
TABLE – 6
REQUIREMENTS OF ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MIX
Sl.No. Description Requirements

1 Number of compaction blows, each and of Marshalling 50
specimen
2 Marshall stability (ASTM Designation-D-1559) 340 kg (min.)
determined on marshal specimen
3 Marshall flow (mm) 2–4
4 Percent voids in mix 3–5
5 Percent voids in mineral aggregate filled with bitumen 75 – 85
6 Binder content percent by weight of mix 5 – 7.5
The Contractor shall intimate to the Project Manager in writing, well in advance of the start of
work, the job-mix-formula proposed to be used by him for the work and shall give following details
to the Project Manager for his approval.
i. Source and location of all materials
ii. Proportions of all materials expressed as follows where each is applicable:
iii. A single definite percentage passing each sieve for the mixed aggregate.
iv. The results of the best enumerated in Table-6 as obtained by the Contractor.
v. Test results of physical characteristics of aggregates to be used.
Should a change in the source of material be proposed, a new job mix formula shall be established
and got approved from the Project Manager before actual using the materials.

9.16.6 Preparation of Base
9.16.6.1 The base on which premix carpet is to e laid shall be prepared, shaped and conditioned to the
specified lines, grade and cross section by repairing all pot holes or patches and ruts. The pot holes
shall be drained of water and cut to regular shape with vertical sides. All loose and disintegrated
material shall be removed. The pothole shall them be filled either with
i. Coarse aggregate and screenings conforming to clauses and compacted with heavy hadn
rammer or approved mechanical tempers or
ii. Premix chippings binders (bitumen grade 80/100) content of 3 percent by weight of total mix,
after painting the sides and bottom of the holes with a thin application of bitumen, or a
combination of both as directed by Project Manager. The surface shall be thoroughly swept
and scraped clean and free of dust and other foreign matter.
9.16.7 Tack Coat

9.16.7.1 The binder used for tack coat shall be bitumen of suitable penetration grade within 30/40 to
80/100 confirming to IS:73. The actual grade of bitumen to be used shall be decided by the Project
Manager, appropriate to the region, traffic, rainfall and other environmental conditions. Binder
shall be heated to the temperature appropriate to its grade and as approved by the Consultants /
Project Manager. The binder shall be sprayed on the prepared based at the rate of 1.0 kg/sqm. The
binder shall be applied uniformly with the aid of either self propelled or towed bitumen pressure
sprayer with self heating arrangement and spraying nozzle arrangement capable of spraying
bitumen at the above specified rate and temperature so as to provide uniform unbroken spread of
bitumen. The tack coal shall be applied just ahead of oncoming premixed asphalt carpet.
9.16.8 Preparation of mix and laying:

9.16.8.1 Hot mix plant of adequate capacity and capable of producing a proper and uniform quality mix shall
be used for preparing the mix. The plant may be either a weigh batch type of volumetric
proportioning continuous or drum mix type. The stone aggregate shall be surface dry and contain
not more then 2 percent moisture before use. It shall be first screened of dust and measured in
o o
boxes, heated to 155 C – 163 C and then loaded into the drum mixer according to the capacity of
o o
the mixing drum in the proportion specified. The binder shall be heated to 140 C – 177 C in
o
boilers and maintained at that temperature between the aggregate and binder exceed 14 C. The
heated binder shall be drawn from the boiler into suitable container or in a bucket gauged to show
the weight of bitumen in it.
9.16.8.2 Mixing shall be done in two stages. The coarse aggregate of the correct standard size and in the
rd
proportion as specified shall be fed into the mixer to which 2/3 of the total specified quantity of
bitumen heated to the appropriate temperature shall be added. When the coarse aggregate is wel
rd
coated, the fine aggregate in the specified proportion followed by the balance 1/3 quantity of
total bitumen shall be fed into the mixer. Mixing shall be continued until a homogeneous mix is
produced and all particles are uniformly coated with bitumen.
9.16.8.3 The hot mix shall be discharged from the mixer carried to the point of use in suitable tippler
vehicles and shall be spread by means of a self propelled mechanical paver with a suitable screeds
capable of spreading tamping and finishing the mix to specified lines and levels to a thickness
sufficient to achieve after consolidation the specified thickness. Temperature of the mix at the

o o
time of laying shall be in the range of 120 C – 160 C. However, in restricted locations and in
narrow width where available equipment cannot be operated in the opinion of the Project
Manager, he may permit manual laying of the mix. Longitudinal joints and edges shall be
constructed true to the delineating lines parallel to the centre line of the road. Longitudinal joints
shall be offset by at least 150mm from those in the binder course )tack coat). All joints shall be cut
vertical to the full thickness of the previously laid mix and the surface painted with hot bitumen
before placing fresh material.
9.16.9 Rolling
9.16.9.1 Immediately after the spreading of mix it shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling with a set of
roller moving at a speed not more than 5 km per hour. The initial or break down rolling shall be
with 12 ton three wheel roller and the surface finished by final rolling with the 12 ton tendem
roller. Preferably before finishing with tendem, breakdown rolling shall be followed by an
intermediate rolling with a fixed wheel pneumatic roller of 15 to 30 ton having a tyre pressure of 7
kg. Per cum. The joints and edges shall be rolled with 12 ton three wheel roller. Any high spot or
depressions which become apparent shall be corrected by addition or removal of mix material. The
roller shall uniformly overlap not less than a third of the track made in the preceding pass. The
wheels of the roller shall be moistened with gunny bags to prevent the mix sticking to the wheels
while rolling, but in no case shall fuel lubricating oil be used for this purpose. Rolling shall be
continued till the mix is thoroughly compacted and all roller marks are eliminated.
9.16.10 Opening to traffic
Traffic shall be allowed on the road after a lapse of minimum 24 hours, preferably 48 hours after
laying as directed by Project Manager.
The measurement shall be taken for the finished work in sqm. The rate shall include the cost of all
materials, labour, plant and equipment involved in all the operations described above.
9.16.12 Seal Coat
This work shall consist of application of a seal coat sealing the voids in a bituminous surface laid to
the specified levels, grade and camber. Seal coat shall be of either of the two types below:
Type A Liquid seal coat comprising of an application of a layer of bituminous binder followed by a
cover of stone chippings.
Type B Premixed seal coat comprising of a thick application of fine aggregate premixed with
bituminous binder.
9.16.13 Materials
9.16.13.1 Binder: This shall be 30/40, 60/70 or 80/100 grade straight run bitumen conforming to IS:73, The
actual grade of bitumen to be used shall be decided by the Project Manager, appropriate to the
region, traffic, rainfall and other environmental conditions. The quantity of binder to be utilised,
shall be 9.8 kg and 6.8 kg per 10 sqm. of area for type A and type B seal coat respectively.
9.16.13.2 Stone chippings for Type A seal coat : These shall consist of angular fragments of clean, hard, tough
and durable rock of uniform quality throughout. They should be free of elongated or flaky pieces,
soft or disintegrated stone, vegetable or other deleterious matter. Stone chippings shall be of
10mm size defined as 100 percent passing through 12.5mm sieve and retained on 2.36mm sieve.
The quantity used for spreading shall be 0.09 cum per 10 sqm.
9.16.13.3 Fine aggregate for type B seal coat: This fine aggregate shall be sand or fine grit and shall consist of
clean, hard durable, soft or flaky material organic matter or other deleterious substances. The

aggregate shall pass 1.7mm sieve and be retained on 180 micron sieve. The quantity used for
premixing shall be 0.06 cum. per 10 sqm area.
9.16.14 Preparation of base
9.16.14.1 The seal coat shall be applied immediately after the laying of bituminous course which is required
to be sealed. Before application of seal coat materials the surface shall be cleaned free of any dust
or other extraneous matter.
9.16.15 Construction of type A seal coat
9.16.15.1 Application of binder
0 o
Binder shall be heated in boilers to 163 C to 171 C maintained at the temperature and sprayed on
the dry surface in a uniform manner with the help of mechanical sprayers. Excessive deposits of
binder caused by stopping or starting of the sprayer through leakage or any other reason shall be
suitably corrected before the stone chippings are spread.
9.16.15.2 Application of stone chippings
Immediately after the application of the binder, stone chippings in a dry and clean state shall be
spread uniformly on the complete surface. If necessary the surface shall be broomed to ensure
uniform spread of chippings. The surface shall be checked by means of a camber board laid across
the road and a 3 meter straight edge laid parallel to the centre line of the road and undulations if
any, shall be corrected by addition or removal of blindage.
9.16.15.3 Rolling
Immediately after the application of the cover the material, the entire surface shall be rolled with a
8 to 10 ton smooth wheeled roller. While rolling is in progress additional material shall be spread
by hand in whatever quantities required to make up irregularities. Rolling shall continue until all
material is firmly bedded in the binder and presents a uniform closed surface. Generally five to six
passes shall be made for thorough compaction of the surface or as directed by Project Manager.
Along kerbs, manholes and at all places not accessible to roller, thorough compaction shall be
secured by means of steel rammers or hand rollers. Traffic shall be allowed after 24 hours. After a
period of seven days, surplus grit shall be swept and collected and shall be used for binding the
spots where bleeding occurs.
9.16.16 Construction of type B seal coat
9.16.17 Preparation mix and laying
The aggregate shall be surface dry and contain not more than 2 percent moisture before use, and
o o
shall be heated to 155 C - 163 C and then loaded into the drum mixer according to the capacity of
o o
the mixing drum in the proportion specified. The binder shall be heated to 149 C - 177 C in boilers
and maintained at that temperature. At no time shall the difference in temperature between the
o
aggregate and binder exceed 14 C. The heated binder shall be drawn from the boiler into a
suitable container or in a bucket gauged to show the weight of bitumen in it. The mix shall be
immediately transported from the mixing plant to the point of use and spread uniformly on the
bituminous surface to be sealed.
9.16.18 Rolling
As soon as sufficient length has been covered with the premixed material, the surface shall be
rolled with 12 tonne smooth wheeled power rollers. Rolling shall be continued till the premixed
material completely seals the voids in bituminous course and a smooth uniform surface is obtained.
9.16.19 Opening to Traffic

Traffic may be allowed soon after final rolling when, the premixed material has cooled down to the
surrounding temperature.
The measurement shall be taken for the finished work in sqm. The rate shall include the cost of all
materials, labour, plant and equipment involved in all the operations described above.
9.16.20.1 QUALITY CONTROL

9.17.1 GENERAL
9.17.1.1 All materials incorporated and all works performed shall be strictly in conformity with the
specification requirements. All works shall conform to the lines, grades, cross sections and
dimensions shown on the drawings or as directed by the Project Manager subject to the permitted
tolerances described hereinafter. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of the work in
the entire construction within the Contract. He shall therefore have his own independent and
adequate set-up for ensuring the same.
9.17.1.2 The Contractor shall carry out quality control test on the materials and work to the frequency
specified. In the absence of clear indications about method and or frequency of tests for any item,
the direction of the Consultants / Project Manager shall be followed and he shall provide necessary
cooperation and assistance in obtaining the samples for test and carrying out the field test as
required by the Consultants / Project Manager from time to time. This may include provision of
labour, attendance, assistance in packing and despatching and any other assistance considered
necessary in connection with the test.
9.17.1.3 For the work of embankment, subgrade and construction of subsequent layer of same or the
material over the finished layer shall be done after obtaining permission from the Consultants /
Project Manager. Similar permission from the Project Manager shall be obtained in respect of all
other items of works prior to proceeding with the next stage of construction.
9.17.1.4 The Contractor shall carry out modification in the procedure of work, if found necessary, as
diirected by the Project Manager during inspection. Works falling short of quality shall be rectified
by the Contractor at his own cost as directed by the Project Manager.
9.17.1.5 The Contract rate quoted for various items of works in the bill of quantities or the lumpsum
amount Tendered shall be deemed to be inclusive of all costs of the quality control tests and
operations necessary for ensuring quality of the material and work so as to be in conformity with
the specification requirement.
9.18 PERMITTED TOLERANCES

9.18.1 Horizontal Alignments
Horizontal alignments shall be reckoned with respect to the centre line of the carriage way as
shown on the drawings. The edges of the carriage way as constructed shall be correct within a
tolerance of ± 25mm therefrom. The corresponding tolerance for edges of the roadway and lower
layers of pavement shall be ± 40mm.
9.18.2 Longitudinal profile
The levels of the subgrade and different pavement courses as constructed, shall not vary from
those calculated with reference to the longitudinal and cross-profile of the road shown on the
drawings or as directed by the Project Manager beyond the tolerances mentioned below:

Subgrade ± 15mm
Sub-base ± 20mm
Base course ± 15mm
Wearing course ± 10mm
Provided, however, that the negative tolerance for wearing course shall not be permitted in
conjunction with the positive tolerance for base course if the thickness of the former is thereby
reduced by more than 6mm.
9.18.3 Surface Regularity
The surface regularity of completed subgrade, sub-bases, base course and wearing surfaces in the
longitudinal and transverse directions shall be within the tolerances indicated in Table-7.
The longitudinal profile shall be checked with a 3 meter long straight edge, at the middle of each
traffic lane along a line parallel to the centre line of the road. The transverse profile shall be
checked with a set of three camber boards at intervals of 10 meters.
9.18.4 Rectification
Where the surface irregularity of subgrade and the various courses fall outside the specified
tolerances, the Contractor shall be liable to rectify these in the manner described below and to the
satisfaction of the Project Manager.
i. Subgrade
Where the surface is high, it shall be trimmed and suitably compacted. Where the same is low,
the deficiency shall be corrected by adding fresh material. The degree of compaction and the
type of material to be used shall conform to the clauses.
ii. Water Bound Macadam
Where the surface is high or low, the top 75mm shall be scarified, reshaped with added material
as necessary re-compacted to clauses. The area treated at a place shall not be less than 5 meter
long and 2 meters wide.
iii. Bituminous constructions
For bituminous construction other than wearing course, where the surface is low, the deficiency
shall be corrected by adding fresh material and re-compacting to specifications. Where the
surface is high, the full depth of the layer shall be removed and replaced with fresh material and
compacted to specifications.
For wearing course, where the surface is high or low, the full depth of the layer shall be removed
and replaced with fresh material and compacted to specifications. In all cases where the removal
and replacement of a bituminous layer is involved, the areas treated shall not be less than 5
meter lon and not less than 1 lane wide.
TABLE – 7
PERMITTED TOLERANCES OF SURFACE REGULARITY FOR SUBGRADE AND PAVEMENT COURSE
Sl. Type of construction Longitudinal profile with 3 cross profile meter straight
No. edge

Maximum Maximum number of Maximum
permissible undulations permitted permissible
undulation in any 300 meters variation from
mm length exceeding mm specified
profile under
camper
template mm
1 Earthen subgrade 24 30 - - - 15
2 Granular / Lime / Cement 15 - 30 - - 12
/ stabilised subbase
3 Water bound macadam 15 - 30 - - 12
with over size metal (45-
90mm size)
4 Water Bound macadam 12 - - 30 - 8
with normal size metal (22
4-53mm & 45-63mm size)
5 Bituminous concrete 8 - - - 10 4
**
Notes:
1 ** These are for machine laid surfaces. If laid manually due to unavoidable reasons,
tolerance up to 50 percent above these values in this column may be permitted at the
discretion of the Project Manager. However, this relaxation does not apply to the values
of maximum undulation for longitudinal and cross profiles mentioned in columns 3 and
8 on the table.
Surface evenness requirements in respect of both the longitudinal and cross profiles
should be simultaneously satisfied.
9.19 TESTS
9.19.1 General
For ensuring the requisite quality of construction, the materials and works shall be subjected to quality control
tests, as described hereinafter. The testing frequencies set forth are the desirable minimum and the Project
Manager shall have the full authority to increase the frequencies of tests as he may deem necessary to satisfy
himself that the materials and works comply with the appropriate specifications.
Test procedures for the various quality control tests are indicated in the respective sections of these specifications
or for certain tests within this section. Where no specific testing procedure is mentioned, the tests shall be carried
out as per the prevalent accepted engineering practice to the directions of the Project Manager
9.19.2 Tests on earthwork for embankment and sub grade construction
A. Borrow material
a. Sand content {IS:2720 (part IV)}: 1-2 tests per 8000 cum. of soil
b. Plasticity Test {IS:1270 (Part V)}: Each type to be tested, 1-2 tests per 8000 cum. of soil

c. Density Test {IS:2720 (part VII)}: Each soil type to be tested, 1-2 tests per 8000 cubic meters of soil
d. Deleterious content test {IS:2720 (part xxVII)}: As and when required by the Project Manager.
e. Moisture content Test {IS:2720 (part II)}: One test for every 250 cubic meters of soil
f. CBR Test on materials to be incorporated in the subgrade on soaked/unsoaked samples {IS:2720 (Part XVI)}: One
test for every 3000 cum. at least or closer as and when required by the Project Manager.
B. Compaction control
Control shall be exercised by taking at least one measurement of density for each 100 square meters of compacted
area, or closer as required to yield the minimum number of test results for evaluation a day’s work on statistical
basis. The determination of density shall be in accordance with IS: 2720 (part XXVIII). Tests locations shall be
chosen only through random sampling techniques. Control shall not be based on the results of any one test but on
the mean value of a set of 5-10 density determinations. The number of tests in one test in one set of
measurements shall be 5 as long as it is felt that sufficient control over borrow material and the method of
compaction is being exercised. If considerable variations are observed between individual density results, the
minimum number of tests in one set of measurement shall be increased to 10. The acceptance of work shall be
subject to the condition that the mean dry density equals or exceeds the specified density and the standard
deviation for any set of results in below 0.08 gm/cc.
However, for earthwork in shoulders (earthen) and in top 500mm portion of the embankment below the sub
grade, at least one density measurement shall be taken for every 50 square meters of the compacted area
provided further that the number of tests in each set of measurements shall be at least 10. In order respects, the
control shall be similar to that described earlier.
9.19.2.1 Tests on sub-bases and bases

(Excluding bitumen bound bases)
The tests and their frequencies for the different types of bases and sub-base shall be as given in
table-8. The evaluation of density results for compaction control shall be on lines similar to those
set out in clauses.
TABLE – 8
CONTROL TESTS AND THEIR FREQUENCIES FOR SUBBASES AND BASES (EXCLUDING BITUMEN
BOUND BASES)
Sl.No Types of construction Test Frequency

.
1 Granular sub-base Gradation One test per 200 cum.
Atterbergs limit One test per 200 cum.
Moisture content prior One test per 250 sqm.
to compaction
Density of compacted
layer One test per 500 sqm.
Deleterious constituents
CBR
As required
As required

2 Lime / Cement stabilised Purity of lime (for lime- One test for each
soil stabilisation) consignment subject to a
Lime / Cement content minimum of one test per 5
Degree of pulverisation tonnes of lime.
CBR test on a set of 3 Regularly, through procedural
specimens checks
Moisture content prior Periodically as considered
to compaction necessary
Density of compacted As required
layer One test per 250 cum.
Deleterious One test per 500 sqm.
constituents As required
3 Water Bound Macadam Aggregate Impact value One test per 200 cum. of
Grading aggregate
Flakiness Index
Atterbergs limits of One test per 100 cum. of
binding material aggregate
One test per 200 cum. of
aggregate
One test per 25 cum. of
binding material
9.19.3 TESTS ON BITUMINOUS CONSTRUCTIONS

The tests and their frequencies for the different types of bituminous works shall be as given table-9 hereunder:
TABLE – 9
CONTROL TESTS AND THEIR FREQUENCY FOR BITUMINOUS WORKS
Sl. Types of construction Test Frequency

No.
1 Prime coat / Tack Coat Quality of binder As required
Binder temperature for a As regular close intervals
application Two tests per day
Rate of spread of binder
2 Seal coat / Surface dressing Quality of binder As required

Aggregate impact value One test per 50 cum of aggregate
Flakiness index One test per 50 cum. of aggregate
Initially one set of 3 representative
Stripping value of aggregates specimens for each source of supply
Water absorption of Subsequently when warranted by
aggregates changes in the quality of
Grading of aggregated aggregated.

Temperature of binder of One test per 25 cum. of aggregate
application At regular close intervals
Rate of spread of materials
One test per 500 cum of aggregate
3 Bituminous Concrete Quality of binder As required
Aggregate impact value, One test per 50-100 cum. of
flakiness index and striping aggregate
value of aggregates One set of test on individual
Mix-grading constituents and mixed aggregates
from the dryer for each 100 tonnes
Control of temperature of of mix subject to a maximum of two
binder in boiler, aggregate in sets per plant per day.
the dryer and mix at the At regular close interval
time of laying and rolling.

10 .0 Q U AL IT Y CON TR O L T ES T S
The following tests as well as other tests may be ordered during execution by PMC/ Architect/ Structural
Consultant shall be carried out by the contractor within the quoted rate and time schedule at the required
frequency.
10 .1 QU A LI TY C ON TR OL T E ST S:
1 Cement:
a) Recommended tests:
i) Fineness
ii) Soundness
iii) Consistency
iv) Setting time
v) Compressive strength and
vi) Chemical analysis
b) Sampling and frequency of sampling: As per guidelines in relevant Indian Standards.

c) Acceptance criteria: As per guidelines in relevant Indian Standards.
d) Relevant references:
IS: 4031- Method of physical tests for Hydraulic cement.
Part 2 – Determination of fitness by Blaine air Permeability method.
Part 3 – Determination of Soundness.
Part 2 – Determination of Consistency.
Part 2 – Determination of initial and final setting time.
Part 2 – Determination of compressive strength.
IS:4032-Chemical analysis of Hydraulic cement.

IS:3535-Method of sampling Hydraulic cements.
IS:8112-Specification for 43 grade ordinary Portland cement.
IS:12269-Specification for 53 grade ordinary Portland cement.
IS:12330- Specification for sulfate resisting Portland cement.
2 Fine aggregate:
i) Particle size and shape
ii) Estimation of deleterious materials and organic impurities.
iii) Specific gravity and density
b) Sampling and frequency of sampling:
As per guidelines in relevant Indian Standards.
c) Acceptance criteria:
IS: 383- Specification for coarse and fine aggregate from natural sources for concrete.
IS:2430- Method of sampling of aggregates for concrete.
IS:2386- Methods of tests for aggregates for concrete

Part 1 – Particle size and shape
Part 2 – Estimate of deleterious materials and organic impurities.
Part 3 – Specific gravity and density.
Part 6 – Mortar making properties of fine aggregate.
3 Concrete workers
Guide – 1992 by Research and Consultancy directorate, A.C.C. Ltd., Mumbai
4 Coarse aggregate:
i) Sieve analysis
ii) Flakiness index
iii) Specific gravity and density
iv) Soundness
v) Alkali aggregate reaction
vi) Mechanical properties
vii) Petrographic examination

IS: 383-Specification for coarse and fine aggregate from natural sources for concrete.
IS:2430- Method of sampling of aggregates for concrete.
IS:2386- Methods of tests for aggregates for concrete
Part 1 – Particle size and shape
Part 3 – Specific gravity and density.
Part 4 – Mechanical properties
Part 5 – Soundness
Part 7 – Alkali aggregate reactivity
Part 8 – Petrographic examination
5 Water
i) P-Alkalinity
ii) M-Alkalinity
iii) Inorganic solids
iv) Sulfates
v) Chlorides
vi) Suspended solids
vii) pH Value

As per guidelines in relevant Indian Standards
c) Acceptance criteria
d) Relevant references
IS: 456- Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.
IS: 3025 –Method of sampling and tests (Physical and chemical) for water and waste
water.
Part 1 - Sampling
Part 2 - pH Value
Part 15 - Total residue (total solids dissolved and suspended)
Part 16 - Total dissolved solids
Part 17 - Total suspended solids
Part 23 - Alkalinity
Part 24 - Sulfates
Part 32 - Chlorides
6 Admixtures:
(Accelerating, retarding, water reducing/workability improvement and air entraining admixtures)
i) Water content of concrete with and without admixture
ii) Setting time of concrete with and without admixture
iii) Compressive strength of concrete with and without admixture
iv) Change in length of concrete with and without admixture
v) Bleeding of concrete with and without admixture
vi) Workability of concrete with and without admixture
vii) Air content of concrete with and without admixture
viii) Heat of hydration of concrete with and without admixture
ix) Chloride content

As per guidelines in relevant Indian standards.
IS:9103 - Specification for admixtures for concrete.
IS:516 - Method of tests for strength of concrete.
IS:6925 – Method of test for determination of water soluble chlorides in concrete
admixtures.
7 Fresh concrete:
i) Slump/compaction factor/Vee Bee test
ii) Setting time of concrete by penetration method
iii) Air content

iv) Analysis for constituents
As per guide lines in relevant Indian Standards.
c) Acceptance Criteria:
IS: 1199 – Method of sampling and analysis of concrete
IS: 8142 – Setting time of concrete by penetration resistance
8 Hardened concrete:
i) Compressive strength
a) Accelerated curing
b) Normal curing
ii) Permeability test
As pe guidelines in relevant Indian Standards.
IS : 456 – Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete
IS: 516 – Methods of tests for strength of concrete
IS: 9013 – Method of testing of accelerated cured concrete
IS: 3085 – Method of tests for permeability of cement mortar and concrete.
9 Reinforcing Steel:
i) Tensile test on bars welded or otherwise.
ii) Bend and re-bend test
iii) Bond test
iv) Chemical analysis
As per guidelines in relevant Indian standards.
IS:1786 –Specification of high strength deformed steel bars for concrete reinforcement.
IS: 1608 –Method of tensile testing of steel products.
IS: 228 –Method of chemical analysis of steel.
Part 1 : Determination of carbon by volumetric method.
Part 3 : Determination of phosphorous by alkali metric method
Part 9 : Determination of sulphur
10 Solid concrete blocks:

i) Dimensional tolerances
ii) Block density and compressive strength
iii) Water absorption
iv) Drying shrinkage
v) Moisture movement

IS: 2185 – Specification for concrete masonry units part-1 solid concrete blocks.
11 Autoclaved Cellular Concrete Blocks:

i) Dimensional tolerances
ii) Block density and compressive strength
iv) Drying shrinkage
v) Moisture movement

IS: 6072 – Specification for autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete wall slabs.
IS: 6441 –Method of tests for autoclaved cellular concrete products.
Part 1 : Determination of unit wt. And moisture content.
Part 2 : Determination of drying shrinkage.
Part 4 : Corrosion protection of steel reinforcement.
Part 5 : Determination of compressive strength
IS: 2185 –Specification for concrete masonry units.
Part 3 (1990) Autoclaved cellular (aerated) concrete blocks.
12 Door Shutters:
i) Dimensions and defects of square ness test
ii) General flatness test
iii) Local plane ness test
iv) Impact indentation test
v) Edge loading test
vi) Shock resistance test

vii) Buckling test
viii) Misuse test
ix) Slamming test
x) Screw holding power test
xi) Additional test on wood particle board:
1) Determination of water absorption
2) Determination of swelling in water

As per guidelines n relevant Indian Standards.
IS: 4020 – 1994 Door shutters method of test
Part 1 : General
Part 2 : Measurement of dimensions & defects of square ness
Part 3 : Measurement of defects of general flatness
Part 4 : Local plane ness test
Part 5 : Impact indentation test
Part 6 : Edge loading test
Part 7 : Shock resistance test
Part 8 : Buckling test
Part 9 : Misuse test
Part 10 : Slamming test
Part 11 : Screw holding power test
IS: 2389 Method of test for wood particle board
Part 16 : Determination of water absorption
Part 17 : Determination of swelling in water
13 Aluminium:
i) Thickness measurement of member
ii) Coating thickness
IS: 5523 –Method of testing anodic coating on aluminium
14 Tiles (Concrete):
i) Dimensional tolerance
ii) Flatness
iii) Perpendicularity

iv) Straightness
v) Water absorption
vi) Wet transverse strength
vii) Resistance to wear

d) Relevant reference:
IS : 1237-Specification for cement concrete flooring tiles.
15 Glazed Earthenware Tiles:

i) Dimensional tolerance
ii) Warp age
iv) Impact strength
v) Cracking test
IS: 777 – Specification for glazed earthenware wall tiles.
16 Marble:
Recommended tests:
Moisture absorption
Hardness
Sampling and frequency of sampling:
Acceptance criteria:
Relevant references:
IS: 1237 –Specification for marbles (Blocks, slabs & tiles)
IS: 1124 –Methods of tests for determination of water absorption, apparent specific
gravity and porosity of natural building stone.
17 Non-destructive Testing of Concrete:
i) Ultrasonic pulse velocity test
ii) Rebound hammer test

b) Frequency of test:
About 5% of randomly selected reinforced concrete structural components (in-situ of
precast)
IS:13311-Non-destructive testing of concrete
Part 1 : Method of test for Ultrasonic pulse velocity
Part 2 : Method of test for Rebound hammer
The testing of concrete in structures by J.H.Bungey, Surrey University Press, 1982.
18 Core Test on Concrete:

i) Texture of concrete
ii) Compressive strength test
Core to be taken from walls, slabs and footings whenever in doubt.
IS: 516 –Method of tests for strength of concrete
IS: 456 –Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete
19 Load Test:
a) Recommended test:
Load testing of selected in-situ panels/pre-cast components (service load test)
On representative in-situ panels in each type of housing whenever in doubt about 0.5%
of the total precast floor roof components.
IS: 456-Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.
IS: 6441 (part 7 & 8) Method of test for autoclaved cellular concrete products subject to
load test.
20 Earth-filling in Building:
i) Grain size distribution for material selection
ii) Proctor compaction test
iii) Field density by core extraction
i) One sample from each borrow pit

ii) Three cores for every 1000 sqm. In compacted thickness of 30cm.
IS: 2720- Method of test for soil
Part 2 – Determination of water content
Part 4 – Grain size analysis
Part 5 – Determination of liquid and plastic limit.
Part 7 – Determination of water content-dry density relation using light compaction.
Part 29 –Determination of dry density of soils in place by core cutter method.
21 Mix design:
a) Recommended method:
Method outlined in SP-23-– Hand book on concrete mixes.
b) Frequency of design:
On every source of type of the following:
i) Aggregates
ii) Cement
iii) Admixtures and for different grades of workability.
c) Acceptance criteria of mix:
SP:23- Hand book on concrete mixes
SP: 10262 – 1982 Recommended guidelines for concrete mix design.
SP: 456-1978 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.
GENERAL REFERENCES:
1 Properties of concrete by A.M>Neville, ELBS Publication 1981
2 (a) Elements of concrete making,
(b) Concrete workers guide,
(c) Control tests for quality user,
(d) Notes for the cement user, by Research and Consultancy directorate, ACC Ltd.,
Mumbai.
3 SP: 24-Explanatory handbook on Indian Standard Code of practice for plain and
reinforced concrete.
4 Workshop on testing of fresh and hardened concrete Indian Concrete Institute,.
5 SP:21 –Summaries of Indian Standard for building materials.
6 National building code,.
7 Non-destructive testing by Barry Hall, Macmillan Education,.
TOLERANCES:
Sl.No. Item Tolerance

1 Variation from plumb in the lines and surface of columns, piers, walls and
arises.

a) In any 3.05 mt height. 6 mm
b) Maximum for total building height of approx. 50m. 38 mm
2 Variation in plumb for exposed corner columns. Control joint groves and
other conspicuous lines.
a) In any 6.10 mt height. 6 mm
b) Maximum for total building height of approx. 50m 19 mm
3 Variation in level of slab soffits, ceiling, beam soffits and in arrirers,
measured before removal of supporting shores.
a) In any 3.05 mt height. ± 6 mm
b) In any bag or in any 6.10m length. ± 10 mm
c) Maximum for total length of the structure ± 19 mm
4 Variation in level of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and
other conspicuous lines.
a) In any bag or in any 6.10m length. ± 6 mm
b) Maximum for total length of the structure ± 13 mm
5 Variation in level of elevation control points for slabs on grade.
a) In any bag or in any 6.10m length. ± 10 mm
b) Maximum for total length of the structure ± 19 mm
6 Variation in linear building lines from the basic dimension in plan and related
position of columns, walls, beams and partitions. ± 13 mm
a) In any bay ± 13 mm
b) In bay 6.10m ± 25 mm
c) Maximum for the structure
7 Variation in size of sleeves, floor openings, and wall opening. ± 6 mm
8 Variation in location of centre lines of sleeves, floor opening and wall
opening. ± 13 mm
9 Variation in cross sectional dimension of columns, beams, walls and slab
thickness + 10 mm
a) Upto 3.05 mm - 6 mm
b) More than 3.05mm + 13 mm
- 10 mm
10 Variation in horizontal dimension of footings with formed excavation. + 51 mm
- 13 mm
11 Variation in horizontal dimension of footing with unformed excavation. + 76 mm
- nil
12 Variation in misplacement or eccentricity of footing
Positive and Negative tolerance
Lesser of 51mm or 2% of footing dimension in the direction of
misplacement.
13 Variation in cross sectional thickness of footing. + no limits
- 5%
14 Variation in alignment of footing to receive masonry construction:
a) In 3.05 m length

b) Maximum for 15.24 m length ± 6 mm
± 13 mm
15 Variation in level of footing to receive masonry construction
a) In 3.05 m length ± 6 mm
b) Maximum for 15.24 m length ± 13 mm
16 Variation in dimension of an individual step of a stairway.
a) Riser ± 3 mm
b) Tread ± 6 mm
17 Variation in dimension of an extra flight of a stairway.
a) Rise ± 3 mm
b) Run ± 6 mm
18 Variation in finished slab surface determined as depressions in floors 8 mm
between high spots using a 3.05 m long aluminium straight edge over five
consecutive measurements per day.
19 Variation from specified gradient in longitudinal direction of pavements as 3 mm
measured with a 3.05 m long aluminium straight edge.
20 Variation from specified gradient in turnover direction of pavements as 6 mm
measured with a 3.05 m long aluminium straight edge.
21 Variation from specified gradient of ramps and intersection as measured
with a 3.05 m long aluminium straight edge. 6 mm
22 Variation from specified location of dowels. ± 25 mm
23 Variation in alignment of 450mm long dowels. ± 6 mm
24 Variation in length of precast non-prestressed elements.
a) Per 3.05 m of length ± 3 mm
b) Maximum for entire length. ± 19 mm
25 Variation in cross sectional dimensions of precast non-pre-stressed
elements. ± 3 mm
a) Sections upto and including 152 mm ± 5 mm
b) Sections between 153mm and 456mm ± 6 mm
c) Sections between 457mm and 913mm ± 10 mm
d) Sections above and including 914mm
26 Variation from straight line of precast non pre-stressed elements
a) In any 3.05m of length ± 3 mm
b) Maximum for entire length ± 19 mm
27 Variation from specified camber of precast non-pre-stressed elements
a) Per 3.05 m of span
b) Maximum for entire width ± 3 mm
± 13 mm
28 Differential in camber between adjacent units in erected position of precast,
non pre-stressed elements.
a) Per 3.05m of span ± 3 mm
b) Maximum for entire length ± 13 mm

11.0 CEMENT CONSTANTS
Sl. # Item Unit Mix Cement ( Bags ) Cement ( Kg )
1) Cement Concrete
A VOLUMETRIC MIX
a cum 1:1.5:3 8.000 400.000
b cum 1:2:4 6.400 320.000
e cum 1:3:6 4.400 220.000
f cum 1:4:8 3.400 170.000
g cum 1:5:10 2.600 130.000
DESIGN MIX
a cum M7.5 3.000 150.000
b cum M10 4.400 220.000
C cum M15 5.600 280.000
d cum M20 6.000 300.000
e cum M25 6.400 320.000
f cum M30 6.800 340.000
g cum M35 7.500 375.000
h cum M40 8.200 410.000
i cum M45 9.000 450.000
j cum M50 9.000 450.000
2) Mortars
a cum 1:1 28.800 1440.000
b cum 1:2 14.400 720.000
c cum 1:3 9.600 480.000
d cum 1:4 7.200 360.000
e cum 1:5 5.760 288.000
f cum 1:6 4.800 240.000
g cum 1:8 3.600 180.000
3) Brick work - 230mm Thick
a cum 1:3 2.880 144.000
b cum 1:4 2.160 108.000
c cum 1:5 1.728 86.400
d cum 1:6 1.440 72.000
e cum 1:8 1.080 54.000
4) Half Brick work - 115mm Thick

a sqm 1:3 0.290 14.500

b sqm 1:4 0.230 11.500
c sqm 1:5 0.193 9.650
d sqm 1:6 0.169 8.450
5) Half Brick work - 075mm Thick sqm 1:4 0.101 5.040
6) Wire cut/Mech. mould bricks cum 1:6 1.250 62.500
8) Half BW - Honey combed BW
a sqm 1:3 0.174 8.700
b sqm 1:4 0.138 6.900
9) Block work - 200mm Thick
a sqm 1:3 0.212 10.600
b sqm 1:4 0.158 7.900
c sqm 1:5 0.128 6.400
d sqm 1:6 0.106 5.300
a sqm 1:3 0.158 7.900
b sqm 1:4 0.119 5.950
c sqm 1:5 0.095 4.750
d sqm 1:6 0.080 4.000
a sqm 1:3 0.105 5.250
b sqm 1:4 0.079 3.950
12) Aerocon Block work - 200mm Thick sqm 1:6 0.106 5.300
15) Stone masonry Rubble
a cum 1:4 2.520 126.000
b cum 1:5 2.016 100.800
c cum 1:6 1.680 84.000
d cum 1:8 1.260 63.000
16) Coursed roubbled masonry
a cum 1:4 2.376 118.800
b cum 1:6 1.584 79.200
c cum 1:8 1.188 59.400

17) Ashlar masonry

cum 1:5 1.728 86.400
18) Cinder concrete
cum 1:15 2.590 129.500
19) Plastering - 6mm Thick
a sqm 1:3 0.063 3.170
b sqm 1:4 0.050 2.500
a sqm 1:3 0.106 5.300
b sqm 1:4 0.083 4.150
c sqm 1:5 0.066 3.320
d sqm 1:6 0.059 2.940
a sqm 1:3 0.133 6.640
b sqm 1:4 0.104 5.200
c sqm 1:5 0.083 4.160
d sqm 1:6 0.074 3.680
a sqm 1:3 0.202 10.100
b sqm 1:4 0.151 7.550
c sqm 1:5 0.121 6.050
d sqm 1:6 0.101 5.050
a sqm 1:3 0.212 10.610
b sqm 1:4 0.166 8.300
c sqm 1:5 0.133 6.640
d sqm 1:6 0.118 5.880
25) Punning - Neat floating coat
sqm 0.045 2.250
26) Rendering + Float coat
sqm 1:2 0.042 2.100
28) Pointing - 1:3 Brick Masonry
a Flushed/Ruled sqm 1:3 0.032 1.600
b Raised sqm 1:3 0.048 2.400
29) Pointing - 1:3 Stone Masonry

a Flushed/Ruled sqm 1:3 0.024 1.200

b Raised sqm 1:3 0.040 2.000
30) Lath Plaster
sqm 1:3 0.550 27.500
31) Surface finishing to concrete floors sqm - 0.027 1.350
32) Flooring
i) Flooring - Brick on Edging
a sqm 1:4 0.227 11.350
b sqm 1:6 0.165 8.250
Grano Flooring - 1:2:4 + Floating
ii) coat
a 25mm th. With 12.5 mm Aggregate sqm 0.251 12.550
b 40mm th. With 12.5 mm Aggregate sqm 0.350 17.500
c 50mm th. With 12.5 mm Aggregate sqm 0.416 20.800
d 75mm th. With 12.5 mm Aggregate sqm 0.581 29.050
iii) Mosaic/Marble/Blue
Tandoor/Kotah/Cudappah on bed
20mm + slurry 4.4 kg/sqm
a sqm 1:4 0.247 12.350
b sqm 1:5 0.218 10.900
c sqm 1:6 0.194 9.700
iv) Mosaic/Marble/Blue
Tandoor/Kotah/Cudappah on bed
20mm + slurry 4.4 kg/sqm - Skirting
a sqm 1:3 0.216 10.800
b sqm 1:4 0.184 9.200
Ceramic tiles on bed 20mm + slurry
v) 3.3 kg/sqm
a sqm 1:4 0.225 11.250
b sqm 1:5 0.196 9.800
c sqm 1:6 0.171 8.550
Ceramic tiles on bed 12mm + slurry
vi) 3.3 kg/sqm
a sqm 1:3 0.194 9.700
b sqm 1:4 0.162 8.100
vii) Ceramic/Glazed/Vitreous tile

- Flooring sqm 1:4 0.240 12.000

- Dado & skirting sqm 1.4 0.270 13.500
viii) Natural stone
- Flooring sqm - 0.280 14.000
- Dado & skirting sqm - 0.300 15.000
ix) Granolithic 50mm sqm - 0.380 19.000
x) Cement skirting sqm - 0.075 3.750
xi) Waterproofing
a Brickbat coba - toilets sqm - 0.650 32.500
b Brickbat coba - terrace sqm - 0.430 21.500
c Cuddapah waterproofig - single layer sqm - 0.420 21.000
Cuddapah waterproofig - double
d layer sqm - 0.500 25.000
LIST OF APPROVED MAKES OF MATERIALS
Conformance by Deviations if
S.No Materials Approved Makes
vendor Yes / No any by vendor
1
Chlorpyriphios De-Nocil// Cynamide/Tricel
Percept / Fosroc/ BASF / SIKA/

2 Water proofing compound
Carlisle
3 Grey Cement (43/53 Grade Ultratech / Birla/ACC / Zuari
4 White Cement Birla / JK
5 Tor Steel (TMT) BHUWALKA/ TISCO / SAIL / VIZAG
Birla Ready Mix/ Fletcher/ L&T/

6 Ready Mix Concrete
ACC
7 Granular Type Cork Sheet Tara Cork Product
8 Polyurethane Board Armour Board / SIL-FIL

Polysulphide / Polyurethane BASF/ Fosroc / Carlisle

9
Sealant
10 Water Swelling bars BASF / Sika/ Hydrotite
Non-Absorbent Closed Cell

11 Tristar intech /Supreme Ind
PE Board
Bitumat Co. Ltd / Soprema /

12 Polymeric Polyethylene Felt
Tamco
Expanded Polystyrene
13 Beardshell / Toshiba
(Thermocole)
14 Hessian Based Felt Bitumat Co. Ltd / Soprema
15 Tile/ Stone Joint Grout Laticrete/ Bal
16 Building Lime Satna / approved equivalent
17 White Washing Lime Dehradun / approved equivalent
Asian Paints/ Nerolac / ICI

18 Paints/ Primer
/Shalimar/ Berger
19 Concrete admixture Fosroc/ BASF/ Mc Bauchemie
Fosroc/ EMALITE OF
20 Non Metallic Floor
Structural/CICO technologies / STP
21 Fasteners for Anchors Hilti/ Fischer/ Canon
Acrylic/polymer modified
22 BASF / FOSROC / SIKA
coatings
23 Injection grouts BASF / FOSROC/SIKA

Membrane water proofing

24 SIKA / Tristar
(Bituminous)
Special water proof

Nina – AH – Internaltional.USA /
25 treatment on raft slab and
equivalent.
trenches
Extruded Polystyrene
26 Isofoam / Styrofoam
(Insulation)
27 PVC / EPDM Membrane BASF / Carlisle
28
PT Strands Tata / DP wires / Usha Martin
Fire protection Sealants/

29 HILTI / Promat
Spray
Note: In the List of recommendation above, out of makes mentioned in the list, only 1st make shall be quoted for
and used. However if due to non-availability or any other technical reasons, the alternative make is allowed, it
shall be subject to prior approval of the Project Manager and price adjustment.
1. The contractor shall produce all samples including natural stones, before procurement of the materials, for
approval of the Architects/Project Managers.
2. Where more than one manufacturer is listed, the names are given in the order of preference. The contractor
shall quote the rates for the various items of work based on the materials of first preference after ascertaining
the availability, delivery schedule of the same. Unless the contractor stipulates in this tender, it shall be
presumed that the rates quoted are for material of first preference only.
3. In the event, the contractor is permitted to use the material of lower preference because of valid reasons,
then the contract rates for the relevant items of work shall be suitably adjusted on the basis of variation in
prices of the materials of first preference and those actually used. If the prices of the materials used are higher
than the material of the first preference, the owner shall not be liable to make any enhanced payment for the
affected items of work on this account.
4. In respect of materials for which approved makes are not specified above, these will be makes to be decided
by the Architects/Project Managers and as per samples getting approved.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CIVIL FINISHES
The Building is designed for an Energy Efficient Structure and hence all products have to be green rated
and wherever not mentioned clarifications should be sought from the Project Manager.
CEMENT PLASTER
The cement plaster shall be 6mm, 12 mm, 15 mm or 20 mm thick as specified in the item.
Scaffolding:- For all exposed brick work or tile work double scaffolding independent of the work having
two sets of vertical supports shall be provided. The supports shall be sound and strong, tied together with
horizontal pieces over which scaffolding planks shall be fixed.
For all other work in buildings, single scaffolding shall be permitted. In such cases the inner end of the
horizontal scaffolding pole shall rest in a hole provided only in the header course for the purpose. Only
one header for each pole shall be left out. Such holes for scaffolding shall, however, will not be allowed in
pillars/columns less than one metre in width or immediately near the skew backs of arches. The holes left
in masonry works for scaffolding purposes shall be filled and made good before plastering.
Note : In case of special type of brick work, scaffolding shall be got approved from Authority’s Engineer in
advance.
 Preparation of Surface:
The joints shall be raked out properly. Dust and loose mortar shall be brushed out. Efflorescence if any
shall be removed by brushing and scrapping. The surface shall then be thoroughly washed with water,
cleaned and kept wet before plastering is commenced.
In case of concrete surface if a chemical retarder has been applied to the form work, the surface shall be
roughened by wire brushing and all the resulting dust and loose particles cleaned off and care shall be
taken that none of the retarders is left on the surface.
 Mortar:
The mortar of the specified mix using the type of sand described in the item shall be used. It shall be as
specified in Subhead 3.0. For external work and under coat work, the fine aggregate shall conform to
grading IV. For finishing coat work the fine aggregate conforming to grading zone V shall be used.
 Application of Plaster:
Ceiling plaster shall be completed before commencement of wall plaster. Plastering shall be started from
the top and worked down towards the floor. All putlog holes shall be properly filled in advance of the
plastering as the scaffolding is being taken down. To ensure even thickness and a true surface, plaster
about 15 × 15 cm shall be first applied, horizontally and vertically, at not more than 2 metres intervals
over the entire surface to serve as gauges. The surfaces of these gauged areas shall be truly in the plane of
the finished plaster surface. The mortar shall then be laid on the wall, between the gauges with trowel.
The mortar shall be applied in a uniform surface slightly more than the specified thickness. This shall be
brought to a true surface, by working a wooden straight edge reaching across the gauges, with small
upward and sideways movements at a time. Finally the surface shall be finished off true with trowel or

wooden float according as a smooth or a sandy granular texture is required. Excessive troweling or over
working the float shall be avoided.
All corners, arises, angles and junctions shall be truly vertical or horizontal as the case may be and shall be
carefully finished. Rounding or chamfering corners, arises, provision of grooves at junctions etc. where
required shall be done without any extra payment. Such rounding, chamfering or grooving shall be carried
out with proper templates or battens to the sizes required.
When suspending work at the end of the day, the plaster shall be left, cut clean to line both horizontally
and vertically. When recommencing the plastering, the edge of the old work shall be scrapped cleaned
and wetted with cement slurry before plaster is applied to the adjacent areas, to enable the two to
properly join together. Plastering work shall be closed at the end of the day on the body of wall and not
nearer than 15 cm to any corners or arises. It shall not be closed on the body of the features such as
plasters, bands and cornices, nor at the corners of arises. Horizontal joints in plaster work shall not also
occur on parapet tops and copings as these invariably lead to leakages. The plastering and finishing shall
be completed within half an hour of adding water to the dry mortar.
No portion of the surface shall be left out initially to be patched up later on. The plastering and finishing
shall be completed within half an hour of adding water to the dry mortar.
POINTING
All exposed joints shall be pointed with mortar as specified. The pointing when finished shall be sunk from
stone face by 5 mm or as specified. The depth of mortar in pointing work shall not be less than 15 mm.
Curing
Masonry work in cement or composite mortar shall be kept constantly moist on all faces for a minimum
period of seven days. In case of masonry with fat lime mortar, curing shall commence two days after
laying of masonry and shall continue for at least seven days thereafter.
Scaffolding:
Double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports shall be provided. The supports shall be sound and
strong, tied together with horizontal pieces over which scaffolding planks shall be fixed.
Rate: The rate shall include the cost of materials and labour required for all the operations described
above
AUTO CLAVED CELLULAR BLOCK MASONRY

PREPARATORY WORK
Wetting of Blocks - These blocks need not be wetted before ordering the laying in the walls; in case the
climatic condition so required, the top and the sides of the blocks may be slightly moistened so as to
prevent absorption of water from the mortar and ensure the development of the required bond with the
mortar.
LAYING OF AUTOCLAVED CELLULAR CONCRETE BLOCKMASONRY IN SUPERSTRUCTURE

Use of Mortar in Masonry - Mortar shall not be spread so much ahead of the actual laying of the units that
it tends to stiffen and loose its plasticity, thereby resulting in poor bond. For most of the work the joints,
both horizontal and vertical, shall be 10 mm thick. Except in the case of extruded joint construction, the

mortar joints shall be struck off flush with wall surface and when the mortar has started stiffening, it shall
be compressed with a rounded or U-shaped tool. This compaction is important, since mortar, while
hardening, has a tendency to shrinks lightly and thus pull away from the edges of the block. The mortar
shall be pressed against the units with a jointing tool after the mortar has stiffened to effect intimate
contact between the mortar and the masonry unit and obtain a water-tight joint.
OPERATIONS FOR LAYING BLOCK MASONRY

First Course - The first course of cellular concrete block masonry shall be laid with greater care, making
sure that it is properly aligned, levelled and plumbed, as this may assist the mason in laying succeeding
courses to obtain a straight and truly vertical wall. The first layer of cellular concrete block masonry on
plinth should preferably have groove/offset outside so that rain water coming down the wall falls out.
Before laying the first course, the alignment of the wall shall be marked on the damp-proof course. The
blocks for this course shall first be laid dry, that is, without mortar along a string stretched between
properly located corners of the wall in order to determine the correct position of the blocks including
those of the cross walls jointing it and also adjust their spacing. When the blocks are set in proper
position, the two corner blocks shall be removed, a mortar bed spread and these blocks laid back in place
truly level and plumb. The string shall then be stretched tightly along the faces of two corner blocks and
the faces of the intermediate ones adjusted to coincide with the line. Thereafter, each block shall be
removed and re-laid over a bed of mortar. After every three or four blocks have been laid, their correct
alignment, level and verticality shall be carefully checked.
The construction of walls may be started either at the corners first or started from one end proceeding in
the other direction. If the corners of the wall are built first, they shall be built four or five courses higher
than the centre of the wall. As each course is laid at the corner, it shall be checked for alignment and level
and for being plumb. Each block shall be carefully checked with a level or straight-edge to make certain
that the faces of the blocks are all in the same plane. This precaution is necessary to ensure truly straight
and vertical walls.
 The use of a storey rod or course pole which is simply a board with markings 200 mm apart,
provides an accurate method of finding the top of the masonry for each course. Each course, in
building the corners, shall be stepped back by a half-block and the horizontal spacing of the block
shall be checked by placing a mason’s level diagonally across the corners of the blocks.
 When filling in the wall between the corners, a mason’s line shall be stretched from corner to
corner for each course and the top outside edge of each block shall be laid to this line. The
manner of handling or gripping the block shall be such as to position the block properly with
minimum adjustment.
 To assure satisfactory bond, mortar shall not be spread too far ahead of actual laying of the block
or it will stiffen and loose its plasticity. As each block is laid, excess mortar extruding from the
joints shall be cut off with the trowel and thrown back on the mortar board to be reworked into
the fresh mortar. If the work is progressing rapidly, the extruded mortar cut from the joints may
be applied to the vertical face shells of the blocks just laid. If there be any delay long enough for
the mortar to stiffen on the block, the mortar shall be removed to the mortar board and
reworked. Dead mortar that has been picked up from the scaffold or from the floor shall not be
used.

Closure Block –When installing the closure block, all edges of the opening and all four edges of the closure
block shall be buttered with mortar. The closure block shall be carefully lowered into place. If any mortar
falls leaving an open joint, the closure block shall be removed, fresh mortar applied and the operation
repeated.
FLOORING /SKIRTING
Vitrified tiles flooring
The tiles shall be of approved make and shall generally conform to IS 15622. They shall be flat, and true to
shape and free from blisters crazing, chips, welts, crawling or other imperfections detracting from their
appearance. The tiles shall be Group BI b and thickness 9 - 10mm.
Preparation of Surface and Laying:-

 Base concrete or the RCC slab on which the tiles are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted and
mopped. The bedding for the tile shall be with cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) or as
specified. The average thickness of the bedding shall be 20 mm or as specified while the
thickness under any portion of the tiles shall not be less than 10 mm.
 Mortar shall be spread, tamped and corrected to proper levels and allowed to harden sufficiently
to offer a fairly rigid cushion for the tiles to be set and to enable the mason to place wooden
plank across and squat on it.
 Over this mortar bedding neat grey cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be spread at the
rate of 3.3 kg of cement per square meter over an area upto one square meter. Tiles shall be
soaked in water washed clean and shall be fixed in this grout one after another, each tile gently
being tapped with a wooden mallet till it is properly bedded and in level with the adjoining tiles.
The joints shall be kept as thin as possible and in straight lines or to suit the required pattern.
 The surface of the flooring during laying shall be frequently checked with a straight edge about 2
m long, so as to obtain a true surface with the required slope. In bath, toilet W.C. kitchen and
balcony/verandah flooring, suitable tile drop or as shown in drawing will be given in addition to
required slope to avoid spread of water. Further tile drop will also be provided near floor trap.
 Where full size tiles cannot be fixed these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size, and their edge
rubbed smooth to ensure straight and true joints.
 Tiles which are fixed in the floor adjoining the wall shall enter not less than 10 mm under the
plaster, skirting or dado
 After tiles have been laid surplus cement slurry shall be cleaned off.
 Application and sequence of activity as per methodology and instruction of Authority’s Engineer.
 Approved Check list shall follow at site for quality of work.
 Any issue in the technical specification will withdraw from the item and will stand the decision of
the Authority’s Engineer.
PRESSED CERAMIC TILES IN FLOORING

Pressed Ceramic Tiles
The tiles shall be of approved make and shall generally conform to IS 15622. They shall be flat, and true to
shape and free from blisters crazing, chips, welts, crawling or other imperfections detracting from their
appearance. The tiles shall be .Group B Ib and thick 7 - 8mm.

Preparation of Surface and Laying:
Base concrete or the RCC slab on which the tiles are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped. The
bedding for the tile shall be with cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) or as specified. The
average thickness of the bedding shall be 20 mm or as specified while the thickness under any portion of
the tiles shall not be less than 10 mm. Mortar shall be spread, tamped and corrected to proper levels and
allowed to harden sufficiently to offer a fairly rigid cushion for the tiles to be set and to enable the mason
to place wooden plank across and squat on it.
Over this mortar bedding neat grey cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be spread at the rate of
3.3 kg of cement per square meter over an area upto one square meter. Tiles shall be soaked in water
washed clean and shall be fixed in this grout one after another, each tile gently being tapped with a
wooden mallet till it is properly bedded and in level with the adjoining tiles. The joints shall be kept as thin
as possible and in straight lines or to suit the required pattern.
The surface of the flooring during laying shall be frequently checked with a straight edge about 2 m long,
so as to obtain a true surface with the required slope. In bath, toilet W.C. kitchen and balcony/verandah
flooring, suitable tile drop or as shown in drawing will be given in addition to required slope to avoid
spread of water. Further tile drop will also be provided near floor trap.
Where full size tiles cannot be fixed these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size, and their edge rubbed
smooth to ensure straight and true joints. Tiles which are fixed in the floor adjoining the wall shall enter
not less than 10 mm under the plaster, skirting or dado. After tiles have been laid surplus cement slurry
shall be cleaned off.
Pointing and Finishing:

The joints shall be cleaned off the grey cement slurry with wire/coir brush or trowel to a depth of 2 mm to
3 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed. Joints shall then be flush pointed with white cement added
with pigment if required to match the colour of tiles. Where spacer lug tiles are provided, the half the
depth of joint shall be filled with poly-sulphide or as specified on top with under filling with cement grout
without the lugs remaining exposed. The floor shall then be kept wet for 7 days. After curing, the surface
shall be washed and finished clean. The finished floor shall not sound hollow when tapped with a wooden
mallet.
PRESSED CERAMIC TILES IN SKIRTING AND DADO

The tiles shall be of approved make and shall generally conform to IS 15622. The tiles shall be pressed
ceramic covered by a glaze thoroughly matured and fitted to the body. The tiles shall be sound, true to
shape, flat and free from flaws and other manufacturing defects affecting their utility.
The top surface of the tiles shall be glazed. The underside of the tiles shall not have glaze on more than
5% of the area in order that the tile may adhere properly to the base. The edges of the tiles shall be free
from glaze, however, any glaze if unavoidable shall be permissible on only upto 50 per cent of the surface
area of edges.
The glaze shall be free from welts, chips, craze, specks, crawling or other imperfections detracting from
the appearance when viewed from a distance of one metre. The glaze shall be either glossy or matt as

specified. The glaze shall be white in colour except in the case of coloured tiles when colours shall be
specified by the Authority’s Engineer. There may be more than one colour on a tile.
Preparation of Surfaces
The joints shall be raked out to a depth of at least 15 mm in masonry walls. In case of concrete walls, the
surface shall be hacked and roughened with wire brushes. The surface shall be cleaned thoroughly,
washed with water and kept wet before skirting is commenced.
Laying
12 mm thick plaster of cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand) mix of as specified shall be applied
and allowed to harden. The plaster shall be roughened with wire brushes or by scratching diagonal at
closed intervals.
The tiles should be soaked in water, washed clean, and a coat of cement slurry applied liberally at the
back of tiles and set in the bedding mortar. The tiles shall be tamped and corrected to proper plane and
lines. The tiles shall be set in the required pattern and jointed. The joints shall be as fine as possible. Top
of skirting or dado shall be truly horizontal and joints truly vertical except where otherwise indicated. Odd
size/cut size of tile shall be adjusted at bottom to take care of slope of the flooring.Skirting and dado shall
rest on the top of the flooring. Where full size tiles cannot be fixed these shall be cut (sawn) to the
required size and their edges rubbed smooth. Skirting /dado shall not project from the finished “surface
of wall” by more than the tile thickness; undulations if any shall be adjusted in wall.
Curing and Finishing

The joints shall be cleaned off the grey cement grout with wire/coir brush or trowel to a depth of 2 mm to
3 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed. Joints shall then be flush pointed with white cement added
with pigments if required to match the colour of tiles. The work shall then be kept wet for 7 days. After
curing, the surface shall be washed and finished clean. The finished work shall not sound hollow when
tapped with a wooden mallet.
Granite Slabs and Granite tile flooring:

The granite slabs shall be hard, sound, durable, and resistant to wear as per IS3376-1974 and IS14223
(part 1): 1995. The granite slabs shall be without any soft veins, cracks or flaws and shall have a uniform
colour. Thickness mentioned in BOQ. The exposed surface of stone slabs shall be machine polished to a
smooth even and true plan and the edges to be chiseled to half its depth, true and square to ensure
uniform width of joint. The edges of stone slabs shall be machine cut square the required shape if
necessary. The stone slab shall be of approved colours and shades. A few approved samples of stone slabs
to be used shall be deposited by the contractor in the office of the EIC.
i) Mortar Bedding:
Cement mortar shall be prepared in a mortar mill or pan. The amount of water added shall be the
minimum necessary to give just sufficient plasticity for laying and satisfactory bedding. Care shall be taken
in preparing the mortar to ensure that there are no hard lumps that would interfere with the even
bedding of the stone slabs. Before spreading the mortar the sub floor or base cleaned of all dirt, scum,
loose materials and laitance if any by scrubbing with coir or steel wire brush or by hacking if necessary,
and then well wetted without forming any pools of water on the surface. Before laying the mortar, the

sub grade shall be got approved by the EIC. In case of R.C.C. floors, the top shall be left little rough. All
points of level of the finished paving surface shall be marked out. The mortar shall then be evenly and
smoothly spread over the base by the use of screed battens, only over so much area, as will be covered
with slabs within half an hour. The thickness of the mortar bedding shall not be less than 20mm and not
less than 10mm. The required slope shall be given to the bed. Unless otherwise specified, the proportion
of mortar bedding shall be 1:4 (1 cement : 4 sand). Sand for mortar bedding shall be from approved
source, and shall conform to I.S. NO.2116-1965 as applicable to unreinforced masonry work.
iii) Laying, Curing, Polishing, Finishing and Cleaning:

The stone slabs shall be laid on the neat cement float and shall be evenly and firmly bedded to the
required level and slope in the mortar bed. The stone slabs shall be laid in the approved pattern in single
or two-tone colour. Each stone slab shall be gently tapped with a wooden mallet till it is firmly and
properly bedded. There shall be no hollows left. If there is a hollow sound on gentle tapping of the stone
slabs, such stone slabs shall be removed and reset properly. The mason shall make the joint of uniform
thickness and straight lines. The thickness of joints shall not exceed 1.5mm. The joints shall be grouted
with neat cement slurry. No border stone slabs shall be less than 4" in width, unless otherwise approved
by the Architect. When the bedding and joints of the flooring have been completely set, the surface shall
be machine polished to give a smooth, even and true plane to the floor and thoroughly cleaned.
iv) Rates to include:

Apart from other factors mentioned elsewhere in this contract the contractor's rate quoted shall include
for the following:
 Cleaning the base and providing and laying bedding mortar and levelling.
 Providing and fixing the stone slabs in neat cement float on the bedding mortar.
 Filling joints of stone slabs with neat cement slurry of required colour to match the colour of the
stone slabs.
 Chiselling, polishing, finishing and cleaning.
 All labour, materials and use of tools for carrying out the item as specified above.
RED OR WHITE FINE DRESSED SAND STONE CLADDING (If Required)

Stone slab:
The slabs shall be red or white as specified in the description of the item. The stone slabs shall be hard,
sound, durable and tough, free from cracks, decay and weathering. In case of red sand stone, white
patches or streaks shall not be allowed. However, scattered spots upto 10 mm diameter will be
permitted. Before starting the work the contractor shall get samples of slabs approved by the Engineer-
in-Charge.
The slabs shall be hand or machine cut to the requisite thickness along planes parallel to the natural bed
of stone and should be of uniform size if required.
Dressing of Slabs
Every slab shall be cut to the required size and shape and chisel dressed on all sides to a minimum depth
of 20 mm. The top and the joints shall be fine tooled so that straight edge laid along the face is fully in
contact with it. In case machine cut stones are used, chisel dressing and fine tooling of machine cut
surface need not be done provided a straight edge laid anywhere along the machine cut surface is in
contact with every point on it

The thickness of the slabs after dressing shall be 40 mm or as specified in the description of item with a
permissible tolerance of ± 2 mm
Laying
12 mm thick plaster of cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand) mix of as specified shall be applied
and allowed to harden. The plaster shall be roughened with wire brushes or by scratching diagonal at
closed intervals.
The tiles/slab should be soaked in water, washed clean, and a coat of cement slurry applied liberally at the
back of tiles/slab and set in the bedding mortar. The tiles/slab shall be tamped and corrected to proper
plane and lines. The tiles/slab shall be set in the required pattern and jointed. The joints shall be as fine as
possible. Top of skirting or dado shall be truly horizontal and joints truly vertical except where otherwise
indicated. Odd size/cut size of tile shall be adjusted at bottom to take care of slope of the flooring.Skirting
and dado shall rest on the top of the flooring. Where full size tiles /slab cannot be fixed these shall be cut
(sawn) to the required size and their edges rubbed smooth. Skirting /dado shall not project from the
finished “surface of wall” by more than the tile thickness; undulations if any shall be adjusted in wall.
MARBLE STONE FLOORING (If Required)

Dressing of Slabs
Every stone shall be cut to the required size and shape, fine chisel dressed on all sides to the full depth so
that a straight edge laid along the side of the stone shall be fully in contact with it. The top surface shall
also be fine chisel dressed to remove all waviness. In case machine cut slabs are used, fine chisel dressing
of machine cut surface need not be done provided a straight edge laid anywhere along the machine cut
surfaces is in contact with every point on it. The sides and top surface of slabs shall be machined rubbed
or table rubbed with coarse sand before paving. All angles and edges of the marble slabs shall be true,
square and free from chippings and the surface shall be true and plane. The thickness of the slabs shall be
16 mm as specified in the description of the item. Tolerance of + 3% shall be allowed for the thickness. In
respect of length and breadth of slabs a tolerance of + 2% shall be allowed.
Laying
Base concrete or the RCC slab on which the slabs are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped. The
bedding for the slabs shall be with cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) or as given in the
description of the item. The average thickness of the bedding mortar under the slab shall be 20 mm and
the thickness at any place under the slab shall be not less than 12 mm.
The slabs shall be laid in the following manner:
Mortar of the specified mix shall be spread under the area of each slab, roughly to the average thickness
specified in the item. The slab shall be washed clean before laying. It shall be laid on top, pressed, tapped
with wooden mallet and brought to level with the adjoining slabs. It shall be lifted and laid aside. The top
surface of the mortar shall then be corrected by adding fresh mortar at hollows. The mortar is allowed to
harden a bit and cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be spread over the same at the rate of 4.4
kg of cement per sqm. The edges of the slab already paved shall be buttered with grey or white cement
with or without admixture of pigment to match the shade of the marble slabs as given in the description
of the item.
The slab to be paved shall then be lowered gently back in position and tapped with wooden mallet till it is
properly bedded in level with and close to the adjoining slabs with as fine a joint as possible. Subsequent
slabs shall be laid in the same manner. After each slab has been laid, surplus cement on the surface of the
slabs shall be cleaned off. The flooring shall be cured for a minimum period of seven days. The surface of

the flooring as laid shall be true to levels, and, slopes as instructed by the Client/Project manager. Joint
thickness shall not be more than 1 mm. The slabs shall be matched as shown in drawings or as instructed
by the Client/Project manager.
Polishing and Finishing
After the tiles/Slabs are laid all joints shall be cleaned of the grey cement grout with a wire brush or
trowel to a depth of 5 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed and cleaned. Joints shall then be
grouted with grey or white cement mixed with or without pigment to match the shape of the topping of
the wearing layer of the tiles/slabs. The same cement slurry shall be applied to the entire surface of the
tiles in a thin coat with a view to protect the surface from abrasive damage and fill the pin holes that may
exist on the surface.
The floor shall then be kept wet for a minimum period of 7 days. The surface shall thereafter be grounded
evenly with machine fitted with coarse grade grit block. Water shall be used profusely during grinding.
After grinding the surface shall be thoroughly washed to remove all grinding mud, cleaned and mopped. It
shall then be covered with a thin coat of grey or white cement, mixed with or without pigment to match
the colour of the topping of the wearing surface in order to fill any pin hole that appear. The surface shall
be again cured. The second grinding shall then be carried out with machine fitted with fine grade grit
block.
The final grinding with machine fitted with the finest grade grit blocks shall be carried out the day after
the second grinding before handing over the floor
After the final polish, oxalic acid shall be dusted over the surface at the rate of 33 gm per square metre
sprinkled with water and rubbed .The following day the floor shall be wiped with a moist rag and dried
with a soft cloth and finished clean.
Measurement
Marble stone flooring with different kind of marble shall be measured separately and in square metre
correct to two places of decimal. Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm before laying
skirting, dado or wall plaster. No deduction shall be made nor extra paid for voids not exceeding 0.20
square metre. Deductions for ends of dissimilar materials or other articles embedded shall not be made
for areas not exceeding 0.10 square metre. Nothing extra shall be paid for laying the floor at different
levels in the same room. Steps and treads of stairs paved with marble stone slabs shall also be measured
under the item of Marble Stone flooring. Extra shall, however, be paid for such areas where the width of
treads does not exceed 30 cm. The width of treads shall be measured from the outer edge of the nosing,
as laid, before providing the riser
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations described above.
However, extra shall be paid for making special type of pattern/design/flowers as per drawings.
CHEQUERED TILE FLOORING

Chequered Tiles The tiles shall be of nominal sizes such as 20 × 20 cm, 25 × 25 cm and 30 × 30 cm or of
standard sizes with equal sides. The size of tiles to be used shall be as shown in drawings or as required by
the Authority’s Engineer. The centre to centre distance of chequers shall not be less than 2.5 cm and not
more than 5 cm.
The overall thickness of the tiles shall not be less than 30 mm. The grooves in the chequers shall be
uniform and straight. The depth of the grooves shall not be less than 3 mm. The chequered tiles shall be

cement tiles, or terrazo tiles as specified in the description of the item. The thickness of the upper layer,
measured from the top of the chequers shall not be less than 6 mm.
Laying
Base concrete or the RCC slab on which the slabs are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped. The
bedding for the slabs shall be with cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) or as given in the
description of the item. The average thickness of the bedding mortar under the slab shall be 20 mm and
the thickness at any place under the slab shall be not less than 12 mm.
The slabs shall be laid in the following manner:

Mortar of the specified mix shall be spread under the area of each slab, roughly to the average thickness
specified in the item. The slab shall be washed clean before laying. It shall be laid on top, pressed, tapped
with wooden mallet and brought to level with the adjoining slabs. It shall be lifted and laid aside. The top
surface of the mortar shall then be corrected by adding fresh mortar at hollows. The mortar is allowed to
harden a bit and cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be spread over the same at the rate of 4.4
kg of cement per sqm. The edges of the slab already paved shall be buttered with grey or white cement
with or without admixture of pigment to match the shade of the marble slabs as given in the description
of the item.
The slab to be paved shall then be lowered gently back in position and tapped with wooden mallet till it is
properly bedded in level with and close to the adjoining slabs with as fine a joint as possible. Subsequent
slabs shall be laid in the same manner. After each slab has been laid, surplus cement on the surface of the
slabs shall be cleaned off. The flooring shall be cured for a minimum period of seven days. The surface of
the flooring as laid shall be true to levels, and, slopes as instructed by the Client/Project manager. Joint
thickness shall not be more than 1 mm. The slabs shall be matched as shown in drawings or as instructed
by the Client/Project manager
VACUUM DEWATERING PROCESS (VDF) FLOORING

Providing and laying C.C. pavement of mix M-25 with ready mixed concrete from batching plant. The
ready mixed concrete shall be laid and finished with screed board vibrator , vacuum dewatering process
(VDF) and finally finished by floating, brooming with wire brush etc. complete as per specifications and
directions of Authority’s Engineer.
WOODEN FLOORING (if required)

Seasoning and Preservation: All timber used for timber floors shall be thoroughly seasoned in accordance
with IS 1141. After seasoning the timber shall be treated with preservative in accordance with IS 401.
Seasoning and preservative treatment shall be paid for separately unless otherwise specifically included in
the description of the item of flooring.
Supporting Joists: Main beams and joists of the class of wood sections specified in the description of the
item for beams and joists, or as instructed by the Authority’s Engineer shall be fixed in position to dead
levels. The width of the joints shall not be less than 50 mm. The arrangement and spacing of beams joists
etc. shall be as per design furnished.

It shall be of the class of timber and thickness specified in the description of the item. The timber shall be
as specified as per the direction of Authority’s Engineer/Client. Only selected boards of uniform width
shall be used. Unless otherwise specified or shown in the drawings, the width of boards selected shall not
be less than 100 mm nor more than 150 mm. The same width of boards shall not be maintained
throughout except where the width of the room is not an exact multiple of the boards. In the latter case,
the difference shall be equally adjusted between the two end boards (adjacent to walls). The length of the
boards shall not exceed 3 metre anywhere. Ordinarily, the minimum length of boards shall be such that
the boards shall rest at least on three supports, except where otherwise required by the pattern specified
in the drawings or as directed by the Authority’s Engineer.
Fixing
The joists on which the planks shall be fixed shall be checked and corrected to levels. The end boards shall
be accurately fixed with the sides parallel and close to the walls. Each adjoining board shall be carefully
jointed and shall be tightened in position and screwed. For fixing the boards to the joists, two screws shall
be used at each end of the boards and one screw at each of the intermediate joists in a zig-zag manner.
The screws shall be countersunk and screw holes filled with approved stopping.
 The junction between timber flooring and adjacent flooring shall be formed by inserting a metal
strip (brass or aluminium) at the junction. The metal strip shall be fixed to the end of the planks
by screws. The strips shall be paid for extra.
 The flooring shall be truly level and plane. The joints shall be truly parallel and or perpendicular
to the walls, unless otherwise specified.
 The floor shall be plane in both directions and made perfectly even, true and smooth.
 The boards shall be planed true on the top face only unless otherwise specified in the description
of the item. Where the bottom face is exposed and it is also required to be planed, then such
planning shall be paid for extra.
 Unless otherwise described in the item, the longitudinal joints of planks shall be tongued and
grooved to a minimum depth of 12 mm while the heading joints shall be of the square butt type
and shall occur over the centre line of the supporting joists. Heading joists in adjacent boards
shall be placed over the same joists.
Rate: The rate shall include the cost of the labour and materials involved in all the operations described
above, with the exceptions noted in the relevant sub-paras
WOOD WORK AND JOINRY:

Timber:
Unless otherwise specified all timber for frames of doors, should be best quality sal wood. The timber
should be free from knots, shakes, fissure, flaws, sub-cracks & other defects. The surface shall be smooth
& free from blemishes & discolorations.
All timber for carpentry and joinery in touch with masonry or concrete shall be painted with wood
preservative before fixing.

All fully fabricated timber shall be seasoned and chemically treated. The preparation of timber for joinery
is to commence simultaneously with the beginning of the project work generally and should proceed
continuously until all the wood work is prepared and fixed / stacked on/ near the site as the case may be.
Workmanship and Construction:

The workmanship shall be first class and to the approval of the Authority’s Engineer. Scantling and
boardings shall be accurately sawn and shall be of required width and thickness. All carpenters work shall
be wrought except where otherwise described. The workmanship and joinery shall be accurately set out
in strict accordance with the drawing and shall be framed together and securely fixed in approved manner
and with properly made joints. All work is to be properly made joints. All work is to be properly
shouldered wedged, pinned, braded etc. and properly glued with approved quality adhesive to the
satisfaction of the Authority’s Engineer. Door / window frames shall have cut rebates. Planted rebated
shall not be permitted. Where door frames are fixed flush with plaster to walls, wooden cover mould of
40mm x 12 mm to be provided.
Doors, Frames:
The specification for frames of doors, are described here. The frames shall wrought, framed and fixed in
position as per detailed drawing and as directed by the engineer in charge. Specified timber shall be used,
and it shall be sawn in the direction of the grains. Sawing shall be truly straight and square. The scanting
shall be planed smooth and accurate to the full dimensions, rebates, rounding and mouldings as shown in
the drawings made, before assembling. Patching or plugging of any kind shall not be permitted except as
provided. A tolerance of 2 / 3 mm shall be allowed in the finished cross section dimensions of door and
windows frames.
Joints:
These shall be of mortise and tenon type, simple, neat and strong. Mortise and tendon joints shall fit in
fully and accurately without wedging or filling. The joints shall be glued, framed, put together and planned
with hard wood or bamboo pins not less than 10 mm diameter after the frames are put together in
position by means of a press.
Gluing of joints:
The contact surface of tendon and mortise joints shall be treated before putting together with synthetic
resin adhesive of make, approved by the engineer.
Fixing in Position:
Before the frames are fixed in position, these shall be inspected and passed by the engineer. The frame
shall be placed in proper position and secured to walls or columns as the case maybe with metallic
fastener, iron hold fasts as per direction of the Authority’s Engineer.
In case of door frames without sills the vertical members shall be embedded in the flooring to its full
depth. When sills are provided, these sills shall be embedded and sunk in the floor to its full depth. The
door frames without sills while being placed in position shall be suitably strutted and wedged in order to
prevent warping during construction. The frames shall also be protected from damage, during
construction.
Measurement:
Wood work wrought and framed shall be measured for finished dimensions. No allowance shall be made
for wastage and for dimensions supplied beyond those specified. Length of each peace shall be measured

over all nearest to one cm, so as to include projections for tendons, scarps or meters, width or thickness
shall be measured to the nearest mm.
In case of moldings, rounding, rebates, circular and varying section, the sectional area of the piece shall be
taken as the area of the least square of the rectangle from which such a section can be cut.
Rate:
The rate is to include the cost of all materials required and labour involved in all the operations, described
above.
FLUSH DOOR SHUTTER

Flush door shutters shall have a solid core and may be of the decorative or non-decorative (Paintable type
as per IS 2202 (Part I). Nominal thickness of shutters may be 25, 30, 32 or 35 mm. Thickness and type of
shutters shall be as specified by Client/Project manager.
Width and height of the shutters shall be as shown in the drawings or as indicated by the Engineer- in-
Charge. All four edges of the shutters shall be square. The shutter shall be free from twist or warp in its
plane. The moisture content in timbers used in the manufacture of flush door shutters shall be not more
than 12 per cent when tested according to IS 1708.
Core
The core of the flush door shutters shall be a block board having wooden strips held in a frame
constructed of stiles and rails. Each stile and rail shall be a single piece without any joint. The width of the
stiles and rails including lipping, where provided shall not be less than 45 mm and not more than 75 mm.
The width of each wooden strip shall not exceed 30 mm. Stiles, rails and wooden strips forming the core
of a shutter shall be of equal and uniform thickness. Wooden strips shall be parallel to the stiles.
End joints of the pieces of wooden strips of small lengths shall be staggered. In a shutter, stiles and rails
shall be of one species of timber. Wooden strips shall also be of one species only but it may or may not be
of the same species as that of the stiles and rails. Any species of timber may be used for core of flush
door. However, any non-coniferous (Hard wood) timber shall be used for stiles, rails and lipping.
Face Panel
The face panel shall be formed by gluing, by the hot-press process on both faces of the core, either
laminate or cross-bands and face veneers. The thickness of the cross bands as such or in laminate shall be
between 1.0 mm and 3.0 mm.
Lipping
Lipping, where specified, shall be provided internally on all edges of the shutters. Lipping shall be done
with battens of first class hardwood or as specified of depth not less than 25 mm. For double leaved
shutters, depth of the lipping at meeting of stiles shall be not less than 35 mm. Joints shall not be
permitted in the lipping.
Adhesive
Adhesive used for bonding various components of flush door shutters namely, core, core frame, lipping,
cross-bands, face veneers, plywood etc. and for bonding plywood shall conform to BWP type, phenol
formaldehyde synthetic resin adhesive conforming to IS 848.

Rates
The rate includes the cost of material and labour and all hardware fitting & fixtures involved in all the
operations.
GLASS DOOR SHUTTER

Providing and fixing 12 mm thick frameless toughened etched glass door shutter of approved brand with
machine polished edges, including top & bottom pivot & spring type fixing with an approved make
including 450mm Stainless steel handle & patch lock etc. for fixing required door fittings,as approved by
the Client/Project manager.
Rates
The rate includes the cost of material and labour and all hardware fitting & fixtures involved in all the
operations.
MS SHEET DOOR
Door shall be made of 1 mm thick MS Sheet door with 40x40x6 mm angle iron frame and 3 mm MS gusset
plates using flats 30x6 mm for diagonal braces and central cross piece. All the steel surfaces to be
thoroughly cleaned, free from rust, mill scales, dirt, oil etc by mechanical means, than applying a coat of
red oxide zinc chromate primer and finally finished with minimum two coats of synthetic enamel paint of
approved brand.
LAMINATED SINGLE SHUTTER 4Hrs FIRE RATED HOLLOW METAL DOOR:

Providing and fixing of Hollow metal fire rated doors as per IS 3614,Part 2 & BS 476,Part 20&22 for
stability and integrity. The framing is made out of pressed Galvanised steel confirming to IS 277with the
following specification. Recommended fire door shall have door tested earlier for maximum rating of 4 hrs
tested either with or without vision panel. All door and frames should be finished with Thermosetting
powder coating in desired RAL shades. Any deviation in specification and sheet thickness other than what
is mentioned in the test certificates are not allowed .approved manufacturer should be ISO & CE certified
& IGBC registered company .Rate should include supply and installation of door and hardwares set.
Door frame shall be double rebate profile of minimum size 154mm x 77mm made out of minimum 1.5
mm thick GPSP sheet. NDRF 154mm x 77mm frames shall be butt jointed and field assembled with self
bolted .All provision should be mortised, drilled and tapped for receiving appropriate hardware ,Frames
should be provided with back plate bracket and anchor fasteners for installations on a finished plastered
masonry wall opening.
Door leaf shall be minimum 49mm thick fully flush double skin door with or without vision lite. Door leaf
shall be manufactured from 1.0 mm minimum thick GPSP sheet. The internal construction of the door
should be rigid reinforcement pads for receiving appropriate hardware. The infill material shall be
Rockwool treated with Viper FRS 881 LH. All doors NSD 12049 shall be factory prepped for receiving
appropriate hardware and provided with necessary reinforcement for hinges, lockand door closers. The
edges should be interlocked with a bending radius of 1.44mm.For pairs of doors astragals has to be
provided on the meeting stile for both active and inactive leaf. Vision lite wherever applicable should be
provided as per manufacturers recommendation with a beeding and screw from inside.

WEATHER COAT EXTERIOR PAINT:
o Material: The paint shall be (Textured exterior paint/Acrylic smooth exterior paint/premium acrylic
smooth exterior paint) of approved brand with low VOC and manufacture.
This paint shall be brought to the site of work by the contractor in its original containers in sealed
condition. The material shall be brought in at a time in adequate quantities to suffice for the whole work
or at least a fortnight’s work. The materials shall be kept in the joint custody of the contractor and the
Authority’s Engineer. The empty containers shall not be removed from the site of work till the relevant
item of work has been completed and permission obtained from the Authority’s Engineer.
o Preparation of Surface:- For new work, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned off all mortar dropping,
dirt dust, algae, fungus or moth, grease and other foreign matter of brushing and washing, pitting in
plaster shall make good, surface imperfections such as cracks, holes etc. should be repaired using white
cement. The prepared surface shall have received the approval of the Engineer in charge after inspection
before painting is commenced.
o Application: Base coat of water proofing cement paint

o Before pouring into smaller containers for use, the paint shall be stirred thoroughly in its
container, when applying also the paint shall be continuously stirred in the smaller containers so
that its consistency is kept uniform. Dilution ratio of paint with potable water can be altered
taking into consideration the nature of surface climate and as per recommended dilution given
by manufacturer. In all cases, the manufacturer’s instructions & directions of the Authority’s
Engineer shall be followed meticulously.
The lids of paint drums shall be kept tightly closed when not in use as by exposure to atmosphere
the paint may thicken and also be kept safe from dust.
o Paint shall be applied with a brush on the cleaned and smooth surface. Horizontal strokes shall
be given, First and vertical strokes shall be applied immediately afterwards. This entire operation
will constitute one coat. The surface shall be finished as uniformly as possible leaving no brush
marks
PAINTING (Both interior & Exterior) with Acrylic emulsion paint:

Painting two coats to the wall surface by using 100% premium Acrylic emulsion paint of approved make
like NEROLAC ALLS CAPES 24 carrot emulsion/ BERGER luxel luxury silk emulsion / ASIAN Royal / ICI velve
touch or equivalent make of approved shade to interior wall surface over a coat of primer with water
bond cement primer after preparing the surface smooth by applying putty punning with Synthetic Acrylic
wall putty including finishing the surface smooth by sand papering in all heights including scaffolding
charges with cost, conveyance, taxes of all materials, cost of all labours, etc. as required for the work
complete in all respect
i. Materials:
a. Paints to be used for interior wall shall be of 100% premium Acrylic emulsion paint of approved
make like NEROLAC ALLS CAPES 24 carrot emulsion/ BERGER luxel luxury silk emulsion / ASIAN Royal
/ ICI velvet touch or equivalent make with low VOC of approved shade
b. Paints to be used for exterior wall shall be of 100% Acrylic emulsion paint (1st quality) exterior grade
of approved make & shade manufactured by reputed manufacturer like NEROLAC / ASIAN / BERGER
/ DULOX or equivalent of approved shade with low VOC.

If for any reason thinning is necessary in case of ready mixed paint, the brand of thinner
recommended by the manufacturer or as instructed by the Authority’s Engineer shall be used.
Approved, paints, oil or varnishes shall be brought to the site of work by the Contractor in their
original containers in sealed condition. The material shall be brought in at a time in adequate
quantities to suffice for the whole work or at least a fortnight’s work. The materials shall be kept in
the joint custody of the contractor and the Authority’s Engineer. The empties shall not be removed
from the site work, till the relevant item of work has been completed and permission obtained from
ii. Commencing Work:
Painting shall not be started until the Authority’s Engineer has inspected the items of work to be
painted, satisfied himself about their proper quality and given his approval to commence the
painting work. Painting of external surface should not be done in adverse weather condition like hail
storm and dust storm.
Painting, except the priming coat, shall generally be taken in hand after practically finishing all other
builder’s work.
The rooms should be thoroughly swept out and the entire building cleaned up, at least one day in
advance of the paint work being started.
iii. Preparation of Surface:
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned from dust & other foreign materials. . All rust, dirt scales,
smoke and grease shall be thoroughly removed before painting is started. The prepared surface shall
have received the approval of the Authority’s Engineer after inspection, before painting is
commenced.
iv. Application:
Before pouring into small containers for use, the paint shall be thoroughly in its containers, when
applying also the paint shall be continuously stirred in the smaller containers so that its consistency
is kept uniform.
Scaffolding shall be stout and strong to prevent any collapse or displacement. Proper measures for
safety of workmen working on scaffolding should be taken by the contractor to reach heights in
conformity with approved standards. As the paint is to be applied over a coat of primer with water
bond cement primer, the surface is to be prepared smooth by applying putty, punning with
Synthetic Acrylic wall putty including finishing the surface by sand papering. The painting shall be
laid on evenly and smoothly by means of crossing and laying off, the later in the direction of the
grain of wood. The crossing and laying off consists of covering the area over with paint, brushing the
surface hard for the first time cover and then brushing alternately in opposite direction, two or three
times and then finally brushing lightly in a direction at right angles to the same. In this process, no
brush mark shall be left after the laying off is finished. The full process of crossing and laying off will
constitute one coat.
The left over paint shall be put back into the stock tins. When not in use, the containers shall be kept
properly closed.
No hair marks from the brush or clogging of paint putties in the corners of panels, angles of
mouldings etc. shall be left on the work.
In painting nearer to doors and windows, the putty round the glass panes must also be painted, but
care must be taken to see that no paint stains etc. are left on the glass. Tops of shutters and surfaces
in similar hidden locations shall not be left out in painting.

The additional specifications for primer and other coats of paints shall be as according to the
detailed specifications under the respective headings.
Brush and Containers:
After work, the brushes shall be completely cleaned of paint and linsed oil by rinsing with
turpentine. A brush in which paint has dried up in ruined and shall on no account be used for
painting work. The containers when not in use shall be kept closed and free from air so that paint
does not thicken and also shall be kept safe from dust. When the paint has been used, the
containers shall be washed with turpentine and wiped dry with soft clean cloth, so that they are
clean, and can be used again.
v. Measurements:
The length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm. The area shall be calculated in sq. meters
(correct to two places of decimal), except otherwise stated, small articles not exceeding 10 sq.
decimeters (0.1 Sqm.) of painted surfaces where not in conjunction with similar painted work shall
be enumerated.
Painting up to15 cm in width or in girth and not in conjunction with similar painted work shall be
given in running meters. Weather Coat Cement Painting to outside walls
PAINTING
i. Materials:
Paints, oil, varnishes etc. of approved brand and manufacturer shall be used ready mixed paint as
received from the manufacturer without any admixture shall be used. All materials shall be low VOC
levels. If for any reason thinning is necessary in case of ready mixed paint, the brand of thinner
recommended by the manufacturer or as instructed by the Authority’s Engineer shall be used.
Approved, paints, oil or varnishes shall be brought to the site of work by the Contractor in their
original containers in sealed condition. The material shall be brought in at a time in adequate
quantities to suffice for the whole work or at least a fortnight’s work. The materials shall be kept in
the joint custody of the contractor and the Authority’s Engineer. The empties shall not be removed
from the site work, till the relevant item of work has been completed and permission obtained from
ii. Commencing Work:
Painting shall not be started until the Authority’s Engineer has inspected the items of work to be
painted, satisfied himself about their proper quality and given his approval to commence the
painting work. Painting of external surface should not be done in adverse weather condition like hail
storm and dust storm.
Painting, except the priming coat, shall generally be taken in hand after practically finishing all other
builder’s work. The rooms should be thoroughly swept out and the entire building cleaned up, at
least one day in advance of the paint work being started.
iii. Preparation of Surface:
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned from dust & other foreign materials... All rust, dirt scales,
smoke and grease shall be thoroughly removed before painting is started. The prepared surface shall
have received the approval of the Authority’s Engineer after inspection, before painting is
commenced.
iv. Application:

Before pouring into small containers for use, the paint shall be thoroughly stirred in its containers,
when applying also the paint shall be continuously stirred in the smaller containers so that its
consistency is kept uniform.
The painting shall be laid on evenly and smoothly by means of crossing and laying off, the later in
the direction of the grain of wood. The crossing and laying off consists of covering the area over with
paint, brushing the surface hard for the first time cover and then brushing alternately in opposite
direction, two or three times and then finally brushing lightly in a direction at right angles to the
same. In this process, no brush mark shall be left after the laying off is finished. The full process of
crossing and lying off will constitute one coat.
 The left over paint shall be put back into the stock tins. When not in use, the containers
shall be kept properly closed.
 No hair marks from the brush or clogging of paint putties in the corners of panels, angles of
moldings etc. shall be left on the work.
 In painting doors and windows, the putty round the glass panes must also be painted, but
care must be taken to see that no paint stains etc. are left on the glass. Tops of shutters and
surfaces in similar hidden locations shall not be left out in painting.
 In painting steel work, special care shall be taken while painting over bolts, nuts, rivets,
overlaps etc.
 The additional specifications for primer and other coats of paints shall be as according to
the detailed specifications under the respective headings.
Brush and Containers:

After work, the brushes shall be completely cleaned of paint and linsed oil by rinsing with
turpentine. A brush in which paint has dried up in ruined and shall on no account be used for
painting work. The containers when not in use shall be kept closed and free from air so that paint
does not thicken and also shall be kept safe from dust. When the paint has been used, the
containers shall be washed with turpentine and wiped dry with soft clean cloth. So that they are
clean, and can be used again.
v. Measurements:
The length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm. The area shall be calculated in sq. meters
(correct to two places of decimal), except otherwise stated, small articles not exceeding 10 sq.
decimeters (0.1 Sqm.) of painted surfaces where not in conjunction with similar painted work shall
be enumerated. Painting up to15 cm in width or in girth and not in conjunction with similar painted
work shall be given in running meters.
SS STEEL AND MS WORK WELDED IN BUILT-UP SECTIONS FOR HAND RAIL:
Laying Out:
A figure of the steel structure to be fabricated shall be drawn on a level platform to full scale. This
may be done in full or in parts, as shown on drawings or as directed by the Authority’s Engineer.
Steel tape shall be used for measurements.
Fabrication:-

Straightening, shaping to form, cutting and assembling, shall be as per CPWD clause 10.3.2 as far as
applicable, except that the words “riveted or bolted” shall be read as “welded” and holes shall only
be used for the bolts used for temporary fastening as shown in drawings.
Welding: Welding shall generally be done by electric arc process as per IS 816 and IS 823. The
electric arc method is usually adopted and is economical. Where electricity for public is not available
generators shall be arranged by the contractor at his own cost unless otherwise specified. Gas
welding shall only by resorted to using oxyacetylene flame with specific approval of the Authority’s
Engineer. Gas welding shall not be permitted for structural steel work Gas welding required eating
of the members to be welded along with the welding rod and is likely to create temperature stresses
in the welded members. Precautions shall therefore be taken to avoid distortion of the members
due to these temperature stresses.
The work shall be done as shown in the shop drawings which should clearly indicate various details
of the joint to be welded, type of welds, shop and site welds as well as the types of electrodes to be
used. Symbol for welding on plans and shops drawings shall be according to IS 813.
As far as possible every effort shall be made to limit the welding that must be done after the
structure is erected so as to avoid the improper welding that is likely to be done due to heights and
difficult positions on scaffolding etc. apart from the aspect of economy. The maximum dia of
electrodes for welding work shall be as per IS 814. Joint surfaces which are to be welded together
shall be free from loose mill scale, rust, paint, grease or other foreign matter, which adversely affect
the quality of weld and workmanship.
Precautions: All operation connected with welding and cutting equipment shall conform to the
safety requirements given in IS 818 for safety requirements and Health provision in Electric and gas
welding and cutting operations.
Assembly: Before welding is commenced, the members to be welded shall first be brought together
and firmly clamped or tack welded to be held in position. This temporary connection has to be
strong enough to hold the parts accurately in place without any disturbance. Tack welds located in
places where final welds will be made later shall conform to the final weld in quality and shall be
cleaned off slag before final weld is made.
Erection: The specification shall be as described in 10.3.3 except that while erecting a welded
structure adequate means shall be employed for temporary fastening the members together and
bracing the frame work until the joints are welded. Such means shall consists of applying of erection
bolts, tack welding or other positive devices imparting sufficient strength and stiffness to resist all
temporary loads and lateral forces including wind. Owing to the small number of bolts ordinarily
employed for joints which are to be welded, the temporary support of heavy girders carrying
columns shall be specially attended. Different members which shall be fillet welded, shall be brought
into as close contact as possible. The gap due to faulty workmanship or incorrect fit if any shall not
exceed. 1.5 mm if gap exceeds 1.5 mm or more occurs locally the size of fillet weld shall be
increased at such position by an amount equal to the width of the gap.

Painting: Before the member of the steel structures are placed in position or taken out of the
workshop these shall be painted as specified in CPWD clause 10.2.2
PAINTING WITH SYNTHETIC ENAMEL PAINT
Synthetic Enamel Paint (conforming to IS 2933) of approved brand and manufacture and of the
required colour shall be used for the top coat and an undercoat of ordinary Paint of shade to match
the top coat as recommended by the same manufacturer as far the top coat shall be used.
Painting on new surface:-
Wooden Surface : The wood work to be painted shall be dry and free from moisture. The surface shall
be thoroughly cleaned. All unevenness shall be rubbed down smooth with sand paper and shall be
well dusted. Knots, if any shall be covered with preparation of red lead made by grinding red lead in
water and mixing with strong glue sized and used hot. Appropriate filler material conforming to IS
345 with same shade as Paint shall be used where specified. The surface treated for knotting shall be
dry before Paint is applied. After obtaining approval of Authority’s Engineer for wood work, the
priming coat shall be applied before the wood work is fixed in position. After the priming coat is
applied, the holes and indentation on the surface shall be stopped with glazier’s putty or wood putty.
Stopping shall not be done before the priming coat is applied as the wood will absorb the oil in
stopping and the latter is therefore liable to crack.
Iron & Steel Surface : All rust and scales shall be removed by scrapping or by brushing with steel wire
brushes. Hard skin of oxide formed on the surface of wrought iron during rolling which becomes
loose by rusting, shall be removed.
All dust and dirt shall be thoroughly wiped away from the surface.If the surface is wet, it shall be
dried before priming coat is undertaken.
Application: The number of coats including the undercoat shall be as stipulated in the item.
Under Coat: One coat of the specified ordinary Paint of shade suited to the shade of the top coat,
shall be applied and allowed to dry overnight. It shall be rubbed next day with the finest grade of wet
abrasive paper to ensure a smooth and even surface, free from brush marks and all loose particles
dusted off.
Top Coat : Top coats of synthetic enamel Paint of desired shade shall be applied after the undercoat is
thoroughly dry. Additional finishing coats shall be applied if found necessary to ensureproperly
uniform glossy surface.
FACTORY MADE CEMENT CONCRETE INTERLOCKING BLOCK (If required)
Base
Interlocking paver block to be fixed on the bed 50 mm or specified otherwise thick of coarse sand of
approved specification and filling the joints with the sand of approved type and quality or as specified
and as directed by Authority’s Engineer.

Interlocking Paver Block
Factory made precast paver block of M-30 or otherwise specified grade to be used. Paver blocks to be
of approved brand and manufacturer and of approved quality. Minimum strength as prescribed by
manufacturer and as per direction of Authority’s Engineer for the grade specified to be tested as per
method mentioned in specification of subhead cement concrete of CPWD Specification 2009 Vol. I.
KERB STONE(PRECAST):-`
Laying:-
Trenches shall first be made along the edge of the wearing course of the road to receive the kerb
stones of cement concrete of specified grade. The bed of the trenches shall be compacted manually
with steel rammers to a firm and even surface and then the stones shall be set in cement mortar of
specified proportion.
The kerb stones with top 20 cm. wide shall be laid with their length running parallel to the road edge,
true in line and gradient at a distance of 30 cm. from the road edge to allow for the channel and shall
project about 12.5 cm. above the latter. The channel stones with top 30 cm. wide shall be laid in
position in chamber with finished road surface and with sufficient slope towards the road gully
chamber. The joints of kerb and channel stones shall be staggered and shall be not more than 10 mm.
Wherever specified all joints shall be filled with mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) and pointed
with mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 fine sand) which shall be cured for 7 days.
The necessary drainage openings of specified sizes shall be made through the kerb as per drawings or
as directed by the Authority’s Engineer for connecting to storm water drains.
Finishing:- Berms and road edges shall be restored and all surplus earth including rubbish etc.
disposed off as directed by the Authority’s Engineer. Nothing extra shall be paid for this.
Measurements:-It shall be measured in cubic meters with Length of the finished work (for specified
width and height of stone) shall be measured in running metre along the edge of the road correct to a
cm.
CEMENT CONCRETE PIPES(LIGHT DUTY):

Cement Concrete Pipes (with and without Reinforcement) (Light Duty, Non-Pressure)
The pipes shall be with or without reinforcement as required and shall be of class not lesser than
NP2. These shall conform to IS 458 and shall be capable of withstanding a test pressure of 0.07 MPa
(7 m head). The reinforced cement concrete pipes shall be manufactured by centrifugal (or spun)
process while un-reinforced cement concrete pipes by spun or pressure process. All pipes shall be
true to shape, straight, perfectly sound and free from cracks and flaws. The external and internal
surface of the pipes shall be smooth and hard. The pipes shall be free from defects resulting from
imperfect grading of the aggregate mixing or moulding. Concrete used for the manufacture of un-
reinforced and reinforced concrete pipes and collars shall not be leaner than 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2
coarse sand: 4 graded stone aggregate). The maximum size of aggregate should not exceed one third
of the thickness of the pipe or 20 mm whichever is smaller for pipes above 250 mm internal diameter.
But for pipes of internal diameter 80 to 250 mm, the maximum size of aggregate should be 10mm.

The reinforcement in the reinforced concrete pipes shall extend throughout the length of the pipe.
The circumferential and longitudinal reinforcements shall be adequate to withstand the specified
hydrostatic pressure and further bending stresses due to the weight of water when running full
across a span equal to the length of pipe plus three times its own weight.
The minimum clear cover for reinforcement in pipes and collars shall be as given in Table.
Sl. No. Precast concrete pipe/collar Minimum clear cover, mm

(i) Barrel wall thickness
(a) Upto and including 75 mm 8
(b) Over 75 mm 15
(ii) At spigot steps 5
(iii) At end of longitudinal 5
Note : An effective means shall be provided for maintaining the reinforcement in position and for
ensuring correct cover during manufacture of the unit. Spacers for this purpose shall be of rust proof
material or of steel protected against corrosion.
 Laying and Jointing Cement Concrete Pipes and Specials:
(i) Trenches: Trenches shall be as described in 18.4.4.(CPWD specs) Where the pipes are to be
bedded directly on soil, the bed shall be suitably rounded to fit the lower part of the pipe, the cost for
this operation being included in the rate for laying the pipe itself.
(ii) Loading, transporting and unloading of concrete pipes shall be done with care. Handling shall be
such as to avoid impact. Gradual unloading by inclined plane or by chain pulley block is
recommended. All pipe sections and connections shall be inspected carefully before being laid.
Broken or defective pipes or connections shall not be used. Pipes shall be lowered into the trenches
carefully. Mechanical appliances may be used. Pipes shall be laid true to line and grade as specified.
Laying of pipes shall proceed upgrade of a slope.
(iii) If the pipes have spigot and socket joints, the socket ends shall face upstream. In the case of
pipes with joints to be made with loose collars, the collars shall be slipped on before the next pipe is
laid. Adequate and proper expansion joints shall be provided where directed.
(iv) In case where foundation conditions are unusual such as in the proximity of trees or holes, under
existing or proposed tracks manholes etc. the pipe shall be encased all-around in 15 cm thick cement
concrete 1:5:10 (1 cement : 5 fine sand : 10 graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size) or
compacted sand or gravel.
(v) In cases where the natural foundation is inadequate the pipes shall be laid either in concrete
cradle supported on proper foundations or on any other suitably designed structure. If a concrete
th
cradle bedding is used the depth of concrete below the bottom of the pipe shall be at least 1/4 of
the internal dia of the pipe subject to the min. of 10 cm and a maximum of 30 cm. The concrete shall
extend up the sides of the pipe at least to a distance of 1/4th of the outside diameter of
pipes 300 mm and over in dia. The pipe shall be laid in this concrete bedding before the concrete has
set. Pipes laid in trenches in earth shall be bedded evenly and firmly and as far up the haunches of
the pipe as to safely transmit the load expected from the backfill through the pipe to the bed. This
shall be done either by excavating the bottom of the trench to fit the curve of the pipe or by
compacting the earth under around the curve of the pipe to form an even bed. Necessary provision
shall be made for joints wherever required.

(vi) When the pipe is laid in a trench in rock hard clay, shale or other hard material the space below
the pipe shall be excavated and replaced with an equalising bed of concrete, sand or compacted
earth. In no place shall pipe be laid directly on such hard material.
(vii) The method of bedding and laying the pipes under different conditions
(viii) When the pipes are laid completely above the ground the foundations shall be made even and
sufficiently compacted to support the pipe line without any material settlement. Alternatively the
pipe line shall be supported on rigid foundations at intervals. Suitable arrangements shall be made to
retain the pipe line in the proper alignment, such as by shaping the top of the supports to
fit the lower part of the pipe. The distance between the supports shall in no case exceed the length of
the pipe. The pipe shall be supported as far as possible close to the joints. In no case shall the joints
come in the centre of the span. Care shall be taken to see that super imposed loads greater than the
total load equivalent to the weight of the pipe when running full shall not be permitted.
Suitably designed anchor blocks at change of direction and grades for pressure lines shall be provided
where required.
(ix) Jointing: Joints are generally of rigid type. Where specified flexible type joints may also be
provided.
(a) Rigid Spigot and Socket Joint : The spigot of each pipe shall be slipped home well into the socket
of the pipe previously laid and adjusted in the correct position. The opening of the joint shall be filled
with stiff mixture of cement mortar in the proportion of 1:2 (1 cement: 2 fine sand) which shall be
rammed with caulking tool. After a day’s work any extraneous material shall be removed from the
inside of the pipe and the newly made joint shall be cured.
(b) Rigid Collar Joint : The two adjoining pipes shall be butted against each other and adjusted in
correct position. The collar shall then be slipped over the joint, covering equally both the pipes. The
annular space shall be filled with stiff mixture of cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 fine sand) which
shall be rammed with caulking fool. After a day’s work any extraneous materials shall be removed
from the inside of the pipe and the newly made joint shall be cured.
(c) Semi Flexible Spigot and Socket Joint (Fig. 19.10): The joint is composed of specially shaped
spigot and socket ends on the concrete pipes. A rubber ring shall be placed on the spigot which shall
be forced into the socket of the pipe previously laid. This compresses the rubber ring as it rolls into
the annular space formed between the two surfaces of the spigot and the socket, stiff mixture of
cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 fine sand) shall then be filled into the remaining annular space and
rammed with a caulking tool. After day’s work any extraneous materials shall be removed from the
inside of the pipe and the newly made joint shall be cured.
(d) Semi Flexible Collar Joint: This is made up of a loose collar which covers two specially shaped
pipe ends . Each end shall be fitted with a rubber ringwhich when compressed between the spigot
and the collar, seal the joint. Stiff mixture of cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 fine sand), shall then be
filled into the remaining annular space and rammed with a caulking tool. After day’s work, any
extraneous material shall be removed from the inside of the pipe and the newly made joint shall be
cured.
(e) Internal Flush Joint: This joint is generally used for culvert pipe of 60 cm dia and over. The ends
of the pipe are specially shaped to form a self centering joint with an internal jointing space 1.3 cm
wide the finished joint is flush with both inside and outside with the pipe wall as shown in Fig. 19.10.
The jointing space is filled with cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 fine sand) mixed sufficiently dry to

remain in position when forced with a trowel or rammer. After day’s work, any extraneous material
shall be removed from the inside of the pipe and the newly made joint shall be cured.
(f) External Flush Joint : This joint is suitable for pipes which are too small for jointing from inside.
This joint is composed of specially shaped pipe ends . Each end shall be butted against each other and
adjusted in correct position. The jointing space shall then be filled with cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement:
2 fine sand) sufficiently dry and finished off flush. Great care shall be taken to ensure that the
projecting ends are not damaged as no repairs can be readily affected from inside the pipe.
(x) In all pressure pipe lines the recess at the end of the pipe line shall be filled with jute braiding
dipped in hot bitumen or other suitable approved compound. Pipes shall be so jointed that the
bitumen ring of one pipe shall set into the recess of the next pipe. The ring shall be thoroughly
compressed by jacking or by any other suitable method.
The number of pipes that shall be jacked together at a time shall depend on the diameter of the pipes
and the bearing capacity of the soil, for small pipes up to 25 cm diameter, six pipes can be jacked
together at a time. The quantity of jute and bitumen in the ring shall be just sufficient to fill the recess
in the pipe when pressed hard by jacking or by any other suitable method. Before and during jacking
care shall be taken to see that there is no offset at the joint.
(xi) Testing: For pressure pipes, the completed pipeline shall be tested for pressure (Known as site
test pressure) which shall not be less than the maximum pipeline operating pressure plus the
calculated surge pressure, but in no case shall it exceed the hydrostatic test pressure. For
nonpressure pipes the joints shall be tested as per procedure laid down under CPWD specs19.2.1.2.
(xii) Refilling of Trenches: The specification described in CPWD specs19.2.1.2 (v) shall apply. In case
where pipes are not bedded on concrete special care shall be taken in refilling, trenches to prevent
the displacement and subsequent settlement at the surface resulting in uneven street surfaces and
dangers to foundations etc. The backfilling materials shall be packed by hand under and around the
pipe and rammed with a shovel and light tamper. This method of filling will be continued up to the
top of pipe. The refilling shall rise evenly on both sides of the pipe and continued up to 60 cm above
the top of pipe so as not to disturb the pipe. No tamping shall be done within 15 cm of the top of
pipe. The tamping shall become progressively heavier as the depth of the backfill increases.
PARTIALLY GLAZED FLUSH DOOR

Supplying fitting and fixing of partially Glazed flush door confirming to IS:2202 (part 01/1991) with
select seasoned timber and 32 mm thick block board core framed with seasoned hard wood battens
and bonded at high pressure with phonol formaldehyde resin under the cross banding process,
termite resistant and moisture proof with both side 1mm thick laminate and fixing of 5mm thick
clear glass as per detailed drawing & design including cost of ss fittings and fixtures such as Dead
lock, Towerbolt, SS hinges , SS handle, Floor spring etc also including cost of conveyance, taxes of all
materials complete as per direction of Authority’s Engineer.
ALUMINUM POWDER COATED VENTILATOR

Providing and fixing aluminium powder coated louvered ventilator confirming to ISI with 4mm thick
tinted/other glass. Including cost of all gasket hardware fittings, labours, transportation etc. All
complete as per the direction of Authority’s Engineer,

GLASS CURTAIN WALLS
Commencement of work: The surface shall be cleaned of all loose materials and measurement shall
be taken accurately. Aluminum multi chamber sections are done to ensure proposed sections are
capable to withstand the wind pressure of about 1.8 kpa and other loads. The glass is well supported
and held properly by the members. Properly designed gaskets (EPDM or Neoprene) is used which can
withstand the wind pressure and expansion due to temperature. Following points are to be taken
care of:
Design, supply and install semi unitized structural glazing system/curtain wall designed to withstand
the design wind pressure of 1.8 kPa confirming to IS -875 part III. The system is with microwave cured
EPDM gaskets in exposed and unexposed area, structural and weather sealants of GE or approved
make, Norton spacer tape, backer rod, Bracketing system with MS hot dip galvanized brackets
designed to accommodate three dimensional movements, SS 316 grade fasteners and anchor bolts of
approved make, nylon separators to prevent bi-metallic corrosion, all complete required to perform
as per specification and drawing in conjunction with BOQ.
The system designed include pressure equalization with barrier gaskets for improved thermal
performance and weather performance, drainage at ground floor level thru bottom, spandrel panel
shall have pressure release & condensation drainage provisions, to accommodate building
movements, thermal expansions and the seismic movements. All metal joints in the wet area shall be
small joint sealant applied to ensure water tightness.
The extruded aluminum sections of Alloy 6063 T6 & T5 and tolerances confirming to DIN standard
from approved extruder. All the internal and external visible surfaces shall have average 65 microns
Powder Coating finish. Glazing shall be with double layer of 6mm toughened glass one reflective and
one clear with a 12 gap filled with argon gas for energy efficiency and thermal insulation.
The window system shall have a u value of 0.31, SHGC(g value)- 0.3 and VLT 50% with high acoustics
level. The vendor is to provide execution drawings and get the same approved before construction.
The rates shall be inclusive of drawings, design for requisite wind load, getting the design approved,
supply, installation inclusive of all taxes, T&P etc. complete including all support structural members
necessary hardwares, sealants, tapes etc. complete and all inclusive.
GLASS CURTAIN WALLS WITH TRANSLUCENT GLASSES

Design, supply and install semi unitized structural glazing system/curtain wall designed to withstand
the design wind pressure of 1.8 kPa confirming to IS -875 part III. The system is with microwave cured
EPDM gaskets in exposed and unexposed area, structural and weather sealants of GE or approved
make, Norton spacer tape, backer rod, Bracketing system with MS hot dip galvanized brackets
designed to accommodate three dimensional movements, SS 316 grade fasteners and anchor bolts of
approved make, nylon separators to prevent bi-metallic corrosion, all complete required to perform
as per specification and drawing in conjunction with BOQ.
The system designed include pressure equalization with barrier gaskets for improved thermal
performance and weather performance, drainage at ground floor level thru bottom, spandrel panel

shall have pressure release & condensation drainage provisions, to accommodate building
movements, thermal expansions and the seismic movements. All metal joints in the wet area shall be
small joint sealant applied to ensure water tightness.
The extruded aluminum sections of Alloy 6063 T6 & T5 and tolerances confirming to DIN standard
from approved extruder. All the internal and external visible surfaces shall have average 65 microns
Powder Coating finish. Glazing shall be with double layers of 6mm toughened translucent glass with a
12 gap filled with argon gas for energy efficiency and thermal insulation.
The glazing system shall have a u value of 0.31, SHGC(g value)- 0.3 and VLT 50% with high acoustics
level. The vendor is to provide execution drawings and get the same approved before construction.
The rates shall be inclusive of supply, installation inclusive drawings, design for requisite wind load,
getting the design approved, of all taxes, T&P etc. complete including all support structural members
necessary hardwares, sealants, tapes etc. complete and all inclusive.
FIRE STOP SMOKE SEAL

Design, supply and install of fire stop smoke seal at every floor level with 48kg/m³ rockwool of
approved make install in a G.I Tray of min 2.5mm thk . All screw used shall be of SS grade.
BACKPAN SPANDERAL INSULATION

Providing and fixing the spandrel panel with the Rockwool wool insulation of 50mm thick 48 kg/m3
density slab with inbuilt black veil of 0.65mm firmly held on the GI tray of 1.0 mm thk. The assembly
is kept at least 50mm away from the glass surface. The rock wool joints shall be not visible from
outside and shall have hair line joints.
CANOPYUSING LAMINATEDGLASS
Providing and fixing and finishing of Canopy glass with 12.5mm (5mm clear H.S glass+1.52mm(4layer
of PVB)+6mm clear toughened )Laminated Glass with spider fitting including 4way, 2way spiders 1
way spiders and Routels bolt(316 grade) for 12 mm fixed glass fixed at 100x50x2.5 & 75x50x2.5 mm
square tube M.S Structure etc. complete as per the direction of Authority’s Engineer
CLADDING
Providing and fixing of Cladding with external wall with solid exterior grade compact high pressure
laminates as per EN 438-6 type EDS and EGS manufactured using specially treated acrylic resin under
high pressure and temperature and hardened with electron beam curing providing weather
resistance and UV resistance. The cost is inclusive of Aluminum framework for the same, fixing details
with Aluminum/MS cleats and all necessary arrangement inclusive cost of adhesive, all hardware,
materials, labour & T&P etc. complete as per the direction of Authority’s Engineer.
POLYCARBONATE SHEET:
Providing and fixing of 12 mm thick (minimum) co-extruded UV Protected Multicell Polycarbonate
panels with 3 cells - 4 walls structure with panel width of 700 - 900mm and having vertical standing
seam at both sides of the panel minimum protruded 15-20mm height for better connector
engagement. Panels shall be fixed on Purlin with the Z-type stainless steel fastener and snap on

connectors. Panel shall be secured with Snap on connector to interlock the panels shall have 2-4
tooth locking with continuous connector mechanism along with Standing seam to ensure maximum
uplift capability. Fasteners shall be fixed on Purlins using minimum 3 self drilling screws for maximum
wind uplift capability. Panel shall be sealed with Anti-dust Aluminium tape / Aluminium U Profile(mill
finish) for ends. Panels shall be tested against fire as per EN 13501-1:2007 in an international
accredited laboratory and classified B-s2, d0. Panel shall be manufactured in a manufacturing facility
with approved Quality Assurance procedure as per ISO 9001 & ISO 14001. Panel Manufacturer shall
provide limited international warranty against any manufacturing defects for a period of 10 years
(minimum) with proven successful project reference in Indian sub-continent for a project at least 10
years old with roof area not less than 1500 sq mtr. Multi-cell Panels shall be fixed over structural steel
/ MS purlin inclusive of cost and the MS sections power coated conforming to the detail technical
specifications as below and as per approved colour and directions of Authority’s Engineer.
STRUCTURAL GLAZING
 Design, supply and install semi unitized structural glazing system/curtain wall designed to
withstand the design wind pressure of 1.8 kPa confirming to IS -875 part III. The system is
with microwave cured EPDM gaskets in exposed and unexposed area, structural and
weather sealants of GE or approved make, Norton spacer tape, backer rod, Bracketing
system with MS hot dip galvanized brackets designed to accommodate three dimensional
movements, SS 316 grade fasteners and anchor bolts of approved make, nylon separators to
prevent bi-metallic corrosion, all complete required to perform as per specification and
drawing in conjunction with BOQ.
 The system designed include pressure equalization with barrier gaskets for improved
thermal performance and weather performance, drainage at ground floor level thru bottom,
spandrel panel shall have pressure release & condensation drainage provisions, to
accommodate building movements, thermal expansions and the seismic movements. All
metal joints in the wet area shall be small joint sealant applied to ensure water tightness.
 The extruded aluminum sections of Alloy 6063 T6 & T5 and tolerances confirming to DIN
standard from approved extruder. All the internal and external visible surfaces shall have
average 65 microns Powder Coating finish. Glazing shall be with double layers of 6mm
toughened translucent glass with a 12 gap filled with argon gas for energy efficiency and
thermal insulation.
 The extruded aluminum sections of Alloy 6063 T6 & T5 and tolerances confirming to DIN
standard from approved extruder. All the internal and external visible surfaces shall have
average 65 microns Powder Coating finish. Glazing shall be with double layers of 6mm
toughened translucent glass with a 12 gap filled with argon gas for energy efficiency and
thermal insulation.
PLINTH PROTECTION:
Min 750mm wide plinth protection by providing 50mm thick of cement concrete 1:3:6 (1 cement :3
coarse sand : 6 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) over 75mm thick bed of dry brick ballast
40 mm nominal size, well rammed and consolidated and grouted with fine sand shall be provided
around all buildings.

CHEMICAL REBARING
Making drilled hole of required diameter of approved depth followed by proper cleaning and
application of the specified chemical compound and there by fixing the Rebar into the chemical filled
hole. Rates: The rate includes the cost of material and labour and involved in all the operations.
CORE CUTTING
Core cutting of RCC Slab of required diameter and depth of the slab with the help of required
machineries as specified and direction of CLIENT/Project Manager specified as per BOQ.
Rates: The rate includes the cost of material and labour and involved in all the operations
LIST OF MAKES-CIVIL FINISHES

SL. NO. ITEM OF WORK APPROVED MAKES
FINISHES:
1 VITRIFIED TILES SOMANY KAJARIA JOHNSON
2 CERAMIC TILES SOMANY KAJARIA JOHNSON
3 GLAZED TILES SOMANY KAJARIA JOHNSON
4 CLADDING CONCRETE TILES / CONCRETE TILE ULTRA EUROCON PAVIT
FOR PAVING / INTERLOCKING BLOCKS
5 WALL PUTTY LATICRETE BIRLA JK WALL PUTTY
6 PLASTIC EMULSION PAINTS-LOW VOC DULUX BERGER ICI
7 WEATHER COAT PAINT- LOW VOC DULUX BERGER ICI
8 ENAMEL PAINT ASIAN BERGER ICI
9 TEXTURED PAINT DULUX BERGER ICI
10 EPOXY PAINT ASIAN BERGER ICI
11 WATER PROOFING PERCEPT FOSROC PIDILITE
12 MS/SS SECTIONS SAIL TATA TISCON VIZAG STEEL
13 ALUMINUM POWDER COATED VENTILATOR DOMAL TECH NAL STAR ALUBUILD
14 GLASS CURTIN WALLS/STRUCTURAL GLAZING TECHNAL IMPULSE JINDALAL
15 GLASS SAINT GOVIN MODIGUARD EQUIVALENT
16 EPOXY GROUT LATICRETE DOW EQUIVALENT
17 CANOPY DORMA HEFFLE OZONE
18 POLYCARBONATE SHEETS DUNPALON GE EQUIVALENT
Note: In the List of recommended above, out of makes mentioned in the list, only 1st make shall be quoted for and
used. However if due to non-availability or any other technical reasons, the alternative make is allowed, it
shall be subject to prior approval of the Project Manager and price adjustment.
1. The contractor shall produce all samples including natural stones, before procurement of the materials, for
approval of the Architects/Project Managers.
2. Where more than one manufacturer is listed, the names are given in the order of preference. The contractor
shall quote the rates for the various items of work based on the materials of first preference after ascertaining

the availability, delivery schedule of the same. Unless the contractor stipulates in this tender, it shall be
presumed that the rates quoted are for material of first preference only.
3. In the event, the contractor is permitted to use the material of lower preference because of valid reasons,
then the contract rates for the relevant items of work shall be suitably adjusted on the basis of variation in
prices of the materials of first preference and those actually used. If the prices of the materials used are higher
than the material of the first preference, the owner shall not be liable to make any enhanced payment for the
affected items of work on this account.
4. In respect of materials for which approved makes are not specified above, these will be makes to be decided
by the Architects/Project Managers and as per samples getting approved.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS:
PUBLIC HEALTH ENGINEERING
1. INTRODUCTION
The proposed Office site is located at Bhubaneswar
2. SCOPE
The scope of Public Health Engineering Services though not limited can be classified as follows
 Domestic & Flushing water supply system.
 Soil & Waste water drainage system.
 Water treatment plant
 Sewage Treatment Plant.
 Rain/storm water management system
 Solid waste management.
3. STANDARDS AND CODES

 NATIONAL BUILDING CODES
 INDIAN STANDARDS
 CPHEEO MANUAL (GOVT OF INDIA)
 UPC
4. CONCEPT OF THE SYSTEM

The following services are envisaged for the Complex:
 Water treatment system for meeting domestic & drinking water quality requirement in acceptance limits
as per IS 10500-2012
 Domestic Water shall be distributed to the top two floors by Booster pumps and by gravity to the
remaining floors.
 Sewage treatment is as per SPCB/CPCB norms
 Reuse of Treated effluent from STP for flushing, cooling tower makeup & Irrigation Purpose
 Peripheral Strom water drainage system
 Provision of Roof rain water drainage system and collection. Reuse of stored rain water for domestic as
per MOEF
SECTION – I: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1 Scope
The General character and the scope of work to be carried out under this section as illustrated in the drawings,
specifications and scope of work attached herewith. The contractor shall carry out and complete the said work
under this contract in every respect in conformity with the rules and regulations of the local authority. The
Contractor shall furnish all labour, materials, appliances, tools and equipment necessary for the work for plumbing
services installation including testing and commissioning as specified herein, and as per the relevant Bureau of
Indian Standards (BIS), British Standards codes, and as shown on the drawings. This also includes any material,
appliances and equipment not specifically mentioned here in or noted on the drawings as being furnished or

installed which are necessary and customary to make a complete installation properly connected and in working
order.
 Carryout all incidental works connected with plumbing services installation such as excavation of trenches
and back filling, cutting and chasing in concrete and brick and making good, cutting/drilling holes through
walls, floors, and grouting for fixing of fixtures/equipment and so forth.
 Furnish and install complete workable plumbing services installation as shown on the drawings and
described in this specification and as per the latest Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS), British Standards (BS)
specifications including all that which is reasonably inferred to all the buildings, internally and externally.
 Complete installation of the sewerage and sewerage appurtenances internally as well as around the
building.
 Complete installation of all sanitary and plumbing fixtures in all buildings.
 Co-operation with other trades in putting the installation in place. Any work done without regards or
consultation with other trades, shall be removed by the contractor without additional cost to the Owner,
to permit proper installation of all other work, as desired by the Architect/Consultant.
 Repair all damage done to the premises as a result of this installation and remove all debris left by those
engaged for this installation to the satisfaction of Architect/Consultant.
 Cleaning of all plumbing and sanitary fixtures, testing and providing the satisfactory performance of all
fixtures at the time of buildings are handed over to the Owner.
 It is the responsibility of the contractor to take care of all the fixtures fitted until the time of handing over
to the Architect/Consultant.
 Painting of all exposed pipes shall be done by contractor as specified in the specification.
 Assume full responsibility for getting the entire installation duly approved by the authorities concerned
and for all expenses in connection with the same. Assume responsibility for obtaining and delivering to
the Owner certificate of final inspection and approval by the concerned authorities.
1.2 Licensed Plumber

All work performed by the contractor shall be through licensed plumbing supervisor possessing a valid
plumbing contractor’s license employing Engineers, Technicians, Foremen, Plumbers, Masons, Helpers, etc., as
required.
1.3 Regulations and Standards

The installation shall conform in all respects to the following standards in general:
Pipes and Fittings
IS 13592 : Specification for unplasticized PVC pipes for soil and waste discharge system inside
building including ventilation and rainwater.
IS 783 : Code of practice for laying of concrete pipes
IS 4985 : Specification for unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies (second revision)
IS 3114 : Code of practice for Laying of CI pipes
IS 458 : Specification for precast concrete pipes (with or without reinforcement)
Valves
IS 778 : Specification for copper alloy gage, globe and check valves for water works
purposes.
IS 1703 : Specifications for copper alloy float valves (horizontal plunger type) for water supply

fittings.
IS 4038 : Specification for foot valves for water works purposes.
IS 13095 : Butterfly valves for general purposes.
IS 12992 (Part 1) : Safety relief valves, spring loaded
IS 5312 (Part 1) : Specification for swing check type reflux (non-return) valves: part 1 Single door
pattern.
IS 5312 (Part 2) : Specification for swing check type reflux (non-return) valves:
part 2 Multi door pattern.
Sanitary Fittings
IS 2064 : Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of sanitary appliances
IS 2692 : Specification of ferrules for water services
IS 2548 ( Part 1&2 ) : Specification for plastic seats and covers for water closets.
IS 3004 : Specification for plug cocks for water supply purposes.
IS 1711 : Specification for self closing taps for water supply
Pumps
IS 5600 : Specification for sewage and drainage pumps
IS 8034 : Specification for submersible pump sets for clear, cold, fresh water.
IS 8418 : Specification for horizontal centrifugal self-priming pumps.
General
IS 5329 : Code of practice for sanitary pipe work above ground for buildings.
IS 12251 : Code of practice for drainage of building basements
IS 1200 ( Part 1) : Method of measurement of building earthwork
IS 1200 ( Part 16) : Method of measurement of laying of water and sewer lines including appurtenance
IS 1200 ( Part 19) : Method of measurement of Water supply, plumbing and drains.
IS 2527 : Code of practice for fixing rainwater gutters and down pipes for roof drainage.
IS 6784 : Method of performance testing of water meters
(Domestic type).
IS 12235 ( Parts 1 to 11) : Methods of test for unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies.
IS 782 : Specification for Caulking Lead.( Third revision)
IS 1172 : Code of basic requirements for water supply, drainage & sanitation (revised).
IS 1239 –(Part I) : Specifications for mild steel tube, tubular and other steel pipe fittings.
IS 1239 –(Part II) : Specifications for mild steel tube, tubular and other steel pipe fittings.
IS 1726 : Code of cast iron manhole frame and cover (third revision).
IS 1742 : Code of practice for building drainage.( Second revision)
IS 2064 : Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of sanitary appliances.
IS 2065 : Code of practice for water supply to buildings.
IS 732 & IS 2274 : Indian Standard code of practice for electrical wiring & installation.
The installation shall be in conformity with the bylaws and requirements of the local authority in so far as these
become applicable to the installation. Wherever this specification calls for, a higher standard of materials and /or
workmanship than those required by any of the above regulations and standards, then this specification shall take
precedence over the said regulations and standards.

Wherever drawings and specifications require something that may conflict with the regulations, the regulations
shall govern. This shall be referred to the Superintendent for arbitration.
1.4 Drawings and Specifications

The drawings and specifications shall be considered as part of this contract and any work or materials shown
on the drawings and not called in the specifications or vice versa shall be executed as if specifically called for in
both. The tender drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the fixtures, drainage system, etc..
The drawings indicate the points of supply and termination of work shall be installed as indicated in the
drawings. However, any changes found essential to co-ordinate with this work and other trades shall be made
without any additional cost. The drawings and specifications are meant for the assistance and guidance of the
contractor, and exact location, distance and levels will be governed by the individual building and site
conditions. Therefore, approval of the Superintendent shall be obtained before commencement of work.
1.5 Shop Drawings

 The contractor shall submit to the Owner four copies of the shop drawings.
 Shop drawings shall be submitted under the following conditions:
 Indicate any changes in the layout in the contract drawings.
 Floor plans, Enlarged toilet details, schematic showing water supply and sanitary installation works
 Pumps /Equipment layout, control panel, wiring and piping diagram.
 Manufacturer’s or Contractor’s fabrication drawings for any materials or equipment.
 The contractor shall submit four copies of catalogues, manufacturer’s drawings, equipment characteristic
data or performance charts as required by the Owner.
1.6 As Built Drawings

On completion of works, the Contractor shall submit one complete set of original tracings and two prints of “As
built” drawings to the Owner. He should submit all drawings / information in AutoCAD latest version. These
drawings shall have the following information:
 Contractor shall provide exact length and sizes of all piping on all floors and vertical stacks.
 Ground and invert levels of all drainage pipes together with location of all manholes and connections up to
outfall.
 Run of all water supply lines with diameters, location of control valves and access panels.
 Contractor shall provide Location of all mechanical equipment with layout and piping connections.
 Contractor shall provide four sets of catalogues, performance data and list of spare parts together with the
name and address of the manufacturer for all electrical and mechanical equipment provided by him.
 All “Warranty Cards” given by the manufacturers shall be handed over to the Superintendent.
1.7 Manufacturers’ Instructions

Where manufacturers have furnished specific instructions relating to the materials used in this job and
methods of construction that are not specifically mentioned in these documents, such instructions shall be
followed in all cases. The contractor shall also furnish detailed instruction and operation manuals in triplicate
including detailed completion drawings and Fire Safety Plans on a tracing cloth to approved scale. Further it is
the responsibility of the contractor to train the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the
system.

1.8 Materials
Materials shall be of approved make and quality specified. They shall conform to the respective Bureau of
Indian Standards, British Standards Specifications and supported by Manufacturing Certificate / test certificate.
Samples of all materials shall be as per the list of approved brand manufacture, which shall be approved by the
Superintendent before placing the order.
In any case of non availability of materials in metric sizes, the nearest size of FPS units shall be provided with
prior approval of the Superintendent at no extra cost to the owner.
1.9 Guarantee
The contractor shall guarantee both the material and workmanship of first class quality corresponding to
standard engineering practice. Any defective materials / workmanship shall be rejected, the contractor has to
rectify / replace at his own cost. Guarantee certificate of the materials supplied shall be handed over to the
owner.
SECTION – II: SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPES AND RAIN WATER PIPES
1.1 General Requirements

 Materials shall be of the approved make and quality specified. They shall conform to the respective
Bureau of Indian Standards, British Standards Specifications, supported by Manufacturing Certificate and
any other specification referred to herein.
 Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or on slopes as required in neat manner.
 Pipes shall be fixed in a manner as to provide easy accessibility for repair and maintenance and shall not
cause obstruction in shafts, and in suspended ceilings.
 Pipes shall be fixed securely to walls and ceilings by suitable pipe supports at intervals specified.
 Access door for fittings and cleanouts shall be located that they are easily accessible for repair and
maintenance.
1.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPES AND FITTINGS MATERIAL
Soil, Waste & Vent Pipes shall be PVC pipes & fittings.
PVC (SWR) class pipes conforming to IS 13592 of dia 63mm up to 250mm dia of Type A are used in rain water &
ventilation and Type B for soil and waste discharging system shall be used. The pipes shall be supplied in nominal
lengths of 2, 3, and 4 or 6 meters, tolerance on specified lengths shall be +10mm and – 0mm. Any physical test
requirements shall be as per IS 13592. And Pipe of higher Dia i.e. 160mm Dia. and above shall be agricultural series
(6kg / sq. cm pressure rated) made as per IS 4985.
1.2.1 HANDLING
Because of their light weight, there may be a tendency for the PVC pipes to be thrown much more. Reasonable
care should be taken in handling and storage to prevent damage to the pipes. Contractor should hold the fullest
responsibility in this case. On no account the pipes should be dragged on the ground. Pipes should be given
adequate supports at all times.
1.2.2 LAYING

The PVC pipes shall be laid under the floors below slab or on walls either buried or exposed as the case may be, as
shown in the drawings. The minimum thickness of fittings shall be of 3.2 mm. the fittings shall be of injection
mould type with solvent cement joint or rubber ring joint. The pipes and fittings shall be capable of withstanding
sun’s rays. PVC pipes laid below slab or suspended in ceiling shall be supported by angle brackets / supports as
detailed in the drawings.
1.2.3 JOINTING
The jointing of pipes to fittings shall be done as per the manufacturer’s instructions / recommendations. The UPVC
pipes and fittings shall be joined with Solvent Cement and jointing shall be carried out as follows:
1. Cut the spigot end of the pipe square.
2. All burrs from the internal and external surfaces should be removed.
3. The spigot should be marked with a pencil line and a distance equivalent to the socket depth. Clean the
surface within the marked area.
4. Apply uniform coat of solvent cement on the external surface to the pipe and a lighter coat on the internal
surface of the fitting.
5. Insert the pipe end into the socket of the fitting and push it in up to the mark.
6. Remove the excess solvent cement and hold the joint firmly in position for 30seconds to dry. Gluing should
be avoided in a rainy or foggy weather.
The other method of jointing shall be rubber rings. The material of rubber ring should conform to IS 5382-1969.The
ring is housed in groove formed in a plastic or metallic housing. The rubber is compressed and makes a seal
between the pipe and housing. Lubricating paste should be applied before compressing the rubber. Where natural
rubber rings are used, mineral oil or petrol or grease should be used. Joining of UPVC pipes shall be made means of
solvent cement for horizontal lines and by rubber ring for vertical lines.
1.2.4 TESTING
PVC pipes and fittings shall be tested for water tightness in accordance with IS 13592. The openings of the pipes
shall be sealed for the section to be tested. The water pressure of 1mtr water column to be applied for a period of
15 minutes. The Authority’s Engineer shall examine carefully all the joints for leakage.
1.3 PVC PRESSURE PIPES AND FITTINGS

The PVC pressure pipes and fittings shall be used for conveying waste water from wash basins, Urinals, kitchen
sinks, floor drain connecting to washing machines, etc. The pipes shall be class III, 6 Kg/cm2. PVC pipes and fittings
shall be jointed with solvent cement. The pipes shall conform to IS 4985. Fittings shall be of injection moulded PVC
conforming to IS 7634 (Part1) - 1975.
1.3.1 LAYING AND FIXING

The pipe laying and jointing shall be done in accordance with IS 7634 (Part 3) – 1975. Pipes shall be cut to size and
chamfered well. Pipes and fittings shall be jointed using solvent cement or rubber ring joints. The pipes and fittings
shall be jointed accurately without any stress to achieve leak proof joints.
1.3.2 TESTING
The method which is commonly in use is filling the pipe with water, taking care to evacuate any entrapped air and
slowly raising the system to the test pressure. The water pressure of 1mtr water column to be applied for a period
of 15 minutes.

1.4 CAST IRON PIPES AND FITTINGS
Soil, waste and vent pipes in shaft and basement ceiling, podium drainage pipes- shall be cast iron pipes. All pipes
shall be straight and smooth and inside free from irregular bore, blow hole, cracks and other manufacturing
defects. Pipes shall centrifugally spun iron soil pipes conforming to I.S 3989-1984, 1729-1979.
Standard weight, dimension and DRIP SEAL required for joints shall be as follows:
For pipes conforming to IS 3989-1984 (centrifugally cast pipes)
Nominal Thickness Overall Weight6’ Internal diameter of Depth of lead
dia length 1.83mm socket
inches mm mm kg. mm mm
2 50 3.5 8.5 73 25
3 75 3.5 12.7 99 25
4 100 4.0 19.2 126 25
6 150 5.0 35.5 178 38
TOLERANCES
Tolerances on the external diameter of the barrel as mentioned below. The internal diameter of the socket and
the depth of socket shall be as follows:
Dimension Nominal diameter mm Tolerance mm
External 50, 57 + 3.0
Diameter in barrel 100 + 3.5
150 + 4.0
Internal diameter of barrel All diameters + 3.0

Depth of socket All diameters + 10.0
Dimension Nominal - Size A
Pipe {External diameter, B 50 75 100 150

{Thickness, C 60 85 110 160
5 5 5 5
{Internal diameter, F 76 101 129 181
Socket {Thickness, H 6 6 6 6
{Internal depth, J 60 66 70 75
Overall length 1800mm

Nominal Weight of Pipe kg kg kg kg
(Exclusive of ears) 11.41 16.52 21.67 31.92
Weight tolerances in all items +10%
1.4.1 Laying and Jointing

Cleaning of Pipes and Fittings
All lumps, blisters and excess coating shall be removed from the socket and spigot end of each pipe. The outside of
the spigot and the inside of the socket shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from oil and grease
before the pipe is laid.
Closing the Ends of Pipe to Prevent Entry of Foreign Materials While Laying Pipe
Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material entering the pipe while it is being placed in the line. If
the pipe laying team cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without getting earth into it, the Engineer in
charge may order a heavy tightly woven canvas bag of suitable size be placed over each end and left there until the
connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe that before lowering the pipe into the trench. During laying
operations, no debris, tools, clothing or any other material shall be placed in the pipe. After laying and jointing of a
reach is completed the two free ends shall be kept closed to prevent entry of foreign materials, rodents and other
animals.
Cutting of Pipe
The cutting of pipe for inserting fittings or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and good workmanship without
any damage to the pipe so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. For this purpose use of a
pipe cutter is recommended. Pipe cutting machines are recommended for large dia of pipes. When pipe-cutting
machines are not available for cutting pipes of large diameters, the electric arc cutting method may be permitted
using carbon or steel rods.
Only qualified and experienced workmen shall be employed on this work. When the pipe-cutting machine is not
available and the site conditions do not permit pipe cutting by machine, the pipe can be cut using a chisel. Flame
cutting of pipes by means of ox-acetylene torches shall not be allowed.
Direction of Laying of Socket End

On level ground, the socket ends should face the upstream. When the line runs uphill the socket ends should face
the upgrade. The permitted tolerance for deflection for lead joint shall be 2.5 millimetres.
Jointing
Jointing of socket and spigot pipes is done by DRIP SEAL (under dry conditions).
1.4.2 Testing
The method which is commonly in use is filling the pipe with water, taking care to evacuate any entrapped air and
slowly raising the system to the test pressure. The pressure of 1mtr water column to be applied for a period of 60
minutes.
1.4.3 Mode of Measurement

Cast Iron Pipes shall be measured along the centre line of the pipeline including the specials in running meter
(Rmt). Quoted rate shall include specials and the pipes shall be measured between:
a. Chambers: Shall be recorded from the inside of one chamber to inside of another chamber.
b. Gully trap and Chamber: Shall be recorded between socket pipe near gully trap and inside of chamber.

1.5 MS BRACKETS
The brackets should be of 25x5mm MS angle and 50x 5 mm MS flat. The length and profile of bracket shall be as
per site conditions. The brackets shall be provided hot dip galvanizing after fabrication. The brackets shall be fixed
in true alignment and level. The bracket shall be fixed to the RCC members using 8mm dia anchor fasteners in
adequate number based on length of bracket. The brackets can be fixed to masonry wall using holdfast
arrangement. In such cases curing shall be done for at least 3 days.
The pipes shall be fixed to the brackets with the help of threaded U bolts or C clamp with 25x 6 mm GI Nut bolts.
Spacing of bracket shall be governed by the pipe material.
1.6 PVC khurra

The khurras shall be straight type or bend type as per the location of outlet. It consists of a rigid PVC body, leaf trap
with grating, PVC sheet 400mmx400mm welded to collar. The khurra should be fixed firmly on to the parapet wall
or roof slab with concrete. Due consideration shall be given to the finished level of roof while fixing the same.
1.7 RCC Hume Pipes:

The pipes shall be with or without reinforcement as required and of the class NP2 as specified. These shall confirm
to IS 458-2003. The reinforced cement concrete pipes shall be manufactured by centrifugal (or spun) process. All
pipes shall be true to shape, straight, perfect sound and free from cracks and flaws. The external and internal
surface of the pipes shall be smooth and hard. The pipes shall be free from defects resulting from imperfect grading
of the aggregate, mixing or moulding.
1.7.1 Laying of pipes

 Loading, transporting and unloading of concrete pipes shall be done with care. Handling shall be such as to
avoid impact. Gradual unloading by inclined plane or by chain block is recommended. All pipe sections and
connections shall be inspected carefully before being laid. Broken or defective pipes or connections shall
not be used. Pipes shall be lowered into the trenches carefully. Mechanical appliances may be used. Pipes
shall be laid true to line and grade as specified. Laying of pipe shall proceed upgrade of a slope.
 If the pipes have spigot and socket joints, the socket end shall face upstream in the case of pipe with joints
to be made with loose collars. The collar shall be slipped on before the next pipe is laid. Adequate and
proper expansion joints shall be provided where directed.
 In case where the foundation conditions are unusual such as in the proximity of trees or holes, under
existing or proposed manholes etc., the pipe shall be encased all round in 15cm thick cement concrete
1:5:10 (1 cement, 5 fine sand, 10 graded stone aggregated 40mm nominal size) or compacted sand or
gravel.
 In cases where the natural foundation is inadequate the pipes shall be laid either in concrete suitably
designed structure as specified. If a concrete cradle bedding is used the depth of concrete below the
bottom of the pipe shall be at least 1/4th of the internal dia and shall extend up to the sides of the pipe at
least to a distance of ¼ of the outside diameter of pipes 300 mm dia.. The pipes laid in trenches in earth
shall be bedded evenly and firmly and as far up the haunches of the pipe as to safely transmit the load
expected from back fill through the pipe to the bed. This shall be done either by excavating the bottom of
the trench to fit the curve of the pipe or by compacting the earth under around the curve of the pipe to
form an even bed. Necessary provision shall be made for joints wherever required.

 When the pipe is laid in the trench in rock, hard clay, or other hard material, the space below the pipe
shall be excavated and replaced with an equalizing bed of concrete, sand or compact earth. In all place
pipe shall be laid directly on such hard material.
 When the pipes are laid completely above the ground the foundations shall be made even and sufficiently
compacted to support the pipe line without any material settlement. Alternatively the pipe line shall be
supported on PCC saddle blocks. Similar arrangement shall be made to retain the pipe line in the proper
alignment, such as by shaping the top of the supports to fit the lower part of the pipe, the distance
between the supports shall be no case exceed the length of the pipe. The pipe shall be supported as far as
possible close to the joints. In no case shall the joint come in centre of the span. Care shall be taken to see
that superimposed loads greater than the total load equivalent to the weight of the pipe when running full
shall not be permitted.
1.7.2 Jointing of pipes:

Joints are generally of rigid type. When specified flexible type joints may also be provided.
SPIGOT AND SOCKET JOINT (RIGID):

The spigot of each pipe shall be slipped home well in to the socket of the pipe previously laid and adjusted in the
correct position. The opening of the joints shall be filled with stiff mixture of cement mortar in the proportion 1:2
(1cement, 2fine sand) which shall be rammed with caulking tool. After a day’s work any extraneous material shall
be removed from the inside of the pipe and the newly made joint shall be cured.
1.8 STONEWARE (SW) PIPES AND FITTINGS

1.8.1 Material
Stoneware pipes and fittings shall comply with IS 651-1992 in every respect and all stoneware pipes, bends, etc.,
shall be of the best salt glazed variety, glazed inside as well as outside, hard smooth, even textured, free from fire
cracks, air blows and blisters. The pipe shall be truly circular in cross section, perfectly straight and of standard
nominal diameter, length and depth of socket.
The pipes covered in this standard are not meant for potable water applications. The dimensions are grouped into
two sections Section A & B. Section A covers dimensions of straight pipes and all such fittings which normally from
part of pipeline and which are subjected to same conditions. Section B includes dimensions of fittings, which are
commonly used but do not form part of the normal pipeline.
1.8.2 Laying
The pipes shall be carefully laid to the levels and gradients shown in the plans and sections by making use of sight
rails and boning rod and socket up the gradient. The pipes crossing the road shall be encased in Plain Cement
Concrete of 1:3:6 to the required depth as per the drawings and bill of quantities. The pipes laid in the soil shall be
enclosed with selected sand filling as per the bill of quantities.
1.8.3 Jointing
Hemp rope socked in neat cement slurry shall be passed round the joint and inserted in it by means of caulking
tool. More skins of yarn shall be added and well rammed. Cement mortar with one part of cement and one part of
sand with minimum water content, but on no account soft or sloppy, shall be carefully inserted by hand into the

joint & more cement mortar added until the space of the joint has been filled completely with tightly caulked
mortar. The joint shall be then finished off neatly outside the socket at angle of 45 degree.
1.8.4 Curing
The joint shall be cured at least for seven days.
1.8.5 Testing
As per IS 4127 – 1983 – code of practice for laying of glazed stoneware pipes, the pipelines and fittings shall be
subjected to a test pressure of at least 2.5 m head of water at the highest point of section under test. This pressure
shall be maintained for not less than 30 minutes. The contractor shall also carry out the smoke test for the drains
and sewers. Any leakage will be visible & the defective part should be cut out and made good.
1.8.6 Mode of Measurement

Stoneware pipes shall be measured along the centreline of the pipeline including the specials in running meter
(Rm.) between:
a. Chambers: Shall be recorded from the inside of one chamber to inside of another chamber.
b. Gully trap and chamber: shall be recorded between socket pipe near gully trap and inside of chamber.
The quoted rate shall include the following:
i. The cost of pipes, specials and other jointing materials.
ii. Laying, jointing and curing.
iii. Testing and making good the defects if any.
SECTION – III: SANITARY FIXTURES INSTALLATION
1.1 General
All fixtures shall be fixed in a neat workman like manner true to line and as recommended by the manufacturer or
shown in the drawings. Care shall be taken to fix all fixtures, brackets and accessories by proper wooden cleats, rawl
plugs, bolts and nuts.
Care shall be taken in fixing all approved chromium plated (CP) single lever fixtures and accessories so as not to leave
any tool marks or damages on the finish. All such fixtures shall be tightened with fixed spanners. Use of `Stiltson' type
pipe wrenches with toothed jaws shall not be allowed.
All fixtures shall be thoroughly tested after connecting the drainage and water supply system. All fixtures shall be
thoroughly finished and any leakage in piping valves and waste fittings corrected to the complete satisfaction of the
Consultant/Engineer.
Upon completion of the work, all labels, stickers, plasters, etc. shall be removed from the fixtures and all fixtures shall
be cleaned with soap and water so as to present a neat and clean toilet.
1.1.1 In brief the scope of work involves following

Sanitary appliances and fixtures for toilets
Chromium plated bath fittings
Stainless steel sinks
Accessories like towel rack, toilet paper holder, soap dish, tumbler holder, coat hook etc.

All appliances, fixtures and fittings shall be provided with all such accessories are required to complete the item in
working condition whether specifically mentioned or not in the schedule of quantities, specifications and drawings.
Accessories shall include proper fixing arrangements, brackets, nuts-bolts, washers, screws and required connection
pieces etc.
1. 2 Eu r op e an T yp e Wa t er C lo s et
The closet shall be white or colored as per BOQ and made of vitreous China and shall be of the best quality
manufactured by an approved firm, and fixed by approved means. It shall have 100 mm dia `P` or `S` trap depending
on the location of water closets and soil stacks with effective seal. The water volume shall be 3 and 6 litres per flush
or 2 and 4 litres per flush. Each closet shall be provided with the following accessories:
a. Double flapped heavy urea formaldehyde seat cover of approved make quality and color with rubber buffers
and C.P. brass screws fixed to the pan.
b. Exposed ceramic cistern of approved design.
c. Cast-iron chair or rag bolt for wall hung type with C.P bolt & nut.
1. 3 Wa sh B as in s
They shall be white or colored as per BOQ and of vitreous China with best quality manufactured by an approved firm
and size as specified. Oval/circular wash basins shall be supported on a RC counter with necessary steel
reinforcement and rectangular wash basins with or without pedestals shall be supported by a pair of rag bolts of
approved design. The washbasin shall be circular or oval shape below or above counter or rectangular with or without
pedestal type as specified in Schedule of Quantities. The basin shall be provided with waste coupling, bottle trap,
angle cocks, pillar cock/ basin mixer, connecting pipes and other accessories. The flow rate of pillar cock or basin
mixer shall be less than 2 liters per minute at 60 psi pressure.
1. 4 Sin k
They shall be Stainless steel of AISI 304 -18/8 grade and shall be supported on counter. Each sink shall be provided
with 40 mm CP waste coupling, CP bottle trap, Table/wall mounted sink cock/mixer, angle cock and other accessories.
1. 5 He al th F au ce t
These shall be of brass CP .The make and model shall be as specified in the BOQ. These shall be fixed by means of
stainless steel counter sunk screws to wooden/ plastic cleats firmly embedded in the wall.
 15 mm CP health faucet with 1.0m long flexible tube with end nuts & Hook.
 1 No 15mm CP brass angular stop cock with wall flange
 Hook with CP brass counter sunk screws.
1.6 Angular Stop Cock

These shall be of brass, CP. The make and model shall be as specified in the BOQ. These shall be fixed by means of
Teflon tape, extension nipple of suitable length shall be provided, if required. The stopcock shall be provided with
CP wall flange.
2.0 Bib Cock & Stop Cock

A bibcock is a draw off tap with a horizontal inlet and free outlet and stopcock (stop tap) valve with a suitable
means of connections for insertion in a pipeline for controlling or stopping the flow. They shall be of specified size
and shall be screw down type. The closing device should work by means of a disc carrying a renewable non-

metallic washer which shuts against water pressure on a seating at right angles to the axis of the threaded spindle
which operates. The handle shall be either crutch or butterfly type securely seated pattern. The cocks (taps) shall
open in anticlockwise direction. The bib cock and stop cock shall be polished bright (Chrome plated).
2.1 Urinal
Urinal shall be back inlet type, white colored and of vitreous China with best quality manufactured by an approved
firm. The urinal shall be fixed with hangers and brackets. The urinal shall be provided with auto flush system with
sensor, solenoid valve / pneumatic push cock / angle valve etc., complete. Make and model shall be as specified in
the BOQ. The complete set shall comprise of the following.
 Urinal with auto flush system along with battery / electrically operated solenoid valve / with push cock.
 Fixing brackets,
 32mm CP Bottle Trap, dome type grating, spreader etc., if the specified model is not having in-built units
as indicated above the same shall be part of the scope of work.
 CP wall flanges (if required).
2.2 Urinal Division Plate

Urinal division plate of size 700 x 340 x 120mm of approved make white glazed and is fixed to wall by using CP
brass counter sunk screws etc., complete
2. 3 B id et
The bidet shall be white or colored as per BOQ and made of vitreous China and shall be of the best quality
manufactured by an approved firm, and fixed by approved means. It shall have 100 mm dia `P` or `S` trap depending
on the location of bidet and soil stacks with effective seal. Bidet shall be provided with its fittings, seat cover, CI
bracket/rack bolt for support,15mm CP bidet cock with connection to spray outlet,15mm CP angle cock , CP bolts and
nuts with all the arrangements of approved make.
3. 1 Toi l et Acce s so r ies

3. 1. 1 To il et Pap er Ho ld er
Toilet paper holder shall be of chromium plated as specified in the Material specification.
3. 1. 2 Tow el R in g
These shall be of CP as specified in the material specification. These shall be fixed by means of stainless steel screws
to wooden / plastic cleats firmly embedded in the wall.
3. 1. 3 Gr ab B ar
The grab bars shall be of stainless steel of approved quality. The size and location shall be as specified in the BOQ.
3. 1. 4 Floor Traps Frame and Grating
The floor trap frame and grating shall be of approved material as specified in the BOQ. The trap shall be fitted with
stainless steel square grating. A minimum of 40mm depth of water seal shall be provided in the trap.
3. 1. 5 Dou b le Co at Ho o k
These shall be of CP as specified in the material specification. These shall be fixed by means of stainless steel screws
to wooden / plastic cleats firmly embedded in the wall.

SECTION –IV: WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
1.1 General
1.1.1 In brief scope of work involves following
Tapping of water from existing lines
Puddles, piping for Sump and OHT
Water lines within toilet, pantry, shaft, terrace etc
Isolation valves, Pressure regulating valves, brackets and other accessories
1.1.2 Manuals
Three sets of all manuals for the systems shall be submitted to the client. This shall include instruction and
maintenance manuals.
1.1.3 As-built Drawing
As built drawings as specified in the contract shall be submitted to the client on completion of work.
Drawing shall clearly show pipe routes, component details including
1.1.4 Training
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to train the Owner’s personnel in the operation and maintenance
of the system.
1.2 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
1.2.1 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE SET

Each pressure reducing valve set shall be complete with pressure reducing and isolating valves, pressure
gauge on outlet. Each pressure reducing valve shall contain loading neoprene diaphragm and a full
floating, self aligning, ignition resistant seat and shall be of the single stage, pressure reduction type with
provision for manually adjusting the delivery pressure. The valve shall fail safe to the low pressure. Valves
shall be capable of operating and maintaining automatically the respective delivery pressure and flow
rates as indicated and shall not be liable to creep. Valves shall also be capable of maintaining the pre-set
downstream pressure under static condition.
1.2.2 BUTTERFLY VALVES

Butterfly valves shall be slim seal, short wafer type with standard finish. The valves shall be suitable for
mounting between flanges drilled to ANSI 125. The valve body shall be cast iron. The disc shall consist of
disc pivot and driving stem shall be in one piece centrally located. The disc shall move in bearings on both
ends with ‘O’ ring to prevent leakage. The seat shall be molded with black nitrile rubber or nylon and shall
line the whole body. The spindle shall be of AISI 41 steel. The valve shall be suitable for a working
pressure of 16.5 kg/sq.cm and shall be complete with flow control lever and notches, factory machined
companion flanges and bolts and nuts. These valves conform to BS 5155 with electro steel nickel coated
SG Iron (N) and seat material EPDM3.The pressure rating & dia of valve shall be indicated on the valve
body for proper identification.
1.2.3 BALL VALVES

The ball valve shall be of high-pressure type and shall be of sizes as specified and/or shown in the
drawings the normal size of a ball valve shall be that, corresponding to the size of the pipe to which it is
fixed. Ball valves shall have body of carbon steel. The ball and the shaft shall be of stainless steel. The seat

shall be of PTFE. The valve shall be complete with socket weld ends and the float of copper sheet. The
minimum thickness of copper sheet used for making the float shall be 0.45mm for a float exceeding
115mm dia. The body of the high pressure ball valve when assembled in working condition with the float
immersed to not more than half of its diameter shall remain closed against a test pressure of 3.5kg/sqcm.
The ball valve shall generally conform to IS specification No.1703:1977. The weight of ball cock and the
size of the ball cock shall be as per IS specification.
BALL VALVES WITH HANDLE

Body : Brass
Bore size : Full bore
Ball seal : PTFE
O Ring seal : Nitrile rubber / viton
Threads : BS 21 taper threads
Finish : Chrome plated
Pressure rating : PN 10 / 16 / 25
Application : water / Air / Oil.
1.2.4 MANHOLE COVERS

CI Frame with Covers: Covers shall be of heavy duty cast iron with lifting hooks as per IS 1726 – 1991. The
details given in the drawing and fixed on the CI frame embedded in concrete. Cover placed on the frame
shall be airtight. Weight of the cover on frame shall be specified in the schedule of quantities. All castings
shall be free from voids whether due to shrinkage, gas inclusion or other causes. Covers shall have a
raised checkered design on the top surface to provide an adequate non-slip grip. The sizes of covers
specified shall be taken as the clear internal dimensions of the frame.
The covers and frames shall be coated with a black bituminous composition. The coating shall be smooth
and tenacious. It shall not flow when exposed to a temperature of 63° C and shall not brittle as to chip off
at a temperature of 0° C.
1.3 UPVC Sch 40 Pipes & Fittings

The pipes shall be UPVC (Unplasticized Poly Vinyl Chloride) material for cold water supply piping system
with Sch 40 and using solvent welded Sch 40 fittings i.e. Tees, Elbows, Couplers, Unions, Reducers,
Brushing etc. including transition fittings (connection between PVC & Metal pipes / GI) i.e. Brass adapters
both Male & Female threaded and all conforming to ASTM D-2466 with only PVC solvent cement
confirming to ASTM F-493, with clamps / structural metal supports as required /directed at site, including
painting of the exposed pipes with one coat of desired shade of enamel paint. All termination points for
installation of faucets shall have brass termination fittings. Installation shall be to the satisfaction of
manufacturer, client & consultant.
i. Joining Pipes & Fittings

a. Cutting: Pipes shall be cut either with a wheel type plastic pipe cutting or hacksaw blade and
care shall be taken to make a square cut which provides optimal bonding area within a joint.

b. Deburring / Bevelling: Burrs should be removed from the outside and inside of pipe with a
deburring tool/ pocket knife or file otherwise burrs may prevent proper contact between
pipe and fittings during assembly. Also the outer end of pipe should be slightly chamfered.
c. Fitting preparation: A clean dry rag/cloth should be used to wipe dirt and moisture from the
fitting sockets and tubing end. Dry assemble the pipe and fitting to ensure proper fit and
alignment.
d. Solvent Cement Application: An even coat of solvent cement should be applied on the pipe
end and a thin coat inside the fitting socket, otherwise too much of cement solvent can
cause clogged water ways.
e. Assembly: After applying the solvent cement on both pipe and fitting socket, pipe should be
inserted into the fitting socket within 20 seconds, and rotating the pipe ¼ to ½ turn while
inserting so as to ensure even distribution of solvent cement within the joint. The
assembled system should be held for 10 seconds (approximately) in order to allow the joint
to set up.
An even bead of cement should be evident around the joint and if this bead is not continuous remake
the joint to avoid potential leaks.
Set & Cure times:
Solvent cement set and cure times shall be strictly adhered to as per the below mentioned table.
Minimum Cure time prior to pressure testing upto 180 PSI
Size
Ambient Temperature 1/2" to 1 1/4" 1 1/2" to 3" 4" to 8"
Above 15 deg C 1 hr 2 hr 6 hr
4 to 15 deg C 2 hr 4 hr 12 hr
Below 4 deg C 8 hr 16 hr 48 hr
f. Testing: Once an installation is completed and cured as per above mentioned

recommendations, the system should be hydrostatically pressure tested at 150 psi (10 Bar)
for two hours. During pressure testing, the system should be fitted with water and if a leak
is found, the joint should be cut out and replacing the same with new one by using couplers.
No payment shall be made for reworking of already finished works.
ii. Transition of PVC to Metals: When making a transition connection to metal threads, special Brass
transition fitting (Male and female adapters) should be used. Plastic threaded connections/ transition
fittings should not be used in the project.
iii. Threaded Sealants: For fixing of bath fittings Teflon tape shall be used to make threaded connections leak
proof. Hold tite shall be used for other threaded connections like valve etc.
iv. Solvent Cement: Only CPVC solvent cement conforming to ASTMF 493 should be used for joining pipe
with fittings and valves. Flow guard CPVC cement solvents have a minimum shelf life of 1 year. Aged
cement solvent will often change colour or being to thicken and become gelatinous or jelly like and when
this happens, the cement should not be used. The cement solvent should be used within 30 days after
opening the company’s seal and tightly close the seal after using in order to avoid its freezing. The
freezed cement solvent should be discarded immediately and fresh one should be used. The solvent
cement usage should be adhered to as given in table below

Diameter of pipe in inch ½” ¾” 1” ¼” 1½” 2”
Approx. nos. of joints which can be 200 180 150 Nos 130 Nos 100 Nos 70
made per litre of solvent cement. Nos Nos
v. Hangers and supports

Spacing of supports should be as per the below mentioned table:
Pipe size 15.5°C 26.6°C 37.7°C 48.8°C 60°C
Inch Ft Ft Ft Ft Ft
1/2 4 1/2 4 1/2 4 2 1/2 2 1/2
3/4 5 4 1/2 4 2 1/2 2 1/2
1 5 1/2 5 4 1/2 3 2 1/2
1 1/4 5 1/2 5 1/2 5 3 3
1 1/2 6 5 1/2 5 3 1/2 3
2 6 5 1/2 5 3 1/2 3
2 1/2 6 1/2 6 5 1/2 4 3 1/2
3 7 7 6 4 3 1/2
4 7 1/2 7 6 1/2 4 1/2 4
6 8 1/2 8 7 1/2 5 4 1/2
1.4 Colour Code for Water Supply Pipes

Colour code for water-supply pipes shall be as per standard requirement. Details as mentioned below.
COLOUR CODE FOR GENERAL SERVICES
SL NO DESCPRITION GROUND COLOUR FIRST COLOUR BAND SECOND COLOUR BAND

A WATER
1 Cooling Sea green French blue ------
2 Boiler feed Sea green ------ ------
3 Condensate Sea green Light brown ------
4 Drinking Sea green French blue Signal red
5 Treated Sea green Light orange ------
Cold water from
6 Sea green French blue Canary yellow
storage tank.
1.5 Disinfection of the Pipe Network

The entire water distribution network is to be disinfected by using residual chlorine of 0.2 ppm for a period of 2
(two) hours. The entire chlorinated pipe network is to be flushed out with fresh water before the water supply
system is put into operation for domestic usage.

1.6 VALVES, STRAINERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES
1.6.1 General
This section deals with different type of valves like butterfly valves, gate valves, ball valves, check valves, balancing
valves and Strainers and pressure gauges. The contractor shall refer to the approved make of materials specified
in the document & relevant drawings.
Valves shall be provided on branch pipe connections to mains and at connection to equipment where indicated.
All valves are to be located for easy access. All valves shall be supported wherever necessary with MS brackets.
Valves shall comply with IS 780 (Class I) for C.I sluice valves and IS 778 for G.M valves and tested.
Pressure gauges shall have outer diameter not less than 115mm with 10mm BSP full thread, brass body siphon
and gauge cock of size10mm. Dia l ga u g e s sh al l h a v e adequate response for the pressures encountered
within the specified (Range 0-15Kg/sq.cm).
1. 6. 2 Va l ve s
All valves (gate, ball, check, safety) shall be of brass suitable for the particular service as specified. All valves shall
be of the particular duty and design as specified. Valves shall either be of screwed type or flanged type, as
specified, with suitable flanges and non-corrosive bolts and gaskets. Tail pieces as required shall be supplied along
with valves. Gate, ball and check valves shall conform to Indian Standard IS: 776 and non-return valves and swing
check type reflux to IS: 5312.
Sl. No Type of Valve Size Construction Ends

a. Isolating Valve 15 mm to 50 mm Gunmetal Screwed
b. Butterfly Valve 65 mm and above Cast Iron Flanged
c. G.M. non return valve 15 mm to 32 mm Gun Metal Screwed
d. Flap Type – Non return valve 40 mm and above Cast Iron Flanged
1. 6. 3 Fl an ge s an d Un io n s
Sufficient number of flanges and unions shall be provided as required to facilitate maintenance work after the
piping is installed. Mild steel flanges shall be used for pipes. The flanges shall be connected to the pipeline by
screwing or welding depending on the requirement. The flanges shall conform to the relevant ASTM standard for
the particular material used for its manufacture. The flanges shall also conform to IS 5211.
1. 6. 4 R el i ef Ven ts
Drainage systems, especially those in tall buildings, are frequently found to develop extremely high and
objectionable pneumatic effects in several specific portions of such piping. Special air pressure relief vents are
recommended to control, within tolerable limits.
The air pressure relief vent ,at least one-half the diameter of the building drain , should be provided at the top of
vertical offset so as to supply such additional air to the drain as may be required by the sudden increase in liquid
velocity in the vertical offset Where a building trap or other sharp change in flow direction is provided in the
building drain downstream from the vertical offset ,an air pressure relief vent should be provided at the base of,

and within 3 ft (0.900m) of, the vertical offset. Lower relief vent should be branch –connected to the upper relief
vent at a sufficient height.
The recommended provision for soil and waste stacks more than ten stories in height is to provide a yoke relief
vent at each tenth story of the drainage stack, counting downward from the top story. The lower end of the yoke
relief vent should connect to the drainage stack by means of a Y located below the horizontal branch drain serving
fixtures in that story, and the upper end should connect to the vent stack by means of a T or inverted Y located at
least 3 ft (0.900m) above the floor level as shown in the drawing.
1. 6. 5 In st a l lat io n o f V al ve s
Valves should be installed in true tolerance of +/-5mm with respect to the center line of the pipe. Where threaded
joints are encountered the threads should be initially sealed with PVC tape to avoid leakage due to improper
tightening and leakage from threading.
Proper care has to be taken in welded installation so that the centreline of valve should not deviate from the pipe
causing uneven load on the pipe and further stress during its operation. The welding should be done only after
proper inspection of the joint by the Authority’s Engineer in the tacked position of the joint.
Before putting the line in operative mode the valves should be checked for free and easy operation of the hand
wheel. Any burrs or foreign materials should be removed by flushing before final operation so that no choking in
the valves should occur which might damage the valve seat.
1.7 PUMPS
1.7.1 Submersible- Mono block Pump
Supply, testing & commissioning of Horizontal Single/ Multi- stage submersible pump suitable for pumping clean,
less viscous, non-aggressive liquids without solid particles or fibre. Pumps are fitted with standard & approved
motor. Impeller & other parts of pump are made of SS304 with 3-phase motor, sand shield, liquid-lubricated
bearings and pressure equalizing diaphragm. Pump Enclosure class (IEC 34-5):IP58. Pumps should contain integral
suction strainer & fitted with priming mechanism. Motor parts are CED coated, fitted with carbon bushes. Double
lip Seal back to back to arrangement to ensure no water leakage inside the motor. Motor should be fitted with
mechanical seal & withstand upto 6 kN having 4 SS segments and carbon thrust pads. Pumps are provided with
stop ring. Motors should be locally rewindable. Motor should capable of good starting torque and low starting
current. Pumps shall be of NEMA with Standard AISI 416 Stainless steel shaft Rubber O-ring for all fasteners. All
bearing should be water lubricated and square shape to enabling sand particular from the pump. At the delivery of
the pump each pump shall be fitted with a NRV & a valve of appropriate size & make of components shall be as per
approved list. The pump shall be placed in a pump pit of adequate size such that the minimum submergence level
is maintained at all times. Dry run protection, overload trip, shall be provided for each pump system. The pump
shall be provided with a chain/ guide rope to lift the same. The pump shall be placed such that dust particles, etc
do not enter the pump impeller & damage the same. A min clear ht of 100 mm shall be provided at the base of the
pump to avoid dust particles entering the pump. The pump shall work with a min motor efficiency of 55-80%.
Motor should be suitable for horizontal installation. Operating voltage 220 + 10% -15% for single phase and 415+
10% -15% for three phases.
1.7.2 Storm Water Pump

Supply, testing & commissioning of Vertical single-stage stainless steel submersible pump with vertical
discharge port and integrated submersible 1/3-phase totally enclosed motor in insulation class F with
thermal overload protection. Pump should be fitted with a suction strainer. The impeller is a SEMI OPEN
impeller for 12 mm free passage suitable for pumping groundwater, surface water & rain water and similar.
Pump is with a double shaft seal and an intermediate oil chamber pre-filled with non-toxic special oil.
The pump shall come with a riser pipe, a cooling jacket for continuous cooling of the motor by the pumped
liquid and long-life deep-groove greased-for-life ball bearings. The pump shall fitted with carrying handle
and supplied with a 10 m mains cable. The mains cable should of the plug type with glass sealing compound
in the socket to prevent penetration of humidity into the stator windings. The pump shall work with a min
motor efficiency of 55-80%. Operating voltage 220 + 10% -15% for single phase and 415+ 10% -15% for three
phase
1.7.3 Horizontal Mono-block Pump

Supply, testing & commissioning of Horizontal centrifugal multi-stage pump with axial suction port and
radial discharge port close-coupled with a single/ three-phase TEFC motor with thermal overload protection.
Pump and motor are mounted on a common base plate. The pump should be fitted with mechanical shaft
seal. Impellers, intermediate chambers and shaft are made of stainless steel. Suction and discharge
chambers are made of Cast iron. Motor should be IP 54 protection & Class F winding insulation. The pump
shall work with a min motor efficiency of 65-80%. Operating voltage 220 + 10% -15% for single phase and
415+ 10% -15% for three phase
1.7.4 Vertical Multi Stage Pump

Supply testing & commissioning of vertical, non-self-priming, multistage, in-line, centrifugal pump for
installation in pipe systems and mounting on a foundation. Pumps shall fitted with cartridge type
mechanical seal. Impellers and intermediate chambers are made of Stainless steel, Pump head and base are
made of Cast iron. The shaft seal shall have an assembly length according to EN 12756. Power transmission
is via cast iron split coupling. Motor should be with IP55 protection & Class F windi ng insulation. The pump
shall work with a min motor efficiency of 70-80%. Operating voltage 220 + 10% -15% for single phase and
415+ 10% -15% for three phase
1.7.5 Pump
The pumps shall be of the vertical multi-stage centrifugal design. The pump suction/discharge chamber
(base) shall be in CI or SS as per requirement. Motors tool and pump shaft coupling shall be constructed of
cast iron. The impellers, pump shaft, diffuser chambers, outer discharge sleeve, impeller seal rings, and seal
ring retainers shall be constructed of stainless steel. Optional materials for the suction/discharge chamber
and motor stool liner shall be stainless steel.
The pump impellers shall be secured directly to the pump shaft by means of a spine shaft arrangement for
model of the lower sizes, and the pump impellers shall be secured to the shaft by a split cone and nut for
higher sizes. The shaft journal and chamber bearings shall be Tungsten Carbide and Ceramic/ Bronze. All
pumps shall be equipped with a high temperature cartridge mechanical seal assembly with Tungsten
Carbide/ Carbon or Tungsten Carbide seal faces mounted in stainless steel components. The shaft seal shall
be of the cartridge design; the larger pumps (with 7.5 Kw and above motors) shall be designed so that the
cartridge seal may be replaced without removing the motors.

1.7.6 Motor & Variable Frequency Drive
The motors shall be TEFC type, class F insulation, 2 pole, efficiency class “Eff –1”, should be a NEMA
standard motor. Drive-end motor bearings shall be designed to absorb thrust and shall be adequately sized
to ensure long motor life.
The variable frequency drive enclosure shall include dry-contact fault-output relay contacts along with analog and
digital inputs. The motor shall detect/protect itself against under voltage, over voltage, excessive temperature, and
set-point signal fault.
1.7.7 Electronic Controller

An electronic dedicated pump logic controller shall be a Hydro pneumatic system (Multi Pump Controller) or
approved equal. The controller shall operate the pumps to maintain the required system pressure while using
minimum energy and alternating between pumps to maintain relatively equal pump operating hours.
As flow demand begins, one of the pumps will start at low speed. As demand increases, the pump will speed up
until it reaches full RPM. At this point the second pump will start in full speed. The speed of the first pumps will
vary until it builds up required system pressure. This sequence will continue for additional working pumps, if
demand is not met.
Pumps shall changeover automatically to maintain the system pressure depending on demand, time, and fault.
Electronic controller should perform flow estimation every 2 minutes so as to minimize or utilize the number of
duty pumps and stop all pumps in an event of no demand, thereby the performance and energy consumption of
the system is optimized.
If the system includes an optional standby pump, the controller shall exercise the standby pump as a part of the
system and equally run the pump as other pumps in the system.
The controller shall accept a low-suction pressure or other suction fault input to shut down the system. The
controller shall have a keypad and a graphical user interface display with Installation wizard for easy
commissioning of the system.
1.7.8 Programmable Functions

System functions shall be programmable through the keypad. These programmable functions and information
shall include, but not be limited to:
1) Closed loop control.
2) Automatic pump alternations
3) Automatic cascade control of pumps
4) Set point adjustment and control
5) Clock Program
6) Flow estimation function
7) Programmable pump testing
8) Programming of No of starts/stops per hour
9) Remote controlling of the entire Hydro Pneumatic System through Ethernet. (User has to provide
Static IP address to HPS system which can be accessed by BMS computer for remote control)
10) Standby pump designation
11) Friction Loss Compensation (set point)
12) Pump status
13) Elapsed running hours for each pump

14) System pressure set point
15) Actual system pressure
16) Pump speed (percentage)
17) Fault memory up to recent 24 faults with time stamping
18) To display calculated system flow
19) Pressure transducer design settings
20) Redundant primary sensor for pressure monitoring
21) High and low discharge pressure shut-down limit
22) Analog input for remote set-point control
23) Digital input for remote stop/start
1.7.9 Control Cabinet

The controller shall be mounted in a control cabinet with an IP 52 enclosure of suitable rating (or specified optional
cabinet) with the keypad and display screen mounted through the outer door. In addition to the electronic pump
controller, the control cabinet shall include circuit breakers for each pump and the control circuit and control
relays for alarm functions. Control cabinet shall include the following, but not be limited to:
1. Motor protection
2. Dry run protection – Float switch / Inlet pressure monitoring device for suction lift condition
3. Ethernet connectivity (Web based control)
4. 320 X 240 pixels VGA display with adjustable backlight
5. Pump Fault Lights – A Red light for fault indications
6. Visual Alarm
7. Pump Elapsed Time Meters
8. Manual Operation
The entire packaged pumping system shall be mounted on a Hot Dipped Galvanized MS or SS fabricated skid. The
control cabinet shall be mounted in one of the following ways depending on the size of the cabinet.
1. On a Hot Dipped GI or MS fabricated with powder coated control cabinet stand attached to the system
skid
2. On a Hot Dipped GI or MS fabricated with powder coated skid, separate from the main system skid
3. Floor mounted control cabinet with plinth.
1.7.10 Plumbing
 The suction and discharge manifolds shall be fabricated of Hot Dipped Galvanized MS or SS. Both
manifolds shall be designed to attach to the system piping at either end of the manifold. Delivery
manifold shall include a pressure gauge. The suction manifold shall have as standard a pressure switch or
pressure sensor to detect low suction pressure or a float switch to prevent dry running. The discharge
manifold shall include a pressure transducer with a 4-20mA output. The pressure transducer shall be
factory installed and wired.
 Isolation valves shall be installed on the suction and discharge of each pump. A check valve shall be
installed on the discharge of each pump (optional on the suction side for suction lift applications).
 The system shall include a diaphragm type pressure tank sized by the system manufacturer. All systems
shall be factory tested for performance and hydrostatic tested to at least 1.5 times the system working

pressure. The system manufacturer shall provide verified Factory Performance Tests and Witness Factory
Performance Tests.
1.7.11 Hydro pneumatic System Specification for Pressurised Water Boosting System Using Variable Speed Drive
 Supply of booster set consisting upto a maximum of six identical vertical multistage in - line pumps in cast
iron GG20 pump head & base c/w cataphoresis coating, cartridge type mechanical seal, all internals in AISI
304 stainless steel, mounted on common galvanized steel base frame and controlled by variable
frequency drives & a logic controller, which have features like application optimized software, regular
optimization of operating conditions and read-out of operating data, Bus Communication possibility,
Digital remote-control functions, pump & system monitoring functions, Display, Alarm & signal functions
and clock programs. Panel to have 2x24 character LCD display, green & red LED’s for operating & fault
indication, potential free contacts for remote interfacing, and an inbuilt lifetime battery backup for all
clock functions.
 Booster set should include non return valves, isolating valves, pressure transmitter on discharge side, non-
return valve, and pressure gauge. Booster set should ensure constant pressure on discharge side through
continuously variable adjustment of speed of one of the pumps, while the remaining pumps in operation
are running on mains operating at full speed to bring about pump performance to meet consumption
levels. Also provision should be made for alternate change over between pumps in operation once every
24 hours & frequency converter operation of pumps by rotation - all should be built in, cyclically, in the
controls to ensure equal wear and tear of all pumps in the booster set. Means should be provided for
friction loss compensation for increased consumption rate.
 Booster set should incorporate following “Power saving features” as standard.
 Selection of 3 basis set points for pressure relative to time.
 Pipe compensation i.e. Change of set point depending on water consumption.
 Compulsory change of staring of sequence, i.e. Equal operating time for pump, both for frequency control
and ON/OFF regulation.
 Inputs and outputs for external communication.
 A small sized pressure tank, (accumulator) to provide for reducing impact of water hammer and minimize
short cycling of the pumps. The accumulators are piped to allow for in service maintenance.
The functions of the Controller should incorporate the following features,

 Closed loop control.
 On / off operation at low flow.
 Automatic cascade control of pumps
 Selections of switching sequences, automatic pump change and pump priority.
 Manual Operation.
 Analog set point influence
 Friction loss compensation
 Set point adjustment
The remote control functions should have the following features.

 System On / Off

 Set point control
 Switching of individual pumps
The monitoring functions should have the following features,

 Min / Max Levels
 Pre pressure
 Motor protection
 Water shortage monitoring
Enclosure Class: Control Box IP 54.

Motors IP 55.
1.8 Water Level Controllers

The water level controller shall be microprocessor based with LED indicators. Each transfer pump shall be
provided with a level controller. The level controller shall be integrated with OHTs of all the four blocks.
Tinned copper cable shall be run in conduits from pump room to individual OHT’s. The level controller
shall switch on the pump incase of low water level in any of the OHT. However the OHT having low water
level shall only receive water as flow of water to other OHTs shall be stopped by float operated ball valve.
The pump shall stop once all the OHTs are filled. Timer shall be provided to operate the working and stand
by pumps alternately.
1.9 Connection to the RCC Water Tanks

The contractor shall provide all inlets, outlets, washouts, vents, ball cocks, overflows control valves and all
such other piping connections including level indicator to water storage tanks as called for. All pipes crossing
through RCC work shall have puddle flanges fabricated from GI pipes of required size and length and welded
to 6mm thick MS plate. All puddle flanges must be fixed in true alignment and level to ensure further
connection in proper order.
Valves of an approved make shall be provided as near to the tank as practicable on every outlet pipe from
the storage tank except the overflow pipe. Overflow and vent pipes shall terminate with mosquito proof
grating.
The overflow pipe shall be so placed to allow the discharge of water being readily seen, except for flushing
water tank, in-case of which the overflow should be connected to waste pipe. The overflow pipe shall be of
size as indicated. A stop valve shall also be provided in the inlet water connection to the tank.
1.10 Water Meter

Water meters of approved make and design shall be supplied for installation at locations as shown. The water
meters shall meet with the approval of local supply authorities, if they are used at municipal inlet lines. Suitable
valves and chambers or wall meter box to house the meters shall also be provided along with the meters, but the
same shall be measured separately.
The meters shall conform to Indian Standard IS: 779 and IS: 2373/2104
• Tanker Water Inlet
• Softener Outlet

• STP Outlet
• Treated Water tank outlet in flushing line
• Treated Water tank outlet in domestic line
• Treated Water tank outlet in landscaping line
• Cooling tower makeup water line
1.11 Electrical Works

All electrical works shall be carried out as per the specifications and special conditions mentioned above under
package – “Electrical works.”
1.12 Chlorinated PVC PIPES (CPVC)
SCOPE
This specification covers requirements, test methods, and methods of marking for chlorinated poly (vinyl chloride)
plastic hot-and cold-water distribution system components made in one standard dimension ratio and intended
0 0
for water service up to and including 180 F (82 C). These components comprise pipe and tubing, socket-type
fittings, street fittings, plastic-to-metal transition fittings, solvent cements, and adhesives. Requirements and
methods of test are included for materials, workmanship, dimensions and tolerances, hydrostatic sustained
pressure strength, and thermo-cycling resistance. The components covered by this specification are intended for
use in residential and commercial, hot and cold, potable water distribution systems.
The values stated in either inch-pound or SI units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the text, SI
units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each system are not exact equivalents therefore each system
shall be used independently of the other. Combining values from the two systems may result in non-conformance
with the specification.
Materials
 Basic Materials Description—Chlorinated poly (vinyl chloride) plastics used to make pipe, tubing, and
fittings meeting the requirements of this specification are categorized by two criteria; namely, basic short-
term properties, and long-term hydrostatic strength.
 Basic Short-Term Properties—This specification covers CPVC 41 pipe, tubing, and fittings made from
plastic materials meeting the mechanical strength, heat resistance, flammability, and chemical resistance
requirements for CPVC 23447-B in Specification D 1784.
 CPVC 23447-B was formerly designated as CPVC Type IV Grade 1, and is herein designated as CPVC 41.
This is also used in marking pipe, tubing, or fittings.
 Long-Term Hydrostatic Strength—This specification covers CPVC 41 pipe, tubing, and fittings which are
further defined by hydrostatic design stress as CPVC 4120. Pipe and tubing are so defined on the basis of
0
long-term hydrostatic strength tests and are made from compounds having an established 180°F [82 C]
hydrostatic design stress of 500 psi [3.45 MPa] or greater in accordance with Appendix XI and Test
Method D 2837. Fittings are so defined by hydrostatic sustained pressure tests on fitting assemblies,
required by this specification and based on the hydrostatic strength of the corresponding pipe or tubing.
 No hydrostatic design stress, as such, exists for finings until such time as long-term hydrostatic strength
test methods for fittings are developed.

 Rework Material—clean rework material generated from the manufacturer's own production may be
used by the same manufacturer provided the pipe, tubing, or fittings meet all the requirements of this
specification.
Classification
Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings—This specification classifies CPVC 4120 pipe, tubing, and fittings by a single standard
0
dimension ratio which shall be SDR II, by a maximum continuous use temperature which shall be 1800F [82 C] and
by nominal pipe or tubing diameters from 3/8 in.[9.5 mm] through 2 in. [50 mm].
Plastic-to-Metal Transition Finings—This specification classifies CPVC plastic-to-metal transition fittings intended
0
for use up to and including 1800F [82 C] as CPVC-I800F on the basis of resistance to failure by thermo-cycling.
Solvent Cements and Adhesives— this specification classifies solvent cements and adhesives meeting the require-
ments contained herein as CPVC Solvent Cement or CPVC Adhesive.
General
 Wall Minimums—Table 1 and Table 2 show wall thickness minimums. Calculated SDR 11 tubing wall thick-
nesses that fall below 0.068 in. [1.73 mm] shall be arbitrarily increased to that value. Calculated SDR 11
fitting wall thicknesses that fall below 0.102 in. [2.59 mm] for the fitting socket bottom, or 0.I28 in. [3.25
mm] for the fitting body, shall be arbitrarily increased to these values.
 Interference Fit—the diameters and tolerances in Table I and Table 2 provide for socket-type joints having
an interference fit based on the major diameter of pipe and tubing having a degree of out-of-roundness.
This does not necessarily imply interference based on the minor diameter of the pipe or tubing.
 Out-of Roundness—the maximum out-of-roundness requirements shown in Table 1 and Table 2 for pipe,
tubing, and finings apply to the average measured diameter.
Pipe and Tubing:

 Outside Diameter and Wall Thickness—The outside diameters and wall thicknesses for pipe and tubing
shall meet the requirements for dimension and tolerance given in Table 1 when measured in accordance
with Test Method D2122.
 Wall Thickness Range—the wall thickness range for pipe and tubing shall be within 12 % when measured
in accordance with Test Method D 2122.
 Flattening—there shall be no evidence of splitting, cracking, or breaking when the pipe is tested in
accordance with 9.2
 Length— Pipe and tubing supplied in straight lengths shall have a tolerance on any specified length of
+1/2 -0 in. [+12.5, -0 mm].
 Socket-Type Fillings:
 Dimensions—Fitting sockets, inside diameters (waterways), wall thicknesses, laying lengths, and reducing
bushing minimums shall meet the requirements for dimension and tolerance given in Table 2. Table 3,
and Table 4 when measured in accordance with Test Method D2122. The spigot ends of street fittings
shall meet the outside diameter and minimum wall requirements of Table 1.
 Alignment—the maximum angular variation of any socket opening shall not exceed 1/20 off the true
centreline axis.

Plastic –to-Metal Transition Fittings
 Back Dimensions—Plastic parts of plastic to metal transition fittings shall meet the dimensional re-
quirements of Table 1 and Table 2 where applicable with the following exceptions. Such parts shall be
exempted from the requirements for inside diameter (waterway) and wall thickness tolerance.
 Thread Dimensions — Transition fittings that rely on interference fit and sealant shall be threaded with
American National Standard Taper Pipe Threads meeting the dimensional requirements of ANSI B2.1
 Thread Tolerance — The manufacturing tolerance on CPVC threads, measured with a ring gauge, shall be
a maximum variation of 1½ turns large or small when measured in accordance with Test Method D 2122.
 Starting Threads — The entering ends of external CPVC threads shall have a Blunt Start (see Fig. 1)
produced by making the width of the thread at the start approximately 50 to 75% of the full thread. The
Blunt Start provides for easy entrance and protection of the thread, and shall be included in the
measurement of thread length.
Hydrostatic Sustained Pressure

 General — Pipe, tubing, and fittings (tested as assemblies) shall meet the minimum hydrostatic sustained
pressure requirements of both test conditions shown in Table 5 when tested in accordance with 9.2.
 Pipe and Tubing Quality—Test condition B shall be termed the primary sustained pressure test for pipe
and tubing and shall be used for quality control. Test condition A shall be termed the secondary sustained
pressure test for pipe and tubing and shall be used for periodic performance qualification. Failure to pass
either lest is cause for rejection.
 Fitting Quality—Test condition A shall be termed the primary sustained pressure test for fittings and shall
be used for quality control .Test condition B shall be termed the secondary sustained pressure test for
fittings and shall be used for periodic performance qualification. Failure to pass either test is cause for
rejection.
 Thermo cycling — Plastic-to-metal transition fittings (other than metal socket-type transitions for use with
adhesives assembled according to the manufacturer's instructions, shall not separate or leak when
thermo cycled 1000 times between the temperatures of 600Fand 1800F [160C and 820C] in accordance
with 9.3.8
Requirements of Solvent Cement and Adhesive Joints

CPVC Solvent Cements
Note 6—CPVC solvent cements may exist which meet the requirements of the specification when used in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, without a primer or cleaner. It is recommended that those
CPVC solvent cements which may be used without a primer or cleaner be dear or yellow in colour. Otherwise, it is
recommended that CPVC solvent cement requiring the use of 3 primer or cleaner be orange in colour. Colour
identification is recommended to facilitate cement recognition to prevent the misuse of the cement and to the
minimize the unintentional use of other cements that may fail at elevated service temperatures.
General—CPVC solvent cements, for use in CPVC 41, plastic-to-plastic, socket-type joints shall meet the re-
quirements set forth in Specification F 493.
Hydrostatic Burst Strength—2-in. [50-mm] CPVC solvent cement joints shall exceed the minimum hydrostatic burst
strength requirements given in Table 6 after a maximum drying interval of 2 h when tested in accordance with
10.1.3, Failure to pass the burst requirement at either temperature is cause for rejection.

Hydrostatic Sustained Pressure Strength—½-in. [I5-mm] CPVC solvent cement joints shall meet the requirements
of 6.2 when tested in accordance with 9.3.
Safe Handling of Solvent Cement—Refer to Practice F402.
CPVC ADHESIVES
General—CPVC adhesives (other than CPVC solvent cement), shall qualify for use in CPVC socket-type joints by a
rigorous simulated use testing program as further defined in 7.2.2 and 7.2.3. CPVC adhesives shall be tested in the
largest size joint and in the exact type of joint for which they are intended; that is, 2-in. [50-mm] plastic-to-metal
or 2-in. [50-mm] plastic-to-plastic.
Hydrostatic Sustained Pressure Strength—Socket-type CPVC adhesive joints, made and cured according to the
adhesive manufacturer's recommended procedure, shall not separate or leak when tested in accordance with 10.2
at the hydrostatic sustained pressure condition given in Table 7.
Thermo-cycling—Socket-type CPVC adhesive joints, made and cured according to the adhesive manufacturer's
recommended procedure, shall not separate or leak when thermo-cycled 10000 times between the temperatures
0 0 0 0
of 60 F and 180 F [16 C and 82 C] in accordance with 10.2.
WORKMANSHIP, FINISH AND APPEARANCE

The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and essentially uniform in color, capacity, density, and other
properties. The inside and outside surfaces shall be semi-matte or glossy in appearance (depending on the type of
plastic) and free of chalking, sticky or tacky material. The surfaces shall be free of excessive bloom, that is slight
bloom is acceptable. The pipe walls shall be free of cracks, holes, blisters, voids, foreign inclusion, or other defects
which are visible to the naked eye and which may affect the wall integrity. Holes deliberately placed in perforated
pipe are acceptable. Bloom or chalking may develop in pipe exposed to direct rays of the sun (ultraviolet radiant
energy) for extended periods and consequently these requirements do not apply to pipe after extended exposure
to direct rays of the sun.
CPVC SCHEDULE 40 PRESSURE PIPES AND FITTINGS FOR WATER SUPPLY AS PER ASTM F- 441
Outside Diameters and Wall Thicknesses For CPVC 4120, SDR 11 Plastic Pipe As Per ASTM D-2846
Outside Diameter, in.

Nominal Size (mm) Wall Thickness, in. (mm) Pressure Ratting. PSI (Kg.Cm²)
(in.) (mm)
Average Tolerance Minimum Tolerance 73.4°F (23°C) 180°F (82°C)
0.625 ± 0.003 0.068 +0.020

½* (15) 400 (28.1) 100 (7.0)
(15.9) (0.08) (1.73) (0.51)
0.875 ± 0.003 0.080 +0.020

¾ (20) 400 (28.1) 100 (7.0)
(22.2) (0.08) (2.03) (0.51)
1.125 ± 0.003 0.102 +0.020

1 (25) 400 (28.1) 100 (7.0)
(28.6) (0.08) (2.59) (0.51)
1.375 ± 0.003 0.125 +0.020

1¼ (32) 400 (28.1) 100 (7.0)
(34.9) (0.08) (3.18) (0.51)
1½ (40) 1.625 ± 0.004 0.148 +0.020 400 (28.1) 100 (7.0)

(41.3) (0.10) (3.76) (0.51)
2.125 ± 0.004 0.193 +0.023

2 (50) 400 (28.1) 100 (7.0)
(54.0) (0.10) (4.90) (0.58)
* For ½" wall thickness minimum is not a function of SDR.
Support Spacing for PVC Pipe
Support and Spacing

To ensure the satisfactory operation of a PVC piping system the location and type of hangers should be carefully
considered. Hangers should not compress, distort, cut or abrade the piping. All piping should be supported with an
approved hanger at intervals sufficiently close to maintain correct pipe alignment and to prevent sagging or
reversal. Pipe should also be supported at all branch ends and at all changes of direction. Support traps arms as
close as possible to the trap. In keeping with good plumbing practices support and brace all closet bends and
fasten closet flanges.
Recommended Horizontal or Vertical Support / pipe clamping
Pipe Size in inches Spacing in feet

½ “ to 1” (Cold) 5.0 (1.52 m)
½ “ to 1” (Hot) 2.5 (0.76 m)
1¼ “ to 2” (Cold) 6.0 (1.82 m)
1¼ “ to 2” (Hot) (1.06 m)
Handling
The pipe should be handled with reasonable care. Thermoplastic pipe is much lighter weight than the metal pipe.
There is sometimes a tendency to throw it around. This should be avoided. The pipe should never be dragged or
pushed from a truck bed. Pallets for pipe should be removed with a fork lift. Loose pipe can be rolled down
timbers, as long as the pieces do not fall on each other or on any hard or uneven surface. In all cases, severe
contact with any sharp objects (rocks, angle irons, forks on forklifts, etc.) should be avoided.
Storing
If possible, pipe should be stored inside. When this is not possible, the pipe should be stored on level ground,
which is dry and free from sharp objects. If different schedules of pipe are stacked together, the pipe with the
thickest walls should be at the bottom.
The pipe should be protected from the sun and be in an area with proper ventilation. This will lessen the effects of
ultraviolet rays and help prevent heat build-up. If the pipe is stored in racks, it should be continuously supported
along its length. If this is not possible, the spacing of the supports should not exceed three feet (3').
When storage temperatures are below 32°F, extra care should be taken when handling the pipe. This will help
prevent any problems, which could be caused by the slightly lower impact strength of PVC and CPVC pipe at
temperatures below freezing.

Laying, joining, curing
Systems should be installed in a good and workmanlike manner consistent with normal industry standards and in
conformance with all local plumbing, fire and building code requirements. Failure to follow proper installation
practices procedures or techniques can result in system failure, property damage or personal injury.
Pipe and fitting systems should be used for their intended purpose as defined by local plumbing and building codes
and the applicable ASTM standard.
Follow manufacturers' instructions for all related products.
Cut pipe square as joints are sealed at the base of the fitting socket. An angled cut may result in joint failure.
Acceptable tools include miter saw, mechanical cut off saw or wheel cutter. Wheel type cutters must employ a
blade designed for plastics.
Remove all burrs from inside and outside of pipe with a knife-edge, file, or de-burring tool. Chamfer (bevel) the
end of the pipe 10° -15°
Remove surface dirt, grease, or moisture with a clean dry cloth.
With light pressure, pipe should go one half to one third of the way into the fitting socket. Pipe and fittings that are
too tight or too loose should not be used.
Use an applicator that is one half the pipe diameters. Too large an applicator will force excessive cement into the
inside of small diameter fittings. Too small applicator will not apply sufficient cement to large diameter systems.
Recommended initial set times Apply a full even layer of cement to the outside of a pipe and medium layer of
cement to inside of a fitting. Assemble pipe and fitting socket until it contacts socket bottom. Give pipe a quarter
turn. Hold pipe and fitting together until the pipe does not back out. See table for recommended cure times.
Remove excessive cement from the exterior. A properly made joint will show a continuous bead of cement around
the perimeter.
Testing Pressure System

Prior to testing, safety precautions should be instituted to protect personnel and property in case of test failure.
Conduct pressure testing with water. DO NOT USE AIR OR OTHER GASES for pressure testing.
The piping system should be adequately anchored to limit movement. Water under pressure exerts thrust forces in
piping systems. Thrust blocking should be provided at changes of direction change in size and at dead ends.
The piping systems should be slowly filled with water, taking care to prevent surge and air entrapment. The flow
velocity should not exceed 1 foot per second.
All trapped air must be slowly released.
Primers are used in solvent cement joints of PVC plastic pipe and fittings as per ASTM F 656
Provided at all high points of the piping system. All valves and air relief mechanisms should be opened so that the
air can be vented while the system is extremely dangerous and it must be slowly and completely vented prior to
testing.
The piping system can be pressurized to 125% of its designed working pressure. However care must be taken to
ensure the pressure does not exceed the working pressure of the lowest rated component in the system (valves,
unions, flanges, threaded parts etc.) The pressure test should not exceed one hour. Any leaking joints or pipe must
be cut out and replaced and the line recharged and retested using the same procedure
Water Hammer Arrestors

The effective fluid hammer, which results in breaking of pipeline caused due to series of hydraulic shock, should be
arrested by means of a water hammer arrestor. The arrestor shall be capable of withstanding pressures upto 30

Kg/ Sq.cm and temperatures in the range of –400F to 2120F (-540C to +1000C). It shall be maintenance free with a
companion flange to suit in the pipeline. The following materials are used for its manufacture
Barrel – MS Class C (heavy class) pipe
Cap - Malleable cast iron fittings attached to Barrel.
The sealed chamber type shall be installed upstream of flush valves or quick closing valves. The size to be as
recommended by manufacturer’s recommendation submitted for approval.
AIR RELEASING VALVE

A valve that releases air from pipeline automatically without loss of water or introduce air into line automatically if
the internal pressure becomes less than that of the atmosphere.
Body : CI
Pressure rating : PN 10
Type : Screwed end
Strainer : Inbuilt
Gasket : Synthetic rubber as per IS 638 type B
Ball : Rubber coated wooden valve
Air release : Automatic
Bolt & nut : Caron steel BS 916.

S EC TI ON - V EX T ER NA L S E WA G E SY S T EM
1. 1 M AN H OL E A N D IN S P EC T ION C H AM B ER S
Inspection chambers of minimum Internal size 600 x 600mm up to a depth of 1.0M and manholes of varying
sizes as per IS 4111 shall be constructed beyond 1.0M (depth of the manhole from the formation ground level).
1. 1. 1 LO C AT IO N AN D SI ZE S
The size indicated in the drawings shall be the internal size of chamber. Unless otherwise specified, manholes and
inspection chambers are provided at all changes of direction of drains and where branch drain meets the main
drain. Chambers shall be of such size as to allow necessary examination and clearance of drains. The minimum
internal sizes shall be taken as per detail drawings; standards specified and local bye laws if any. In the absence
of local byelaws, the requirements stipulated in IS 4111 (Part I) Code of Practice for Ancillary Structures on
Sewage System shall be followed. The work shall be done strictly as per standard drawings and the following
specifications:
1. 1. 2 B E D CO NCR E T E
Bed concrete shall be in 1:4:8 cement concrete 150 mm thick for inspection chambers, 200 mm for depths upto 2
m and 250 mm for greater depths in case of manholes.
1. 1. 3 B R IC K M A S ONR Y
Brick work shall be with best quality table moulded bricks in 1:5 cement mortar as per specification for brick masonry.
The thickness of masonry shall be as per Bill of Quantities.
1. 1. 4 PL A S TE R
Inside walls of chambers/manholes shall be plastered with 15mm thick cement plaster 1:3 and finished smooth with a
floating coat of neat cement. External walls shall be plastered in CM 1:3 mixed with waterproofing material and
sponge finished.
1. 1. 5 B EN C HIN G
Channels and benching shall be done in cement concrete 1:3:6 rendered smooth with neat cement. The following
sizes of channels for the bench shall be adopted:
Size of Drain Depth of Centre Depth at sides i.e, at walls

100 mm (4``) 150 mm (6``) 250 mm (10``)
150 (6``) 200 mm (8``) 300 mm (12``)
1. 1. 6 CH AM B E R/M AN H OL E C OV ER S
Covers shall be of heavy duty cast iron or fiber reinforced cement concrete as per material specification with lifting
hooks as per IS 1726 - 1974 and as per the details given in the drawings and fixed on CI frame or cement concrete
embedded in concrete. Covers placed on the frames shall be airtight. The weight of frame and cover shall be as per
bill of quantities.
1. 1. 7 ST E P S
PVC steps shall be provided wherever the depth of the manhole/chamber is more than 1.2M. Steps shall be arranged
in a staggered manner as per drawings.
1. 1. 8 DR O P C ONN E CT I O NS
In case the difference in invert levels between the main drain and the branch line requires a drop more than 600 mm,
a drop connection should be provided with a PVC fourway junction, fixed at right angles to the drop pipe at the level
where the branch pipe enters the manhole. Access for cleaning the bend should be provided at finished ground level
1. 1. 9 GU LL Y TR A P C H A M B ER S

PVC gully traps of specified size shall be provided as per relevant IS code. It shall be fixed on 15 cm. thick and 70 cm
square 1:4:8 cement concrete bedding and the gully outlet shall be jointed similarly to the jointing of stoneware pipes.
A brick masonry chamber 300 x 300 mm (internally) shall be constructed in 1/2 brick masonry with 1:6 cement
mortar and the spaces between the trap and the wall shall be filled up with 1:3:6 concrete and the upper portion of
the chamber shall be finished with neat cement. The corners and bottom of the chamber shall be rounded off so as to
slope towards the grating and the bottom of the chamber shall not be less than 230 mm. In addition to 150mm x
150mm CI grating, the chamber shall have a CI frame cover (300mm x 300 mm). It shall then be placed on top of the
brick masonry.
LIST OF APPROVE MAKE

WATER SUPPLY & SANITARY INSTALLATION
SL no Material Make
1 Sanitary ware Hindware / Parryware / Cera/KHOLER
2 Toilet Accessories Jaquar / ESS ESS / Parryware /KHOLER
3 CP fittings Jaquar / ESS ESS / Parryware /KHOLER
4 Gate valves/Non-return valves Zoloto /RB/HAWA/Leader
5 Water closet seats & Cisterns Hindware /Parryware/KHOLER
6 Mirrors Modifloat / Saint Gobain / Approved Equivalent
7 Pumps Grundfos/Kirloskar/ Darling / Wilo
8 Pipe supports Hi-Tech pipe Support System / Intellotech
9 Liquid level indicator Interlink / Sridhan International / Midas Marketing
10 Kitchen sink Franke / Diamond / Nirali
11 uPVC pipes & fittings /Prince / Finolex/supreme
12 Pipe protection tape (uPVC) underground Pypcoat /TWL / Rustech
13 Pipe protection tape (Concealed) Tapex / Approved Equivalent
14 Manhole frame & cover in Fiber reinforced Southern Concrete Industries / Approved Equivalent
concrete
15 Manhole PVC steps Southern Concrete Industries / Approved Equivalent

16 Pressure relief Valves Zoloto /RB/HAWA/Leader
17 Butterfly valve Zoloto/Audco / Intervalve / Approved Equivalent
18 Urinal flushing sensor Jaquar/ ROBO / UTECH System / AOS.
20 Ball Valve Zoloto /RB/HAWA/Leader
21 Pressure Reducing valves Zoloto/ RB / Hawk
22 Y strainer Zoloto / RB/ Intervalve / Leader
25 Soap Dispenser Kimberly Clark / Aerofresh
26 Hand Dryer Nova-Tech / Prima / Technocrat
27 Water meters Dash-mesh / BHEL / Capstan
28 Water Heater Bajaj / Racold / Venus / Usha
30 CPVC Pipes & Fittings Ashirvad / Astral
32 Pressure gauge H Guru / Gluck / Wari
33 RCC Hume pipes Sudershan
34 RCC Chamber Covers Southern Concrete Products
NOTE : 1) Quote should be for the first preference make only, if not available then second preference can be quoted
same has to be mentioned in the BOQ.
2) All bought-out items shall be of makes approved by Architect, Consultants & Equivalent makes to
be got approved by Architect / Consultant / Owner prior to placement of order.
PREAMBLE TO SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES
1. All items of work mentioned in the Schedule of Quantities shall be read and executed strictly in accordance
with the description of the item in the Schedule of Quantities & read in conjunction with the appropriate IS
and conditions of Contract.

2. The rate for each item of work included in the bill of quantities shall unless expressly stated otherwise
included cost of: -
 All materials, fixing materials, accessories, hardware, operations, tools, equipment, consumables, civil works
wherever involved and incidentals required in preparation for in the full and entire execution and
completion of the work called for in the item as per specification and drawings completely.
 Wastage on materials and labor.
 All taxes, duties, octroi, including works contract tax, sales tax, transit insurance, packing and forwarding
charges, loading, transportation, unloading, handling, hoisting, to all levels, setting and fixing in position,
disposal of debris and all other labor necessary in accordance with contract documents, good practice and
recognized principles.
 Liabilities, obligations and risks arising out of conditions of contract.
 Liaison service charges.
 Preparation of shop drawing, As built drawing, O & M Manuals, Soft Copies ‘CD’ to be submitted after final
completion of work.
3. All requirements of system whether such of them are mentioned in the item or not the specifications and
drawings are to be read as complimentary to and part of the schedule of quantities and any work called for
in one shall be taken as required for all.
4. In the event of conflict between the bill of quantities and other documents, the most stringent shall apply
and interpretation of the Architect shall be final and binding.
5. The installation price of switchboards, metering panels, DB's or any other items shall include supply and
fixing of supporting steel structures/MS channels grouting of the same civil works etc., as required.
6. No change in unit rate shall be allowed for any change in quantity or for any other reason whatsoever.
7. Supply of materials shall mean supply of materials at site. The rate for supply shall include all taxes, octroi,
insurance, packing and forwarding charges, transportation, unloading at site. However the quote should
indicate the tax structure separately with necessary details.
8. The successful contractors shall submit the Schematic diagrams, fabrication drawings with details of all
equipments wirings diagrams etc., for approval prior to supply/commencement of such works. The approval
of these drawings will be general and will not absolve to contractor of the responsibility of the correctness of
these drawings. Atleast four copies of the approved drawings shall be supplied to Consultants for their
distribution to various agencies at site at no cost of Owner.
9. The tenderers must see the site conditions such as type of soil, locations etc., and take all factors into
consideration while quoting the rates as no extra cost will be allowed on any ground arising out of or relating
to the site conditions.
10. Any error in description or in quantity or omission of items from the contract shall not vitiate this contract
but shall be corrected and deemed to be a variation required by the Architect/Owners.
11. The Liason Service Charges shall include the following :
 Follow up expenses with the Local Statutory authorities from the drawing approval up to servicing the
installation and getting the safety certificate.
 Preparation of detailed drawings required by the Local Statutory Authorities.
 Obtaining approval of drawings and installation from Local statutory Authorities as applicable.
 Obtaining route drawings from Local Statutory Authorities as applicable.
 All incidental charge/expenses associated with the above work as applicable.
 Official deposits paid to the above agencies will be reimbursed separately at actuals by the Owners.

12. The tenderer shall take into account the expenses of pre-commissioning tests to be conducted as per
specification of the complete installation by licensed agencies.
13. Tenders to submit performance curves, Schematic & GA drawing of pumps, Hydro pneumatic system and
other bought out components along with offer for proper evaluation.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR ELECTRICAL SERVICES
IN D EX
 B A SI C EL E CT RI CA L R E Q U IR EM EN T S
 S WI TC H B O AR D S
 PO W ER F A CT OR CO RR EC TI ON
 M E D IUM V O LT AG E C AB L E S
 WI RIN G D E VI C ES
 B U SB A R T RU N KIN G
 LUM IN A IR E S
 INV E RT OR U P S S Y ST E M
 E AR T HIN G
 LI GH TN IN G P RO T EC T ION
 RE CO M M EN D E D M A K E OF M A T ER I AL S

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.0 General
1.1 Scope
The scope of work covers complete electrical installation system for all buildings including but not limited
to:
 Supply, storage, installation, testing and commissioning of all equipment, components,
accessories, labour, tools and tackles required for the operation of the buildings to the extent
specified and detailed on the drawings and specifications.
 All Civil works in connection with the Electrical Installation including supply, laying and fixing of
necessary inserts, hooks, brackets and sleeves etc.
 Any work which can be reasonably inferred as necessary for the safe, satisfactory operation
whether such work is specified or shown on the drawings or not.
 Arranging permanent supply including necessary submissions of drawings as required to the
supply authorities and arranging inspections and obtaining necessary approvals of all the
concerned authorities.
1.2 Licensed Electrical Contractor

All work shall be carried out by a licensed Electrical Contractor who is approved by the Consultant /
Developer and who possesses a valid local Electrical Contractor's license employing licensed Supervisors
and licensed Electricians, Helpers, as required. Required 3 years of documented experience at least.
1.3 Regulations and Standards

The installation shall conform in all respects to the Indian Standard Code of Practice for Electrical Wiring
Installation IS.732-1963 and IS.2274-1963. It shall also conform with the current Indian Electricity Rules
and the Regulations and requirements of the local Electric Supply Authority applicable to the installation.
Wherever this specification calls for a higher standard of materials and/or workmanship than those
required by any of the above Regulations, this Specification shall take precedence over the said
Regulations and Standards.
In general, the materials, equipment and workmanship not covered by the above shall conform to the
latest Indian Standards. All bolts and nuts used shall be metric size with corrosion protection suitable for
the location.
1.4 Documentation
 The indication and/or description of an item on the drawings or in the Specifications, unless
otherwise specifically stated, implies an instruction to supply and fix such items.
 Notes on drawings referring to individual items of work generally take precedence over
specifications, however all discrepancies shall be referred to the Consultant / Developer before
ordering materials or commencing work.
 Drawings show general run of cables, approximate locations of outlets and equipment, utility
symbols and schematic diagrams of no dimensional significance. Refer to the Architectural
drawings for locations and also obtain approval from the Consultant / Developer wherever

dimensions are not shown, or locations cannot be determined from the drawings. Do not scale
drawings to obtain locations.
1.5 Design Criteria

 Electrical materials and equipment shall comply in all respects, as a minimum to the latest Indian
Standards Institution's recommendations.
 Should any difference arise between ISI and the specification, the requirement of the
Specification shall prevail.
 The components of submain switchboards, distribution boards and other electrical equipment
shall be clearly labeled in English.
 Distribution boards shall have circuit schedules fastened to the inside cover of the board showing
rating of the circuit breakers, type and number of points and their connected loads.
2.0 Submissions
2.1 Shop Drawings
Shop drawings shall be provided of the Main and Sub-Main Switchboards, Distribution Boards, Cable
Trays, Reactive Power Compensation Panel, and any other switchboards and panels, wherever applicable
and approval shall be obtained from the Consultant / Developer before commencing fabrication or
procurement.
Any equipment or switchboard manufactured without the written consent of the Consultant / Developer
prior to the approval drawings shall be liable for rejection.
3.0 Foreman/Supervisor
3.1 Qualifications
The Electrical Contractor shall employ a competent, licensed qualified full time electrical
foreman/supervisor to direct the work of electrical installations in accordance with the Drawings and
Specifications. Required 5 years of documented experience at least.
3.2 Responsibility
The foreman/supervisor shall be available at all times on the site to receive instructions from the
Consultant / Developer in the day to day activities throughout the duration of the work. The foreman/
supervisor shall correlate the progress of the work in conjunction with all the relevant requirements of
the Supply Authority. The skilled workers employed for the work shall have the requisite qualifications
and shall possess competency certificates from the Electrical Inspectorate of Local Administration.
4.0 Application for Power Supply, Fees, Permits and Tests

4.1 Responsibility
The Contractor shall be responsible for filing and follow up of application for getting the drawings/scheme
approved by the Electrical Inspector and finally the approval by the Electrical Inspector of the whole
installation.
4.2 Electrical Utility Supply to Site

The Contractor shall be responsible for negotiating with the TRANSCO / APCPDCL for providing the
required KVA electrical supply to the Project site.
4.3 Statutory Approvals

The Contractor shall be responsible for payment of all fees involved with obtaining Statutory Approvals.
On completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Consultant / Developer the
relevant final inspector, and approval certificates issued by the Local Electricity Supply Authority.
4.4 Tests
 The Consultant / Developer shall have full powers to require the materials or works to be tested
by an independent agency at the Contractor's expense in order to establish their soundness and
adequacy.
 The Contractor shall notify the Consultant / Developer at least 7 working days before testing of
each system. The Consultant / Developer reserve the right to be present when such tests are
being made.
 If the Electrical Inspectorate requires manufacturer's test reports for HT cables, HT switch gear,
transformers or any other equipment used in the project, the Contractor shall obtain such
approvals at no extra cost to the Developer. Such approved reports shall be handed over to the
Consultant / Developer.
 Calibration certificates shall be obtained from the Meter and Relay Testing Department of the
Electricity Board for all relays and meters used in the project at no extra cost to the Developer.
S WI TC H B O AR D S
1.0 Medium Voltage Distribution Boards for Power and Lighting

1.1 Approvals and Submissions
Distribution boards shall be deemed to be approved when a sample has been inspected and when the
sample workshop drawings have been approved, by the Consultant / Developer.
1.2 General
Distribution boards shall be suitable for 433 volts, 3 phase AC supply and 240 volts single phase AC supply,
as required. Distribution boards shall generally conform to IS:2675 or BS:214.
1.3 Type and Construction

All the distribution boards shall be of Class IP 54 with approved type of components of recommended
make of MCB. The sheet steel MCB DB shall be flush mounting type unless otherwise specified and shall
consist of MCB/ELCB as incomer and MCB as outgoings. The short circuit rating of MCB shall be 10kA as a
minimum, unless otherwise specified.
1.4 Bus Bars

Suitable bus bars made of high conductivity aluminium strips and mounted on non-hygroscopic insulating
supports shall be provided. 200% Neutral Busbar up to 200A
1.5 Circuit Breakers

Miniature circuit breakers shall be of approved make and of specified short circuit rating.
1.6 HRC Fuses

Rating of the fuses and carriers shall be as per drawings. Fuses carriers and bases conform to IS:1300.
They shall be non-flammable and non-hygroscopic, with hard finish.
HRC fuses are unacceptable for power circuits.
1.7 Surge Diverters

Surge diverters shall be provided as specified in 16670 Lightning Protection.
1.8 Safety and Interlocks

All the live parts shall be shrouded such that accidental contacts with live parts are totally avoided.
Distribution boards shall be provided with a front hinged door. Distribution boards interior assembly shall
be dead front with the front cover removed. Incoming lugs shall be shrouded. Suitable insulating barrier
made of are resistant material shall be provided for phase separation. The ends of the bus structures shall
also be shrouded.
1.9 Cabinet Design

The Distribution Board cabinet shall be totally enclosed type with dust and vermin proof construction. The
cabinet shall be stove enamelled. The interior surface shall be finished to an off-white shade. The interior
components shall be mounted on separate sheet steel which is mounted and locked onto the studs
provided inside the cabinet. Over this, a cover made of HYLAM sheet or stove enamelled sheet shall be
provided with slots for operating handle of breakers. The cabinet shall be equipped with a front door
having a spring latch and a vault lock. Cabinets shall have detachable glands plates at both top and
bottom with knock out holes of suitable numbers. And diameter for the required number, of cables.
1.10 Terminals
Distribution Boards shall be provided with an approved make terminal block of adequate size to receive
mains and outgoing circuits. The location of the terminal block shall be so located that crowding of wires
in the proximity of live parts is avoided. A neutral link having a rating equal to that of phase bus shall also
be provided.
1.11 Directory
Distribution boards shall be provided with a directory indicating the area or loads served by each circuit
breaker, the rating of breakers, size of conductors and other components as determined necessary for
clear identification of the function and operation of the distribution board.
Indication labels shall be machine engraved on laminated plastic and attached with approved adhesive or
mechanical fasteners. The font shall be ARIAL and sized to suit the application. The minimum font size
shall be 3.5mm. Hand painted directory or text is not acceptable.
 Bolted connections should be torqued and marked with paint.

 Provide provision plate for smoke detector at the top of Switchboard section.

2.0 LT Switchboards
2.1 General
The switchboard shall be metal clad, totally enclosed, rigid, compartmentalized design, floor mounting, air
insulated, extensible cubicle type for use on medium voltage power, 3 phase 4 wire 50 cycles system.
The equipment shall be designed for operation in high ambient temperature and high humidity tropical
atmospheric conditions. Means shall be provided to facilitate ease of inspection, cleaning and repairs for
use in installations where continuity of operation is of prime importance.
2.2 Standards
The equipment listed below shall conform to tie requirements shown:
a. Air Circuit Breaker (ACE) - IS 13937 - 1.2 / IEC 947 - 1.2

b. Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) - IS 13947 - 1.2/ IEC 947 - 1,2
c. Contactors- IS 13947-1,4 Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB)-IS 8828-1996/IEC898-1995
e. Residual Current Circuit Breaker (RCCB) - IS 12640 - 1988 / IEC 1008
f. HRC fuse link - IS 9224 and BS 8 :8
g. Current Transformer - IS 2705 and IEC 185
h. Potential Transformer- IS 3156
i. Relay - IS 3231 and IS 8686 (For Static Relays)
j. Indicating Instrument- IS 1248
2.3 Type and Construction

The switchboard shall be of:
a. Sheet steel enclosed, indoor floor mounted free standing cubicle type.
b. Made up of the requisite vertical sections modular type which when coupled together shall form
continuous dead front switchboards.
c. Dust, vermin and damp proof and enclosure protection of not less than IP 54.
d. Each feeder/instrument compartment shall be provided with a hinged door interlocked with
MCCB inside the compartment such that door can only be opened when MCCB in off position.
e. Readily extendable as required by the addition of vertical sections after removal of the end
covers.
f. Switchboards shall have access to the feeders, bus bars, cable termination, cable alley, etc. as
required.
g. Main Breakers need to be lockable.
Each vertical section shall comprise:

a. A front framed structure of rolled/folded CRCA sheet steel angle section of minimum 3 mm
thickness rigidly bolted together. This structure shall house the components contributing to the
major weight of the equipment such as circuit breaker cassettes, main horizontal bus bars,
vertical risers and other front mounted accessories.
b. The structure shall be mounted on a rigid base frame of folded CRCA sheet steel of minimum 6
mm thickness and 75 mm height. The design shall ensure that the weight of the components is

adequately supported without deformation or loss of alignment during transit or during
operation.
c. A cable chamber housing the cable end connections and power or control cable terminations.
The design shall ensure generous availability of space for ease of installation and maintenance of
cabling and adequate safety for working in one vertical or horizontal section without coming into
accidental contact with live parts of the adjacent section.
d. A cover plate at the top of the vertical section, provided with a ventilating hood where
necessary. Any aperture for ventilation shall be covered with a perforated sheet having less than
1mm diameter perforations to prevent entry of vermin.
e. Front and rear doors fitted with dust excluding neoprene gaskets with fasteners designed to
ensure proper compression of the gaskets. When covers are provided in place of doors generous
overlap shall be ensured between sheet steel surfaces with closely spaced fasteners to preclude
the entry of dust.
The height of the panel shall not be more than 2200 mm unless otherwise specified and maximum height
of switch operating handle shall not be more than 1800mm from FFL. The total depth of the panel shall be
adequate to cater for proper cabling space.
Doors shall be of minimum 14 gauge sheet steel and covers and partitions of 160 sheet steel. All sheet
steel work forming the exterior of switchboards shall be smoothly finished, levelled and free from flaws.
The corners shall be rounded.
The Components in the switchboards shall be so arranged as to facilitate ease of operation and
maintenance and at the same time to ensure necessary degree of safety.
Components forming part of the switchboards shall have the following minimum clearances:
a. Between phases 25 mm
b. Between phases and neutral 25 mm
c. Between phases and earth 25 mm
d. Between neutral and earth 19 mm
When, for any reason, the above clearances are not available, suitable insulation barrier/shielding shall be
provided. Clearances shall be maintained during normal service conditions.
Creepage distances shall comply to those specified in relevant standards. All insulating material used in
the construction of the equipment shall be of non-hygroscopic material treated to withstand the effects
of high humidity, high temperature and tropical ambient service conditions.
Functional units such as circuit breakers, MCCBs, etc. shall be arranged in multi-tier formation except that
not more than two air circuit breakers shall be housed in a single vertical section.
Metallic and/or insulated shrouding shall be provided within vertical sections and between adjacent
sections to ensure prevention of accidental contact with:

a. Main bus-bars and vertical risers during operation, inspection or maintenance of functional units
and front mounted accessories.
b. Cable terminations of one functional unit, when working on those of adjacent units.
All covers providing access to live power equipment or circuits shall be provided with tool operated
fasteners to prevent unauthorized access. Provision shall be made for permanently earthing the frames
and other metal parts of the switch gear by two independent distinct connections. Only CRCA steel sheets
shall be used for fabricating the cubicle. Thickness tolerance for sheets shall be as applicable in relevant
IS.
2.4 Metal Treatment and Finish

Generally the treatment and finish of the metal surface shall be as per detailed specifications in Clause 8.4
Metal Treatment and Finish.
2.5 Bus Bars

 The bus bars shall be made of high conductivity high strength E91E aluminium alloy suitable for
440 volts 3phase 4 wires 50 Hz 20KA unless otherwise specified.
 The bus bars shall be suitably supported with non-hygroscopic supports to provide a fault
withstand capacity as specified.
 High tensile bolts and spring washers shall be provided at all bus bar joints.
 Fish plates of equal type and size shall be used at all joints.
 The bus bars shall have uniform cross section throughout and shall be capable of carrying the
rated current at 433V continuously. The bus bars shall be designed to withstand a temperature
rise of 45 Deg C above the ambient. A current density of 1.00 Amp/Sqmm shall not be exceeded
for copper bus bars.
 The neutral bus bars shall have a continuous rating of at least 100% of the phase bus bars, unless
mentioned otherwise. 200% Neutral Busbar up to 200A
 Bus bars shall be fully sleeved using heat shrunk PVC sleeves appropriately colour coded to
identify different phases and neutral bar.
 An earth bus of size not less than 40 x 6 mm aluminium shall run throughout the length of
switchboard at top or bottom as required.
3.0 Air Circuit Breakers

3.1 GENERAL
The ACBs shall conform to IS 13947-172/IEC60947-1&2; confirming to test sequence 1. The ACBs shall be
suitable for 3 phase 415 Volts. 4 pole ACBs shall have settable neutral at site (0,50, 100% In). All the
breakers shall have tropicalisation as a standard feature.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION
The Breaker shall be suitable for rear and vertical mounting and line load reversibility without duration.
The operating mechanism shall be designed such that the handle can only be in ÒFF' position if the Main
contacts are actually separated and vice versa. It shall confirm to Isolation as per standard.

3.3 CONTROL UNITS
The Control Units shall be housed in a separate enclosure and there shall be total insulation of the control
unit with respect to the power unit.
The Control Unit shall be suitable to provide short circuit, overload and earth fault protection (wherever
specified). The Control Unit shall not be a peak sensing device and shall measure the true RMS values to
make the measurement free from the influence of harmonics. It shall have thermal memory.
3.4 PROTECTIONS
The overload settings shall be adjustable from 0.4 to 1.0 times the nominal rating (In) and shall have time
delay. Short circuit protection shall be from 3 to 9 times the rated current (Ir) with time delay.
Instantaneous protection shall be settable upto 15 times nominal rating. Earth fault Protection (wherever
specified) from 0.2 to 0.7 time’s nominal current (In) with time delay.
All breakers shall have segregated Led fault Indications & mP failure indication.
3.5 ACCESSORIES
 All ACB feeders shall have metering and local display features viz. Ammeter, Voltmeter,
frequency, KVA, KW, KWAh, p.f, maximum demand. It shall be possible via COM (485 port) to
transmit the protection & metering settings to PC.
 ACB shall be provided with following accessories, in addition to the item specified in Bill of
Quantities. Further these devices shall be fit-table at site accessible from the top and front and
shall be common for all ratings.
 The connection for the auxiliary shall be accessible from the front.
 All ACBs shall have Under Voltage trip, shunt trip, auxiliary switches with NO. + NC. In EDO type,
closing coil shall be provided.
3.6 INTERLOCKING
 ACBs shall be provided with the following interlocking devices for interlocking the door of a
switchboard:
 Handle interlock to prevent unnecessary manipulations of the breaker.
 Door interlock to prevent door being opened when breaker is ON position.
 Defeat interlocking device to open the door even if the breaker is in ON position.
4.0 MCCB - Moulded Case Circuit Breaker

4.1 General
MCCB shall conform to IS 13947-1&2/IEC60947-1&2; confirming to test sequence 1 and Isolation as per
standard. It should be suitable for Horizontal and Vertical mounting and line load reversibility without any
duration.
The Moulded Case Circuit Breaker incorporated in the switchboard shall be of the current limiting type,
cat A, upto 630A. 800A and above shall be cat B i.e with Short time withstand capacity Icw/0.5 sec of
minimum 20kA. MCCB shall be suitable either for Single Phase AC 230V On Three Phase 415V. The MCCB
shall be available in fully rated four pole versions for neutral isolation. It shall have tropicalisation as
standard feature.

The MCCB cover and case shall be made of high strength heat-resistant and flame-retardant
thermosetting insulating material. The operating handle shall be quick make, quick break, trip - free type.
The operating handle shall have suitable ÒN' ÒFF' `TRIPPED' indicators and in order to ensure suitability
for isolation complying with IS 13947-2/IEC60947-2, the operating mechanism shall be designed such that
the toggle or the handle can only be in ÒFF' position: if the main contacts are actually separated.
All Breakers shall have adjustable overload and short circuit settings.
 Overload – adjustable 0.4 to 1 times nominal rating(In)
 Short-circuit – adjustable fro 2 – 9 times rated current(Ir)
 Earthfault (wherever specified) – adjustable setting with time delay.
All MCCB feeders shall have monitoring & display feature viz. Ammeter, Voltmeter, frequency, KVA, KW,
KWAh, p.f, THD with COMM port.
4.2 Accessories
MCCB shall be designed to have following accessories and it shall be fittable at site.
a. Under voltage trip
b. Shunt trip
c. Alarm switch
d. Auxiliary switch
e. Remote operation using motor mechanism with facility of using the same in auto / manual mode.
4.3 Interlocking
MCCB shall be provided with following interlocking devices for interlocking the door of a switchboard.
a. Handle interlock to prevent unnecessary manipulations of the breaker.
b. Door interlock to prevent door being opened when breaker is in ON position.
In addition to the above, and other features indicated elsewhere shall also be provided.
Typical Features for MCCB ABB Schneider Siemens
Upto 160A rating T2N MG-compact NS VL-160X
Service Breaking Capacity(KA) 35kA 35kA 40kA
Type of Release TM TM TM
Overload protection Adjustable Yes Yes Yes
Short circuit protection Fixed Yes Yes Yes
Instantaneous - - - -
Earth fault protection (add on
Adjustable Yes Yes Yes
module)
Features ABB Schneider Siemens

S4H-200/250A MG-compact NS VL-
Upto 630A rating S5H - 400A STR 22SE- 200/250A 200/250/400/630A
S6H - 630A STR 23SE - (mP rel)

400/630A
Service Breaking Capacity(KA) 65kA 50kA 45kA

Type of Release mP mP mP
Overload protection Adjustable Yes Yes Yes
Short circuit protection Adjustable Yes Yes Yes
Instantaneous - - - -
Earth fault protection (add on
Adjustable Yes Yes Yes
module)
* mP rel has to be
Default releaseis mP when adjO/,
Yes Yes mentioned in case of
adj S/c reqd-
Siemens.
* for mP release with Electromagnetic-compatibility(EMC), thermal memory.
* current limiting type upto 630A
5.0 Other Equipment

5.1 Contactors
Contactors shall comply with IS 13947-1 for general rules and IS 13947 - 4.1 for Standards pertaining to
Contactor and Motor Starter.
The Contactors shall be capable of withstanding breaking and making capacities per following:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AC3 Category AC4 category
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Making Current 10 x Rated Current 12 x Rated Current
Breaking Current 08 x Rated Current 10 x Rated Current
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
o Contactors shall be capable of withstanding an impulse voltage of 8kV and have an insulation
voltage of 1000V.
o Contactors shall be suitable for copper termination with a maximum permissible temperature
rise of 65 Deg; C at the terminals with an ambient temperature of 50 Deg; C.
o The coils shall have three terminals and the insulation shall be of class H type.
o The auxiliary contact block shall have a switching capacity of 240V at 2A. Contactors shall have
one auxiliary in built and it shall be possible to have additional normally opened, normally closed
contacts in steps of two.
5.2 Miniature Circuit Breakers [MCB]

MCB shall be in 1,2,3 or 4, pole versions. MCB casing shall be made of self extinguishing, tropicalised
material.

MCB shall comply with IS 8828-1996/1EC 898-1995. It shall be suitable for use in frequency range 40Hz to
60Hz and shall accommodate AC/DC supply according to requirements. It shall have a trip-free
mechanism and toggle shall give a positive contact indication. It shall be suitable for mounting on 35mm
DIN rail/surface mounting.
Line supply may be connected to either top or bottom terminals i.e. there shall be no line-load restriction.
Degree of protection, when the MCB is flush mounted, shall be IP40. MCB shall be supplied with clamping
terminals fully open. Contact closing shall be independent of the speed of the operator. The breaking
capacity of the MCB shall be 10kA. The MCB shall be capable of being used as Incomer Circuit Breaker and
shall be suitable for use as an isolator. In case of multiple MCBs in a single location (DB), it shall be
possible to remove any MCB without having to disturb other MCB's in the vicinity.
5.3 Surge Diverters

Surge diverters shall be provided as specified in Section 16670 Lightning Protection.
5.4 RCCB - Residual Current Circuit Breaker

RCCB shall be available in 2 pole and 4 pole versions and threshold sensitivities of 30mA, 100mA, 300mA
and current ratings from 25 to 80A. Rating and sensitivities shall be as specified.
RCCB shall comply with IS 12640-1988/IEC 1008. The short circuit withstand of the RCCB without the
associated short circuit/overhead protection shall not be less than 3 kA. It shall be operationally
independent of line voltage. The sensitivity thresholds (30mA, 100mA, 300mA) shall be of non-user
adjustable type by construction.
 Provide RCCB per 6 branch circuits for General Purpose (Normal Power) or when indicated.
 No RCCB will be provided at UPS Boards.
5.5 Current Transformers

o Current transformers shall comply with the requirements of IS 2705. They shall have ratios,
outputs and accuracy as specified/required. All CT's shall be of resin cast type unless otherwise
specifically called for.
o All CTs shall be of bar type primary or suitable for the cable given type and size.
o For all the CTs suitable type and size clamps are to be supplied for mounting in the switchboards.
o Polarities and terminal markings of primary and secondary shall be clearly marked on all CTs.
5.6 Specifications for CTs

a) Current Ratios:
1. Primary: As per feeder ratings
2. Secondary: 5A
b) Type: Resin Cast
c) Class: PS-Differential Protection
5P10-O/C,E/F, RPR
Class 1 for metering
d) System Voltage

1. LT:415V, 3Ph, 50Hz
5.7 Potential Transformers
 All the Potential Transformers shall comply with the requirements of IS 3156 latest edition. All
PT's shall be resin cast type and shall have Voltage ratios, output and accuracy class as Specified
in Data Sheer.
 All PT's shall be single phase, dry type suitable for mounting inside the panel or cubicles. Clamps,
brackets and supports required for the mounting shall be supplied along with PT.
 Polarities and Terminal markings shall be clearly marked in all PT's. Name plate indicating,
voltage ratio, burden, accuracy class, type, serial number, make and model plus other related
data, shall be provided.
 A common earth terminal for earthing of core, bolts, clamps (non current carrying metal parts)
etc., shall be provided.
For 415V system, Specification of the PT's shall be as follows:

a) Voltage ratio : 415V/110V
b) Type : Resin cast
c) Burden : 100VA
d) Class (Metering/Protection) : 0.5/3P
5.8 Instruments and Meters
All instruments and meters shall be enclosed in dust proof, moisture resistant black finished cases and
shall be suitable for tropical use. They shall be calibrated to read directly the primary quantities. They
shall be accurately adjusted and calibrated at Works and shall have means of calibration, check and
adjustment at site. Definition of various meters as follows:-
a. Power Qulaity meters needs Complete Electrical Data that includes Analyzer Harmonics, Voltage
Sags,Swells, Current Peaks, Vectorial Information on V and I etc.
b. Load Manager: It is derived from managerial terms that to have effective Control (Manual or
Automatic ) over electrical loads need to have comprehensive information.
c. Multi Function meter: A meter that Can Monitor Control and Communicate meter and expand to
Interface with External Environment like PC/PLC/DCS SCADA etc.
d. Load Monitor or Energy Analyzer: Like EYES is to human body , Digital meters is for Electrical Panels ,
here look at Individual Paramaters
e. Power & Energy meter is an Indication of Consumption it also needs to meter Show Work Done ,
need to Have Power and Energy
f. Multi Data Meter A single Instrument will Display Many Electrical Parameters
5.9 SPECIFICATION FOR DIGITAL METERS.

5.9.1 Multi data meter

a. Individual Voltmeter /Ammeter (Used on all Outgoings feeders or DB feeders located outside
Sub Stations) ) – Equvalent to New Horizon’s VM 300 or AM 301 series)
1. Meter to Simultenously display all three Phases of the chossen parameter i.e V in
Voltmeter and Amps in ammeter
2. Suitable for Three Phase 3 OR 4 Wire LT Systems
3. in ammeter cabpable of Handling 1/5 Amps with programmable CT ratio from 0-8000
Amps
4. 3 ½ or 4 ½ Digit Meters
b. VAF POWER METER ( Used on Main outgoing Panels Located within Sub station) ( Equvalent
to New Horizon make model mdm)
1. METER TO DISPLAY SIMULTENOUSLY VOLTAGE CURRENT KILO WATT POWER FACTOR
AND FREQUENCY PHASE WISE.
2. high luminosity red led displays RMS measurement up to the 16th harmonic
3. Inputs: Voltage: 3 x 200 - 240 VAC Phase neutral ± 10% 50 / 60 Hz
4. Current from external CT 0 - 5 A Field Programmable CT ratio thru Dip Switches
5. Accuracy: 0.5% of reading on V and I. 1% of the reading on P.Auto Scale Change for
Linearity of accuracy (Number of scales: 1 voltage scale , 2 current scales)
6. Protection level: Front panel = IP40
7. Temperature range: -10°C +50°C Relative Humidity: max 90%. Condensation not
permitted.
8. Isolation: In accordance with group B VDE 0110 standards for 250 VAC rms operating
voltages
5.9.2 Energy meters with Power ( used in all panels where Loads are running 30 % of the utility Time of the
factory /Building ) (Equivalent to New Horizxon make model mico 3 )
A. Must Indicate kw and Kwh through Selectable Display Switch on LCD display
B. Inputs: Voltage: 250V from 20 to 800 Hz
C. Current: 5 A from 20 to 800 Hz with Field programmable Ct ratios
D. Input overload: Voltage: max.264 Vrms phase to neutral Current: max 20 Arms,
E. Automatic Scale Change on V and I for linearity of reading min scales: 2 current scales 1 voltage scale
and Auto offsetting of Errors for Consistent reading
F. Accuracy: Class 1 according to IEC1036 standards
G. IP rating : Instrument = IP20 Front panel = IP40
H. Temperature range: from -10°C to +40°C Relative humidity: R.H. max 90% Condensation: not
permitted
I. Isolation: in accordance with group B VDE 0110 standards for 250 VACrms operating voltages.
J. Output through RS 485 confirming to J MODBUS MODICON communication Protocol
5.9.3 Dual Energy meter (Used in Multi tenant Billing or Multi product Energy Accounting) - Equivalent to New
Horizon make model mico 3 2 T
A. Must Indicate kw and KWH of EB and Dg selectable through Separate Display Switch
B. Tariff Change to be imitated through Volt Free Contacts ( NO Aux or DG power will be available
C. Inputs: Voltage: 250V from 20 to 800 Hz

D. Current: 5 A from 20 to 800 Hz with Field programmable Ct ratios
E. Input overload: Voltage: max.264 Vrms phase to neutral Current: max 20 Arms,
F. Automatic Scale Change on V and I for linearity of reading min scales: 2 current scales 1 voltage scale
G. Accuracy: Class 1 according to IEC1036 standards
H. IP rating : Instrument = IP20 Front panel = IP40
I. Temperature range: from -10°C to +40°C Relative humidity: R.H. max 90% Condensation: not
permitted
J. Isolation: in accordance with group B VDE 0110 standards for 250 VACrms operating voltages.
K. Output through RS 485 confirming to J MODBUS MODICON communication Protocol
5.9.4 Energy Analyzer Used in Electrical Panels (Equivalent to New Horizxon make model PLUS 96)
1. To Display Voltage Current Frequency Active Power factor and kWh
2. LCD Display with Separate switch for Selecting the Required parameters
3. Inputs: Voltmetric: 500VAC 20-800 Hz Input impedance: 2 Mohm
4. Current 0-5 A from external CTs with Field Programmable CT ratio
5. Overload: V: max. 800 Vrms, A: max. 7 Arms
6. Connection: Three phase delta networks (3 phases without neutral wire) Three phase STAR
connection (3 phase + neutral )
7. Accuracy: ≤0,5% of the reading x V and I, 1% of the reading x P. as per IEC 1036
8. Automatic Scale Change on V and I for linearity of reading min scales: 2 current scales 1 voltage scale
9. Protection class: Front= IP40
10. Temperature range: -10°C + 50°C Relative humidity: RH: max. 90%. Condensation: not allowed.
11. Insulation: according VDE 0110, group C for rated voltages of 500 VAC rms.
12. Output through RS 485 confirming to J MODBUS MODICON communication Protocol
5.9.5 Load Manager /Multi Function meter used on All Transformer and Outgoing Panels (Equivalent to New
Horizxon make model FLASH NH )
1. To Display All Electrical parameter V,I,Hz,kw,kVA,kVAr , Energy (kwh kVAh,kVArh), Max Demand,
and Neutral Current
2. To Display Individual harmonics from 0 to 31 on V , I and KW with Indication of Direction of Harmonic
from load to Source or Vice versa
3. Accuracy Class 1 on energy complying with IEC EN 61036. Quadrants ........ 2 and 4 quadrant
measurement (programmable) with Auto Automatic Scale Change on V and I for linearity of reading
min scales: 2 current scales 1 voltage scale and Auto offsetting of Errors for Consistent reading
4. Standards - Safety: .....IEC EN 61010 class 2 – E.M.C.: ......IEC EN 61326-1A
5. Protection degree .......... IP51 on front panel.
6. OUTPUT through RS 485 confirming to J MODBUS MODICON communication Protocol or Output
thru RS 4*20mA
7. 2 Set Points as 2 digital outputs rated 27Vdc-27mA (DIN43864) with programmable functionality
(pulse output or alarm)
8. Galvanic Isolation on all inputs and outputs to Attunate RFI Disturbance

5.9.6 Power Quality meter - Used on Main HT Incoming /UPS panels /Power Quality affects production
Equivalent to New horizon X3mH series
a) To Display All Electrical parameter V,I,Hz,kw,kVA,kVAr, Energy (kwh kVAh,kVArh), Max Demand and
Neutral Current
b) To Display Individual harmonics from 0 to 31 on V , I and KW with Indication of Direction of Harmonic
from load to Source or Vice versa
c) POWER QUALITY EVENTS (EN 50160 standards) Meter should detect and stores, with individual date-
time stamp several events giving an accurate monitoring of the power supply quality according to the
EN 50160 standards. It should store on 2 MB Flash memory
d) Voltage sags/dips , Temporary over voltage/swell and Temporary current peak and direction of flow
i.e. short duration events (1 cycle resolution) with registration of date-time, event type, phase
involved, duration in number of cycles and min/max parameter value attained during each event.
e) Under voltage/voltage interruption Over voltage and Over current and direction of flow i.e. medium
and long duration events with registration of event start-end date/time, event type, phase involved
and parameter min/max value attained during each event.
f) MIN. AND MAX. VALUE per Phase of V A KW and PF
g) LOAD PROFILES AND CONSUMPTION DATA on all Energy and MD parameters
h) HARMONICS SURVEYS to Cover Individual harmonics with the direction of Harmonic recorded with
date/time stamped sample of 42 default readings is automatically saved to the instruments'built-in
memory on a circular buffer (FIFO) covering a 10-day survey period with samples taken every 2
minutes and data organized in daily files.
i) Accuracy Class 1 on energy complying with IEC EN 61036. Quadrants ........ 2 and 4 quadrant
measurement (programmable) with Auto Automatic Scale Change on V and I for linearity of reading
min scales: 2 current scales 1 voltage scale and Auto offsetting of Errors for Consistent reading
j) Standards - Safety: ...............IEC EN 61010 class 2 – E.M.C.....................IEC EN 61326-1A
k) Protection degree .......... IP51 on front panel.
l) OUTPUT through RS 485 confirming to J MODBUS MODICON communication Protocol or Output
thru RS 4*20mA
m) 2 Set Points as 2 digital outputs rated 27Vdc-27mA (DIN43864) with programmable functionality
(pulse output or alarm)
n) Galvanic Isolation on all inputs and outputs to Attunate RFI Disturbance
5.9.7. TVSS
1.1 GENERAL
 TVSS shall be as per IEEE standards & UL listed. The current rating of TVSS for different panels
shall be as specified below.
 The TVSS shall be mounted in a separate chamber away from control components. The cable
length between bus & TVSS shall be less as much as possible.
 Irrespective of TVSS rating a minimum of 10Sq.mm copper wire shall be used.
1.2 GENERAL CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES & STANDARDS

 The TVSS shall provide protection from power surges & transients for DB’s, MCC & PCC’s , ANSI
/IEEE C62.41 Category A,B & C3 Compatible.
 TVSS should be MOV based with each circuitry packaged inside a multi cavity, glass filled plastic
housing rated UL94-5 V. The assembly should be packed with specially formulated sand & then
epoxy capsulated.
 Tested in accordance with ANSI /IEEE C62.11 C62.45 tested.
 UL 1449 (2nd edition) , UL1283 & CSA listed.
 The module used in the TVSS should be UL at 600V AC and 300,000AIC.
 Each MOV inside the module to be individually fused & matched to within 1% to ensure max.
sharing & full surge current handling capacity.
 Sine Wave Tracking EMI & RFI filtering.
 5 year warranty against defects in materials & workmanship.
1.3 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Connection Means : Parallel connection (10 sq.mm)
nd
Agency Listed : UL1449(2 edition), UL1283, CSA
Protection Modes : All Modes Standard (L-N,L-G,N-G,L-L)
EMI/RFI Attenuation : 50db typical from 10khz to 100 Mhz.
Response Time : Less than 0.5ns
Enclosure : Gray Noryl HS-1000, rated 94-5V,NEMA 12,4, or 4x
Fault Current Rating : 300,000AIC @ 600VAC
Operating Frequency : 47 to 63 HZ.
Line Voltage : +/- 15% Nominal
Operating Temp : -40 to 60 deg. Centigrade.
Storage Temp. : -55 to 85 deg. Centigrade.
Audible Noise : Less than 45 dBa.
1.4 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

SURGE
REQUIRED MINIMUM
RMS SYSTEM CAPACITY PROTECTION
FAULT BREAKING
AMPS PER MODE MODES
CURRENT CAPACITY
OF PROTECTION
3000 ABOVE 200KA L-N, L-E, N-E 200KA
2000-3000 200KA L-N, L-E, N-E 200KA
1000-2000 80 -- 100KA L-N, L-E, N-E 80KA
400-1000 80KA L-N, L-E, N-E 80KA
225-400 40KA L-N, L-E, N-E 40KA
100-225 40KA L-N, L-E, N-E 40KA
30 - 100 40KA L-N, N-E 40KA

Automatic Transfer Switch
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
A. Furnish and install automatic transfer switches (ATS) with number of poles, amperage, voltage,
withstand and close-on ratings as per schematic. Each automatic transfer shall consist of an
inherently double throw power transfer switch mechanism and a microprocessor controller to
provide automatic operation. All transfer switches and controllers shall be the products of the
same manufacturer.
1.2 Codes and Standards
The automatic transfer switches and controls shall conform to the requirements of:
 UL 1008 - Standard for Transfer Switch Equipment
 IEC 947-6-1 Low-voltage Switchgear and Controlgear; Multifunction
equipment; Automatic Transfer Switching Equipment
 NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
 NFPA 99 - Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities
 NFPA 110 - Emergency and Standby Power Systems
 IEEE Standard 446 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Emergency and
Standby Power Systems for Commercial and Industrial Applications
 NEMA Standard ICS10-1993 (formerly ICS2-447) - AC Automatic Transfer
Switches
 UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment
1.3 Acceptable Manufacturers
Automatic transfer switches shall be ASCO 7000 Series.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Mechanically Held Transfer Switch
A. The transfer switch shall be electrically operated and mechanically held. The
electrical operator shall be a momentarily energized, single-solenoid
mechanism. Main operators which include overcurrent disconnect devices,
linear motors or gears shall not be acceptable. The switch shall be
mechanically interlocked to ensure only two possible positions, normal or
emergency.
B. All transfer switch sizes shall use only one type of main operator for ease of
maintenance and commonality of parts.
C. The switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by momentary outages,
so that contact pressure is maintained at a constant value and contact
temperature rise is minimized for maximum reliability and operating life.
D. All main contacts shall be silver composition. Switches rated 600 amperes
and above shall have segmented, blow-on construction for high withstand and
close-on capability and be protected by separate arcing contacts.
E. Inspection of all contacts shall be possible from the front of the switch without
disassembly of operating linkages and without disconnection of power
conductors. Switches rated 600 amps and higher shall have front removable
and replaceable contacts. All stationary and moveable contacts shall be
replaceable without removing power conductors and/or bus bars.

F. Designs utilizing components of molded-case circuit breakers, contactors, or
parts thereof, which are not intended for continuous duty, repetitive switching
or transfer between two active power sources are not acceptable.
G. Where neutral conductors must be switched as per schematic, the ATS
shall be provided with fully rated overlapping neutral transfer contacts. The
neutrals of the normal and emergency power sources shall be connected
together only during the transfer and retransfer operation and remain
connected together until power source contacts close on the source to which
the transfer is being made. The overlapping neutral contacts shall not overlap
for a period greater than 100 milliseconds. Neutral switching contacts which
do not overlap are not acceptable.
H. Where neutral conductors are to be solidly connected as shown on the plans, a neutral conductor
plate with fully rated AL-CU pressure connectors shall be provided.
2.2 Microprocessor Controller

A. The controller's sensing and logic shall be provided by a single built -in microprocessor for
maximum reliability, minimum maintenance, and the ability to communicate serially through an
optional serial communication module.
B. A single controller shall provide twelve selectable nominal voltages for maximum application
flexibility and minimal spare part requirements. Voltage sensing shall be true RMS type and shall
be accurate to ± 1% of nominal voltage. Frequency sensing shall be accurate to ± 0.2%. The panel
shall be capable of operating over a temperature range of -20 to +60 degrees C and storage from -
55 to +85 degrees C.
C. The controller shall be connected to the transfer switch by an interconnecting wiring harness. The
harness shall include a keyed disconnect plug to enable the controller to be disconnected from
the transfer switch for routine maintenance. Sensing and control logic shall be provided on
multi-layer printed circuit boards. Interfacing relays shall be industrial grade plug-in type with dust
covers. The panel shall be enclosed with a protective cover and be
mounted separately from the transfer switch u nit for safety and ease of maintenance. The
protective cover shall include a built-in pocket for storage of the operator's manuals.
D. All customer connections shall be wired to a common terminal block to simplify field-wiring
connections.
E. The controller shall meet or exceed the requirements for Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
as follows:
1. EN 55011:1991 Emission standard - Group 1, Class A
2. EN 50082-2:1995 Generic immunity standard, from which:
3. EN 61000-4-2:1995 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) immunity
4. ENV 50140:1993 Radiated Electro-Magnetic field immunity
5. EN 61000-4-4:1995 Electrical fast transient (EFT) immunity
6. EN 61000-4-5:1995 Surge transient immunity
7. EN 61000-4-6:1996 Conducted Radio-Frequency field immunity
8. IEEE472 (ANSI C37.90A) Ring Wave Test.

2.3 Enclosure shall be provided by local switch gear manufacturer, manufacturer shall follow the guidelines of
ASCO while installing the same.
A. The ATS shall be furnished in a Type 1 enclosure
B. All standard and optional door-mounted switches and pilot lights shall be 16-mm industrial grade
type or equivalent for easy viewing & replacement. Door
controls shall be provided on a separate removable plate, which can be supplied loose for
open type units.
3.0 OPERATION
3.1 Controller Display and Keypad
A. A four line, 20 character LCD display and keypad shall be an integral part of the controller for viewing
all available data and setting desired operational parameters. Operational parameters shall also be
available for viewing and limited control through the serial communications input port. The following
parameters shall only be adjustable via DIP switches on the controller:
1. Nominal line voltage and frequency
2. Single or three phase sensing
3. Operating parameter protection
4. Transfer operating mode configuration (Open transition, Closed transition, or Delayed transition)
All instructions and controller settings shall be easily accessible, readable and accomplished without
the use of codes, calculations, or instruction manuals.
3.2 Voltage, Frequency and Phase Rotation Sensing

A. Voltage and frequency on both the normal and emergency sources (as noted
below) shall be continuously monitored, with the following pickup, dropout,
and trip setting capabilities (values shown as % of nominal unless otherwise
specified):
Parameter Sources Dropout / Trip Pickup / Reset

Undervoltage N&E,3φ 70 to 98% 85 to 100%
Overvoltage N&E,3φ φ70 to 98% 85 to 100%
102 to 115% 2% below trip
Underfrequency N&E 85 to 98% 90 to 100%
Overfrequency N&E 102 to 110% 2% below trip
Voltage unbalance N&E 5 to 20% 1 % below dropout
B. Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be within ± 0.5% over an operating temperature range of -
20°C to 60°C.
C. Voltage and frequency settings shall be field adjustable in 1% increments either locally with the
display and keypad or remotely via serial communications port access.
D. The controller shall be capable (when activated by the keypad or through the serial port) of sensing
the phase rotation of both the normal and emergency sources. The source shall be considered
unacceptable if the phase rotation is not the preferred rotation selected (ABC or CBA).

E. Source status screens shall be provided for both normal & emergency to provide digital readout of
voltage on all 3 phases, frequency, and phase rotation.
3.3 Time Delays

A. An adjustable time delay of 0 to 6 seconds shall be provided to override momentary normal
source outages and delay all transfer and engine starting signals. Capability shall be provided to
extend this time delay to 60 minutes by providing an external 24 VDC power supply.
B. A time delay shall be provided on transfer to emergency, adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes, for
controlled timing of transfer of loads to emergency.
C. Two time delay modes (which are independently adjustable) shall be provided on re-transfer to
normal. One time delay shall be for actual normal power failures and the other for the test
mode function. The time delays shall be adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. Time delay shall be
automatically bypassed if the emergency source fails and the normal source is acceptable.
D. A time delay shall be provided on shut down of engine generator for cool down, adjustable
from 0 to 60 minutes.
E. A time delay activated output signal shall also be provided to drive an external relay(s) for selective
load disconnect control. The controller shall have the ability to activate an adjustable 0 to 5 minute
time delay in any of the following modes:
1. Prior to transfer only.
2. Prior to and after transfer.
3. Normal to emergency only.
4. Emergency to normal only.
5. Normal to emergency and emergency to normal.
6. All transfer conditions or only when both sources are available.
F. The controller shall also include the following built-in time delays for optional Closed Transition and
Delayed Transition operation:
1. 1 to 5 minute time delay on failure to synchronize normal and emergency sources prior to
closed transition transfer.
2. 0.1 to 9.99 second time delay on an extended parallel condition of both power sources
during closed transition operation.
3. 0 to 5 minute time delay for the load disconnect position for delayed transition
operation.
G. All time delays shall be adjustable in 1 second increments, except the extended parallel time,
which shall be adjustable in .01 second increments.
H. All time delays shall be adjustable by using the LCD display and keypad or with a remote device
connected to the serial communications port.
3.4 Additional Features

A. A three position momentary-type test switch shall be provided for the test / automatic / reset modes.
The test position will simulate a normal source failure. The reset position shall bypass the time
delays on either transfer to emergency or retransfer to normal.
B. A SPDT contact, rated 5 amps at 30 VDC, shall be provided for a low-voltage engine start signal. The
start signal shall prevent dry cranking of the engine by requiring the generator set to reach proper

output, and run for the duration of the cool down setting, regardless of whether the normal source
restores before the load is transferred.
C. Auxiliary contacts, rated 10 amps, 250 VAC shall be provided consisting of one contact, closed when
the ATS is connected to the normal source and one contact closed, when the ATS is connected to the
emergency source.
D. LED indicating lights (16 mm industrial grade, type 12) shall be provided; one to indicate when the
ATS is connected to the normal source (green) and one to indicate when the ATS is connected to the
emergency source (red).
E. LED indicating lights (16 mm industrial grade, type 12) shall be provided and energized by controller
outputs. The lights shall provide true source availability of the normal and emergency sources,
as determined by the voltage sensing trip and reset settings for each source.
The following features shall be built-in to the controller, but capable of being activated through
keypad programming or the serial port only when required by the user:
F. Provide the ability to select "commit/no commit to transfer" to determine

whether the load should be transferred to the emergency generator if the
normal source restores before the generator is ready to accept the load.
G. Terminals shall be provided for a remote contact which opens to signal the
ATS to transfer to emergency and for remote contacts which open to inhibit
transfer to emergency and/or retransfer to normal. Both of these inhibit
signals can be activated through the keypad or serial port.
H. An In phase monitor shall be provided in the controller. The monitor shall control transfer so that
motor load inrush currents do not exceed normal starting currents, and shall not require external
control of power sources. The in phase monitor shall be specifically designed for and be the product
of the ATS manufacturer. The in phase monitor shall be equal to ASCO Feature 27.
I. The controller shall be capable of accepting a normally open contact that will allow the transfer
switch to function in a non-automatic mode using an external control device.
J. Engine Exerciser - The controller shall provide an internal engine exerciser. The engine exerciser shall
allow the user to program up to seven different exercise routines. For each routine, the user shall be
able to:
1. Enable or disable the routine.
2. Enable or disable transfer of the load during routine.
3. Set the start time, .
4. time of day
5. day of week
6. week of month (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, alternate or every)
7. Set the duration of the run.
At the end of the specified duration the switch shall transfer the load back to normal and run
the generator for the specified cool down period. A 10-year life battery that supplies power to
the real time clock in the event of a power loss will maintain all time and date information.
K. System Status - The controller LCD display shall include a "System Status" screen which shall be
readily accessible from any point in the menu by depressing the "ESC" key a maximum of two times.

This screen shall display a clear description of the active operating sequence and switch position. For
example,
Normal Failed Load on Normal TD Normal to Emergency- 2min15s
Controllers that require multiple screens to determine system status or display "coded" system status
messages, which must be explained by references in the operator's manual, are not permissible.
L. Self Diagnostics - The controller shall contain a diagnostic screen for the purpose of detecting
system errors. This screen shall provide information on the status input signals to the controller
which may be preventing load transfer commands from being completed.
M. Communications Interface - The controller shall be capable of interfacing, through an optional serial
communication module, with a network of transfer switches, locally (up to 4000 ft.) or remotely
through modem serial communications. Standard software specific for transfer switch applications
shall be available by the transfer switch manufacturer. This software shall allow for the monitoring,
control and setup of parameters.
N. Data Logging - The controller shall have the ability to log data and to maintain the last 99
events, even in the event of total power loss. The following events shall be time and date
stamped and maintained in a nonvolatile memory:
1. Event Logging
1. Data and time and reason for transfer normal to emergency.
2. Data and time and reason for transfer emergency to normal.
3. Data and time and reason for engine start.
4. Data and time engine stopped.
5. Data and time emergency source available.
6. Data and time emergency source not available.
2. Statistical Data
1. Total number of transfers.
2. Total number of transfers due to source failure.
3. Total number of days controller is energized.
4. Total number of hours both normal and emergency sources are available.
O. Communications Module - A full duplex RS485 interface shall be installed in the ATS controller to
enable serial communications. The serial communications shall be capable of a direct connect
or multi-drop configured network. This module shall allow for the seamless integration of existing or
new communication transfer devices. The serial communication interface shall be equal to ASCO
Accessory 72.
P. External DC Power Supply - An optional provision shall be available to connect an external 24 VDC
power supply to allow the LCD and the door mounted control indicators to remain functional when
both power sources are dead. This option shall be equivalent to ASCO accessory 1G.
4.0 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 Withstand and Closing Ratings
A. The ATS shall be rated to close on and withstand the available RMS symmetrical short
circuit current at the ATS terminals with the type of over-current protection shown on the
plans.

B. The ATS shall be UL listed in accordance with UL 1008 and be labeled in accordance with that
standard's 1% and 3 cycle, long-time ratings. ATSs which are not tested and labeled with 1%
and 3 cycle (any breaker) ratings and have series, or specific breaker ratings only, are not
acceptable.
4.2 Tests and Certification

A. The complete ATS shall be factory tested to ensure proper operation of the individual
components and correct overall sequence of operation and to ensure that the operating
transfer time, voltage, frequency and time delay settings are in compliance with the specification
requirements.
B. Upon request, the manufacturer shall provide a notarized letter certifying compliance with
all of the requirements of this specification including compliance with the above codes and
standards, and withstand and closing ratings. The certification shall identify, by serial number(s),
the equipment involved. No exceptions to the specifications, other than those stipulated at
the time of the submittal, shall be included in the certification.
C. The ATS manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 International Quality Standard and the
manufacturer shall have third party certification verifying quality assurance in
design/development, production, installation and servicing in accordance with ISO 9001.
4.3 Service Representation

A. The ATS manufacturer shall maintain a local service organization of company-employed
personnel located in India. The service center's personnel must be factory trained and must be on
call 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
B. The manufacturer shall maintain records of each switch, by serial number, for a minimum
of 20 years.
5.0 OPTIONAL FEATURES

5.1 DATA MONITOR
A. Furnish data monitors at locations shown to monitor all functions Specified below.
B. The Data Monitors shall be listed to UL 3111-1, CSA, CE Mark, and industrially rated for an operating
temperature range of -20 °C to 60 °C.
C. The Data Monitor shall be accurate to 1% measured, 2% computed values
and display resolution to .1%. Voltage and current for all phases shall be
sampled simultaneously to assure high accuracy in conditions of low
power factor or large waveform distortions (harmonics).
D. The Data Monitor shall be capable of operating without modification at nominal frequencies of 45
to 66 Hz and over a control power input range of 20 - 32 VDC.
E. Each Data Monitor shall be capable of interfacing with an optional communications module to
permit information to be sent to central location for display, analysis, and logging.
F. The Data Monitor shall accept inputs from industry standard instrument transformers (120 VAC
secondary PT's and 5A secondary CTS.) Direct phase voltage connections, 600 VAC and under, shall
be possible without the use of PT's.
G. The Data Monitor shall be applied in single, 3-phase, or three & four wire circuits. A fourth CT input
shall be available to measure neutral or ground current.

H. All setup parameters required by the Data Monitors shall be stored in nonvolatile memory and
retained in the event of a control power interruption.
I. The following metered readings shall be communicated by the Data Monitor, via serial
communication, when equipped with optional serial communications module:
a) Current, per phase RMS and neutral (if applicable)
b) Current Unbalance %
c) Voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral
d) Voltage Unbalance %
e) Real power (KW), per phase and 3-phase total
f) Apparent power (KVA), per phase and 3-phase total
g) Reactive power (KVAR), per phase and 3-phase total
h) Power factor, 3-phase total & per phasei
i) Frequency
j) Accumulated Energy, (MWH, MVAH, and MVARH)
5.10 Push Buttons

Push buttons shall be of momentary contact type with rear terminal connection. These shall be suitably
shrouded to prevent inadvertent operation. Integral inscription plates engraved with their functions shall
be provided. All push buttons shall have two Normally Closed and two Normally.
Open contacts comprising rivets of pure silver. The contacts shall be able to make and carry 5 A and break
up one amp inductive loads at 250V DC.
5.11 Cable Terminations

 Cable entries and terminals shall be provided in the switchboard to suit the number, type and size of
copper conductor power cables and copper conductor control cable specified in the detailed
specifications.
 Provision shall be made for top or bottom entry of cables as required. Generous size of cabling chambers
shall be provided with the position of cable gland and terminals such that cables can be easily and safely
terminated.
 Barriers or shrouds shall be provided to permit safe working at the terminals of one circuit without
accidentally touching that of another live circuit.
 Cable risers shall be adequately supported to withstand the effects of rated short circuit currents without
damage and without causing secondary faults.
 Cable sockets shall be of tinned copper and of the crimping type.
5.12 Control Wiring

 All control wiring shall be carried out with 660/1100V grade single core PVC cable having stranded copper
conductors with minimum cross section of 1.5Sqmm for potential circuits and 2.5Sqmm for current
transformer circuits.
 Wiring shall be neatly bunched, adequately supported and properly routed to allow for easy access and
maintenance.
 Wires shall be identified by numbered ferrules at each end. The ferrules shall be of ring type and of non-
deteriorating material. They shall be firmly located on each termination so as to prevent free movement.

 All control circuit fuses shall be mounted for easy accessibility.
5.13 Terminal Blocks

 Terminal blocks shall be of 500 Volts grade and of stud/ screwless type.
 Terminal blocks shall have a minimum current rating of 10 Amps and shall be shrouded. Provisions shall
be made for label inscriptions. At least 20% spare terminals shall be provided on each panel and these
spare terminals shall be uniformly distributed on all terminal blocks.
 Terminal blocks for current transformer and voltage transformer secondary leads shall be provided with
test links and isolating facilities. Also current transformer secondary leads shall be provided with short
circuiting and earthing facilities.
 There shall be a minimum clearance of 250mm between the first row of terminal blocks and the
associated cable @land plate. Also, the clearance between two rows of terminal blocks shall be a
minimum of 150mm.
5.14 Relays
 All Relays shall conform to the requirement of IS : 3231/IS 8686 or other applicable approved standards
Relays
 All AC Relays shall be suitable for operation at 50Hz. AC Voltage operated relays shall be suitable for 110v
3 Volts PT secondary and Current operated relays for 5Amp CT secondaries, as specified in this
specification. Voltage operated relays shall have adequate thermal capacity for continuous operation.
 Auxiliary Relays and Timers shall have pairs of contacts as required to complete the scheme. Contacts
shall be silver faced with spring action.
 All Protective Relays, Auxiliary Relays and Timers except the lockout relays and Interlocking relays
specified, shall be provided with self reset type contacts. All Trip relays and Timers shall be provided with
externally hand reset positive action provided with inscription subject to Consultant/Developer approval.
Timers shall be of the electromagnetic or solid state type.
 Wherever solid state relays are used the following requirement shall be met:
(a). All Relays shall be designed for operating under an ambient temperature 55 Deg; C and 100%
relative humidity.
(b) All accessories required for correct operation of each relay shall be supported by the Contractor
without any extra cost.
(c) The solid state relays shall be stable and suitably protected against transient or induced over
voltages. The Bidder shall state clearly in his list special requirements, if any, for DC input
arrangement or cabling considered necessary for satisfactory operation of solid state relays
quoted by him.
6.0 Labelling
6.1 General
 Every switchboard, switchboard control contactor, time switch, relay, indicator lamp, meter. motor
starter, link and any control or protection equipment within or on a switchboard shall be clearly and
accurately labelled.

 Labels shall be engraved laminated plastic or photo anodised rigid aluminium and shall comply with the
following requirements.
 Except where otherwise required, labels shall be fixed adjacent to, but not on any item of equipment.
 Engraved lettering shall be black on a white background, except that the label for a main switch shall have
red lettering on a white background, and warning and caution labels shall have white lettering on a red
background.
 The minimum height of lettering shall be 3mm and of sufficient definition to allow easy reading.
6.2 Fixing of Labels

Labels shall be securely fixed by:
(a) Screws and adhesive, or
(b) Fixed in an extruded aluminium section which shall be countersunk screw fixed or countersunk
riveted to the panel.
Screws shall be tightened with nuts or into tapped holes in the switchboard. Mechanically expanded
plastic rivets of minimum 6mm head diameter are acceptable instead of screws. Aluminium rivets may be
used to fix aluminium labels only. Self-tapping screws, thread-cutting screws or other fixings are not
acceptable.
6.3 Labels on Exterior of Switchboards and Schedules

All switchboards shall be labeled with the manufacturer's name.
A switchboard designation label shall be provided. For other than main switchboards, the designation
label shall also state the source of electrical supply. Separate sections of enclosures shall be identified.
The label for any section or enclosure containing Supply Authority equipment shall be to the satisfaction
of the Consultant / Developer and the Supply Authority.
Every switchboard control shall be labeled and shall include:
(a) Circuit designation for all main switches, main controls and submain controls.
(b) Details of the consumer's mains and all submains.
(c) Incoming busbar or cable rating to the first tee-off.
The minimum height of lettering shall be 6 mm.
For identification of final sub circuits, a typed schedule, cross-referenced to the lighting and power layout
plans shall be provided. The schedule shall be protected by a plastic sheet and fixed in a suitable frame
mounted on the inside of the relevant switchboard door or, if the switchboard has no door, on the wall
immediately adjacent to the switchboard.
6.4 Labels on Interiors of Switchboards

 Labels identifying equipment within a switchboard shall be located such that the item referred to is
obvious and the lettering is not substantially obscured by the temporary or permanent position of any
equipment or wiring.

 For plug-in equipment where items are physically but not functionally interchangeable, the label wording
shall be expanded to clearly identify the removable section (e.g. to identify the contact configuration or
timing range). Where this is not possible, a second identifying label shall be glue fixed to the removable
section.
 The function and coding shown on the circuit diagram shall be used.
 The MEN link shall be labeled, or stamped and infilled, `MEN LINK' on the link.
6.5 Warning Labels

Where copolymer membrane coating is used anywhere on live conductors without further insulation, a
warning label shall be provided on the front cover near the main switch or local main switch and in a
prominent position within each section of the switchboard. The label shall have the following wording in
6mm high lettering:
WARNING
PAINTED COATING ON BUSBARS OR TERMINATIONS IS NOT INSULATION.
If a stand-by power supply is installed, an appropriate warning label shall be fixed at the main switch or
local main switch. An example of a typical label is:
WARNING
IN THE EVENT OF LOSS OF NORMAL SUPPLY GENERATOR SET WILL AUTOMATICALLY START AND BE
CONNECTED TO THIS SWITCHBOARD
When anti-condensation heaters are fitted, a label shall be provided at each heater reading
WARNING
THERMOSTATICALLY CONTROLLED ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER-DO NOT SWITCH OFF
7.0 Tests
7.1 General
The routine tests shall be conducted as per IS standards on each Power Control Center and shall comprise:
 Inspection of the Switchboards including inspection of wiring and electrical operational and functional
tests where necessary.
 Checking of protective measures and electrical continuity of the protective circuits.
7.2 Dielectric Tests

 Insulation resistance of the power circuit between each pole and the earth and that between the poles
shall be measured.
 Insulation resistance of all secondary wiring between phase and earth shall be measured. Insulation test
shall be carried out both before and after high voltage test.
7.3 High Voltage Test

A high voltage test with 2.5 kV for power circuit and 1.5kV for Control Circuit, Duration one minute shall
be applied between each pole and earth and between poles. Test certificate shall be submitted along with
panel.

8.0 Storing, Erection and Commissioning
8.1 Storing
The panels shall be stored in a well ventilated dry place.
Suitable polythene covers shall be pro-aided for necessary protection against moisture, dust, and vermin.
8.2 Erection
Switchboards shall be installed over trench/floor as required. Suitable grouping holes shall be provided in
the flooring. Suitable MS base channel shall be embedded in the flooring on which the panel can directly
be installed The switchboards shall be properly aligned and bolted to the flooring by at least four bolts.
Cables shall be terminated on the bottom plate or top plate as the case may be, by using brass
compression glands. The individual cables as shall then be led through the panel to the required feeder
compartments for necessary terminations. The cables shall be clamped to the supporting arrangement.
Either side, the switchboard earth bus shall be connected to the local earth grid.
The base channel used for erection of panels shall form part of the cost of the panel and shall not be
measured or paid separately.
8.3 Pre-commissioning Tests

The panels shall be commissioned only after successful completion of the following tests. The tests shall
be carried out in the presence of the Consultant / Developer.
(a) All main and auxiliary bus bar connections shall be checked and tightened.
(b) All wiring terminations and bus bar joints shall be checked and tightened.
(c) Wiring shall be checked to ensure that it is according to the approved drawing.
(d) ll wiring shall be tested for insulation resistance by a 500 volt megger
(e) Phase rotation tests shall be conducted.
(f) Suitable injection tests shall be applied to all the measuring instruments to establish the
correctness and accuracy of calibration and working order if required by the Developer.
(g) All relays and protective devices shall be tested for correctness of settings and operation by
introducing a current generator and an ammeter in the circuit or shall produce calibration or test
certificate as required by the inspectorate or Consultant / Developer.
(h) Functional tests on all feeders.
(i) Make, type and ratings of all components shall be checked and verified as per the approved
drawings.
8.4 Metal Treatment and Finish
All steel work used in this Contract shall in general, undergo the following process of treatment and finish.
(a) Degreasing: by hot alkaline degreasing solution followed by cold water rinsing to remove
traces of alkaline solution.
(b) Phosphating: by a recognised phosphating process to facilitate durable coating of the paint on
the metal surfaces and also to prevent the spread of rust in the event of the paint film being
mechanically damaged. This again shall be followed by hot water rinsing to remove traces of
phosphate solution.

(c) Drying in dust-free atmosphere.
(d) Primer : Primer coating with a coat of corrosion resistant primer applied on wet surface.
(e) Finish coat: Two finishing coats of stoving synthetic enamel paint to the specified shade of IS 5.
Both the finish coats shall be only spray painted.
(f) For outdoor units the finishing coat shall be of weather resistant stoving epoxy paint of specified
shade of IS5.
8.5 Warranty and Maintenance

The installation shall be guaranteed against faulty workmanship for minimum of one year from the date
of practical completion. All faulty workmanship shall be replaced and restored to full operation at no cost
to the Developer within the guarantee period.
Manufacturer's guarantees and warranties shall be obtained in accordance with Clause 9.11 of the
Preliminaries. The warranty period shall be for eighteen months commencing from the date of installation
or twelve months from the date of practical completion, whichever is the first to occur.
Medium Voltage Cables

1.0 General
1.1 Type
Medium voltage cables shall be aluminium conductor, XLPE/ PVC insulated, PVC sheathed and steel wire
armoured or steel tape armoured construction. The cables shall conform to IS 1554 Part I in all respects.
Cables shall be laid in tray/hume pipe/in ready-made trenches etc., as required.
1.2 Rating
The cable shall be rated for a voltage of 1100 Volts.
1.3 Core Identifications

Cores shall be provided with the following colour scheme of PVC insulation:
1 core : Red/Black/Yellow/Blue
2 core : Red and Black
3 core : Red, Yellow and Blue
3 1/2 / 4 core : Red, Yellow, Blue & Black
2.0 Storing, Laying, Jointing and Terminations

2.1 Storing
On receipt of cables at site the cables shall be inspected and stored in a safe place.
2.2 Laying
Cables shall be laid as per the specifications given below:
2.3 Cables in Outdoor Trenches
Cables shall be laid in outdoor trenches wherever called for. The depth of the trenches shall not be less
than 75 cm from the final ground level. The width of the trenches shall suit easy laying of cable. Where
more than one cable has to be laid in the same trench, all attempts shall be made to keep the axial
distance between successive cables to be atleast 1d where 'd' is the diameter of the bigger cable. The
trenches shall be cut square with vertical sidewalls and with uniform depth. Wherever cables are bent,

the minimum bending radius shall not be less than 12 times the diameter of the cable. After the cable is
laid and straightened, it shall be covered with sand cushion. Over this a course of cable protection tiles or
burnt brick shall be provided on either sides and above. Trench shall be back filled with earth and
consolidated. Cables shall be laid in hume pipes / stoneware pipes at all road crossings & wall entries.
Approved cable markers made of CI indicating the voltage, no. of cables and the direction of run of the
cables shall be installed at regular intervals.
2.4 Cable in Indoor Trenches

Cables shall be laid in indoor trenches wherever specified. Suitable angle iron brackets, clamps, hoods and
saddles shall be used for securing the cable in position.
2.5 Cable on Trays/Racks

Cables shall be laid on cable trays/racks wherever specified. Cable racks/trays shall be of perforated steel
section slotted angles for suitable purpose. The trays/racks shall be complete with plates, tees, elbows,
risers and all necessary hardware. The steel trays shall be painted. Cable trays shall be erected properly to
present a neat and clean appearance. Suitable cleats or saddles shall be used for securing the cables to
the cable trays. The cable trays shall comply with the following requirements:
a) The trays are ladder type and shall have suitable strength and rigidity to provide adequate
support for all contained cables.
b) It shall not present sharp edges, burrs of projections injurious to the insulation of the
wiring/cables.
c) If made of Sheet metal, it shall be adequately strength protected against corrosion or shall be
made of corrosion resistant material.
d) It shall have side rails or equivalent structural members.
e) It shall include fittings such as horizontal, vertical bends, tie rods, hooks etc., or other suitable
means for changes in direction and elevation of runs, fishplates and hard ware.
2.6 Installation
a) Cable trays shall be installed as a complete system. Trays shall be supported properly from the
building structure. The entire cable tray system shall be rigid.
b) Each run of the cable tray shall be completed before the installation of cables.
c) In-portions where additional protection is required, non-combustible covers/enclosure shall be
used.
d) Cable trays shall be exposed and accessible.
e) Where cables of different system are installed on the same cable tray, non-combustible solid
barriers shall be used for segregating the cables.
f) Cable trays shall be grounded by two nos. earth continuity wires. Cable trays shall not be used as
equipment grounding conductors.
2.7 Jointing And Terminations

o Cable jointing shall be done as per the recommendations of the cable manufacturer. Jointing
shall be done by qualified cable jointers.

o Each termination shall be carried out using brass compression glands and cable sockets.
Hydraulic crimping tool shall be used for making the end terminations. Cable gland shall be
bonded to the earth by suing suitable size G.I. wire/tape.
o Suitable identification tags with the feeder designation inscribed on an aluminium/G.I. sheet
shall be tied to either ends of each cable.
2.8 Testing
Cables shall be tested at factory as per the requirements of IS 1554 Part I. The tests shall incorporate
routine tests, type tests and acceptance tests. Copy of such test certificates shall be furnished to the
Developer prior to dispatch.
3.0 Aluminium Cable Termination Methods

3.1 Generally
The general requirements for all joints and terminations of aluminium cables shall be:
a. To remove oxide from the conductor and prevent the oxide re-forming.
b. To prevent corrosion resulting from contact between dissimilar metals.
c. To retain contact pressure under cyclic loading conditions.
For all aluminium cables, the oxide shall be removed by thoroughly wire-brushing the bare end of the
cable. After brushing, a liberal coating of approved oxide-inhibiting, moisture-excluding thermally stable
grease shall be applied, and the cable shall be wire-brushed again through the grease. Cable strands shall
not be separated before brushing.
Bare aluminium lugs, ferrules and other connectors, unless factory-tinned or factory pre-filled with
inhibiting grease, shall be wire-brushed and grease coated in the same way as cables.
Before making any joints or terminations in aluminium cables, the Contractor shall submit the proposed
method for the Consultant / Developer approval. Notice of at least three working days shall be given
before making any joints or terminations, to enable the Consultant / Developer to witness the work.
3.2 Acceptable Termination Methods

Aluminium to aluminium connections shall be made by one of the following methods:
- Aluminium crimp lugs or tinned copper ferrules.
- Fusion welding with aluminium lugs.
Tinned copper ferrules shall be terminated using the compression method. For compression connections
on stranded cables, a hexagonal die shall be used, on solid conductor cables, indent type dies shall be
used, with at least two indentations per cable connection. Lugs of ferrules shall be selected to suit the size
and shape of the conductor. Compression dies shall be selected to suit the particular lug or ferrule.
Aluminium crimp lugs shall be filled with oxide inhibiting grease.
Joints by the fusion welding method shall be made by jointers experienced in this method. Particular care
shall be taken to protect the cable insulation from heat by fixing substantial heat sinks to the cable near

the joint. After completion of the weld the joint shall be wire brushed and all sharp projections filed
smooth.
Aluminium to copper connections shall be made by one of the following methods:

- Bi-metal connectors, or
- Tinned copper ferrules. or
- Electro-tinned cast aluminium lugs.
Bi-metal connections shall consist of lugs or pin type connectors having a cast copper palm or pin, friction-
welded to an aluminium barrel section which is subsequently factory filled with oxide-inhibiting grease.
The aluminium cable shall be inserted in the barrel section and fixed using the compression method as
detailed above. The copper pin or palm section shall be fixed to copper or brass connectors or bus-bars in
the conventional manner.
Tinned copper ferrules shall be terminated using the compression method.
Where electro-tinned aluminium lugs are used, they shall be fixed to the cable using the compression
method. The palm of the lug shall be bolted to the copper bus-bar or terminal using a stainless steel bolt
and nut, with one large diameter stainless steel flat washer and two "Belleville" spring cup washers.
All nuts shall be adequately torque tightened to manufacturer's recommended levels. Identification
tags for feeder designation shall be by using `Phoenix' plastic cable markers, tied to either end of each
cable.
4.0 Road Crossings

All pipelines laid below roads shall be taken through suitable underground trenches. The size of trenches
shall be as per drawings.
4.1 Construction across Roads

All works across roads shall be carried out as per the directions of the Development Manager. Necessary
safety measures shall be taken to divert traffic. Care shall be taken not to disturb electrical and
communication cables.
4.2 Protection of Existing Services

All pipes, water mains, cables, etc. met with during the course of excavation shall be carefully protected
and supported. In any case damage is caused, the same shall be made good at no extra cost, failing which
necessary rectification will be done by Development Manager at the risk and cost of the Contractor.
4.3 Refilling:
The filling shall be done in layers not exceeding 15mm in depth. Each layer shall be watered, rammed and
compacted. Ramming shall be done with iron rammers where possible and with blunt end of the crow
bars where rammers cannot be used. Special care shall be taken to ensure that no damage is caused to
the pipes, drains, masonry or concrete in the trenches.

Filling in trenches shall be commenced soon after the joints of pipes, cables, conduits etc. have been
tested and approved by Development Manager. The space around the pipes shall be cleared of all debris
where the trenches are excavated in hard/soft soil. The filling shall be done with earth on the sides and
top of pipes in layers not exceeding 15mm in depth. Each layer shall be watered rammed and compacted.
The clods and lumps of earth exceeding 8cm in any direction shall be broken or removed before the
excavated earth is used for filling. Generally no test is done to determine the instu density of filled earth
but on the discretion of Development Manager the 95 proctor’s compaction test may be done to ensure
the in situ density after filling. Consolidation is removal of water from the pores and compaction is the
expulsion of air from the pores. In case of refilling consolidation places most important role as the
watering of the each layer is being done properly. If required by the Development Manager proctors
needle may also be used for the proper checking of the refilling items of in situ density.
4.4 Contractor Shall Restore Settlement and Damages:

The Contractor shall at his own cost make good promptly during the whole period the works are in hand,
any settlements that may occur in the surfaces or roads, beams, footpaths, gardens, open spaces etc.
Whether public or private caused by his trenches or by his other excavations due to not using the method
of compaction as given in clause 3/2.8.3.5 and he shall be liable for any accidents caused thereby.
He shall also at his own expense and charges, repair and make good any damage done to the building and
other properties.
4.5 Testing
Cables shall be tested at the factory as per the requirements of 1S 1554 Part 1. The tests shall incorporate
routine tests, type tests and acceptance tests. A copy of such test certificates shall be furnished to the
Consultant / Developer prior to dispatch.
VIII Wiring Devices

1.0 Switches, Sockets and Accessories
1.1 General Requirements
Light control switches shall be of a 240V, 6A rating for controlling light points as specified. Light control
switches shall be of plate type design with metal or PVC boxes suitable for flush mounting for general
lighting. Light control switch boxes shall be of metal or PVC as specified.
All sockets 6A and 16 A ratings shall be of flush mounting type (unless otherwise indicated with control
switches of plate type design of the same rating as that of the sockets. All socket outlets shall be of 3 pin
type with PVC boxes. UPS sockets should not contain switch, need to be different consistent color from
others.
1.2 Industrial Type Sockets

Industrial tax: sockets shall be provided wherever specifically called for on the drawings. Industrial sockets
shall be rated as specified. Plugs and sockets shall have 3 pins for single phase applications and 5 pins for
3 phase applications. The sockets shall be provided with suitable plug top and cable entry device and shall
be controlled by a suitably rated rotary switch. The sockets shall be housed in suitable PVC housings of IP
54 protection class.

1.3 Light Outlet Accessories
Accessories for light outlets such as lamp holders, 3 plate ceiling rose, etc. shall be in conformity with
requirements of relevant IS specification. Only approved make of accessories shall be supplied.
1.4 Installation
All switch connections shall be made only after ensuring the continuity of wires and terminations. Tapping
of wires shall be done only at the terminals of switches, sockets and ceiling roofs and terminal blocks.
Under joining and extension of wires in pipes and conduits shall not be carried out under any
circumstances.
The arrangement of switches and sockets shall be neat, systematic, and aesthetic. The Contractor shall
obtain approval from the Consultant / Developer with regard to the proper location of switches and all
outlets.
The enclosures of sockets and pin of the sockets shall be connected to the ground through a proper size
insulated earth continuity wire. Metal or hylam phase barriers shall be interposed between switches
located in a common enclosure, when wired on different phases.
1.5 Sub-Mains and Circuit Mains

Wiring of sub-mains and circuit mains in concealed or surface conduit systems shall be with 2mm thick
rigid PVC conduits and conduit accessories with 660/1100V grade PVC insulated copper flexible wires for
phase neutral and earth.
Sub-main shall include Ms or PVC draw-boxes, sized as required to be located at every floor for easy
drawing of wires.
1.6 Point Wiring

Point wiring shall commence from the first point control box for the points connected to the same circuit.
Point wiring for lights, sockets etc, shall be carried out with PVC insulated copper conductor wires of
660/1100V grade. The point wiring shall be inclusive of suitably sized conduits of standard and approved
make (as specified before) along with approved quality of conduit accessories and shall be provided with
PVC insulated copper earth continuity wire for earthing 3rd pin of sockets at all points as specified.
Wiring of light points and 6A switched socket outlets by providing PVC or 16G rigid MS Box with
accessories, and 2.5 sqmm 660V/1100V grade PVC flexible multi strand copper wires, SP MCB 6A modular
plate switch, and other point wiring accessories and carrying out surface/concealed conduit point wiring.
All light points, 5A sockets shall be earthed using the third core of green colour insulated copper wires.
1.7 Labeling
The Contractor shall provide labelling for all light control switches, industrial-type sockets, socket outlets,
permanently connected devices, etc, identifying the distribution board and circuit breaker number, in an
approved manner, acceptable to the Consultant / Developer, to provide ready identification.
Hand painted labels are not acceptable.

LIGHTNING PROTECTION
EXTERNAL LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM AS PER INDIAN STANDARDS
IS/IEC 62305-3 & NBC-2016
General
There are no devices or methods capable of modifying the natural weather phenomena to the extent that they can
prevent lightning discharges. Lightning flashes to, or nearby, structures (or lines connected to the structures) are
hazardous to the structures, their contents and installations as well as to lines. This is why lightning protection
measures are essential
Lightning Protection System shall be in accordance with IS IEC 62305-3 & NBC-2016. Lightning Protection consists of
external Protection for the building with Air termination, Down Conductors and Earthing and Internal protection for
power lines with Surge Protective devices.
Generally lightning between cloud and ground creates failures. However inter-cloud and intra-could lightning also can
create potential differences and failures in electronic installation. More than 95 % of Lightning strikes are of Negative
impulse and less than 5 % are of positive impulse. Positive impulses are mainly due to dry lightning in cold areas.
Current parameters as per IS/IEC 62305 and the effects of lightning are as below
Lightning Protection Level

Current Parameters Symbol Unit Effect
I II III IV
First positive Impulse
Peak Current I kA 200 150 100 Mechanical
Impulse charge QSHORT C 100 75 50 Thermal (arc)
Specific Energy W/R MJ/Ω 10 5.6 2.5 Mechanical & Thermal
Average Steepness di / d t kA / µS 20 15 10 Surges and flashover
Time Parameters T1 / T2 µS / µS 10/350
First Negative Impulse
Peak Current I kA 100 75 50 Mechanical
Average Steepness di / d t kA / µS 100 75 50 Surges and flashover
Time Parameters T1 / T2 µS / µS 1 / 200
Damages from lightning strike are due to Peak Current (I), Charge (C), Specific Energy (W/R) & Rate of change of
current (di/dt). Lightning protection is designed to take care of these effects of lightning and hence the following
parameters shall be strictly followed.
Effect of Lightning on External LPS (Air termination, Down Conductor and Earthing)
Effects on air-termination systems arise from both mechanical and thermal effects. Effects on down-conductors are
thermal effects due to resistive heating & mechanical effects in parallel conductors and in Bends. The real problems
with earth-termination electrodes are linked with chemical corrosion and mechanical damage caused by forces other
than electro dynamic forces.

Sizing and fixing of Materials are selected to handle the mechanical and thermal effects. Bends in down conductor shall
strictly NOT be at 90 degree (right angles) & should have a curved path of 45 degree bend. Earth electrodes are
selected based on the current handling capacity up to 1 second. To avoid corrosion problems as explained in IS/IEC
62305 (clause E.4.3.4 and E.5.4.3.2), GI is strictly not recommended inside concrete and in soil.
Effect of Lightning on Internal LPS (SPD’s for POWER, DATA lines etc)
Effect on internal LPS is mainly due to coupling and the rate of change of current. Due to Very high d i/dt of the first
negative stroke. The expected problem is the response time of SPD and the voltage drop in the connecting wires. SPD’s
at the incoming panels shall have a response time less than 1 nano sec & shall be of BUSBAR Mounted type to avoid
connecting wire length.
LPL (Lightning Protection Level)

LPL is a number associated with a set of lightning current parameters relevant to the probability that the associated
minimum & maximum values do not exceed the normally occurring lightning. LPL can be determined by Risk analysis as
explained in IS IEC 62305-2 or can be selected based on the guideline in NBC-2016.
*
Application LPL
Computer Data Centers, Military Applications, Nuclear Power Stations, High raise Hotels/Hospitals, 1
airports, essential services such as telecom towers
EX-Zones in the industry and chemical sector, Low raise Hospitals & Hotels, fuel retail outlets, gas 2
station, compressor station etc
Schools, Banks, Residential Buildings, Temple, Churches, Mosques 3/4
LPL levels, probability and basic design consideration:

Class of LPS Lightning current Lightning Interception Rolling Mesh Down Conductor
MINIMUM current probability sphere size Spacing
MAXIMUM radius (m) (m)
1 3 kA 200 kA 98% 20 5*5 10
2 5 kA 150 kA 95% 30 10*10 10
3 10 kA 100 kA 88% 45 15*15 15
4 16 kA 100 kA 81% 60 20*20 20
Protection angle w.r.t Height

Class of LPS
80
70
0
a 60
50
40
30
IV
I II III
20
10
0
10 20 30 40 50 60
H m
Air termination system:

Material, Configuration and Minimum cross sectional area of air terminal & down conductors
2
Air Termination mesh conductor and down conductors: 8 mm Aluminium alloy round conductor (50 mm )
Air Termination Rod: 10 mm, 16 mm & 40 mm solid Aluminium rods (combination of sizes) (tubes are not allowed)
Joints / Connectors / Fixing materials:
Connection materials Connector type GI fixing materials shall not be used

Aluminium to Aluminium Aluminium or SS
Aluminium to Steel SS
Aluminium accessories if connection is between Aluminium materials are necessary. SS accessories if connections are
between aluminium and copper / copper coated materials.
Earth Termination Conductor: 10 mm solid copper coated steel conductor (100 microns min coating)
Earth Termination Joints in soil: Exothermic welding
GI material for earthing shall not be used as per the recommendation in IS/IEC62305 as well as Kerala electrical
inspectorate guideline.
If the structure height is more than 60 meters, top 20% of the height of the structure shall be protected with a lateral
air termination system. This is needed because the probability of flashes to the side is generally more for structures
more than 60 meters in height. More importance need to be provided to Corners, Edges and significant protrusions
such as balconies. Metallic handrails/ Aluminium frame of wall cladding if used in balconies shall be conned to air
termination / down conductors.
In PEB / Steel buildings where GI sheet roofing, air termination mesh / Rod shall be directly mounted on the sheet.
Fixing materials used shall be in good electrical contact with the sheet, shall not create water leakage.
No drilling is allowed in the terrace for fixing the air terminal, if the roof is made of concrete. Parapet wall is
exception to this.

Air terminal holder:
Concrete Roof structure: Conductors shall be securely fixed on the terrace by means of concrete air terminal holders
with suitable fixing materials which is fixed on the roof by adhesive or cement mortar taking care of varying weather
conditions. Plastic air termination conductor holder is not allowed. The minimum height of this air terminal holder shall
be 50 mm to avoid the contact of conductor with water
Metal Roof structure: Conductors shall be securely fixed on the terrace by means of air terminal holder which is fixed
on the roof by metal conductor holder made of Stainless steel. As metal roof structures are normally tapered at an
angle, there are no min height criteria for metal conductor holder.
Recommended fixing distance of air terminal and down conductors

Recommended distance
Arrangement
TAPE / Strip ROUND
Horizontal conductor on horizontal surface 500 mm 1000 mm
Horizontal conductor on vertical surface 500 mm 1000 mm
Vertical conductor from Ground to 20m height 1000 mm 1000 mm
Vertical conductor above 20m height 500 mm 1000 mm
If antenna, Chillers or any other roof top electrical equipment is present in terrace, the same have to be protected by
using vertical air terminal after calculating the safety or separation distance. The vertical air terminal has to have
suitable supports to hold it. Wind speed need to be taken into account. Vertical air terminal must be connected to
horizontal air terminal by using suitable connectors.
At the crossings of the horizontal air terminals, suitable Cross connector has to be used.
Safety or Separation distance: (not required for LPS using structural natural components)
To avoid flash over to electrical/electronic apparatus, this equipment shall be kept at a distance away from LPS
components more than the safety distance as per the following calculation.
Safety/Separation distance (S) in m = (ki * kc*L) / km

Coefficient ki depends on class of LPL/LPS (ki = 0.08 for LPL1, 0.06 for LPL 2, 0.04 for LPL3 and 4)
Coefficient kc depends on no of down conductors: kc = 0.66 for 2 down conductors, kc = 0.44 for 3 or more down
conductors
Value of coefficient km = 1
Value of L is the total distance between the equipment to be protected (for e.g. Antenna) to the equi-potential bonding
bar situated just above the ground.
Expansion piece
In order to take care the expansion of the metal in summer and contraction of the metal in winter, expansion piece
with suitable connectors have to be used at every 20m distance of horizontal air termination mesh.

Joints and Bends
The lightning protective system shall have few joints as far as possible & air terminal & down conductor have to be
straight. Where it is not possible, it should NOT be bent at 90 degree (right angles) & should have a curved path of 45
degree bend.
Down conductor system

In order to reduce the probability of damage to electronic/electrical equipment, the down conductors shall be
arranged in equi distance in such a way that from the point of strike to earth, several parallel current paths should exist
& length of the current path should be minimum. Down conductors should be installed at each exposed corner of the
structure as a minimum. Maximum distance between down conductors shall be as per the table above.
Test joints:
At the connection to the earth conductor, a test joint should be fitted on each down conductor at a height of 1 m from
the ground, except in the case of natural down conductors combined with foundation earth electrode. The purpose of
test joint is to measure the earth resistance value. The remaining portion of down conductor (i.e., after the test joint
should be mounted inside a plastic pipe of minimum 3 mm thickness.)
Earth Terminations
For earth termination system, 2 basic types of earth electrode arrangements are applicable. Type A & Type B
arrangement.
Type A arrangement: Comprises of horizontal or vertical earth electrode installed outside the structure to be protected
connected to each down conductor. Minimum Length of vertical earth electrode shall be as below
Class of Typical Length of each vertical earth electrode based on Soil resistivity
LPS Up to 500 Ω M 1000 Ω M 2000 Ω M 3000 Ω M
1 2.5 meter 10 meters 25 meters 40 meter
2 2.5 meter 5 meter 15 meters 22 meter
3 2.5 meter 2.5 meter 2.5 meter 2.5 meter
4 2.5 meter 2.5 meter 2.5 meter 2.5 meter
If horizontal electrodes are used, the length shall be double. In type A arrangement, the total number of earth
electrodes shall not be less than two. Type A arrangement is suitable in places where electronic equipment are not
located.
Type B arrangement: This type of arrangement comprises either a ring conductor external to the structure to be
protected, in contact with the soil for at least 80% of its total length or a foundation earth electrode. Ring earthing
must be 1 meter away from the building and 0.5m below the ground as a closed loop. Such earth electrodes can also be
meshed. For structures with extensive electronic systems or with high risk of fire, type B earthing is most preferable
method. There is no limit in the resistance of Ring Earthing if the ring radius of the ring is larger than 50 meters or 80
meters for LPL 1 and 2. For LPL 3 and 4 this radius is about 5 meters. The overall resistance of earthing system shall not
exceed 10 ohms.
Galvanised steel (GI) as earthing material shall not be used.

Lightning Counters: At least 2 down conductors in an installation shall have a lightning counter tested as per IEC
62561. The counter shall be digital type with replaceable battery. Battery life shall be minimum 3 years. The
minimum measuring current is 1KA (8/20) and the maximum is 100 KA (10/350). The counter shall be outdoor
type, IP65 and shall be able to record date, time and no of strikes.
Quality and Confirmations

All materials and accessories shall be tested as per IEC 62561 for its mechanical / corrosion resistant / electrical
conductivity. Vendor shall provide test reports along with completion certificate. GI (Hot dip galvanised or zinc
electroplated) fixing materials and fasteners are not allowed.
References:
IS/IEC62305 – PROTECTION AGAINST LIGHTNING:
Part 1: General Principles
Part 2: Risk Management
Part 3: Protection of structures
Part 4: Protection of Electrical & Electronic equipment within structure
NBC-2016: National Building Code of India – 2016
IS3043: 1987: Code of practice for earthing.
UP S – IN V ER T ER TY P E
1.0 General
1.1 Scope
Supply, install and commission RATED KVA / 230V (single phase) UPS systems with necessary batteries for
a battery back up time of 90 minutes. For lighting & general power applications.
1.2 Related Work

Co-ordinate the work with other trades, especially electrical.
1.3 References and Codes

This specification shall be read in conjunction with the complete tender conditions and relevant
standards.
1.4 Submissions
Full details of the systems, including technical specifications and shop drawing showing precise layout of
UPS and batteries, shall be provided to the Development Manager.
Technical specifications must contain , but not be limited to:

 UPS rating KVA , for P.F 0.8, grater then 0.8
 UPS overload capability: Unit and Static Switch separately.
 Paralleling capability - for redundancy .
 Current walk in at least 4 sec.
 If charging limiting possible for remote signal
 Battery monitoring possibility ( 2 per string active or passive type).

 Maximum numbers of strings ( >=3) for 15 min.
 Control card for communication RS232/ 485 for display.
 Monitoring software availability
 Maintenance support data,: batteries, UPS
 MTTR by vendor
 Time to arrive on site.
1.5 Project Conditions

The Contractor shall inspect drawings, visit the site, check aspects of required work and refer any
discrepancy to the Consultant / Developer.
1.6 Warranty end Maintenance

The installation shall be guaranteed against faulty workmanship for minimum of one year from the date
of practical completion. All faulty workmanship shall be replaced and restored to full operation at no cost
to the Developer within the guarantee period.
Manufacturer's guarantees and warranties shall be handover to Developer.
Once the warranty expires the Developer may at his discretion enter in to an annual maintenance
contract (AMC) or ask, the Specialist Agency to support the maintenance of the system on a per call basis
with the same commitment as in the case of AMC.
2.0 UPS System

2.1 Conditions
The following details are the minimum requirements:
 The UPS shall be fully covered on all the sides, and with front opening for servicing ventilation
system).
 UPS shall have potential Free contacts corresponding to fault conditions I/P mains failure,
Inverter O/P failure, Battery low pre-alarm so that this information can be carried to the paging
system.
 UPS shall have a LCD Panel for measuring various other parameters related to UPS operation.
 Output of the both UPS's shall be paralleled so as to form a parallel redundant configuration.
2.2 Batteries
All batteries shall be sealed maintenance-free batteries of appropriate rating to provide 90 minutes back
up at full load. Battery mounting racks shall also be supplied with batteries.
3.0 Execution
3.1 Installation
The UPS System and batteries shall be installed as per the approved drawing. All cable shall run through
the cable turn provided
3.2 Commissioning

The Development Manager shall witness the commissioning. The Contractor shall give minimum 7
working days notice to the Consultant / Developer before commencing commissioning.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the testing and satisfactory performance of the complete UPS
system which shall include as a minimum:
(a) Switch off all the output breakers that are connected to the load. Run the UPS in no load
condition at least for 15 minutes.
(b) Measure and confirm output voltage. Phase difference, frequency and all other specified
parameter are within the allowed range.
(c) Conduct the load test of the UPS system by connecting the UPS to a dummy load like water load
Contractor shall arrange for test facility.
d) Measure and confirm at full load, voltage, frequency, phase difference, Battery backup time,
battery charging current, DC ripple, parallel redundancy operation, and all other necessary
and/or specified parameters are within the approved range.
e) Once the result of the load test is satisfactory, and approval is received for connecting the power
to the electric circuit; connect the UPS output to the actual computer load.
f) Check for any malfunctioning with the computers and UPS system. Observe for 15 minutes.
g) Repeat step
3.3 Manuals
Two sets of all manuals for the systems, including instruction, administration and maintenance manuals,
shall be submitted to the Consultant / Developer.
2.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR SELF CONTAINED EMERGENCY LIGHTING LUMINAIRES

 Extra slim luminaries to match the most aesthetic environment
 Certified to IEC 598-2-22 and EN 60598-2-22 standards quality mark ANCHOR
 Power Supply : 230V AC +/- 10%, 50/60 Hz. IP 42 IK 07, class II
 Suitable for mounting on inflammable surfaces
 Recharge time : 24 hours
 Non-maintained emergency lighting luminaries with 2 high luminosity LEDs (average life time
1,00,000 h) to ensure 1 lux along the center of an escape route.
 Sealed rechargeable Ni-Cd batteries, high temperature type.
 Screw terminals with high capacity : 4mm2 for mains and 2.5mm2 for remote control
 1 dia. 20 cable entry at the top and 1 rectangular one at the back side.
E AR T HIN G
Scope of work
o Supply and installation of all Earth Electrodes as enumerated in earthing schematic.
o Supply installation of earthing conductors for the electrical works covered under this scope of
work.
o Supply and installation of Rigid PVC pipes up to the nearest shaft or cut in building or the cable
trench in the vicinity to enable laying of earthing strips by other agencies at a later date.

1.0 Earthing Electrodes
o Earthing electrodes shall be designed as per the requirements of clause 17.2 of IS:3043. The
number and size of earth electrodes shall be calculated so that under fault conditions no
electrode is loaded above its maximum permissible current density. The resistance of earth
electrodes shall not exceed one Ohm.
o The number of earth electrodes shown in the drawing is indicative. The Contractor shall provide
required additional earth electrodes to contain the ohmic value at no extra cost.
o Earthing electrodes of plate type shall be used. The choice of pipe or plate electrode shall be
decided according to the anticipated fault level of the network and local soil conditions.
o All grounding electrodes shall be tested with earth meggers and grounding resistances are
recorded.
1.1 Plate Electrode

Plate electrodes shall be made of copper plate of 3.15 mm thick and 60 x 60 cm size. The plate shall be
buried vertically in ground at a depth of not less than 2 meters to the top of the plate, the plate being
encased in salt and charcoal to a thickness of 15 cm all around. It is preferable to bury the electrode to a
depth where subsoil water is present. Earth leads to the electrode shall be of copper and shall be laid in a
GI pipe and connected to the plate electrode with brass, bolts, nuts and washers. A GI pipe of not less
than 25 mm dia. shall be placed vertically over the plate and terminated in a funnel at 5 cms above the
ground. The funnel shall be provided with a wire mesh. The funnel shall be enclosed in masonry chamber
of 45 cm x 45 cm x 30 cm dimensions. The chamber shall be provided with GI frame and GI cover. The
earth station shall also be provided with a suitable permanent identification using painting.
Maintenance free grounding electrodes
Characteristics
 Shall have good Electrical conductivity.
 Shall high Corrosion Resistance.
 Shall be mechanically robust and reliable.
 Maintenance free Earthing System shall consist
1. Copper bonded Earth Rod at a depth of minimum 3 meters (3 rod per pit)
2. Ground Enhancing Material (GEM).
3. Earth Rod Clamps.
Copper bonded Steel Earth Rods:

Copper bonded Steel Earth Rods shall have the UL certification, which calls for a minimum molecular
bonding of 250 microns. These Coppers bonded rods are provided with a Nickel bonding interface to
avoid galvanic corrosion.
Ground Enhancing Material:

Earth Enhancing Material shall be supplied in bags consists of Earth Enhancing chemical for good
conductivity.

Method of Installation:
One number or three numbers as per Bill of material, Copper bonded Earth Rod shall be placed in an Earth
Pit of 10-inch diameter. The earth pit has to be connected by means of Copper Earth Rod Clamp. The
whole setup is treated by Ground Enhancing Material (GEM).
The resistance of earth electrodes shall not exceed one Ohm.
Precautions
Earthing system shall be mechanically robust and the joints shall be capable of retaining low resistance,
even after passage of fault currents.
Joints shall be welded, bolted or double-riveted. All welded joints are painted with cold zinc galvanizing
paint. All the joints shall be mechanically and electrically, continuous and effective. Joints shall be
protected against corrosion.
Testing
On the completion of the entire installation, tests on the earth resistance of the electrodes shall be
conducted using an earth-testing Megger.
All meters, instruments and labour required for the tests shall be provided by the Contractor. The test
results shall be submitted in triplicate to the AE / Owner for approval. Tests shall be conducted in the
presence of AE / Owner.
Ground resistance test shall be conducted to verify impedance of the electrical ground systems. For sizes
of conductors of earthing refer to earthing schematic.
Luminaires
1.0 Supply and Installation
1.1 General
Luminaries shall be installed in an approved manner and shall be complete with incandescent lamps,
fluorescent tubes, discharge lamps and accessories necessary for their proper functioning and shall be in
accordance with the provisions indicated herein.
All discharge luminaries shall be power factor corrected to a minimum of 0.8 lagging. Lead lag circuits or
blocking Inductors shall be incorporated where indicated.
Supply of Luminaries
Luminaries shall be purchased from a reputable supplier and shall be manufactured in accordance with
relevant standards.
The catalogue numbers or trade designations for luminaries used in the schedule of equipment are
intended to indicate the required quality, style and performance of the luminaries. Where alternative
luminaries are offered all performance data shall be submitted to the Consultant / Developer for
approval. If requested, by the Consultant / Developer, a sample shall be submitted for approval.

2.0 Installation of Luminaries
2.1 General
o All screws, battens, roses, trims, packing, etc., necessary for the proper fixing of luminaries shall
be provided by the Contractor as part of the works. Packing pieces of approved material shall be
fitted where required to level the luminaries and to prevent distortion.
o Where painted surfaces are damaged, they shall be made good by painting to the same standard
as the original paintwork.
o Fittings are to be installed subject to the approval of the Consultant / Developer.
o All luminaries shall be effectively earthed.
o Where rod suspensions are indicated, rods shall be steel water pipe. Rods shall be gimbal
mounted from ceiling and lengths shall be adjusted so that the luminaries hang true.
2.2 Fluorescent Luminaries

o Luminaries shall be supported by two fixings at each end. One fixing at each end of a narrow
fitting will be accepted where a 1.6 mm thick back plate reinforces each fixing screw.
o End to end luminaries shall be correctly aligned using packing strips where necessary.
o Luminaries shall not be supported or suspended from plastic boxes or fittings.
o Plastic boxes attached to luminaries or cable protection shall not be used as part of the fixing
method.
o Where a PVC conduit enters a luminary, a screwed PVC adaptor with circular lock nuts shall be
used to secure the conduit to the luminary. Lock nuts are not required for luminaries with
screwed conduit entries.
o Where indicated, luminaries shall be suspended level with electroplated welded link chains at
each end.
2.3 Surface Mounted Luminaries

Luminaries shall be securely fixed to structural members of the ceilings or walls, or fixed by hangers or
brackets, which are securely fixed to structural members. The minimum size of fixing for luminaries,
hangers, or brackets for various surfaces shall be as follows:
(a) Fixing to timber: steel wood screw No.10 x 25, round head, cadmium plated.
(b) Fixing to concrete: approved screw expanding bolts M5 x 40.
(c) Fixing to hollow blocks: M5 electro-galvanized, round head screws with spring loaded butterfly
toggles. Where a deep cast iron junction box is provided in the centre, M5 metal screws shall be
used with approved expanding fixings at each end.
(d) Fixing to suspended ceilings shall be as indicated.
All fixings shall be fitted with large diameter (minimum 3 mm screw dia.) cadmium plated washers under
the heads of each screw.
2.4 Recessed Luminaries

o Recessed luminaries shall be fitted with flexible cords and 3 pin plugs. The flexible cord shall be
PVC insulated, 3 core with 1.5 mm 2 conductors, and shall comply with the relevant IS. It shall be
of suitable length not greater than 1500 mm.

o A plug socket shall be located within 500 mm from the edge of the access aperture to allow the
luminary to be plugged-in prior to fixing.
o Recessed luminaries installed in timber-framed ceiling shall be fixed to the ceiling members and
noggins using the proprietary fixings supplied by the luminary manufacturer, subject to the
approval of the Consultant / Developer.
o Recessed luminaries using incandescent or discharge, lamps and installed in a confined space
(e.g. covered way, counter canopy, integrated ceiling or roof) shall be wired to a near-by junction
box using cable having insulation at least rated to 200 deg.C maximum operating temperature.
o Recessed luminaries for suspended or modular ceilings shall be attached to suspended ceilings
with proprietary mounting brackets supplied by the luminary manufacturer.
2.5 Post Top Luminaries

o Unless otherwise indicated, post-top luminaries shall be mounted on tapered steel lighting
columns.
o Unless otherwise indicated, lighting columns shall consist of proprietary brand steel poles, hot
dipped galvanized and suitable for base plate mounting on galvanized rag bolt assembly set in a
concrete pad. The poles shall be adequately drained and shall be fitted with an approved
weatherproof lockable enclosure to house the control gear and fuse(s), in the lower section of
the pole, within 1000 mm of the ground.
Recommended Make of Materials
Sl.No. Description of Items Make of Material

1 Manufacturer of Switchboards Elins / Load control / Pragathi Controls / Lotus Power Gear
2 LT Cables Polycab / KEI / Ravin cable

3 End termination materials Hex / SMI / Dowells / Jainsons
4 LT - ACB / MCCB Schneider (Master Pact) / ABB / GE (Imported) / Siemens
5 Auto Transfer Switch (ATS) ASCO - 300 & 7000 sries
6 Digital meters ( A,V,kWh,kW, etc) Circutor / scheinder
7 Digital Load Monitors Circutor / scheinder
8 Indicating lamps / Push Buttons Technik / Vaishno / Siemens
9 KWH meters Circutor / scheinder
10 Push Button Stations Siemens / Telemechanique / Clipsal / L&T
11 Selector switches Schneider / Salzer / Kaycee
12 Earth leakage relay Prok Device
13 Relays Schneider / Siemens / ABB / L&T / Prok device / AVK SEGC /
AREVA
14 Current Transformers Kappa / Kalpa / Instrans
15 Potential Transformers Kappa / Kalpa / Instrans
16 Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors ASCO
17 MCBs Legrand /Siemens / L&T / ABB
18 MPCB ABB / Siemens / L&T / Legrand
19 RCCBs [Si type] Schneider / ABB / MDS

20 Distribution Boards Legrand /Siemens / L&T / ABB
21 Cable Trays & Raceways Profab / Patny / Indiana / Storack
22 Conduits - PVC Universal / VIP / Avon
23 Conduits - MS GB / Bharath
24 PVC insulated, multistrand Copper Anchor / Rajnigandha / SBEE / Powerflex
Conductor Cables - FRLS
25 Light Fixtures - Internal Wipro / Bajaj /Lighting Technology/ Philips
26 Light Fixtures - External Wipro / Bajaj /Lighting Technology/ Philips
27 Switch Socket Outlets Anchor / MK / North west /
28 Inverters Emersion / Eaton / Delta / Power one
Industrial Power Sockets with
29 enclosure Asian / Schneider / Neptune / Gewiss
30 Lighning arrestors Cape Electric / OBO Bettermann / DEHN India
31 Maintenance Free Earth Electrodes Eric / Lightning Protection International

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF BOREWELL& WATER TREATMENT
PLANT, UNDER GROUND TANK, STP
 The scope briefly shall include supply, erection, testing and commissioning of External Water Supply
Distribution Network , containing various requirements of piping, valves, supports, specialities etc.
 The water requirement for building shall be calculated as per Plumbing section of IS: SP: 7-2005.
 The pipe shall be concealed and painted with anti-corrosive bituminous paint (as per IS:158) wherever
required as per requirement and direction of Authority’s Engineer /Client
 The total water requirement shall be met with underground source by providing deep tube wells or by any
other nearby water source.
 Construction of Borewells with adequate capacity of submersible pumps(Including complete set as per
requirement) shall be in scope of Work as per requirement and direction of Authority’s Engineer /Client..
 Water source shall be tested for potable water quality and suitable water treatment shall be provided as per
WHO standards.
WATER TREATMENT PLANT (As per requirement)

The scope of the proposal includes Design, Engineering, Construction including supply of all material, mechanical /
electrical equipments i.e. pumps, motors, level switches, cables, MCC etc., Erection / Commissioning & maintenance of
Water Treatment Plant (WTP) to treat the required water per day.
The contractor shall have to maintain the plant for a period of 12 months including all the materials etc. at their own
cost after satisfactory commissioning of the plant. The contractor shall provide training to the operators of the owner
for a minimum period of three months during the maintenance of the plant. The responsibility for any defect due to
design, construction, performance lies solely with the contractor.
The scope shall cover the following activities and services in respect of all the works of WTP:
 Basic Engineering
 Detailed design of all the civil structures,
 Providing engineering drawings, data, Operation & Maintenance/ instruction manuals, as built drawings and
other information,
 Compliance with statutory requirements and obtaining clearances from statutory authorities, wherever
required,
 Finalisation of sub-vendors, manufacturing quality plans and Field quality plans,
 Complete manufacturing including conducting all shop / routine tests.
 Packing and transportation from the manufacturer’s works to the site including customs clearance & port
clearance, port charges (if any),
 Receipt, storage of manufactured items, at the site,
 Erection, testing and putting into satisfactory operation all manufactured items
 Satisfactory completion of the contract.
 The contractor shall be responsible for making all connections at terminal points, and for supplying any
necessary jointing material, connectors, nuts, bolts etc.,

 Special tools and tackles, if any, required for maintenance of the manufactured items.
PUMPS
Suitable capacity of Drinking water Pumps along with drive motor (Vertical turbine wet pit type) (as per
requirement including all) to be provided at underground water tank.
UNDERGROUND TANKS
Earth pressure for all underground structures shall be calculated using coefficient of earth pressure at rest or
co-efficient of active earth pressure, whichever is applicable, depending upon the structural configuration
Minimum 100 mm thick PCC of grade M-10 as per IS:456 shall be provided as mud mat below the bottom slab
/ raft. The PCC shall extend 100 mm beyond the outer edge of the structural concrete. A layer of bitumen
paper or craft paper shall be provided over the blinding layer (lean concrete) to destroy the bond between
structural concrete and blinding layer.
Water proofing cum plasticizer compound shall be mixed with the concrete.
For the design of substructure of pump houses, earth pressure at rest shall be considered. Co-efficient of
passive earth pressure shall be used only in design of shear keys for stability against sliding.
The design of all liquid retaining structures shall be carried out by working stress method of IS 3370 (All parts)
STP
Design, drawing, supply, erection, testing and commissioning of Sewage Treatment Plant as per the Schematic,
Flow Scheme, Specification consisting of :
 Bar Screen Chamber ( Bucket Screen )
 Equalisation Tank
 FRP treatment plant comprising of pre-aeration in contact media, aeration treatment, sedimentation
and disinfection. System is equipped with settling and anaerobic filtration as an integral part of the FRP
module.
 Semi Treated Effluent sump
 Treated Effluent sump
 Screen Filter
 Diffusers
 Raw Effluent pump, Filter feed Pumps, Alum dozing system & Blowers.
 Pump House
Note:
 All works to be carried out to the relevant IS Specifications whether so mentioned in the description of
works or not.
 Including all Electrical, mechanical and piping works complete in all respects. Rate quoted shall also
include for obtaining necessary approvals from the Pollution Control Board & other statutory bodies as
applicable, for trial run & commissioning of the plant with performance Guarantee for 12 months from
the date of commissioning for trouble free performance. The Total plant is to be above ground with
only Equalisation tank, Semi Treated water tank & Final treated water tank located below ground level.
Galvalume sheet roof with pump room in masonry to be provided above ground.
 The cost inclusive of all civil structure.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF STROM WATER DRAINAGE
SC O P E O F W OR K
Work under this section consists of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and appliances
necessary and required to completely install drainage system as re quired by the drawings,
specified herein after and given in the schedule of quantities.
Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the drainage system shall include the following: -
a) RCC Hume pipes (light duty pressure pipes)
b) Connection of all pipes to Catch Basins as shown on the drawings.
c) Testing of all pipes lines.
RE IN FO RC E D C E M ENT C ONC R ET E (RC C) LI G HT D UT Y PI P E S

These pipes shall conform to IS 458-1988. This shall be of class Non Pressure (NP) 2. The design
and strength thickness and test requirements of pipes shall be as per table 2. of IS 458.
LA Y ING AN D J O IN TIN G
The concrete pipe should be carefully loaded, transported and unloaded without impact, the
laying of pipes shall be done by using tripod stand and chain pulley blocks.
Joints shall be of collar joint and the caulking space shall be filled with CM. 1:1 mixture of
cement & sand. The caulking shall be employed on both the ends and finished neatly outside the
socket at an angle of 450. Wooden caulking tool shall be used for forc ing the mortar home into
the collar.
All the joints shall be kept moist by means of wet gunny cloth to protect them from quick drying. The
joints sh a l l be cured at least for seven days.
T ES TI NG
Testing of non-pressure pipes shall be subject to a test for 2.5 meters head of water at the
highest point of the section under test for 10 minutes. The leakage or quantity of water supplied
during testing shall not exceed 0.2 lt./mm dia of pipes per Km length per day.
PR OC E D UR E FO R L E A K A GE T E S T – I S 31 11 4
A leakage test shall be conducted currently with the pressure test. Leakage is defined as the
quantity of water to be supplied into the newly laid pipe, or any valve section thereof within
0,035 N/Sq.mm /0.35 Kgf/Sq.cm, of the specified leakage test pressure after the air in the
pipeline has been expelled and the pipe has been filled with water (in case of test pressure is 10
Kgf/Sq.cm the leakage test pressure will be 3.5 Kgf/Sq.cm.)
No pipe installation shall be accepted until the leakage is less than the n umber of cu.cm/h as
determined by the formula:

ND x (P)1/2
QL = -----------------
3.3
Where QL = The allowable leakage in cu.cm/h,
N = Number of joints in the length of
the pipeline
D = diameter in mm and
P = The average test pressure
during the leakage test
in Kg/Sq.cm
VA RI A TI ON FR OM P ERM IS S IB L E L E A KA G E
The leakage or quantity of water supplied during testing shall not exceed 0.2 lts/mm diameter of
pipe per kilometer of length per day.
PL A IN CE M ENT C ONC R E T E O V ER P IP E S
When pipes are laid under roads and payments subjected to heavy traffic loads the trenches
may be covered with plain cement concrete slabs of suitable dimension, supported on edges to
relieve the load on pipes to the adjoining earth.
CON TR AC T OR S H AL L R E ST OR E S E TT L EM EN T AN D D AM AG E S
The Contractor shall at his own cost make good promptly, during the whole period that the works are
in hand, any settlement that may occur on the surfaces of roads, berms, footpaths, gardens,
open spaces, etc. whether public or private caused by trenches or his other excavations and he shall be
liable for any accidents caused thereby. He shall also, at his own expense, repair and make good any
damage done to the buildings and other properties.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: LANDSCAPE
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
SITE CLEARANCE, EXCAVATION, SITE LEVELLING AND GRADING
The term Grading, Grading Plan, Site Grading shall mean the following in singular and collectively:
 Surface dressing: Trimming of natural ground and / or excavated surface / filled up area to remove
vegetation and undulations not exceeding 150 mm deep shall be described as surface dressing. Measured
in sq Mts.
 Rough excavation: Excavation not requiring surface dressing. Measured in Sq mts.
 Surface Excavation: Excavation exceeding 1.5m width and 10 sq mts in plan but not exceeding 300 mm in
depth.Measured in sq Mts.
 Area Excavation: Excavation exceeding 1.5m width and 10 sq mts in plan and exceeding 300 mm in depth.
Measured in Cu M.
Classification of Ground to be Graded:

Materials to be Graded and measured shall be classified as follows:
Loose soil: Generally any soil which yeilds to ordinary application of, shovels
( faawda), rakes (panjaa) and any other ordinary digging implement.
Hard Soil: Soil which needs to be loosened by application of picks (tikau)andcrowbars
Soft rock: Rocks which can be split by picks and crowbars. This will includelaterite.
Hard rock: rock that is to be displaced by wedging, chiselling (taapkari). Hard rock on site shall not be blasted.
1. Each dimension shall be measured to the nearest 0.01 m. for dimensions exceeding 25 mts, the accuracy
shall be 0.1 m
2. Areas shall be worked out to the nearest 0.01 sq mts.
3. Cubic content shall be worked out to nearest 0.1 Cu m.
Measurement of Cut: Where the ground is not uniform, levels shall be taken before the commencement of works
and after completion of works and the quantity of cutting calculated from this measurement.
Measurement of Fill: Where the ground is not uniform, levels shall be taken before the commencement of works.
Works shall be measured during compaction of fills at suitable intervals, and the final measurement taken after
achieving and after completion of neat surface dressing.
The following works shall not be measured seperately and allowance for the same shall be deemed to have been
made in the description of the main item.
1. Setting out
2. Profiles
3. Site clearance
4. Informal Battering or benching of excavation
5. Pumping out water from excavated areas and sub soil.
6. Slinging or supporting pipes and cables encountered during work.

HORTICULTURAL INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS
Scope
This specification includes furnishing all the materials, equipment and labour necessary for the excavation,
fumigation, pest control, pre and post and emergent weedicide application, placement of soil mix, planting of plant
materials, irrigation, protection, maintenance and guarantee and all related items to complete the landscape work
as shown in the drawings and specified herein for plantation of trees, shrubs, groundcovers and lawns.
(A) SITE PREPARATION
(a) Cleaning up:

The site shall be cleared of all debris and construction materials. Existing structures, planters,
fences etc. shall not be damaged. If damaged, they should be repaired.
(b) Excavation
Excavation upto 2’ depth for shrubs, groundcover and lawn; and upto 1m depth for trees, shall be carried
out by contractor with his own labourers and tools necessary for the operation. The contractor shall have
to carry away and dump the rejected excavated material to a place shown by the Engineer in charge and
the excavated area shall be filled with soil mixture as specified.
(c) Laying of the drainage layer (below soil surface):
If required, in absence of natural soil below 2’ depth, drainage will be provided as described herein.
Perforated PVC pipes 6” (150mm) in diameter cut into two half rounds shall be laid as indicated in the
drawing. These shall be laid to provide unobstructed flow of water towards the drainage outlets at sub
surface levels. A 3” (75mm) thick layer of cinder (burnt bricks) shall be laid in between these pipes as
draining bed. The soil mix as specified herein shall be spread over this layer.
(B) SOIL MIXTURE
All plantations shall be done in the refilled pits or trenches containing a well mixed composition of the
following ingredients:
 Stacked top soil/ Garden earth (2 parts)
 Cocopeat (1/2 part)
 Sieved sand (1 part) (grade as specified for construction) – to increase aeration and reduce termite
and other insect attack.
 Organic sterilized manures like vermicompost granules (without mud), or any refined manure or
Amrut compost (1/2 part)
 Conventional methods of using FYM in the soil mix, in the pre and post planting stage are avoided
since it heats up the soil, increases methane production, thus affecting plant roots, it also increases
weed, pest and disease incidence. This also reduces the cost of maintenance.
 The soil mixture shall have a pH of 6.5 to 7.
 The soil used shall be properly screened into coarse texture and fine texture to suit the type of plant
(coarser for trees and shrubs and finer for lawns) containing adequate amount of humus, friable and
free from perennial weeds, stones and pebbles, foreign materials, plastic bags, roots, half decayed
leaves, debris etc. It shall be fine textured soil that breaks into clods and lumps when crushed. All the
soil should be of the same structure and composition throughout. The soil shall not be delivered,
handled or placed in a muddy condition.

 The soil mix components should be thoroughly mixed before laying in place. This soil mix is good for
the growth of trees, shrubs, groundcover and lawn.
 Manures used to upgrade and increase efficiency and richness of soil shall be sterilized (if possible)
free of smell, insect eggs and larvae, weeds, and harmless. Amrut compost is recommended, since it
contains cocopeat, sterilized and sun dried FYM, Neem, and Trichoderma (N fixing) bacteria.
 Contractor shall submit soil test reports of the soil, specifying pH values, N, P, K values, micronutrient
content, soil structure and texture, so that additives can be determined accordingly.
(C) FERTILIZERS, GROWTH REGULATORS AND TONICS

 Organic fertilizers like ValueMeal (5:10:5, N, P, K) should be top dressed, at the rate of half kg/ cum,
at every ten days interval during monsoon and fifteen days interval otherwise. Groundnut cake or
Neem oil cake can be used alternatively bi-monthly at the rate of half kg/ cum.
 For lawns, in addition to the organic fertilizer, Sufala (15:15:15, N, P, K) should be top dressed at
every fifteen days interval at the rate of half kg/ cum.
 Avoid using inorganic fertilizers like urea etc. as they are harmful to the plants in the long run.
 Tonics like Plantakola and Bahar at the rate of 0.01% should be sprayed at every fifteen days interval
alternately.
 Growth regulators like Vipul can be used (0.01%) bi-monthly.
 Adjuvant like APSA-80 (0.01%) should be mixed with any of the pesticides or fungicides mentioned
above and used as foliar sprays to increase their durability and efficiency.
(D) SOIL LEVELLING AND GRADING

After thorough mixing of the soil mix, the soil shall be levelled, graded and thoroughly wetted, all depressions
should be refilled to required levels. The soil shall then be allowed to dry, and compact. Pre emergent
weedicide and plant protection sprays shall be done at this stage. The soil is again tilled. This is again wetted
and filled for final levels as per specifications.
(E) PRE AND POST EMERGENT WEEDICIDE APPLICATION

One to two pre emergent sprays at fifteen days intervals (any commercial weedicide like 2,4-D or
Grammaxone (0.5%) should be applied on the entire soil mix surface and thoroughly mixed to a depth of 9”.
Post emergent spraying of Glycel (0.5%) controls weeds after emergence.
(F) PRE AND POST PLANT PROTECTION MEASURES

Synthetic Pyrethroides like Cypermethrin, Deltamethrine, or Alphamethrine should be sprayed on the soil mix
prior to planting at the rate of 0.05% to control insects at larval and caterpillar stages. Saaf (Bavistin + Dithane-
M-45) should be sprayed prior to planting to control all fungal diseases.
Organic insecticides like Neemark, Go-Neem, Vermiwash, Humus Acid should be used as post emergent sprays
to control insects. Inorganic insecticides like Monocrotophos (Phoskil) should be used alternating with organic
insecticides. Bactericides like Streptocycline, fungicides like Blitox should be used on the foliage as post
emergent sprays.
Care should be taken to ensure that no single formulation should be used continuously to avoid resistance
building.

(G) PLANTING
All plants shall be well formed, healthy, transplanted or pot grown with vigorous sound roots, true to type.
Plants which do not meet the specifications shall be rejected by the Horticulturist/ Landscape Architect. No
substitutions shall be made without the Landscape Architect’s approval in writing. Detailed specifications for
trees/ shrubs/ creepers/ lawn discussed below.
a. Specification for trees

(1) Excavation
Each tree sapling shall be planted in position shown on the plan in pits admeasuring 1m x 1m x 1m.
(2) Plant material

1. The pits of 1x1x1 mt are to be dug two to three weeks prior to planting. The pit should be kept exposed to
sunlight for these two to three weeks. Soil mix as specified above should then be filled into the pit. For
longer and better favourable conditions it is suggested to plant at the beginning of monsoon. For proper
and strong growth of the plant pruning should be done at a regular interval at an early stage of the plant
growth. Manuring is necessary and should be done as per suggestions. Trees need generous watering and
should be done one time daily.
2. Trees shall be supplied in containers or the trees shall be burled. In the latter case, trees shall be dug up
with a ball of soil around the roots and the soil ball wrapped and tied in polythene or hassian sacking. The
trees shall be in good condition with no broken branches or bark injury. The foliage shall be adequate and
shall show no signs of wilting. The roots shall be growing in a thick unbroken tangle.
(3) Stakes
Each tree shall be secured to a stout straight stake of average diameter of 2”. These stakes of soft wood or
bamboo should have a clear height of 6’-0” above the ground and 2’-0” below ground. They shall be driven
into the hole before the tree is planted and the trees shall be secured to them immediately below the bottom
branch. The second tie is to be staked as practicable.
b. Specifications for shrubs/ creepers/ groundcovers

(1) Excavation
Since soil mix is loose and friable to 2’ depth, direct planting to be done with diameter of pit being slightly
larger than the root ball.
(2) Plant material

Shrubs/ groundcovers provided shall be in accordance with the specifications in the plant list. They shall be in
good condition with no broken branches. The foliage shall be healthy and shall show no signs of wilting. The
root ball shall be intact and main top root shall be free from injuries.
c. Specifications for lawn

(1) Excavation
Since soil mix is loose and friable to 2’ depth, direct turfing to be done
(2) Cultivation of lawn

The cultivation of lawn shall consist of excavation of area and refilling in with the soil mixture as specified
earlier. The soil mixture shall be laid to proper slopes for surface drainage. The soil shall be properly raked and
watered thoroughly before receiving the strips of turf of specified grass variety (minimum 1’ wide).
(3) The contractor shall be required to do proper top dressing, rolling and periodical hand cutting or machine
mowing as per consultants instructions during maintenance period in order to bring and maintain the lawn in
perfect green thick and springy carpet of turf.
(H) WORKMANSHIP
(A) Trees
(a) Tree pits: After making out the positions for planting the trees, pits shall be made minimum 1 cum or at
least 150mm wider and deeper than the space the roots will occupy when they are spread out in their
natural positions.
(b) Handling: The container of the trees shall be removed before planting the trees. The tree shall be handled
by the soil ball. The trunk of the tree shall not be used as a handle as this may injure the tree by breaking
of fragile roots or loosening the whole root system, while planting a small hole shall be made in the centre
of the pit slightly larger than the ball of earth holding the roots.
(c) Placing/ Protection: If the plant is tall and likely to sway by the wind, it shall be supported by a stick to
which it is tied. For a young tree under 2.5” to 3” dia., support of 2” x 3” wooden stake 4’ long shall be
used. The end of the stake shall go into the ground. The tree shall be tied to the stake with coir tie (sutli).
The stakes and ties shall be removed after they have done their job between one year to three years.
(d) Planting: The pits shall now be filled with the prepared mixture of manure and earth, working the soil
between the roots. The soil shall be pressed down firmly by treading on it, leaving a shallow depression all
around for watering. When the tree has lawn around it, the surface of the lawn shall have a slight slope
around the tree.
(e) Watering: The tree shall be watered heavily soon after planting in the absence of rain, the trees shall be
watered every three days for smaller trees and once a week for larger trees. The interval between
watering shall gradually be increased to twice a month, once in a month to once in six months in the case
of large trees only.
(B) Shrubs, groundcovers and creepers

(a) Ground preparation: The shrub and groundcover areas shall be marked prior to planting on the prepared
site. Since soil mix is loose and friable to 2’ depth, direct planting to be done with diameter of pit being
slightly larger than the root ball. The surface shall be watered thoroughly at least three days prior to
planting. The surface shall be carefully levelled and graded as mentioned above.
(b) Planting: The shrubs and groundcover shall be planted in positions and spaced as specified in the drawing
and plant list. Planting shall not be too deep. When transplanting/planting shrubs, there shall be a good
ball of the original earth around the roots and the tap root and side roots shall not be unduly cut or
damaged when lifting the plant.
(c) Creepers: Creepers shall be planted in the same manner as shrubs. Adequate support shall be provided so
as to enable the creeper to grow naturally without damage to the structure.
(C) For planters:-

Appropriate care should be taken that a proper drainage should be given to the planter. The planter is to
be filled with clean and loose soil mix which should be free from stones, sticks and plastic papers. Planting
should be done as mentioned for shrubs and groundcovers.
(D) Lawns
Ground preparation: Thorough and adequate ground preparation shall be carried out as mentioned
earlier. In absence of rain, the surface shall be watered heavily. Any weeds that come up shall be removed
thoroughly. As soon as the surface is dry enough, the levels shall be rechecked, slight surface settling that
occurs shall be filled in before grass planting is commenced for turfing. Turf (minimum 1’ wide) shall be
spread on the ground without any gaps. Any cavities shall be filled with fine soil. The entire area shall be
watered liberally. Any soil settling/ turf settling should be corrected by removing the turf at this stage and
refilling with soil mix, and re-turfing. After six months, all levels should be resurfaced to required grade by
top dressing the turf with soil mix, and washing it down.
Growing and shaping: When the growth of the grass has progressed sufficiently to require mowing, hand
weeding shall be done. After each mowing, sieved soil mix shall be spread, watered and smoothed down.
Planks of wood shall be used for this purpose. Besides mowing, weeding, and watering of lawn, lawn shall
be treated with organic manures and fertilizers as mentioned earlier. The edges of the lawn where it
meets shrub areas, walkways, or structures shall be clipped by hand and well maintained.
(I) INSPECTION
The site will be inspected by the Architects, Clients, Landscape Architect and Horticulturist from time to time
at different stages of work. All the stages of work will be under continuous supervision and observation by the
horticultural supervisors appointed by the Landscape Architect. Security measures will have to be provided by
the Clients during the entire period of planting and maintenance.
(J) MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE

After completion of the landscape planting operations and prior to the beginning of the formal free
maintenance of six months, if the landscape architect and the clients are of the opinion that all work has been
performed in accordance with the drawings and specifications, the Contractor shall obtain from the Landscape
Architect a written notice or preliminary acceptance noting any item which must be corrected and stating the
date of commencement of the formal maintenance period.
All the trees/ shrubs/ creepers will have free maintenance period of 6 months, during which the contractor is
supposed to maintain all these items in all respects such as watering, pruning, spraying of pesticides,
fungicides, insecticides, adding fertilisers, removing of weeds etc. The maintenance of the horticultural work
includes employment of required malis and others continuously for period as per contract agreement.
All plant materials furnished or relocated shall be warranted for a period of six months from the date of pre-
maintenance inspection against defective, unsound, or diseased condition that may appear. Any damaged
plant material shall be promptly replaced with new material of the same size and condition and installed
according to the specifications. The expense of replacement shall be borne by the contractor. The contractor
shall not be held liable for the loss of plants due to accidents, severe storms or inclement weather or theft.

All accessories required for the horticultural maintenance work such as hosepipe, insecticides, pesticides,
fungicides, pump, lawn mower, tools sharpening, fertilizer, rodenticide, sickles, khurpis etc. shall be provided
by the contractor for which no extra payment shall be made. The rate includes making arrangement for water
supply and cost of water required for maintenance.
(K) FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
Final acceptance shall be based upon a visual inspection operation by the Architect/ Landscape Architect at
the completion of the maintenance period.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION: LIFT
Scope the section death with technical requirement of lift installation. Its components safety devices various type of
controls and methods of operation will be guided by the requirements in individual case such as nature of building,
usage occupancy, traffic pattern etc. and has to be decided in individual cases.
1.0 Drive machinery :

1.1 Electric Supply :
Three phase, 50 c/s 415volt electric supply shall be made available. The entire lift equipment should be
suitable for operation at+10%to -20% of the rated supply voltage.
2.2. Gearless machine
The lift machine shall be of worm gear reduction type with motor, brake, worm gearing and driving
sheave and break – drum or brake disc completely aligned on a single shaft. Gearless machine shall be a/c
gearless with VVVF drive.
2.3. The lift machine shall be of worth gear reduction type with motor, brake. Worm gearing and driving
sheave and suitable for type of control specified.
2.4. Sheaves.
Sheaves and pulleys shall be of hard alloy. Cast iron. SG iron or steel and free from cracks, sand holes and
others defects. They shall have machined rope groves. The traction sheave shall be grooved to produce
proper traction and shall be of sufficient dimension to provide for wear in the grove. The deflector sheave
shall be grooved so as to provide a smooth bed for the rope. The deflector or secondary sheave
assemblies where used shall be mounted in proper alignment with the traction sheave. Such deflector
sheaves shall have groves large than rope diameter as specified in clause 8 of IS 14665 (part -4- sec -
3):2000. The size of all the sheave shall be in accordance with clause 8.4 of IS 14665 (part -4- sec -3):2000.
Wherever necessary suitable protective guards may be provided.
2.5. Shaft keys.
Shafts which support sheaves, gears, coupling and other members which transmit torque shall be
provided with light fitting keys of sufficient strength and quality.
2.6. Brake
The lift drive machinery shall be provided with and electromagnetic brake or motor operated brake
normally applied means of springs in compression when the operating device is in off position. The brake
shall be suitable curved over the brake drum or brake disc and provide with fire proof friction lining. The
operation of brake shall be smooth, gradual and with minimum noise. The brake shall be designed to be
of sufficient size and strength to stop and hold the car at rest with rated load. The brake should be
capable of operation automatically by the various safety devices,current failure and by the normal
stopping of the car. The brake shall be released electricity. It shall also be possible to release the brake
manually such releases the permanent application of manual force so as to move the lift car in short
stops. For this purpose suitable brake release equipment wherever necessary shall be supplied with each
lift installation and the same shall be kept in safe custody to prevent misuse.
2.6.1. Hand winding wheel or handle:

At times or lift stoppage due to any reasons it shall be possible to move the lift car to the nearest landing
manually. The manual operation shall be by means of a winding wheel or handle mounted on the end of

the motor shaft. The up or down direction of the movement of the car should be clearly marked on the
motor or at suitable location. A warming plate written in bold signal red colour advising the maintenance
staff to switch off the mains supply before releasing the brake and operating the wheel is to be
prominently display.
2.7. Bearing :
Bearing shall be either of the anti-friction metal sleave type with oil reservoirs, self, lubricant, oil, gauges,
capped filler opening and drains of the ball roller type subject to oil flood lubrication or grease lubrication.
Grease lubricated bearing shall have grease gun connection and drains plugs. The bearing and lubricant
reservoirs shall be dust tight and shall incorporate effective seals to prevent leakage. The outer end of the
bearing shall be closed with a removable oil tight plate. Thrust bearing shall be of the ball or roller type
and shall have two sets of balls arranged to minimize backlash for efficient working.
2.0 Type of controls:

3.1 Single speed alternating current control:
A control for a driving machine induction motor which is arranged to run at a single speed.
3.2 Variable voltage variable frequency:
Incoming mains as power is first rectified to dc and then inverted to provide controlled ac current to the
elevator drive. Precision monitoring of motor speed and car direction position and load enable the pulse
width of the ac power supplied to the motor to be adjusted to ensure that elevator speed is maintained
very accurately to an ideal profile.
Thus in VVVF controls pulse width modulation control of ac motors has following advantages compare
with the older servo controlled elevators:-
(a) Total control at all stage of the motions cycle.
(b) A consistent fully adjustable smooth ride.
(c) Better leveling accuracy under all conditions.
(d) A higher power factor.
(e) Lower staring current.
(f) Energy saving through reduced power consumption.
4.0 Installation aspects:

4.1. Installation in machine room- lift machine room to accommodate the drive machinery, controller, etc.,
shall as far as possible be located on top of the lift shaft. The layout of equipment there should be such as to allow
free movement of maintenance personnel inside. Machine room shall not be used for storage purpose.
4.1.1 Verification of machine room: - machine room shall be provided with natural air and mechanical
ventilation to avoid over healing of the electrical equipments and to ensure proper operation of the controller.
Entry of dust etc shall also be suitable prevented.
4.1.2 Vibration isolation- vibration and isolation arrangement shall be provided to prevent transmission of
vibration to the building and structure.
4.2 General illumination of lift well. : Suitable light points shall be provided in the lift well at a spacing of not
more than 10meters in suitable light at the ground floor. All the points should be group controlled from the M/C
room. The wiring shall be carried out in surface conduit as per CPWD General Specification. One socket outlet shall
be provided in the shaft for use by maintenance personnel at a level slightly above the ground floor landing.

5.0. Guide rails:
Guide rails shall be in accordance with clause 3 of IS14665(part 4-sec.2)2000. Only machined guide rails shall be
permitted for cars for passengers and hospital lifts. Formed sheet metal rails shall be used upto speeds of 1.75mps
for counter weight applications in the case of goods lifts. Unmachined guides rails shall be permitted for the
counter weight for all speeds and for the cars only upto a speed of 0.5 m/sec.
The guide rails shall be supported by brackets secured to the hoistway frame at each floor. The rails shall be
securely fastened to the brackets or other supports by approved heavy rail clamps. Ali necessary guide rails
packing or additional supports shall be provided to prevent guide rail deflection and stresses exceeding the
prescribed limits. The stresses on the guide rail due to the horizontal forces imposed on it during loading.
Unloading and running calculated without impact. Shall not exceed 1100 kg/sq cm based upon the class fastenings
and supports shall be capable of resisting the horizontal forces mentioned above. With the total deflection at the
point of support not in exceed of 3mm.
Guide rails shall extend from pit floor to the underside of concrete slabs or grafing at top of the lift well. They shall
be erected in plumb and parallel with a maximum deviation of 3mm. all shimming required shall be of metal
securely held in place. Jointing plates shall be so located as not to interfere with supporting clamps and brackets.
The bolts shall be used with spring lock washers. The guide rail anchorage at pit floor must be made without
puncturing the water proofing. The expansion joints in the guide rails shall be so designed as to avoid jerks in the
left car. Machined guide rails shall be maintained till the commissioning of the installation. Before the car is a
placed in operation, the preventive coaling shall be removed and the guide rails thoroughly cleaned and
smoothened.
6.0. Lift Car

6.1. Car frame
The car frame shall be in accordance with clause -4 of IS 14665(part4-sec3):2001 made of sheet steel of rigid
construction withstand without permanent deformation the operation of safety gear. The car shall be so mounted
on that vibration and noise transmitted to the passengers inside is minimized.
6.2. Car platform

6.2.1 The car platform shall of framed construction and designed on the basis of rated load evenly distributed. The
dimensions shall conform to IS 14665(part1)2000 unless otherwise specified. The flooring shall be smooth and of
anti-skid surface. The flooring for goods lift shall be strong enough to take the rated load without any deformation
or damage.
6.2.2 A load place along with overload alarm, giving the rated load and permissible maximum number of passenger
should be fitted in each lift car in a conspicuous position.
6.3 Car body:

The car shall be enclosed on all sides by a metallic enclosure. The enclosure including the door shall withstand
deformation a thrust of 35kg applied normally at any point and as per IS 14665(per-4sec 3)-2001 ventilation
specified shall be as per IS 14665(per-4sec3)2001.
6.3.1 Stretcher guards/ trolley guards made of PVC / rubber extrusion housed in a stainless steel beading shall be
fitted at suitable level (s) rear/side panels for bed lifts / goods lifts.
6.3.2 Lift car door shall have a fire resistance ration of one hour.

6.3.3 Grounding switch (es) at ground floor level shall be provided on all the lifts to enable the fire service to
ground the lifts.
6.4 Car roof:

The roof of the car shall be solid type capable of supporting a weight of at least 140 kg and as per IS 14665(Part-4
SEC3)2001
6.5 Car thresholds:

Car entrance shall be provided with metal thresholds having a grooved surface. Thresholds for lifts having
horizontally sliding car doors or gates shall have machined or extruded guide grooves.
6.6. Toe guard aprons.

The toe guard apron of gauge not less than 1.6 mm sheet may be provided extending at least 15mm beyond
entrance jambs at each side. The guards shall have a straight vertical face extending below the level of the finished
car floor and not less than the depth of the leveling zone plus. 7.5 mm. The bottom of guard shall extend 700mm
for lifts upto speed of 1.5 mps and 1000 mm for lifts above speed of 1.5 mps below vertical lace and beveled at
th
15 angle from the vertical. It shall be seamed to car platform construction and be reinforced and braced.
6.7 Clearance
The clearance between the top of the car and the soffit of the lift shall roof. Bottom of the car and the pit floor, the
buffers etc. and the clearance between the car and the lift well, between the car and the landing sill, between two
lift cars in the same shaft etc. shall be provided as per IS 14665(Part 1.2&4)and relevant lift rules mentioned in
appendix-1.
6.8. Car apron, landing thresholds and sills.

An apron shall be fitted to the car platform such that no dangerous gap exists at any time when the land door is
opening. Thresholds and sill plates shall be provided at the landings also. The distance between landing sill and the
sill on car platform shall not be more than 30mm.
6.9. Inter – communication system.

6.9.1 Though Para 8.4.3 of IS 14665 (part2/sec: 1):2000 recommends for provision of either and emergency
signal or a telephone inside the car but as a general experience. It is seen that over a period of time these devices
become inoperative due to one reasons or the other. Therefore, in order to have at least one device of
communication functioning at all the times. As an alternative arrangement, provision of both i.e. telephone with
minimum two connections – one at the operator’s room and other at guard room and the emergency signal with
rechargeable batteries as source of supply shall be made in the lift cars.
6.9.2. The device used for emergency signals should incorporate a feature that gives immediate feedback to the
car passengers that the device has worked properly and the signal has been passed on to the intended agency. This
shall be achieved by pressing of button from control room which shall give audio signal to the passengers in the
car.
6.9.3 Provision of group indicator panel in the control room shall be made to indicate working of lifts.

6.9.4 Emergency power supply for lift car.
This shall include suitable secondary battery with trickle/ boost charge arrangement and invertors power pack with
necessary contactors for supplying the light fixtures in the lift car. The same battery shall also feed the alarm bell
and communication equipment.
6.10 Ratings and instructions

Inside the lift car, the lift supplier shall also provide a stainless steel metallic plate indicating the rated load and
detailed instructions for the passengers. This shall be mounted at a suitable place.
6.11 Lift car interior finish

The side, rear facia panel shall be of scratch free stainless steel sheet. The flooring shall be with 3mm thick PVC
tiles for passenger lifts and chequered aluminium sheet for goods lifts and goods –cum- passenger lifts. The false
ceiling in the lift car shall be crafted from mild steel power coated to suitable colour with CFL lamps and fan diffuse
(s)in different colour.
6.11.1 Operating panel inside the car.

The car operating panel shall be of metal. Flush mounted and duly finished to match the car interior décor and
shall contain all the devices as may be specified depending upon the type of operation required. In addition
separate illuminated panel for indicating the floor and direction may be provided on the top or the door way. All
switches shall be fade proof and the devices shall be of suitable quality.
Each device and its operating position shall be legible fade proof and marked.
7.0 Car and landing entrances.

The car and landing doors shall be of flush type sheet steel only for power operation. The flush type may further be
of single sliding, centre opening or two speed construction. Power operated car and landing doors shall be so
designed as not to injure any person during their closure by means of provision of a safety pressure switch which
shall cause the doors reopen on the slightest pressure. In case of power operated doors. It shall be possible on
power failure, to open them from the car side. All the openings for passenger lifts shall be 2000 mm clear in height.
For goods left vertical by – parting doors or collapsible gates as specified shall be used. The door opening and
closing shall be accomplished smoothly and quickly without undue noise. Vibration and shock and their movement
s shall be cushioned and checked at both limits.
7.1 Car doors
7.1.1 The car door shall be hung from the top M.S fabricated and means shall be provided to prevent the door
from jumping off the track. The doors shall be provided with two point suspension sheave type hangers suitable
for the type of door operation specified. The hungers shall be securely fastened on bearings mounted on a
malleable iron or steel bracket. Arrangement shall be provided for vertical and lateral adjustment of car doors. The
sheaves shall move on a M.S fabricated track so shaped as to permit free movement of sheaves with regard
vertical adjustment of sheave bracket or housing.
The car door shall be centre opening horizontal sliding stainless steel scratch proof(moon rock finish) for office.
Residential and goods lift applications whereas telescopic horizontal sliding stainless scratch proof surface(moon
rock finish) for hospitals.

7.1.2 A potential cause of accidents could be the attempts made to open the landing door of lower floor in case
the car stops away from floor level due to power failure. Since the car door can be opened in case of power failure
so as to improve the ventilation and avoid claustrophobic situation etc. as outlined in IS
14665(part2/sec1):2000para 10.9.1 there is a tendency among trapped passengers to make attempts to open any
accessible landing door which can be opened by a electromechanical latch in the landing doors as the lock is
accessible through open car doors. This attempt in panic may result in accidental fall in to the lift pit. In order to
ensure that the trapped passenger do not attempt opening the landing door, the electromechanical latch should
be so designed that it is inaccessible or invisible to the passengers in the car.
7.1.3 In order to avoid accidental closure of doors while boarding or alighting the car, a temper proof infrared
curtain covering almost the entire height of the door should be provided in the lift doors.
7.2 Provision as per barrier free requirement

7.2.1 wherever lift is required as per bylaws, provision of at least one lift shall be made for the wheel chair user
with the following cage dimensions of lift recommended for passenger lift of 13 persons capacity by Bureau of
Indian standards.
Clear internal depth: 1100mm
Clear internal width: 2000mm
Entrance door width: 900 mm
7.2.2 A hand rail not less than 600mm long at 900mm above floor level shall be fixed adjacent to the control panel.
7.2.3 The time of an automatically closing door should be minimum 5 seconds and the closing speed should not
exceed 0.25 m/sec. The interior of the cage shall be provided with a device that audible indicate the floor the cage
has reached and indicate that the door of the cage for entrance/exit I either open or closed.
8. Landing doors
Each landing door shall be complete with locks. Headers, skill frames rims hanger supports with cover plates etc.
the finished work shall be strong, rigid and neat in appearance plain surfaces shall be smooth and free from warp
or buckle. Moulded surfaces shall be clean out,straight and true. Fastenings shall be concealed from the face side
of the material. Steel sills shall be provided with a suitable noising of approximately 25mm depth on the shaft side.
The opening for the landing gates or doors shall not be wider than that of the lift car. In the case of bi- parting type
steel doors, the locking of the two leafs locking of the doors should be positive.
Car landings
All the lift car landings shall be well lit to an illumination level of 150 lux and shall be free from obstructions. The
control for landing lights and the sign lights shall be temper proof. Wherever standby power supply is available,
these lights shall be connected to standby circuits also.
For the purpose of identification, the lift number should be displayed outside the landing door, inside the car and
in the machine room. This numbering may be used as reference for the purpose of routine/ preventive
maintenance, for operating from machine rooms and reporting of any incidental etc.

Instructions
Details instructions as specified for guidance of passengers shall be prominently displayed inside the car by
contractor and outside the car at all landings by the department. The brail signage will be posted by the
department outside lift lobby at all landings for the lift meant for barrier free requirements as per appendix vii.
It is seen generally, that though the instruction on DO’s and Don’ts, as per provision of the relevant. IS, are
displayed in lift cars but the same are either displayed in inconspicuous location. Or are very small in size or are in
one language only. To make these instructions serve the intended purpose, and not a mare compliance of relevant
IS clause. That these instructions should be displayed at a conspicuous location with larger and understandable
script and should be written in Hindi, English and regional language (where official regional language is notified).
Leveling
All lift (s) shall be incorporated with suitable floor leveling devices. In case of lifts automatic power operated doors
and with A.C VVVF controller a separate level device for automatic leveling with leveling accuracy of 5mm shall
be incorporated.
9. Counter weight
The counter weight for lift cars shall be in accordance with clause 6 of IS14665 (part4/sec-3)2001 and shall be
designed to balance the weight of empty lift car plus approximately 50percent of the rated load. If shall consist of
cast sections firmly secured in relative movement by at least two numbers steel tie rods having lock nuts/split pins
at each end and passing through each section and housed in a rigid steel frame work. Cracked and broken sub
weights shall not be accepted.
9.1 Counter weight guards

Guards of wire metal/mesh shall be provided in the lift pit to a suitable height above the pit floor to eliminate the
possibility of injuries to the maintenance personnel.
10.0. Guide shoes

Two numbers of guide shoes at the top and two numbers at the bottom shall be provided on the lift car and
counterweight.
10.1 Type of shoes
10.1.1 For passenger lifts and bed – cum – passenger lifts.
a. For speed upto 1.5 mps sliding guide shoes shall be used. Sliding guided shoes for car shall be always
flexible and for counterweight solid guide shoes can be used up to 1.0mps.
b. for speeds more than 1.5 mps roller guide shoes shall be used for car and counter weight.
10.1.2 For goods lifts solid shoes can be used.
10.2 Flexible type/ solid type sliding guide shoes.
The car shall be provided with solid or spring loaded swiveling guide shoes with renewable liners. Where the lift
car speeds are upto and including 1MPS. The cars with speeds beyond 1MPS shall be provided with spring loaded
guided shoes with renewable liners or the guide shoes shall be of roller type.
10.3 Roller type guide shoes.
Each roller shall be of an approved type consisting of rollers assembled on a substantial metal base and mounted
as to proved continuous contact of all rollers with the corresponding guide rail surfaces under all conditions of load
and operation. The rollers shall run on the three finished guide rail surfaces and shall operate quietly.

10.3.1 Mounting of guide shoes
Guide shoes shall be provided with adjustable mountings and shall be rigidly secured in accurate alignment at the
top and bottom on each side of the car sling and counter weight frame construction. When oil buffers attached to
the bottom of counter weight are used, Additional guide shoe shall be provided on each side of the buffer frame.
The design of guide and car safety device shall be coordinated so as to ensure the provision and installation of
equipment with clearance specified in clause 5.7of this chapter.
11.0 Lift ropes –IS 14665(part4/sec8)2001
2
Round strand steel wires ropes made from steel wire ropes having a tensile strength not less than 12.5 tonnes.cm
and of good flexibility shall be used for lift. Lubrications between the strands shall be achieved by providing
impregnated hemp core. The lift ropes shall conform to IS 14665(part-4/sec-8): 2001 and the following factor of
safety shall be adhered to. The minimum diameter of rope for cars and counter weight of passenger and goods lift
shall be 8mm.
11.1 Rope fastenings
The ends of lift ropes shall be properly secured to the and counter weight hitch plates as the case may be with
adjustable rope shackles having individual tapers babbit sockets,or any other suitable arrangement. Each lift rope
shackle shall be fitted with a suitable shackle spring, seat washer, shackle nut & lock & shackle nut split pin.
11.2 Guards for lift ropes
Where lift ropes run round a sheave or sheaves on the car and for counterweight of geared/ gearless machine
suitable guards shall be provided to prevent injury to maintenance personnel.
11.3 Number and size of ropes
The contractor must indicate the number and size of lift ropes and governor ropes proposed to be used, their
origin, type, ultimate strength and factor of safety. The contractor should furnish certificate of ropes from the rope
manufacturers issued by competent authority.
12.0 Safety equipments.

Every lift installation shall necessarily be provided with the following safety features.
12.1 The Safety gear shall be provided in accordance with IS 14665(part-4/sec.4)2001,each type of car safety shall
be actuated by a speed governor.
12.2 Governor – the car safety shall be operated by speed governor located overhead and driven by governor
rope suitable connected to the car and mounted on its own pulleys. The rope shall be maintained in tension by
means of weighted or spring loaded tension sheaves located in the pit. Governor shall be provided for lifts with a
travel of more than 5.5 meters. The governor rope shall be not less than 6mm in dial and shall be made of steel or
phosforbroze. These shall be in accordance with IS 14665 (part4/sec-4):2001. Governor for car safety gears shall be
adjusted to actuate the safety gear at the following speeds.
a. For rated speeds upto 1m/s maximum governor tripping speed shall be either 140 percent of rated speed
or 0.88m/s. whichever is higher. For rated speed above 1m/s maximum governor tripping speed shall be
115percent of the rated speed plus 0.25m/s.
b. Minimum governor tripping speed shall be 115percent of the rated speed.
12.2.1 The governor shall be of “v” groove wheel design and only wheel is stopped to actuate the car safety upon a
predetermined over speed downward without damaging the rope.
12.3 The governor, rope and sheave shall be so located so as to minimize danger of accidental injury to the
equipment.

12.3.1. The governor sheave and tension sheave shall be according to clause 2.4 and the sheave bearing shall be
according to clause 2.7of this chapter.
12.3.2. The requirements for field tests on car safety and governor and for drop tests to sliding type car safeties
shall be as specified in section IV of this specifications.
12.4 Terminal limit switches.
12.4.1 Terminal switches
These shall stop the car automatically floors within the top and bottom permissible over travel. They shall
act independently of the operating devices. The ultimate limits switches and the buffers. They shall be in
accordance with clause 8 of IS14665(part3/sec-1):2000.
12.4.2 Terminal stopping devices located in shaft or in the car and operated by cams shall be fitted with rollers
having a rubber or other approved composition to provide silent operation when actuated by the cam. When the
lift car cross head is 60cm from the nearest obstruction above it, no projection on the car shall strike any part of
the overhead structure.
12.4.3 Lifts with speeds over 1.25 meters/ second shall have the normal terminal stopping device located on the
car or on the guide rails or in the machine room.
12.5 Ultimate Terminal Switches.
These shall be provided in accordance with the statutory requirements and standing practices. When provided
these shall arrange to stop the car automatically within top and bottom clearances independently of the normal
terminal switches but with the buffers operative. These shall be in accordance with clause 8 of IS: 14665(part3/sec-
1):2000.
12.6 Buffers – (IS 14665(part4/sec1-2001)
Buffers shall be oil resistant rubber pad type for speeds upto 0.25 mps and spring/ oil type for speeds up to 1.5
mps and only oil type for speed higher than 1.5mps.
Buffers shall be suitable for installation in the space available. Buffer anchorage at pit floors shall be installed
avoiding puncturing of water proofing.
Oil buffers of the car and counter weight shall be of the spring return type or of gravity type.
The partial compression of spring return oil buffers when the car is in level with terminal land will not be
acceptable. All buffers shall be tested at manufacturer’s works and a copy of the test report shall be submitted.
When the lift car rests on fully compressed buffers there shall be at least 60cms clearance between the lowest
point in its car frame and any obstruction in the pit exclusive of buffers and their supports. Similarly when the lift
car cross head is 60cm from the nearest obstruction above it, no projection on the car shall strike any part of the
overhead structure.The contractor must indicate the name of buffer manufacturers. Buffer stroke and certified
maximum loads.
12.7 Door locks

Electro – mechanical door lock shall be provided for all the landing door and they shall be such that the doors
cannot open unless the car is at rest at the particular landing. It shall not be possible to move the car unless all the
landing doors and the car door are closed and locked. This requirement however does not apply when the lift car is
provided with automatic leveling devices and in such cases. It shall be permitted to move the car with both the
doors open in the leveling zone for the purpose of leveling.
All the locks and contacts shall conform to IS 14665 (part 1/sec-6)2001 shall be positive and pass the prescribed
endurance and reliability test a recognized testing laboratory. They shall be so located as to be inaccessible or
invisible to the passengers in the car.

12.8 Other safeties
Besides these safety devices mentioned above, motor operated electro –mechanical brake (clause 1.6) counter –
weight guards (clause8.1) alarm bell, emergency door lock released operating key and associated safety and other
safety requirements shall also be included.
13.0 Lift operations

13.1 Automatic –cum-attendant operation
13.1.1 Single automatic push button with without attendant – the operating devices for this operation shall
incorporate in the car control panel, car buttons corresponding to the various landing served and single landing
button landing button at each landing, all electrically connected to controller governing floor selection, direction of
travel, Acceleration, retardation etc.
This system shall be so arranged that when the car is not in use. On pressing a landing call button the start
automatically provided all the doors are closed during the movement of the car and also when car stops at floor
landing, other landing call buttons are in – cooperative or a predetermined time. The pressing of a car button shall
automatically start the car and send if to the desired landing. In all the cases, the starting of the car is contingent
on the establishment of landing door and car inter – lock circuits. To indicate the availability or in use’ light shall be
placed in the landing call button panel. When light shall be OFF the passenger shall be able to call the car. In case
of manual operated door if the lift is standing at any landing with doors open (when not in use.) the pressing of the
landing call button shall ring a bell, fitted at the top of car to attract the attention of the people soliciting their help
for closing the lift door if any one of the them happens to be near the lift.
Incase of power operated doors. The landing and car doors shall be arranged to open automatically when the car is
parked at landing after all the calls are served and the lift is parked at any landing. The doors can remain open or
alliteratively if desired, the car shall be arranged to close after a predetermined time unless closing is prevented
or interpreted by the car doors re- opening device or the door open button.
The lift shall be suitable for dual operation with or without attendant by the provision of key operated transfer
switch indicating attendant and automatic positions. During attendant operations the landing call shall be
disconnected from the control system and shall be connected to an annunciate in the lift car. The attendant shall
then operate the car to answer the registered calls. This operation is recommended for single speed control lift for
low rising building having a single lift installation.
13.1.2 Simplex selective – collective operation with / without attendant

Automatic operation by means of one button in the car for each landing level and by up and down buttons at the
landings. Wherein all stops registered by the momentary actuation of the car made as defined under non- selective
automatic operation but where in the stops registered by the momentary actuation of the landing buttons are
made in the order in which the landings are reached each direction of travel (irrespective of the sequence in which
the buttons have been actuated). With this type of operation, all up landing calls are answered when the car is
travelling in the up direction and all down land calls are answered when the car is travelling in the down direction,
except in the case of the uppermost or lowermost calls which are answered as soon as they are reached in
respective of the direction of travel of the car.
13.1.3 Duplex collective selective operation with /without attendant.

The control system for this operation shall be similar to the one described under simplex selective – collective
operation except that in this system there shall be two lift cars in adjacent wells. It shall be arranged to co-
ordinate both cars for efficient service and prevent them from answering the same calls by the provisions of only

one set of landing call button fixtures. It shall automatically assign each call to the car that will be in the best
position to answer promptly. The system shall be so arranged that when the cars are idle, normally one car will be
parked at the lower main landing with its doors closed or open and the other car shall be free car parked with the
doors closed or open to the landing where it answered its last call, shall be the one to attend to the nearest call.
Each shall always respond to calls registered by its own car call buttons. When either car is parked out of service
for any reasons the other car shall function as single car (simplex)selective collective. Besides the control system
shall also be arranged for independent service from inside the car.
A by – pass button (non-stop button) shall also be provided inside the car to enable the attendant to by – pass any
landing if the car is full or if otherwise so required.
The two lefts shall be arranged with or without attendant operation and shall function as described using single car
selective – collective operation. When the transfer switch is in the attendant position the operation of the cars
shall be identical with that described for automatic operations except that:
a. closing of doors and starting of cars shall be initiated by the car buttons only:
b. buzzers and directional lights in the car operative, and
c. landing by – pass shall be effective.
The pressing of an up down landing call shall illuminate appropriate direction indicator in the car panel, which is to
answer that call and if the doors open shall also sound buzzers as a signal to the attendant. If both car ore parked
at the lower landing the above signals shall be given to the car which has been at the floor for longest time.
13.2 Automatic group supervisory controls

13.2.1 General operating principle
The call registered inside the car as well as the landings are answered in the sequence in which the floors
are reached irrespective of the sequence in which the buttons have been pressed. Only one car will stop in
response to any one landing call and will be the nearest car travelling in the corresponding direction of the call.
While this car is stopping at this landing, the call will be automatically cancelled to prevent other cars stopping
against the same call.
13.2.2 Automatic selection of traffic programme.

The group supervisory control continuously examines traffic conditions in the building and automatically puts into
operation the programme which can best cope with the demand at any particular time. This is fully automatic and
requires no supervision or attendant. To suit the traffic demand in the building, suitable traffic programmes can be
selected for inclusion in this control. The following are the traffic programmes available.
a. Up peak programme.
b. Down peak programme
c. Up down interfloor programme, and
d. Night programme
a. Up peak programme:- The group supervisory control responds to the increasing influx of passengers at the main
landing in the morning hours. At the start of work, by automatically switching on the up peak programme. The car
are dispatched from the main landing automatically ot a predetermined interval after the previous dispatched
car. The leaves first signal is transferred instantaneously from the car dispatched to another car at the main
landing. The car answers the registered calls in the natural sequence of the floors and returns directly to the main

landing after last passenger has been discharged. However, a car starts its up travel the moment it becomes fully
loaded,without waiting for the dispatch interval to lapse.
b. Down peak programme.:- An intense traffic flow from the upper floors towards main landing will automatically
switch on the down peak programme. The cars when fully loaded at upper floors travel directly to the main landing
and after discharging the passenger. Immediately start up to answer further down landing calls. The down landing
call which has been by passed gets a priority over other down calls which ensure equal service to all floors.
c. Up down interfloor programme. :- A steady traffic between main floor and upper floor and between floor to
floor causes automatic switching on of the interfloor programme. Specific cars are assigned to answer specific calls
by traffic analyzer so that the calls are handled most efficiently. The cars are so well distributed that every call gets
equal service with short waiting intervals.
As soon as the number of calls drops to occasional calls only such as at night, the cars get automatically parked in
their assigned zones to give personalized service with minimum lift travel. If no calls are registered for some time
the motor generator sets are automatically switched off.
d. Night programme: - When the traffic ceases to occasional calls only, the supervisory control automatically
switches over to night programme. All cars remain at the main landing with doors close,but are at all times ready
for operation. One of the lifts has its leave first signal lighted. On pressing of call button at the main landing the
doors of this particular lift open and the passenger can travel with the lift. The same lift also responds to landing
calls from above. The moment this car leaves the main landing the leave first signal is transferred to a second lift.
This second lift also responds to landing calls from above if one lift can no longer cope with the demand. After
these lifts have answered their calls, the one reaching the main landing last will retain the leave first signal.
Thereby, the service is practically confined to one lift alone and motor generator sets of the remaining lifts remain
switched off. If no calls are registered for sometime, the major generator of the stand by lift also automatically be
switched off. The motor generator will start up again. The moment the call is received. The number of lifts going in
to action in automatically regulated to just so many as are necessary to cope with the occasional traffic surge.
In case where more than 3lifts installed in a bank, a better utilization of these lifts can be obtained by two
additional programmes to deal with heavier traffic in each direction in difficult time. These are (I) heaver up
programme (II) heaver (DOWN programme)
I. Heaver UP programme :- This shall require the cars to make more stops in the up direction, necessitating more
time for the up travel. For this purpose the automatic – traffic analyzer shall dispatch cars from both terminal at
automatically adjusted time intervals so that the cars are equally spaced. Thus reducing passenger waiting interval
(this programme caters for the traffic which is likely to be in both directions but predominantly in the up direction
e.g. immediately after the morning peak or after lunch.
II. Heaver DOWN programme :- This shall require the cars to make more stops in the down direction and the
dispatch times shall be adjusted accordingly by the traffic analyzer.
If any of the cars in the group develops any defect it shall be automatically disconnected from the group control
until it is rectified.
In the event of failure of automatic dispatch system the lifts shall function by auxiliary means to avoid any
disruption of service.
Audio visual indication shall be provided to bring such failures to notice.
The lifts shall be designed for attendant operation as described under single (simplex) selective
collective operation car except as follow.

a. the indicating lights in car shall be operative to inform the attendant when to start loading a car at a terminal
and when to leave the terminal.
b. Landing call be pass switch and car reversal switch and switches shall be effective and load weighting devices
shall be inoperative.
c. Call above signal shall be illuminated whenever a call is registered at a landing above the car location indicating
to attendant that car is to proceed upwards. When the highest call has been answered the light shall be
extinguished indicating to the attendant that when the car is started it will proceed downward.
14.0. Controlling equipment

The movement of the car shall be eclectically controlled by means of a controller located in the machine room.
14.1 Control circuits:
The control circuit shall be designed to the type of lift specified for safety operation. It shall not be possible to start
the car unless all the car and landing doors are fully dosed and landing doors locked. The circuit shall have and
independent fuse protection for fault and over loads and be arranged that for the stoppage of the car at
specialized landing or for actuation of a contactor by emergency switches or operation of safety gears the system
shall not depend upon the completion or maintenance of an electrical circuits to cut off power supply and apply
the breaks. This requirement is not applicable to dynamic breaking and speed control devices.
14.2 Terminal boards
All wiring for external control circuits shall be brought to a terminal board with means of identification of each
wire. Metallic/ plastic identification lags shall invariably be provided all connections of wires to terminal boards
shall be adequately clamped or screwed.
14.3 Auxiliary switches
14.3.1. Emergency stop switches:
On top of the lift car an emergency stop switch shall be provided for use by maintenance personnel. Stop switch
shall be provided in the machine room. Operation of these switches/ buttons shall cancel all the registered calls
and landing calls for that particular lift.
14.3.2 Maintenance switch on top of the car.

For purpose of inspection and maintenance, maintenance switch shall be provided on top of the car. The control
circuitry shall be so arranged that in the event of the operation of this switch.
a. The car speed shall be less than the rated speed not exceeding 0.85 metres/sec.
b. the car movement shall be possible only on the application of the continuous pressure on a
button. It shall be so mounted to prevent any inadvertent operation.
14.3.3. Fireman switch:
Fireman switch with glass to break for access shall be provided at ground or main floor for all the lifts. The
operation of this switch shall isolate or cancel all calls to all the lifts and the lifts will stop at the next nearest
landing. If travelling upward. The doors will not open at this landing and the lifts will start travelling to ground
floor. If these were already travelling down,they will go straight to ground floor direct without stopping enroute.
14.3.4 Inspection facility:

An inspector’s change over switch and set of test buttons shall be provided in the controller operation of the
inspector’s change over switch shall make both the car and landing buttons inoperative and permit the lift to be
worked in either direction from machine room for test purpose by pressing corresponding test buttons in the
controller. It shall not however interfere with the emergency stop switches inside the car or on the top of the car.

14.3.5 Safety line indicators.
It specified visual tell tale lights may be provided to monitor the conditions of faults in the safety line of the lift for
easier fault finding. These indicators will remain lit when safety circuits are normal. One indicator shall be provided
for each safety on the controller. If any indicators fail to light up as the lift proceeds in its sequence of operation,
there shall be visual indication of the safety line open circuit and also its location for easier fault finding.
14.4 Control wiring
14.4.1. Wiring in machine room:
Power wiring between the controller and main board controller to various landings shall be done in heavy gauge
conduit or metal duct and shall conform to I.E Rules 1956 and CPWD Specifications for electrical works. Following
general principles shall be followed in wiring:
A. i. Control cables carrying DC and power cable carrying AC shall not be run in the same conduit or metal duct and
they shall be laid as per I.E rules.
II. Metal duct with removable inspection cover shall be preferred.
III. in case of control cables also the harness shall be separate as far as feasible for separate functions and
laid separately in suitably dimensioned metal duct or in a separate conduit such as the signaling, locking lamp
indication and safeties. Control cables for different voltages in the lift installation works should be laid as per IE
rules.
B. At least 5percent with a minimum of 5 unconnected spare wires shall be available out of all the lines to be
provided the wiring harness from the midway junction box to the machine room.
C. There shall be a master isolating switch fuse associated with the controller heavy duty load break. Quick
make quick break type. TP&N preferably interlocked with controller cabinet door isolator handle shall have
provision for external locking in off position.
All relay shall be suitable for lift service and shall incorporate adequate contact wipe for reliable operation. Relay
shall operate satisfactorily between 80 percent to 110 percent of their voltage.Main motor contactors shall be
suitable for A.C duty. Tenderer shall be required to furnish full details of make, Type applicable standard. Voltage
and current rating duty class, type and routine tests done etc. on contactors and relays. Copies of type test
certificates and other lest certificates shall also be furnished by the successful tenderer. All cables shall be with
copper conductors and flame retardant or PVC insulated of appropriate size. The cables feeding motor and in
heavy current flow paths shall be so selected that the size matches the protecting fuses and will not result in more
than 2percent voltage drop from the main board in the terminals of motor. Control cables shall not be less than 0.5
sq mm or equivalent of stranded. Where installation of heavy gauge conduits present difficulties Short lengths of
flexible conduits will be permitted but effective electrical continued by earth bonding shall be ensured. Ferrules
shall be slipped at the ends of all cables as per standard control wiring practice. All terminal blocks shall be suitable
marked.
14.4.2 Trailing cables.
A single trailing cable for lighting control and signal circuit is permitted. If all the conductors of this trailing cable
are insulated for maximum voltage running through any one conductor of this cable. The lengths of the cables shall
be adequate to prevent any strain due to movement of the car. All cables shall properly tagged by metallic/ plastic
tags for identification.
Trailing cable shall run from a junction box on the top of the car to a junction box located in the shall near
midpoint of travel and from those junction boxes conductors shall be run to the various locations.
Trailing cables exceeding 30metres in length shall have steel supporting fillers and shall be suspended directly by
then without rubbing over other supports.

Cables less that 30metres in length shall have no metallic fillers and shall be suspended by looping cables around
supports of porcelain spools type or equivalent.
5 percent of the total capacity subject to a minimum of 5wires shall be available unutilized in the trailing cable
everywhere suitable distributed between various functions.
14.4.3 Earthing
Metal frames and all metal work of the lift controller frame etc. shall be earthed with double earth leads taken to
the earth bar. Looping shell be permitted if such routing is feasible all other individual metallic work of
components etc. shall be loop earthed.
14.5 Miscellaneous
Principle of segregation function wise shall be accepted as far as possible in the general arrangement of
components – All terminal blocks shall be of 650v grade.
14.6. Controller casing:
The controller unit comprising of the main circuit breaker adjustable overload and phase reversal and phase failure
protection all the elements transformer, rectifier for D.C control supply, inverter power pack, terminal blocks etc.
shall be enclosed in an insect proof, sheet steel floor or wall mounted cabinet with hinged doors at front or at both
from and rear. Proper warming boards and danger plates shall be provided on both sides of the controller casing.
Sheet steel used for controller cabinet shall not be less than 18 gauge and shall be properly braced where
necessary. Suitable gland plate shall be provided for cable entry. The battery for the charge unit shall be suitably
placed in the machine room.
All sheet steel work shall be painted with two coats of synthetic enamel paint of suitable shade both inside and
outside over two coats of zinc primer.
15.0. Lift rope compensation
The lift rope compensation for the travel shall be provided for lift travels beyond 40m in all cases.
16.0. Automatic rescue devices (ARD)
The automatic rescue devices (ARD) meant for the purpose of bringing the lift car to the nearest landing doors, are
being used selectively and is generally restricted to commercial buildings having heavy traffic. However, frequent
power failures being the common phenomenon, the provision of ARD shall be made in all the lifts in public
buildings. The ARD shall have the following specifications.
16.1. ARD should move the elevator to the nearest landing in case of power failure during normal operation of
elevator.
16.2. ARD should monitor the normal power supply in the main controller and shall activate rescue operation
within 10 seconds of normal power supply failure. It should bring the elevator to the nearest floor at a slower
speed than the normal run. While proceeding to the nearest floor the elevator will detect the zone and stop. After
the elevator has stopped, it automatically opens the doors and parks with door open. After the operation is
completed by the ARD the elevator is automatically switched over to normal operation as soon as normal power
supply resumes.
16.3. In case the normal supply resumes during ARD in operation the elevator the elevator will continue to run in
ARD mode until it reaches the nearest landing and the doors are fully opened. If normal power supply resumes
when the elevator is at the landing, it will automatically be switched to normal power operation.
16.4. All the lift safeties shall remain active during the ARD mode of operation.
16.5 The battery capacity should be adequate so as to operate the ARD at least seven times a day provided the
duration between usage is at least 30 minutes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: FIRE FIGHTING
CONTENTS
SECTION CLAUSE DESCRIPTION
1 INTENT OF SPECIFICATION
2 DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
3 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
4 SCOPE OF WORK
5 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS
A FIRE HYDRANT SYSTEM
2.0 PIPING
2.1.1 ABOVE GROUND PIPES
2.1.2 UNDER GROUND PIPES
2.2 EXCAVATION OF TRENCHES
2.3 THRUST BLOCKS
3.0 VALVES
4.0 EXTERNAL HYDRANTS
5.0 HOSE REEL
6.0 LANDING VALVES AND HOSE PIPES
7.0 FIRE HOSES
8.0 BRANCH PIPES
9.0 HOSE CABINETS
10.0 SHUTTER FOR FIRE HOSE SHAFT
11.0 FIRE BRIGADE INLET CONNECTION
12.0 AIR RELEASE VALVE
13.0 DRAIN VALVE
14.0 VALVE CHAMBERS
15.0 TESTS AT SITE
15.1 PIPING
15.2 PUMPS
16.0 PUMPS AND ACCESSORIES
17.0 DIESEL ENGINE
B AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM
C ELECTRICAL WORKS
D FIRE ETECTION SYSTEM
I ADDRESSABLE FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM
II CONVENTIONAL FIRE DETECTION & ALARM SYSTEM
E PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
F FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
G SIGNAGE
6 MAKE OF EQUIPMENT

SECTION – 1 INTENT OF SPECIFICATION
This specification is intended to cover design, residual, engineering, manufacture, test and
inspection at works, delivery to site properly packed for transportation, erection, testing,
commissioning, performance demonstration at site and handing over to purchaser of Fire
Protection System as indicated in the schedule of Requirement and scope of work and as
required for reliable and effective fire protection
1.1 This specification also includes complete earthwork, i.e. excavation and back filling for the entire
buried piping for hydrant and Sprinkler System.
1.2 The specification also includes the supply of erection and commissioning of spares as specified
and special tools and tackles.
1.3 This specification also makes it obligatory for the contractor for arranging and obtaining
necessary clearance / approval from all Local / statutory authorities.
1.4 It is not the intent to completely specify all the details of design and construction herein. Never
the less the equipment and installation shall confirm to high standard of engineering, design, and
workmanship in all respect and shall be capable of performing continuous satisfactory operation
and acceptable to the purchaser as well as to the various statutory authorities. In case of any
violation of the above contract, the purchaser reserves the right to change / reject / modify the
equipment / system during detail engineering.
1.5 Wherever material or article is specified or described by the name of particular brand,
manufacturer or vendor, the specific item mentioned shall be understood as established type
function and quality desired. Other manufacturer’s product will be considered provided
sufficient information is furnished to allow the purchaser to determine that the product
proposed is equivalent to those brands.
1.6 The entire system shall be designed and engineered by the Bidder based on the guidelines
furnished in the specification, various codes / standards. Bidder’s experience and also good
engineering practice. Items and quantities, which have been furnished in this specification, are
tentative and indicative only. During quoting, the Bidder shall vet the above Bill of Material and
may furnish additional items necessary for satisfactory operation of the system.
1.7 Supplies and services to be covered under this tender specification and the conditions thereof
are detailed in the subsequent sections of the specifications. In case of conflict among various
sections, subsections, documents, drawings the same shall be referred to purchaser whose
decision shall be final and binding to the Bidder. In all cases, the best advantages will go to the
purchaser.
1.8 Bidder to note that no technical deviation shall be permitted for the system
SECTION – 2 DESIGN PHILOSOPHY

2.1 CODES AND STANDARDS
The Fire protection system for building shall be designed and installed as per National Building
Code (NBC) of India 2005, Part- 4, Fire and life safety and detailed specifications, also the
recommendations made by the Andhra Pradesh State Fire Services shall be followed.

2.2 HAZARD CLASSIFICATION
Tower 7 have been classified, as Residential buildings, Group – A, Sub -division A4 (Above 60 m
in height).
2.3 TYPE OF SYSTEMS PROPOSED
Following are the various Fire Protection systems proposed,
 Centralized firewater tank and Fire pump room equipment
 Wet riser cum down comer system with multi risers for different pressures and heights.
 Foam monitors for helipad
 Yard Hydrants
 Automatic Sprinkler System
 Addressable Fire detection & Alarm system
 Conventional fire detection system
 Public Address system
 Fire extinguishers and Signage (Fire safety plans).
2.4 FIRE WATER STORAGE TANKS
As per National Building Code (NBC) of India 2005, part 4, Life safety, clause No. 6.0 and Table 23.
2.5 FIRE WATER PUMPS
 Electrically driven main pump multi out let type (two out lets) for Hydrant system.
th
(One outlet shall feed up to 14th floor at 120 MWC and other outlet shall feed from 15
onwards at 215MWC)
 Electrically driven main pump multi out let type (two out lets) for Sprinkler system.
th
onwards at 215MWC)
 Diesel Engine driven common standby pump multi out let type (two out lets) for both
systems. (One outlet shall feed up to 14th floor at 120 MWC and other outlet shall feed
th
from 15 onwards at 215MWC)
 Electrically driven common Jockey pump multi out let type (two out lets) for both systems
th
onwards at 215MWC)
2.6 FIRE HYDRANT SYSTEM
 A ring main at ceiling of Basement floor-1 with isolation valves.
 Wet risers cum down comers for all Blocks
 Landing Hydrants on all floors near Staircases inside the dedicated Shaft.
 Fire Brigade Inlet connection for filling the Firewater tank as well as wet riser system.
2.7 WET RISER CUM DOWN COMER SYSTEM
 Wet riser cum down comer for every 1000 sq.mts floor area for all buildings, there shall be
th th
two risers one shall feed up to 14 floor at 120MWCand other shall feed from 15 floor
onwards. at 215MWC for each Block (Tower – 7)
 Wet riser cum down comer for every 1000 sq.mts floor area for all buildings.
 This is to reduce the constant pressure on the equipment and same is ease to operate. All
wet risers are interconnected with Terrace level water tank with Booster pump to increase
the pressure in case of emergency.

2.8 YARD HYDRANTS
 Yard Hydrants are at every 30m of periphery of the Building to protect the building from out
side. Yard hydrants are consisting with Single headed Hydrant valve fixed on the standpipe
and internal hydrants as required and all hydrant points consisting of 2 x 15 mts long fire
hoses, Branch pipe with Nozzle kept in the hose cabinet located next to the Hydrants.
2.9 INTERNAL HYDRANTS
 Internal hydrants shall be fitted on the wet risers which shall locate in side the dedicated fire
shaft. Wet risers shall be minimum 150 mm dia in size and shall run up to terrace.
 Internal hydrants shall be on each floor near landing of each staircase with single headed
hydrant valve for buildings which are less than 30 m in height and in case of buildings more
than 30 m in height hydrants valves shall be double out let type, 2x 15m long fire hoses.
Branch pipe with nozzle and a hose reel with 19 mm hose of 40 m long and nozzle. Internal
hydrants shall be installed inside the fire shaft and fire shaft shall be fitted with glass fronted
door.
2.10 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM
 THE TEST PRESSURE OF THE SPRINKLER SHALL BE EQAL TO 150% OF THE PUMP HEAD.
 Sprinklers at one level (at ceiling) in the apartments and basement floor parking areas
 Coverage per Sprinkler is 25 sq.mts and Sprinklers are Pendant / sidewall / upright (as
suitable at site) type with 79 deg. Temperature rating.
2.11 ADDRESSABLE FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM
Addressable Analogue type fire detection and alarm system shall be designed and installed as per
NFPA 72E / BS 5839 for complete building and for all blocks.
Major Equipment (for each Block) are,
 Conventional Fire detection & alarm control panel
 Addressable system fire detection system for water curtain system
 Smoke & Heat detectors
 Manual call points
 Electronic Hooters cum strobes
 Conduits / wiring
 Coverage per Detector is considered approx. 50 sq.mts
 Manual call points and Hooters are provided at strategic locations.
2.12 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
 Designed and installed as required by Local Fire force and NBC.
 P.A. Speakers shall mount on floors near each Staircase.
 Announcement shall be done in case of Emergency.
2.13 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Portable fire extinguishers are provided at locations mentioned below,
 Dry chemical powder type fire extinguisher conforming to IS 2171 near car parking lots, main
switch board room, transformer, generator room, pump room, AHU rooms and lift machine
room.
 Water expelled carbon-dioxide type fire extinguisher conforming to IS 940 located near each
staircase landing on every floor.

 Carbon dioxide type fire extinguishers conforming to IS 2878, located in electrical panel
room, pump room, lift machine room and Kitchens.
 Mechanical foam type fire extinguishers at HSD Yard, D.G. Rooms, and Firewater pump
house and near oil filled Transformers.
SECTION – 3 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

Unless specifically mentioned otherwise, all the applicable Codes and Standards published by the
Bureau of Indian Standards and their subsequent revision / BS Standards shall govern in respect
of design, workmanship, quality and properties of materials and method of testing; standards
listed below shall be applicable, in particular:
NBC ; National Building Code of India Part 4

Fire and Life safety
IS-1239 / IS 3589 : Specification for MS / GI Pipes
API 600 / BS 5163 : Specifications for Gun Metal gate, globe &
IS778/780/2906 check Valves for water supply.
IS-800 : Specifications for Structural steel
IS-814 : Specifications for covered electrodes for metal are
welding of structural steel.
BS-5155 : Specifications for C.I.butterfly valve.
IS-4927 : Specifications for Canvas Hose Pipes.
IS-903 : Specifications for Branch pipes Fire hose
couplings and auxiliary equipments
IS-5290 : Specifications for hydrant landing valves.
IS-1200 : Method of measuring of building & civil
Engineering Works
(water supply, plumbing drain & sanitary fittings)
IS-4853 : Recommended practice for radiographic inspection
of fusion welded butt joints in steel pipes.
IS-636 : Synthetic, jacketed hose pipes.
IS-2198 : Control Panels.
IS-2159 : Hot dip galvanising of iron and steel
IS-5 : Specification for painting
IS 9137 : Specification for horizontal end suction centrifugal

pump
BS-1965 Part I : Specification for butt-welded Pipe Fittings.
IS 8423 ; Controlled percolating hose for fire fighting.
IS 2871 : Branch pipe, universal for fire fighting purposes.
IS 884 : First aid hose reel for fire fighting
IS 2190 : Code of practice for selection, installation and
maintenance of portable first aid fire extinguishers.
IS 937 : Specification for washers for water fittings for fire
fighting system.

IS 9972 : Specification for automatic sprinkler heads.
IS 2171 ; Dry chemical powder type Fire extinguishers
IS 940 : Water type CO2 Fire extinguishers
IS 2878 : Carbon – di – oxide type Fire extinguishers
IS-2189 : Installation & Maintenance of Fire Detection and
Alarm System
IS-2175 : Detectors
IS-694 : Copper wire
IS-9968 (Pt-1) : Rubber Insulated Braided Wire
IS-1554 (Pt-1) : PVC Insulated Cables
Shade No.536 of IS-5 : Paint Shade for main Equipments/accessories
SECTION – 4 SCOPE OF WORK

4.1 INTRODUCTION
The scope of work includes complete design, Engineering with necessary design calculations, Fit – up details,
Supporting details, Manufacture / Fabrication, supply, Storing. Installation / erection, testing, commissioning the fire
hydrant system, Hose Reel system, Sprinkler system, Fire detection and alarm system, Public address system, first aid
fire extinguishers & Signage and quoted rates should includes complete earth works ie, excavation, back filling for the
buried pipes wherever applicable & with all necessary accessories as per Specifications and National Building Code of
India
4.2 DRAWINGS AND DESIGN CALCULATIONS

The drawings enclosed herewith are for the general guidance to Bidder. The contractor shall upon the award of the
work, furnish detailed working drawings (as mentioned under Clause No. 4.1 above) necessary to carryout the work
at site with detail design calculation. These shall be submitted to the Employer/Architect for the approval and the
work shall be commenced only after the approval of drawing by the Employer/Architect.
4.3 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL

The contractor shall obtain approval to the installation from the Andhra Pradesh State Fire Services. Successful
Bidder shall be responsible for preparation of documents / applications / drawings & hydraulic calculations and flow
up action at all stages, (Drawing / completion) arranging inspections, revisions / modifications for obtaining approval
from Andhra Pradesh State Fire Services within the overall completion period stipulated in the Tender. The
Contractor shall also make payment of all statutory payments like payment for Andhra Pradesh State Fire Services
approval etc. The quoted rates shall take care of such contingencies.
The contractor shall guarantee both the material and workmanship of first class quality corresponding to standard
engineering practice. Any defective materials/workmanship shall be rejected, the contractor has to rectify/ replace at
his own cost. Guarantee certificate of the materials supplied shall be handed over to the clients.
4.4 DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED ALONG WITH BID

List of data/document/drawings to be submitted along with bid shall as mentioned below,
1) Preliminary Overall dimensions of pump sets /motors/engines
2) List of Deviations (Technical) if any, as an Annexure.

3) Technical parameters of all equipment offered (catalogues, G.A. drawings etc).
Preliminary pump house layout confirming adequacy of space provided for firewater pumps
4.5 DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT

List of data/document/drawings to be submitted after the award of contract shall be indicated. The list shall
essentially contain the following:
1) Design and operation philosophy of the complete fire system
2) Piping layout
3) Schematic drawings,
4) Data sheets of all the equipment envisaged
5) Detailed Hydraulic calculation
6) Bar chart/network schedule covering all milestone activities.
4.6 INSTRUCTION MANUAL/COMPLETION DRAWING/TRAINING

The contractor shall be responsible for training of the Employer's personnel (minimum 6 rounds) in the
period of operation and maintenance of the system and conduct Fire drill. The rates quoted shall inclusive
of submitting 6 sets of the following documents (HARD COPIES) along with CDs (Soft copy) and the
following,
1. Detailed equipment data in the approved proforma
2. Manufacture’s maintenance and operating instructions manuals
3. Set of as built drawings, layouts, piping, ducting, cable routing, cable schedules etc
4. Approved test readings of all equipment and installations
5. Inspection certificates
6. Certificates of approval from statutory or Local Authorities for the operation and maintenance
of the installations, wherever such approval or certification is required. This shall include
Application filed along with enclosures and receipts of fees paid and deposits made.
7. Warranty / guaranty certificate for all equipments
8. List of recommended spares together with list of suppliers and their contact details.
9. Certificate from the main civil contractor that he has cleared the site of all debris and litter
caused by him.
10. Undertaking that all the materials supplied by him at site are fully tax paid and shall produce all
documentation for satisfaction of the Employer / consultants / Architects / PMC or taxation
authorities.
Submission of the above documentation shall form a precondition for final acceptance of the plant and
installation and final payments.
SECTION - 5
EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS
A FIRE HYDRANT SYSTEM

1.0 Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the fire hydrant system shall include the following:
1.1 Pumps, suction / delivery pipes, Valves, control panel and Instrumentation and pump set shall be in auto
operation.
1.2. M.S Class "C" (heavy grade) ring mains / riser main within the building and as well outside the building.

1.3 Landing valves, external hydrant valves, hose reels, fire duct shutters. Hose cabinets, fire brigade
connections and connections to pumps and appliances.
1.4 All materials shall be of the best quality and brand new, conforming to these specifications / standards and
subject to the approval of the Client / consultant.
1.5 Pipes shall be fixed in a manner as to provide easy accessibility for repair and maintenance and shall not
cause obstruction in shafts, passages etc.,
1.6 Pipes and fittings shall be fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable clamps at intervals specified. Only approved
types of anchor fasteners shall be used for RCC ceilings and walls.
1.7 Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as required in a neat manner.
The pipes shall be supported by structural steel fabricated (like, channel / angle / flat / plate etc) supports with
suitable anchor fasteners / suspended thread rods not less than M16 in size.
1.8 Valves and other appurtenances shall be as located that they are easily accessible for operation, repairs and
maintenance. Valves / other equipments fitted above the false ceiling shall be provided with trap / access
doors.
1.9 Pipes for wet risers within the Building shall be M.S. tubes conforming to IS 1239 (heavy duty 'C' class) with
flanged/welded joints.
1.10 Fittings for steel pipes shall be malleable iron or forged iron fittings with screwed / welded joints.
1.11 Inter connection between sprinkler and hydrant pumps shall be carried out at discharge side with
Check valve and isolation valves.
1.12 All equipment should be confirmed with Technical data sheets as enclosed along with this tender.
In case Technical data sheet for any of ht equipment is not enclosed Bidder shall consider reputed make of
equipment, manufactured under good engineering practice for the same details to be furnished along with bid.
1.13 Construction of Fire water tanks, Fire water pump house, Puddle flanges at water tanks for suction /
delivery / test lines and core cutting / opening if required on floor is exempted by Fire protection contractor.
2.0 PIPING
All pipes inside the building and where specified, outside the building shall be M.S. tubes conforming to IS:
1239 - heavy duty up to 150 mm dia. Fittings for pipes shall be as per IS: 1239, Part II (heavy grade) up to
150mm dia,. and pipes 200mm dia & above shall be M.S. as per IS: 3589 with minimum 6 mm wall thick &
fittings shall be fabricated from pipes confirming to IS 3589.
Pipes shall be carefully laid to the alignment, levels and gradients shown on the plan and sections and great
care shall be taken to prevent any sand, earth or other matter from entering the pipes during laying. Pipes
shall be kept thoroughly clean during the course of laying. The ends of pipes shall be blocked with wooden
plugs wedged home, at the end of each days work to prevent dirt and rodents, insects etc., entering the
pipe.
Pipes up to 50mm dia, tapered screwed / Socket welded / Butt welded type jointing shall be adopted, while
for pipes above 50mm dia welded or flanged connections shall be used. Flanged joints shall be made with 3
mm thick insertion rubber washer / Gaskets. All boltholes in flanges shall be drilled & making hole by using
gas cutting is not acceptable. The drilling of each flange shall be in accordance with relevant Bureau of Indian
Standards.
Flanged joints shall be used for connections to vessel equipment, flanged valves and also on suitable straight
lengths of pipeline at strategic points to facilitate erection and subsequent maintenance work.
The Bolts /Nuts / Washers used in the system shall be Galvanised as per IS 1367 and suitable length & not
more than 15mm beyond the Nut.

2.1 PIPE PROTECTION
2.1.1 ABOVE GROUND PIPES
All pipes above ground and in exposed locations shall be painted with two coats of Zincrich primer for G.I
pipes and etching primer for M.S. pipes and two or more coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved shade with
minimum thickness if 75 microns. The pipes should be initially brushed to remove all foreign matter before applying
paint / primer.
2.1.2 UNDER GROUND PIPES
The pipes (buried) should be initially brushed to remove all foreign matter and apply the primer over the
pipe. Primer is allowed to dry until the solvent evaporates and surface becomes tacky. The tape 4mm thick and
150/250mm wide shall then be wound in a spiral fashion and bonded completely to pipe by thermo fusion process.
The overlap is to be maintained at 15mm.
2.2 EXCAVATION OF TRENCHES
2.2.1 Excavation for pipelines shall be in open trenches to line and grade or as required at site including disposal
outside of site at approved dumping yard with the prior approval of concerned authorities. Pipelines shall be buried
to a minimum depth of 1M (top of the pipe) from the finished ground level.
2.2.2 The contractor shall support all trenches or adjoining structures with adequate timber supports wherever
required.
2.2.3 On completion of testing and painting of the pipelines, trenches shall be refilled with excavated fine earth in
20cms. Layers and consolidated by ramming and watering.
2.3 THRUST BLOCKS
Contractor shall provide suitable PCC blocks of suitable dimensions at Change – in – direction and regular intervals of
6 meters to support the pipes. Minimum Size of Blocks shall be 600mmx600mmx450mm.
2.5 PIPE SUPPORTS
Supports for above ground pipes of 65 mm dia and above shall be fabricated by structural steel of suitable sections
with suitable fasteners. The spacing of supports shall be 3mts minimum and painted two coats of enamel paint of
approved color over a coat of primer.
Suitable type hangers shall support pipes below 50 mm dia with clamps, anchor fasteners and suspended rods etc.
In any case fasteners shall not be less than 12 mm in size.
3.0 VALVES
3.1 BUTTERFLY VALVES
Butterfly valves shall be as per BS 5155 & provided for pipes 50mm dia and above on down stream (delivery side) of
the pumps. The valves shall be CI /C.S construction (as per the BOQ), seat shall be black nitrile rubber with insitu
moulding. The valves shall be PN 30 rating for high pressure side and PN 20 rating for Low pressure side PN 16 rating
for terrace .
3.2 GATE VALVES
Gate valves shall be as per IS: 14846 / 780, with C.I. body and bronze / brass internal parts and shall be used on
suction side of the pumps. Valve shall be flanged end type, PN 10 with rising Spindle type with C.I hand wheel etc.
3.3 NON – RETURN VALVES
Non – return valves shall be reflux swinging disc OR dual plate type The The valves shall be PN 30 rating for high
pressure side and PN 20 rating for Low pressure side, PN 16 rating for low pressure side as per the schematic drawing
with C.I. body and bronze / brass internals as per Technical data sheet enclosed and as per IS: 5312.
4.0 EXTERNAL HYDRANTS
External (yard) hydrant valves shall be single headed as per IS: 5290 (Type A). The valves should be complete with
hand wheels, quick coupling connections, springs and blank caps. The hydrants shall be fixed to stand posts of 80mm

dia for single headed hydrants at 1.0M from ground level. External hydrant valves shall be consisting with 2 nos. fire
Hoses of 15m long 63 mm dia, One No. Gun metal Branch pipe with Nozzle housed in the M.S cabinet and cabinet
shall be mounted (next to stand post) on free standing support fabricated by suitable structural steel / pipe of not less
than 80 mm dia. Please refer the tender drawings for the details.
5.0 HOSE REEL
Hose reel shall be swinging type for 180 deg with mounting base plate. Hose reel shall consist with 19mm dia high-
pressure rubber braided hose of 40 mts length with gunmetal nozzles. Hose reel water shall be tapped off from the
wet riser with Ball valve. The hose reel shall be installed in fire hose duct inside the building.
6.0 LANDING HYDRANT VALVE
The landing valve (internal) shall be gunmetal Single headed type conforming to IS: 5290 complete with hand wheel,
quick coupling, spring and blank cap. 2 Nos. of RRL type hose pipe of 63mm dia and 15 mts. length as per IS: 636 with
63mm dia instantaneous type Gun metal heavy duty couplings & Gun metal Branch pipe and nozzle to be provided.
Fire hoses and branch pipes shall be mounted inside the fire shaft with suitable supports.
The Fire shaft shall be sealed at all floors with fire retardant material.
7.0 FIRE HOSE
Fire hoses shall be Reinforced Rubber Lined (RRL) type as per IS: 636 & 63 mm dia and 15 mts long. Hoses shall be
bounded by G.I wire to heavy-duty instantaneous gunmetal couplings as per IS 903.
8.0 BRANCH PIPE WITH NOZZLE
Branch pipe shall be gunmetal, 63 mm dia with Nozzle of 19 mm dia made as per IS: 903 and suitable fitted with
hoses as specified else where in this specifications.
9.0 HOSE CABINET
Hose cabinet shall be fabricated by M.S. sheet of 16 swg and size shall be 750mm x 600mm x 250mm. Hose cabinet
shall have glass fronted door fitted with 4mm thick clear glass & powder coated finish of red out side & white inside.
Cabinet shall be suitable for stand mounting and shall have built in breakable glass type feature to keep key.
10.0 SHUTTER FOR FIRE SHAFT
Fire shaft shall have shutter fabricated by M.S. sheet of 16 swg with glass-fronted door (glass shall be 4mm thick) and
size of the shutter shall be 900mm x 1500mm minimum. The door shall be in two leaves with necessary stiffeners.
Shutter shall be powder coated finish of red out side and white inside and on the glass label of “FIRE” shall be stick,
the letter size shall be min. 75 mm height. Also there shall be built in breakable glass type feature to keep key.
11.0 FIRE BRIGADE INLET CONNECTION (FBIC)
FBIC shall be as per IS 5131 & gunmetal four away connecting head with 4 x 63 mm dia instantaneous type inlets with
built in check valve and 150mm dia outlet connection to the fire main grid with 150mm dia Butterfly valve and non –
return valve. Also there shall be an additional fire brigade inlet connection to the fire water tank with necessary
accessories.
12.0 AIR RELEASE VALVES
Air release valve is 25mm screwed inlet GM single acting type and shall be fixed on all high points in the system (wet
riser) with Ball valves or as shown on drawings.
13.0 DRAIN VALVES
Gun metal Gate / Ball valve of 15 / 25 / 40 / 50mm dia as per IS; 778 with fittings as required for instruments /
draining any water in the system / Risers in low points. (THE TEST PRESSURE OF THE VALVES SHALL BE EQAL TO 150%
OF THE PUMP HEAD
14.0 VALVE CHAMBERS
Contractor shall provide suitable brick masonry chambers in cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5 Coarse sand) on cement
concrete foundations 150mm thick 1:5:10 mix (1 cement: 5 fine sand: 10 graded stone aggregate 20mm nominal

size) 15mm thick cement plaster inside and outside finished with a floating coat of neat cement inside with cast
iron surface box ( OR top cover fabricated by M.S. chequered plate of 6 mm thick with frame / stiffeners etc)
approved by local fire brigade including excavation, back filling and additional Iron rungs for entering in to valve
chamber etc, complete.
Valve chambers shall be 1200mm x 1200mm x 1500mm depth.
15.0 TESTS AT SITE

15.1 PIPING
All piping in the system shall be tested to hydrostatic pressure of 1. 5 times of the pump head without drop in
pressure for at least 120 minutes. The test should be made in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the Employers
/ consultants representatives. Any defects / leakage should be repaired or if necessary defective works / equipment
should be replaced with new work / equipment. Tests should be repeated until work is done to the satisfaction of
concerned representatives. After testing, all pipes shall be flushed with portable water to remove foreign materials.
Under ground Pipes after lowered in to trenches shall be Holiday tested for damages of the anticorrosion treatment
and damages should be rectified, bring it to the notice of the engineer – in –charge of site before closing the
trenches.
Also the under ground pipes joints shall be tested for Radiographic for 10 % of the total under ground joints. The test
results and films shall be submitted for approval and any defects found in the welding process shall be rectified the
contractor with out any extra cost to the clients.
15.2 PUMPS
On completion of installation works at site the complete system shall be tested for satisfactory performance in line
with specifications as per Tender / requirements of Employer / Consultants. Pumps should test for Sequential Auto
start in case of using the Hydrants / sprinklers system. Also pump shall deliver minimum required flow & pressure at
top most hydrant point. All instruments for testing should be arranged by the Contractor. The performance test
includes commissioning spares like, diesel oil, engine oil, coolant, grease, gland packs and spare refills for Fire
extinguishers etc complete.
16.0 PUMPS AND ACCESSORIES
The pumps shall be exclusively used for fire fighting purposes and shall be BIS approved as mentioned in the BOQ.
One set main pump for each hydrant & sprinkler system with electrical motor driven direct couple centrifugal
pump of adequate discharge & head and in addition common standby Diesel engine driven direct coupled
centrifugal pump of adequate discharge and head shall be provided. The pumping capacity of main and stand by
hydrant / Sprinkler system pumps shall be as mentioned in the specimen BOQ. The suction / delivery pipes, valves,
instrumentation and control panel shall be considered accordingly.
16.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENT
The pumps shall be horizontal centrifugal horizontal split casing multi out let type ( Two out lets) type, pump
designed for continuous operation and shall have a continuously dropping head characteristic without any zone of
instability. The pump shall deliver with one out let a low head of 12 and high head of 21.5 bar. The power capacity
characteristic shall be non-over loading type. The head vs. capacity, input power vs. capacity characteristics, etc.,
shall match to ensure load sharing and trouble free operation throughout the range. In case of accidental reverse
flow through the pump the driver shall be capable of bringing the pump to its rated speed in the normal direction
from the point of maximum possible reverse speed. The contractor under this specification shall assume full
responsibility in the operation of the pump and the drive as one unit. The pump shall be capable to discharge 150
percent of rated capacity at a total head of not less than 65 percent of the total rated head. The total shut off
head shall not exceed 120 percent of total rated head on the pump. An automatic air release valve shall be

provided to vent air from the pump discharge and also to admit to the pump to dissipate the vacuum there, upon
stopping of the pump.
This valve shall be located at the highest point in the discharge line between the pump and the discharge check
valve. Pump coupled with motor or engine on a common base plate shall perform smoothly without any excessive
noise or vibration. Also pump shall be provided with re-circulation piping with valves.
16.2 PUMP CASING
The casing shall be cast iron to IS 210 and capable of withstanding to the maximum pressure developed by the
pump at the pumping temperature.
16.3 IMPELLER
The impeller shall be of standard bronze. The impeller shall be secured to the shaft with hydraulically balanced and
shall be retained against circumferential movement by keying, pinning or lock rings. All screwed fasteners shall
tighten in the direction of normal rotation.
16.4 SHAFT
Shaft size shall be selected on the basis of maximum combined shear stress. The shaft shall be of stainless steel
AISI-410 ground and polished to final dimensions and shall be adequately sized to withstand all stresses from
motor weight, hydraulic loads, vibrations and torque’s coming in during operation. Pump Shaft-Motor Shaft
Coupling
shall be connected with adequately sized flexible couplings with spacer of suitable approved design. Necessary
guards shall be provided for couplings. Pump shall be consisting with Gland plate for gland packing.
16.5 BASE PLATE
A common base plate for mounting both the pump and drive shall be provided. The base plate shall be of rigid
construction, shall be fabricated by M.S. channels. Base plate and pump supports shall be so constructed, the
pumping unit shall be mounted so as to minimize misalignment caused by mechanical forces such as normal piping
strain, hydraulic piping thrust etc.,
16.6 VIBRATION AND BALANCING
The rotating elements shall be so designed to ensure least vibration during start and throughout the operation of
the equipment. All rotating components shall be statically and dynamically balanced at workshop. All the
components of pumps of identical parameters supplied under these specifications shall be interchangeable.
16.7 INSTRUCTION MANUAL AND TOOLS/SPARES
A comprehensive instruction manual shall be provided by the sub-contractor indicating detailed requirements for
operation, dismantling and periodic operation and maintenance procedures. Recommended tools/spares shall be
provided along with the Pump set.
17.0 DIESEL ENGINE

17.1 GENERAL
The diesel engine shall be of multi-cylinder type four-stroke cycle with mechanical (airless) injection, cold starting
type. The engine shall be manufactured as per IS 10000 and shall be ease of maintenance, repair, cleaning and
inspection. This will also provide interchangeability of parts. All parts susceptible to temperature changes shall
have tolerance for expansion and contraction without resulting in leakage, misalignment of parts or injury to parts.
17.2 STARTING
The engine shall be capable of both automatic and manual start. Generally the engine shall start automatically but
in case of the auto-start system failure the engine shall be capable of manual start. Engine shall be able to start
without any preliminary heating of combustion chamber; cranking mechanism shall also be provided. All controls/
mechanism, which has to be operated in the starting process, shall be within easy reach of the operator. A DC

motor charged by battery shall initiate automatic start of diesel engine. The battery shall hold adequate retainable
charge to provide the starting of the diesel engine. Starting power will be supplied from two sets of storage
batteries. One set of battery is for automatic starting of the engine and the other provided for manual starting. A
selector switch will be provided at automatic starting control panel to select any of the two sets of battery for
manual / auto starting of the engine. The battery capacity shall be adequate for ten consecutive starts without
recharging with a cold engine under full compression. The battery banks shall be used for no other purpose other
than starting of the engine and shall be fully charged at all times with provision for trickle and boost charges. After
start of the engine the charger shall be disconnected, the battery being fed from the engine dynamo. The two-
battery charger of air-cooled type shall be able to charge on battery bank at a time. The D/E starting panel along
with the battery chargers should be of reputed approved makes.
17.3 GOVERNING SYSTEM

The engine shall have a speed control device which will control the speed under all conditions of load, the
governor shall be suitable for operation without external power supply. The Governor shall offer following
features: An adjustable governor to regulate engine speed within a range of 10% between shut-off and maximum
load conditions of the pumps. The governor shall be set to maintain rated pump speed at maximum pump load.
17.4 FUEL SYSTEM

The diesel engine is to run on high-speed diesel, the tank provided being enough to hold the volume required for 6
hours (minimum) continuous operation. Fuel tank shall be double wall type, so that over flow of the fuel shall be
collected in the secondary tank. Fuel supply and return piping shall be metal with necessary valves. Fuel tank shall
be mounted on the fabricated consisting with air vent, over flow, drain, filling and manhole etc.
17.5 COOLING WATER SYSTEM

Direct cooling system shall be employed for the diesel engine. Water shall be tapped from the fire pump
discharge. This water shall be led through duplex strainer, pressure breakdown orifice and then after passing
through the engine, the outlet water shall be taken directly to the sump through an elevated funnel. Re-circulating
thermo siphon system of cooling using a fan cooled radiator or indirect cooling system using heat exchanger shall
not be accepted.
17.6 ACCESSORIES
The engine shall be mounted on a base plate of fabricated steel construction. Adequate access shall be provided
for the big end and main bearings, camshaft and governor drives, water jackets etc., The engine shall have a base
plate made from MS sections. There shall be reasonable space at the big end, camshaft, water jackets, governor
drives and main bearings. The engine shall be provided with intake and discharge ductwork, inlet filter and
silencer, outlet muffler, expansion joints, dampers etc., as necessary for efficient operation. Intake air should be
taken from inside the building in which the engine is located, but the exhaust should be discharged outside the
building and exhaust duct shall be adequately sized for minimum pressure drop as per relevant code/standard, and
shall be housed clearing man height. The flywheel shall have graduated marking around the periphery to facilitate
checking of valve and fuel pump timings. Full set of diesel engine spares as per Standard requirement to be
provided along with tool kit.

17.7 INSTRUMENTATION
The diesel engine shall be provided with adequate instrumentation. The gauges etc., as required are provided for
in the Engine Panel. Also Bidder shall supply one set of Spare parts recommended by the manufacturer for
maintenance purposes.
B. AUTOMATIC SRINKLER SYSTEM
1.0 SCOPE OF WORK

The sprinkler system shall be provided in all floors. This system shall include the following :
Sprinkler main, branch and internal piping complete with valves, alarms and supporting arrangements, sprinkler
heads with spare sprinklers, connections to risers etc., all material shall be of the best quality conforming to
specifications and subject to the approval of the Authority’s Engineer. Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly
vertical/horizontal or on slopes required in a neat manner. Pipes shall be fixed in such a manner so as to provide
easy accessibility for repair and maintenance and shall not cause obstruction in shafts, passages etc., Pipes shall be
securely fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable clamps at intervals specified. Only approved types of anchor
fasteners shall be used for RCC ceilings and walls. Valves and other equipment shall be so located that they are
easily accessible for operation, repairs and maintenance.
th
Sprinkler risers shall be of two pressure levels, one can feed up to 14 floor at 120mwc and other shall feed
th
from 15 floor onwards at 215mwc with necessary valves etc,-
1.1 SPRINKLER HEADS

The sprinkler heads shall be UL listed fixed temperature type with a quartzoid bulb containing liquid having high
vapor pressure held in position by a forged GM yoke and deflector. The rated temperature of quartzoid bulb shall
be 79°C.The spacing shall however conform to the detailed drawing, in Co-ordination with electrical and other
allied services at the ceiling level. Sub-contractor shall supply spare sprinkler heads and spanners neatly installed
in a steel box with glass shutter at an appropriate position approved by the Authority’s Engineer.(THE TEST
PRESSURE OF THE SPRINKLER SHALL BE EQAL TO 150% OF THE PUMP HEAD).
A water motor gong and an inspection test connection shall be provided on the down streamside of the system.
1.2 WATER CURTAIN SYSTEM

The water curtain fire control system is designed to prevent the fire from propagating into adjacent cars and areas
in case of a fire incident. The system will encapsulate the fire between the water curtain sections in order to make
the evaluation of people who may be trapped inside.
The present system is designed as a fire controlling system where the curtains will effectively stop the fire from
propagation. The physics in this respect and the task is to create an effective water wall fire barrier. When hot
smoke and air is reaching the fire curtain, the ambient temperature in this area will be significantly reduced as a
function of rapid heat exchange/heat absorption. Water Curtain fire protection system, consisting of plurality of
nozzles are forming a water barrier.
For design water curtain system each compartment is envisaged as independent zone and each wall will protect by
independent system. Each system will consisting of Motorized valve, water supply pipe lines, isolation valves, Flow
switches, water curtain nozzles.
Water curtain system shall be interlocked with either smoke detection system OR flow swatches for activation. If
any zone comes on the adjacent zones also should discharge water and create curtain to avoid spread of fire /

smoke to another compartment. Logic control shall be done in such a way that three / four zones should operate
simultaneously to create compartment.
1.3.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS

Pipes for the sprinkler system shall refer to the clause No. 2.0,
2.1 and 2.5 of Section - A above.
C. ELECTRICAL WORKS
1.0 ELECTRICAL WORKS
1.1 General
The CONTRACTOR shall supply and install the electrical equipment and services necessary for the efficient
and safe operation of the fire protection systems detailed elsewhere in the specification, including :-
(a) Motors for Fire water pumps.
(b) MCC cum control panel housing the starters for all motors and complete with the switches, relays, push
buttons, indicating lamps, etc. necessary for the control of the fire protection system
(c) Power and control cabling between the MCC, motors, pressure switches, etc. including
accessories like conduits, cable trays ,etc.,
(d) To carry out the electrical installation works in accordance with specifications and as required by the local
statutory departments.
(e) To include the preparation of shop drawings and construction drawings for submission to the Consulting
Engineers to review prior to construction. Final as-built drawings after commissioning of the Fire Protection
System.
1.2 ELECTRIC MOTORS

The motor shall be as per IS: 325 and with class “F” insulation, totally enclosed fan cooled, horizontal induction
foot mounted type and rated not to draw starting current more than 6 times normal running current. Motor shall
be capable of driving the pumps at rated discharge and head & at 150% of its rated discharge at 65 % of the rated
head ( in any case 15 % safety load should add) and shall be designed for continuous full load duty. The motor
shall be capable of handling the required starting torque of the pumps. Speed of motor shall be compatible with
the speed of the pump. The cooling fans shall be directly driven from motor shaft. Motor situated outdoors or
exposed to the weather shall be weather protected. Motors shall be enclosed type and shall have dust tight
construction with suitable means of breathing and of drainage to prevent accumulation of water from
condensation. Drain holes shall exclude bodies greater than 6mm diameter.
All components shall be of adequate mechanical strength and robustness and shall be constructed of metal unless
otherwise approved. All motors shall be dynamically balanced.
The enclosure shall be designed to provide an effective sealing between the primary and secondary air circuits.
Motor winding shall be vacuum impregnated with heat and moisture resistant varnish glass fiber insulated. Two
independent earthing points shall be provided in accordance with IS:3043 on opposite sides of the motor for
bolted connection. The cable boxes and termination shall be designed to enable easy disconnection and
replacement of cables.

2.0 LT SWITCH BOARDS / SWITCH GEAR/ SUB MAIN SWITCH BOARDS
2.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT
The switch board shall be metal clad, totally enclosed, rigid, compartmentalized design, floor mounting, air
insulated, extensible cubicle type for use on medium voltage power, 3 phase 4 wire 50 cycles system. The degree
of protection shall be of IP55 in case of outdoor application as detailed in BOQ. The equipment shall be designed
for operation in high ambient temperature and high humidity tropical atmospheric conditions. Means shall be
provided to facilitate ease of inspection, cleaning and repairs for use in installations where continuity of operation
is of prime importance.
The entire logic of the fire protection system shall be built in this panel. It shall have necessary relays/contactors
for accepting contacts from Pressure/limit switches and for switching ON/OFF motors accordingly. It shall have
ammeter, voltmeter, start / stop push buttons, manual and automatic selector switches, pumps on, off, trip
indicating lamps, relays and other control equipment necessary for the efficient indication and operation of the
system. A visual and audio alarm shall also be provided to raise an alarm when any of the pumps is tripped. It
shall have provision for annunciating the water tank water level high / low / overflow conditions.
Provision shall be made for interfacing with the Building Automation system. Potential free contacts for motors
ON / OFF / TRIP, MCC trouble and fire water tanks level LOW/HIGH/OVERFLOW conditions be provided in the
control panel for BAS. Also provision shall be made for receiving signals from BAS.
2.2 STANDARDS
Following equipment shall conform to the requirements of :
Air Circuit Breaker (ACB) - IS 13947 - 1,2 / IEC 947 - 1,2
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) - IS 13947 - 1,2/ IEC 947 - 1&2
Contactors - IS 13947 - 1,4
Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB) - IS 8828 - 1996/ IEC 898 - 1995
Residual Current Circuit Breaker (RCCB) - IS 12640 - 1988 / IEC 1008
HRC fuse link - IS 9224 and BS 8 :8
Current Transformer - IS 2705 and IEC 185
Potential Transformer - IS 3156
Relay - IS 3231 & IS 8686 (For Static Relays)
Indicating Instrument - IS 1248
2.3 CONSTRUCTION
The switch board shall be:
Sheet steel enclosed, indoor floor mounted free standing cubicle type. Made up of the requisite vertical
sections modular type which when coupled together shall form continuous dead front switchboards. Dust, vermin
and damp proof and enclosure protection not less than IP 52. Each feeder/instrument compartment shall be
provided with a hinged door interlocked with MCCB/SFU inside the compartment such that door can only be
opened when MCCB/SFU in off position. Readily extendable as required by the addition of vertical sections
after removal of the end covers. Switch boards shall have access to the feeders, bus bars, cable termination,
cable alley, etc. as required

2.4 EACH VERTICAL SECTION SHALL COMPRISE
A front framed structure of rolled/folded CRCA sheet steel angle section of minimum 3 mm thickness
rigidly bolted together. This structure shall house the components contributing to the major weight of the
equipment such as circuit breaker cassettes, fuse switch units, main horizontal bus bars, vertical risers and
other front mounted accessories. The structure shall be mounted on a rigid base frame of folded CRCA sheet steel
of minimum 6 mm thickness and 75 mm height. The design shall ensure that the weight of the components is
adequately supported without deformation or loss of alignment during transit or during operation. A cable
chamber housing the cable end connections and power/control cable terminations. The design shall ensure
generous availability of space for ease of installation and maintenance of cabling and adequate safety for
working in one vertical/horizontal section without coming into accidental contact with live parts of the adjacent
section. A cover plate at the top of the vertical section, provided with a ventilating hood where necessary. Any
aperture for ventilation shall be covered with a perforated sheet having less than 1mm diameter perforations to
prevent entry of vermin. Front and rear doors fitted with dust excluding neoprene gaskets with fasteners designed
to ensure proper compression of the gaskets. When covers are provided in place of doors generous overlap shall
be ensured between sheet steel surfaces with closely spaced fasteners to preclude the entry of dust. The height
of the panel shall not be more than 2200 mm unless otherwise specified and maximum height of operating
handle shall not be more than 1800mm from FFL. The total depth of the panel shall be adequate to cater to
proper cabling space. Doors shall be of minimum 14 gauge sheet steel and covers/partitions of 16G sheet steel. All
sheet steel work forming the exterior of switchboards shall be smoothly finished, leveled and free from flaws.
The corners should be rounded. The Components in the switch boards shall be so arranged as to facilitate ease
of operation and maintenance and at the same time to ensure necessary degree of safety.
Components forming part of the switchboards shall have the following minimum clearances:
Between phases - 25mm
Between phases and neutral - 25mm
Between phases and earth - 25mm
Between neutral and earth - 19mm
When, for any reason, the above clearances are not available, suitable insulation barrier/shielding shall
be provided. Clearances shall be maintained during normal service conditions. Creep age distances shall
comply with those specified in relevant standards. All insulating material used in the construction of the
equipment shall be of non-hygroscopic material treated to withstand the effects of high humidity, high
temperature and tropical ambient service conditions. Functional units such as circuit breakers, fuse switches,
MCCBs, etc. shall be arranged in multitier formation except that not more than two air circuit breakers shall be
housed in a single vertical section. Metallic/insulated shrouding shall be provided within vertical sections and
between adjacent sections to ensure prevention of accidental contact with: Main bus-bars and vertical risers
during operation, inspection or maintenance of functional units and front mounted accessories. Cable
terminations of one functional unit, when working on those of adjacent unit/units. All covers providing access
to live parts/circuits shall be provided with tool operated fasteners to prevent unauthorized access. Provision
shall be made for permanently earthing the frames and other metal parts of the switchgear by two independent
distinct connections. Only CRCA steel sheets shall be used for fabricating the cubicle. Thickness tolerance for
sheets shall be as applicable in relevant IS.

2.5 METAL TREATMENT AND FINISH
Generally the treatment and finish of the metal surface shall be as per detailed specifications enumerated
elsewhere in this document.
DEGREASING
Effective cleaning by hot alkaline degreasing solution followed by cold water rinsing to remove traces of alkaline
solution.
PHOSPHATING
A recognized phosphate process to facilitate durable coating of the paint on the metal surfaces and also to prevent
the spread of rusting in the event of the paint film being mechanically damaged. This again shall be followed by hot
water rinsing to remove traces of phosphate solution. Drying in dust free atmosphere.
Primer : Primer coating with a coat of corrosion resistant primer applied on wet surface.
Finish coat : Two finishing coats of stoving synthetic enamel paint to the specified shade of IS:5. Both the finish
shall be only spray painted or powder coating. For outdoor units the finishing coat shall be of weather resistant
stoving epoxy paint of specified shade of IS5.
2.6 BUS BARS
The bus bars shall be made of high conductivity high strength E91E aluminum alloy suitable for 415
volts,3phase 4 wires 50 Hz 20KA unless otherwise specified. The bus bars shall be suitably supported with non-
hygroscopic supports to provide a fault withstand capacity as specified. High tensile bolts and spring washers
shall be provided at all bus bar joints. Fish plates of equal type and size shall be used at all joints. The bus bars shall
have uniform cross section throughout and shall be capable of carrying the rated current at 415V continuously.
The bus bars shall be designed to withstand a temperature rise of 45 Deg. C above the ambient. A current density
of 1.00 Amp/Sqmm shall not be exceeded for Aluminum bus bars.
The neutral bus bars shall have a continuous rating of at least 50% of the phase bus bars, unless mentioned
otherwise. Bus bars shall be fully sleeved using heat shrunk PVC sleeves appropriately colour coded to identify
different phases and neutral bar. An earth bus of size not less than 40 x 6 mm aluminum/GI shall run throughout
the length of switch board at top or bottom as required.
2.7 MCCB - MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
The Moulded Case Circuit Breaker shall be incorporated in the switch board wherever specified and shall be of
the current limiting type. MCCB shall conform to IS 2516, IS 13947-1/ IEC 947-1 (part I & II / section 1) 1977 for
general rules. It should be suitable for Horizontal and Vertical mounting and line load reversibility. MCCB shall
be suitable either for Single Phase AC 230V On Three Phase 415V. The MCCB shall be available in four pole
versions for neutral isolation. It shall have tropicalisation as standard feature.
The MCCB cover and case shall be made of high strength heat-resistant and flame-retardant thermosetting
insulating material. The operating handle shall be quick make, quick break, trip - free type. The operating handle
shall have suitable ÒN' ÒFF' `TRIPPED' indicators and in order to ensure suitability for isolation complying with IS
13947-2/IEC947-2, the operating mechanism shall be designed such that the toggle or the handle can only be in
ÒFF' position : if the main contacts are actually separated.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
MCCB shall be designed to have following accessories and it shall be fittable at site.
Under voltage trip , Shunt trip, Alarm switch, Auxiliary switch, Remote operation using motor mechanism with
facility of using the same in auto/manual mode.
2.9 INTERLOCKING
MCCB shall be provided with following interlocking devices for interlocking the door of a switch board. Handle
interlock to prevent unnecessary manipulations of the breaker. Door interlock to prevent door being opened

when breaker is in ON position. The interlocking device to open the door even if the breaker is in ON position. In
addition to the above, ant other features indicated in the Bill of Quantities shall also be provided.
2.10 BREAKING CAPACITY
Short time with standing capacities different ratings of MCCB's shall be as follows :
Ratings Breaking Capacity
[Amps] [KA]
01. Upto 400 35
02. 630 to 800 50
03. 1000 & Above 65
2.11 CONTACTORS
Contactor shall comply with IS 13947-1 for general rules and IS 13947 - 4.1 for Standards pertaining to Contactor
and Motor Starter. The Contactors shall be capable of withstanding breaking and making capacities per following
:
AC3 category AC4 category
Making Current 10 x Rated Current 12 x Rated Current
Breaking Current 08 x Rated Current 10 x Rated Current
Contactor shall be capable of withstanding an impulse voltage of 8KV and have an insulation voltage of 1000V.
Contactor shall be suitable for aluminum termination with a maximum permissible temperature rise of 650 C at
the terminals with an ambient temperature of 500 C. The coils shall have three terminals and the insulation
should be of class H type. The auxiliary contact block shall have a switching capacity of 220V, 2A. Contactor shall
have one auxiliary in built and it should be possible to have additional NO/NC contacts in steps of two. Miniature
Circuit Breakers [MCB] :
MCB shall be in 1,2,3,4, pole versions. MCB casing shall be made of self extinguishing, tropicalised material. MCB
shall comply with IS 8828-1996/IEC 898-1995. It shall be suitable for use in frequency range 40Hz to 60Hz and
shall accommodate AC/DC supply according to requirements. It shall have a trip-free mechanism and toggle shall
give a positive contact indication. It shall be suitable for mounting on 35mm DIN rail/surface mounting. It may be
installed horizontally, vertically on the ceiling in any place without any change in electrical performance. Line
supply may be connected to either top or bottom terminals i.e. There should be no line-load restriction. Degree of
protection when the MCB is flush mounted, shall be IP40. MCB shall be supplied with clamping terminals fully
open. Contact closing shall be independent of the speed of operator. The breaking capacity of the MCB shall be
9KA/10KA. The MCB shall be capable of being used as Incomer Circuit Breaker and shall be suitable for use as
isolator. In case of multiple MCBs in a single location (DB), it should be possible to remove any MCB without
having to disturb other MCB in the vicinity.
2.12 RCCB - RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKER

Deleted
2.13 FUSE SWITCH UNITS / SWITCH FUSE UNIT
Deleted
2.14 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Current transformer shall comply with the requirements of IS 2705. They shall have ratios, outputs and accuracy
as specified/required. All CT's shall be of resin cast type unless otherwise specifically called for. All CT's shall be of
bar type primary or suitable for the cable given type and size and the CT’s shall be provided with shorting links
irrespective of the CT’s ratio’s preferably with ELMEX / PHOENIX. For all the CT's suitable type and size clamps are

to be supplied for mounting in the switch boards. Polarities and terminal markings of primary and secondary shall
be clearly marked on all CT's.
Specifications for CT's :

a. Current Ratios :
i. Primary : As per feeder ratings
ii. Secondary : 5A
b. Type : Resin Cast
c. Class : PS-Differential Protection
5P10-O/C,E/F, RPR
Class 1 for metering
d. System Voltage
i. LT : 415V 3Ph 50Hz
2.15 INSTRUMENTS & METERS

All instruments and meters shall be enclosed in dust proof, moisture resistant, black finished cases and shall
be suitable for tropical use. They shall be calibrated to read directly the primary quantities. They shall be
accurately adjusted and calibrated at Works and shall have means of calibration, check and adjustment at site.
2.16 INDICATING INSTRUMENTS
Indicating instruments shall be flush mounted with anti-parallel white circular scales with black pointer and
with black numbers and lettering. Knife edge pointers shall be preferred. Unless otherwise specified, the size of all
instruments shall be 96mm x 96mm type. The dials shall be free from warping, fading and discolouring. Spring
controlled instruments shall be provided with front of board zero adjuster, capable of being safely handled while
the instrument is in Service. Instrument covers shall also have red marks on the dial corresponding to rated
values of the associated primary equipment. Synchronising instruments shall also meet the requirements of this
clause. The indicating instruments shall conform to IS:1248 and shall have on an accuracy class of 1. The Ammeter
and Wattmeter current coils shall withstand 200% of rated current continuously and 10 times the rated current
for 0.5 seconds without loss of accuracy . Voltmeter and Wattmeter potential coils shall withstand 120% of rated
voltage continuously and twice the rated voltage for 0.5 sec. without loss of accuracy.
2.17 VOLTMETER
Voltmeter shall be suitable for operating directly on LT supply voltage 415V, 50Hz or with a PT as per the
requirements. All the Voltmeters used for rated operating Voltage of 415/110V as required at 50Hz AC. With a
scale as required at site.
All Voltmeters are 96 x 96mm, suitable for mounting on the panel. Type Sl.No. accuracy class and borders of
the Voltmeter shall be indicated on the dial.
2.18 AMMETER
All the Ammeters shall be CT operated (5A) with a dial marked for line currents.
Type, Sl.No., Accuracy class, Operating Current, Burden etc., shall be indicated on the dial. All Ammeter shall be
of panel mounting type and shall be provided with zero setting screw.
2.19 PUSH BUTTONS
Push buttons shall be of momentary contact type with rear terminal connection. These shall be suitably
shrouded to prevent inadvertent operation. Integral inscription plates engraved with their functions shall be
provided. All push buttons shall have two Normally Closed and two Normally Open contacts comprising rivets

of pure silver. The contacts shall be able to make and carry 5 A and break up one amp inductive load at 250V
DC.
2.20 CABLE TERMINATIONS
Cable entries and terminals shall be provided in the switch board to suit the number, type and size of
aluminium conductor power cables and copper conductor control cable specified in the detailed specifications.
Provision shall be made for top or bottom entry of cables as required. Generous size of cabling chambers shall
be provided with the position of cable gland and terminals such that cables can be easily and safely terminated.
Barriers or shrouds shall be provided to permit safe working at the terminals of one circuit without accidentally
touching that of another live circuit. Cable risers shall be adequately supported to withstand the effects of rated
short circuit currents without damage and without causing secondary faults. Cable sockets shall be of tinned
copper and of the crimping type.
2.21 CONTROL WIRING
All control wiring shall be carried out with 1100V grade single core PVC cable having stranded copper
conductors with minimum cross section of 1.5 Sqmm for potential circuits and 2.5 Sqmm for current transformer
circuits. Wiring shall be neatly bunched, adequately supported and properly routed to allow for easy access and
maintenance. Wires shall be identified by numbered ferrules at each end. The ferrules shall be of ring type and
of non-deteriorating material. They shall be firmly located on each termination so as to prevent free movement.
All control circuit fuses shall be mounted in front of the panel and shall be easily accessible.
2.22 TERMINAL BLOCKS
Terminal blocks shall be of 500 Volts grade and of stud/screwless type. Terminal blocks shall have a minimum
current rating of 10 Amps and shall be shrouded. Provisions shall be made for label inscriptions. At least 20%
spare terminals shall be provided on each panel and these spare terminals shall be uniformly distributed on all
terminal blocks.
Terminal blocks for current transformer and voltage transformer secondary leads shall be provided with test
links and isolating facilities. Also current transformer secondary leads shall be provided with short circuiting and
earthing facilities.
There shall be a minimum clearance of 250mm between the first row of terminal blocks and the associated cable
gland plate. Also, the clearance between two rows of terminal blocks shall be a minimum of 150mm.
2.23 RELAYS
All Relays shall conform to the requirement of IS: 3231/IS 8686 or other applicable approved standards Relays
shall be suitable for flush and Semi-flush mounting on front At with connections from the rear. All Protective
Relays shall be of draw out or plug in type/Modular cases with proper built in test facilities. Test blocks and
switches shall be located immediately below each relay for testing. The auxiliary relays shall be self reset type.
All AC Relays shall be suitable for operation at 50Hz. AC Voltage operated relays shall be suitable for 110/v3 Volts
PT secondaries and Current operated relays for 5Amp. CT. secondaries as specified in this specification. Voltage
operated relays shall have adequate thermal capacity for continuous operation. Auxiliary Relays and Timers
shall have pairs of contacts as required to complete the scheme. Contacts shall be silver faced with spring
action.
All Protective Relays, Auxiliary Relays and Timers except the lockout relays and interlocking relays specified
shall be provided with self reset type contacts. All, Trip and Timers shall be provided with externally hand reset
positive action provided with inscription subject to /Consultant approval. Timers shall be of the electromagnetic or
solid state type.
Wherever solid state relays are used the following requirement shall be met with:

All Relays shall be designed for operating under or ambient temperature 55.C and 100% relative humidity.
Electronic type timers shall be as far as possible avoided.
All accessories required for correct operation of each relay shall be supported by the Sub-contractor without any
extra cost. The solid state relays shall be stable and suitably protected against transient/induced over voltages.
The bidder shall state clearly in his list special requirements, if any, for DC input arrangement or cabling
considered necessary for satisfactory operation of solid state relays quoted by him.
2.24 NAME PLATE
The panel as well as feeder compartments shall be provided with name plate of anodized aluminum with white
engraving on black background. They shall be properly secured with fasteners/rivets. The panel/feeder
descriptions shall be as indicated in the drawings/ by the employer.
2.25 TESTS
The routine tests shall be conducted as per IS standards on each Power Control Centre and shall comprise:
Inspection of the Switch Boards including inspection of wiring and electrical operational/functional tests where
necessary.
2.26 DIELECTRIC TESTS
Insulation resistance of the power circuit between each pole and the earth and that between the poles shall be
measured. Insulation resistance of all secondary wiring between phase and earth shall be measured. Insulation
test shall be carried out both before and after high voltage test. Checking of protective measures and electrical
continuity of the protective circuits.
2.27 HIGH VOLTAGE TEST
A high voltage test with 2.5 KV for power circuit and 1.5KV for Control Circuit, Duration one minute shall be
applied between each pole and earth and between poles. Test certificate shall be submitted along with panel.
2.28 STORING, ERECTION AND COMMISSIONING
2.29 STORING
The panels shall be stored in a well ventilated dry place. Suitable polythene covers shall be provided for
necessary protection against moisture, dust and vermin.
2.30 ERECTION
Switch boards shall be installed over trench/floor as required. Suitable grouting holes shall be provided in the
flooring. Suitable MS base channel shall be embedded in the flooring on which the panel can directly be installed.
The switch boards shall be properly aligned and bolted to the flooring by atleast four bolts. Cables shall be
terminated on the bottom plate or top plate as the case may be, by using brass compression glands. The
individual cables shall then be led through the panel to the required feeder compartments for necessary
terminations. The cables shall be clamped to the supporting arrangement. Either side, the switch board earth
bus shall be connected to the local earth grid. The base channel used for erection of panels shall form part of the
cost of the panel and shall not be measured or paid separately.
2.31 PRECOMMISSION TESTS
The panels shall be commissioned only after successful completion of the following tests. The test shall be
carried in the presence of Architect's representative. All main and auxiliary bus bar connections shall be checked
and tightened. All wiring terminations and bus bar joints shall be checked and tightened. Wiring shall be checked
to ensure that it is according to the approved drawing.
All wiring shall be tested for insulation resistance by a 500 volt megger. Phase rotation tests shall be conducted.
Suitable injection tests shall be applied to all the measuring instruments to establish the correctness and
accuracy of calibration and working order if required by the Employer. All relays and protective devices shall be
tested for correctness of settings and operation by introducing a current generator and an ammeter in the

circuit or shall produce calibration/test certificate as required by the Employer / Inspectorate / consultant.
Functional tests on all feeders. Makes, type and ratings of all components shall be checked/verified as per
approved drawings.
3.0 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR LOW VOLTAGE CABLES
3.1 TYPE
Low voltage cables shall be aluminum conductor, PVC insulated, PVC sheathed and steel wire armored or steel
tape armored Andhra Pradesh State Fire Services, FRLS- PVC out sheathed construction. The cables shall conform
to IS 1554 Part I in all respects. Cables shall be laid in tray/Hume pipe/in ready made trenches etc., as required.
The FRLS outer sheath material shall meet the following requirements ( if used),
i) The oxygen index value shall be minimum 29 when tested at 27  2 C as per ASTM-D-
2863-77 and temperature index value shall be minimum 250 C when tested as per
NES 715.
ii) The maximum total acid gas generation as determined by titration shall be less than 20
% by weight. The test shall be conducted as per IEC-754-1 (1994).
iii) The smoke density shall be 60 % maximum, when tested as per ASTM-D-2843-77
(1988).
iv) The finished cable shall pass the flammability test as per IEC-332-1 (1993), In addition,
it shall also pass flammability test as per Class F3 of Swedish Standard SS-424-1475
(1978).
The sizes of cables shall be selected to limit the voltage drop during running and voltage dip during starting to 5%
and 10% respectively. Adequate derating factors shall be considered
3.2 RATING
The cable shall be rated for a voltage of 1100 Volts.
3.3 CORE IDENTIFICATIONS
Cores shall be provided with the following colour scheme of PVC insulation:
1 core : Red/Black/Yellow/Blue
2 core : Red and Black
3 core : Red, Yellow and Blue
3 1/2 / 4 core : Red, Yellow, Blue & Black
4.0 STORING, LAYING, JOINTING AND TERMINATIONS
4.1 STORING
On receipt of cables at site the cables shall be inspected and stored in a safe place.
4.2 LAYING
Cables shall be laid as per the specifications given below.
5.0 CABLES IN OUTDOOR TRENCHES
Cables shall be laid in outdoor trenches wherever called for. The depth of the trenches shall not be less
than 75 cm from the final ground level. The width of the trenches shall suit easy laying of cable. Where more
than one cable has to be laid in the same trench, all attempts shall be made to keep the axial distance between
successive cables to be at least 1d where 'd' is the diameter of the bigger cable. The trenches shall be cut square
with vertical side walls and with uniform depth. Wherever cables are bent, the minimum bending radius shall not
be less than 12 times the diameter of the cable. After the cable is laid and straightened, it shall be covered with
sand cushion. Over this a course of cable protection tiles or burnt brick shall be provided on either sides and
above. Trench shall be back filled with earth and consolidated. Cables shall be laid in hume pipes/stoneware

pipes at all road crossings & wall entries. Approved cable markers made of CI indicating the voltage, no. of
cables and the direction of run of the cables shall be installed at regular intervals.
6.0 CABLE IN INDOOR TRENCHES
Cables shall be laid in indoor trenches wherever specified. Suitable angle iron brackets, clamps, hoods
and saddles shall be used for securing the cable in position.
7.0 CABLE ON TRAYS/RACKS
Cables shall be laid on cable trays/racks wherever specified. Cable racks/trays shall be of perforated
steel section/slotted angles suitable for the purpose. The trays/racks shall be complete with plates, tees, elbows,
risers and all necessary hardware. The steel trays shall be painted. Cable trays shall be erected properly to present
a neat and clean appearance. Suitable cleats or saddles shall be used for securing the cables to the cable trays.
The cable trays shall comply with the following requirements :
The trays are ladder type and shall have suitable strength and rigidity to provide adequate support for all
contained cables. It shall not present sharp edges, burrs of projections injurious to the insulation of the
wiring/cables. If made of Sheet metal, it shall be adequately protected against corrosion or shall be made of
corrosion resistant material. It shall have side rails or equivalent structural members. It shall include fittings
such as horizontal, vertical bends, tie rods, hooks etc., or other suitable means for changes in direction and
elevation of runs, fish plates and hard ware.
8.0 INSTALLATION
Cable trays shall be installed as a complete system. Trays shall be supported properly from the building
structure. The entire cable tray system shall be rigid. Each run of the cable tray shall be completed before the
installation of cables. In-portions where additional protection is required, non-combustible covers/enclosure shall
be used. Cable trays shall be exposed and accessible. Where cables of different system are installed on the same
cable tray, non-combustible solid barriers shall be used for segregating the cables. Cable trays shall be grounded
by two nos. earth continuity wires. Cable trays shall not be used as equipment grounding conductors.
9.0 JOINTING AND TERMINATIONS
Cable jointing shall be done as per the recommendations of the cable manufacturer. Jointing shall be done by
qualified cable jointers. Each terminations shall be carried out using brass compression glands and cable sockets.
Hydraulic crimping tool shall be used for making the end terminations. Cable gland shall be bonded to the
earth by suing suitable size G.I. wire/tape.
Suitable identification tags with the feeder designation inscribed on an aluminum/G.I. sheet shall be tied to either
ends of each cable.
10.0 TESTING
Cables shall be tested at factory as per the requirements of IS 1554 Part I. The tests shall incorporate routine
tests, type tests and acceptance tests. Copy of such test certificates shall be furnished to the Employer prior to
dispatch.
D. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM

I. ADDRASSABLE FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM FOR WATER CURTAIN
1.1. DESCRIPTION
A. This section of the specification includes the Design, engineering, furnishing, installation, and connection
of a microprocessor controlled, analog addressable fire alarm equipment required to form a complete coordinated
system ready for operation. It shall include, but not be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification
appliances, control panels, auxiliary control devices, annunciators, power supplies, and wiring as per tender
drawings and specified herein.

1.2. SCOPE
A. A new addressable analogue reporting, microprocessor controlled fire detection system shall be installed
in accordance with the specifications and approved shop drawings.
B. The system shall be designed such that each loop shall limited to only 80% of its total capacity at initial
installation.
C. BASIC PERFORMANCE
1. Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall be encoded on type – A
loop.
2. All Detectors shall be wired Class A, as part of an addressable device connected by the loop Circuit.
3. Notification Appliances shall be wired Class A, as part of an addressable device connected by the loop
Circuit.
4. A single ground fault or open circuit on the system loop shall not cause system malfunction, loss of
operating power or the ability to report an alarm.
5. Alarm signals arriving at the FACP shall not be lost following a primary power failure (or outage) until the
alarm signal is processed and recorded.
D. BASIC SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL OPERATION
When a fire alarm condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating devices, the following
functions shall immediately occur:
1. The System (Detector) Alarm LED shall flash.
2. A local piezo electric signal in the control panel shall sound.
3. The LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the fire alarm condition, including the type
of alarm point and its location within the protected premises.
4. Printing and history storage equipment shall log the information associated each new fire alarm control
panel condition, along with time and date of occurrence.
5. All system output programs assigned via control-by-event interlock programming to be activated by the
particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated system outputs (notification appliances and/or
relays) shall be activated.
6. The audio portion of the system shall sound the proper signal (tone or voice) to the appropriate zones.
E. INTEGRATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEMS
The integration of various systems is detailed below:
a. The monitoring of the status of various detectors/devices should be report at the Panel and at PC in
Security room /Reception
b. Alarms and trouble condition reporting at fire system central panel.
c. In the event of fire alarm, FAS shall directly activate the motorized butterfly valve for the water curtain
system.
1.3. SUBMITTALS
A. GENERAL
1. Six copies of all submittals shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review.
2. All references to manufacturer's model numbers and other pertinent information herein is intended to
establish minimum standards of performance, function and quality. Equivalent compatible equipment from other
manufacturers may be substituted for the specified equipment as long as the minimum standards are met.
3. All substitute equipment proposed as equal to the equipment specified herein, shall meet or exceed the
following standards. For equipment other than that specified, the contractor shall supply proof that such

substitute equipment equals or exceeds the features, functions, performance, and quality of the specified
equipment.
B. SHOP DRAWINGS
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and
specifications.
2. Include manufacturer's name(s), model numbers, ratings, power requirements, equipment layout, device
arrangement, complete wiring point-to-point diagrams, and conduit layouts.
3. Show annunciator layout, configurations, and terminations.
C. MANUALS
1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete operating and maintenance manuals listing the
manufacturer's name(s), including technical data sheets.
2. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each device and the interconnections between the items
of equipment.
3. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the information required to
properly operate the equipment and system.
4. Approvals will be based on complete submissions of manuals together with shop drawings.
5. Also contactor should submit operation and maintenance manuals with as built drawings in six sets. All
test certificates, field test reports, and performance test reports etc on handing over of the system.
D. SOFTWARE MODIFICATIONS
1. Provide the services of a factory trained and authorized technician to perform all system software
modifications, upgrades or changes. Response time of the technician to the site shall not exceed 4 hours.
2. Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation necessary to modify the fire alarm
system on site. Modification includes addition and deletion of devices, circuits, zones / loops and changes to
system operation and custom label changes for devices or zones / loops. The system structure and software shall
place no limit on the type or extent of software modifications on-site. Modification of software shall not require
power-down of the system or loss of system fire protection while modifications are being made.
E. CERTIFICATIONS
Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major equipment manufacturer
indicating that the proposed supervisor of the installation and the proposed performer of contract maintenance is
an authorized representative of the major equipment manufacturer. Include names and addresses in the
certification.
1.4. GUARANTY
A. All work performed and all material and equipment supplied & installed under this contract shall be free
from defects, Brand-new. The full cost of maintenance, labor and materials required to correct any defect during
DLP / Warranty shall be included in the quoted prices.
1.5. POST CONTRACT MAINTENANCE

A. Complete maintenance and repair service for the fire alarm system shall be available from a factory
trained authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment for a period of five (5) years after
expiration of the guaranty.
B. As part of the bid/proposal, include a quote for a maintenance contract to provide all maintenance, tests,
and repairs described below. Include also a quote for unscheduled maintenance/repairs, including hourly rates for
technicians trained on this equipment, and response travel costs for each year of the maintenance period. Rates
and costs shall be valid for the period of five (5) years after expiration of the guaranty.

C. Maintenance and testing shall be on a semiannual basis or as required by the facility maintenance team. A
preventive maintenance schedule shall be provided by the contractor, describing the protocol for preventive
maintenance. The schedule shall include:
1. Systematic examination, adjustment and cleaning of all detectors, manual fire alarm stations, Sounders,
strobe lights, voice alarm speakers, control panels, power supplies, relays, water flow switches, modules and all
accessories of the fire alarm system.
2. Each circuit in the fire alarm system shall be tested semiannually.
3. Each smoke detector shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 72 Chapter 7.
1.6. POST CONTRACT EXPANSIONS
A. The contractor shall have the ability to provide parts and labour to expand the system specified, if so
requested, for a period of five (5) years from the date of acceptance.
B. As part of the Bid, include a quotation for all parts and material, and all installation and test labor of
intelligent or addressable devices for ten percent (10%) as mentioned under spare parts list. This quotation shall
include intelligent smoke detectors, intelligent heat detectors, addressable manual stations, addressable monitor
modules and addressable modules equal in number to one tenth of the number required to meet this specification
(list actual quantity of each type).
C. Do not include cost of conduit or wire or the cost to install conduit or wire.
1.7. APPROVALS
A. The design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the entire fire detection and alarm system
shall conform to EN 54,or BS: 5839. The Detectors shall conform to relevant codes for Fire Alarm System.
The system installed shall comply with the following codes/publications:
a) LPCB for addressable detector, fire panel.
b) EN 54
c) BS 5839
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL, GENERAL
A. All equipment and components shall be brand new, and the manufacturer's current model. The materials,
appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally recognized approvals agency for use as
part of a protected premises protective signaling (fire alarm) system. The authorized representative of the
manufacturer of the major equipment, such as control panels, shall be responsible for the satisfactory installation
of the complete system.
B. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with each manufacturer's
recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical
equipment sizes, etc. before beginning system installation. Refer to the riser/connection diagram for all specific
system installation/termination/wiring data.
C. All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held firmly in place (e.g.,
detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings). Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to
support the required load.
2.2. CONDUIT AND WIRE
A. CONDUIT
1. Conduit shall be in accordance with The National Electrical Code (NEC), local and state requirements.

2. Where possible, all wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent
of interior cross sectional area where three or more cables are contained within a single conduit.
3. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of Power, or Class 1 circuits, and shall not be placed
in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors.
4. Wiring for 24 volt control, alarm notification, emergency communication and similar power-limited
auxiliary functions may be run in the same conduit as initiating and signaling line circuits. All circuits shall be
provided with transient suppression devices and the system shall be designed to permit simultaneous operation of
all circuits without interference or loss of signals.
5. Conduit shall not enter the fire alarm control panel, or any other remotely mounted control panel
equipment or back boxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACP manufacturer.
6. Conduit shall be 3/4-inch (19.1 mm) minimum, all conduits / junction boxes / collars shall be painted
before installation and there shall be marking (for identification) on the conduits at interval of 2m minimum.
B. WIRE
1. All fire alarm system wiring must be new.
2. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes and as recommended by the
manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm
system manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG (1.02 mm) for initiating device circuits and signaling line circuits,
and 14 AWG (1.63 mm) for notification appliance circuits.
3. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use with a protective
signaling system.
4. If Wires / cables not installed in conduit shall have a fire resistance rating suitable for the installation, may
be FRLS cables / wires used.
5. The system shall permit the use of Detectors and notification devices wiring in the same conduit with the
multiplex communication loop.
6. All field wiring shall be completely supervised. In the event of a primary power failure, disconnected
standby battery, removal of any internal modules, or any open circuits in the field wiring, a trouble signal will be
activated until the system and its associated field wiring are restored to normal condition.
7. All voice speaker and telephone circuits shall use twisted/shielded pair to eliminate cross talk.
C. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes and Cabinets:
All boxes and cabinets shall be as approved by the client / consultants for their intended purpose.
D. Initiating circuits shall be arranged to serve like categories (manual, smoke, water flow). Mixed category
circuitry shall not be permitted except on signaling line circuits connected to intelligent reporting devices.
E. The fire alarm control panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20
amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the main power distribution panel as FIRE ALARM. Fire alarm control panel
primary power wiring shall be 12 AWG. The control panel cabinet shall be grounded securely to either a cold water
pipe or grounding rod.
2.3. MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)

The main FACP Central Console shall contain a microprocessor based Central Processing Unit (CPU). The
CPU shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used to make up the system:
intelligent addressable smoke and thermal (heat) detectors, addressable modules, panel modules
including initiating circuits, control circuits, and notification appliance circuits, local and remote operator
terminals, annunciators, and other system controlled devices.

The Bidder shall undertake the responsibility of the complete installation, commissioning, user trials,
training and maintenance of the System as required. The Bidder shall take all responsibility for
preparation and installation of System Software into the FACP. The Software shall be such so as to be
easily operated by the Client’s Personnel and secured against Software errors, ability to be upgraded so
as to incorporate more features at a later date.
The panel shall also have automatic dialer with speech processor for transmit fire message to select
telephone numbers in case of fire.
The fire alarm control panel shall meet the modular listing requirements of Underwriters Laboratories
Inc. The control panel shall be capable of expansion via Loop cards. Each Loop shall support a minimum
of 100 analog addressable detectors/devices. The System shall be fail safe and adequate safe guards
should be under taken that in the event of a failure of a part of the System, say a loop card or CPU; it shall
not handicap the complete System. The Loop Control Module shall contain its own microprocessor and
shall be capable of operating in a local/degrade mode (any addressable device input shall be capable of
activating any or all addressable device outputs in that loop) in the unlikely event of a failure in the main
CPU.
The logic circuitry shall be based on high noise immunity solid state hardware.
All addressable units shall be connected to the FACP through the Loop Cards and shall be addressed
through individual numbers. The FACP shall be able to obtain analogue value for all detectors in the
circuit through a pulsed digitalized current data. The FACP shall be able to analyse all analogue inputs
from all addressable units, and through its own software and ambient level screening the FACP shall be
able to identify fire, possible fire or fault conditions. The unit supervision shall be dynamic and
continuous.
The FACP shall also give adequate warning signal whenever there is dust accumulation in detectors, and
up to the point of its replacement it should be possible to change the level of ambient alarm calibration
condition either by the use of software program operable by the owner or by resetting the detector.
Short / Open circuit units shall also be reported at the FACP In such cases, the system through the use of
fault isolators shall be able to isolate that segment between the two fault isolators. The missing
Detectors/Devices shall also be reported at the FACP with identification of the location.
The Bidder shall also undertake to trip the AHUs from the Fire Alarm Panel through the use of
Addressable Output Modules and necessary AC/DC relays, activated by the fire signal of specified
detectors and Input Modules for monitoring contacts from Fire exit doors.
The FACP shall also be able to discriminate between false alarms and fire conditions, as well as priority
selection of alarm in case alarm activates in two or more remotely located units simultaneously. In such
cases, the Manual Call Points shall have the highest priority.

The FACP shall have its own Battery Backup of a minimum of 24 hours in normal run and then 15 min in
alarm condition. The Battery shall be of sealed lead acid re chargeable maintenance free type. Necessary
battery calculations for the system shall be provided along with the bid.
It shall be able to withstand temperature variations from 00 centigrade to 500 centigrade. Further,
Relative Humidity (non-condensing type) up to 95% shall not hamper its performance. The voltage rating
shall be from 17V DC to 31V DC, though the voltage may be change depending upon the working voltages
of a proprietary FACP.
The FACP shall also capable of repeating all the events & messages to a Passive Repeater Panel.
The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall include a full featured operator interface control for the field
programming and control of the fire alarm system. All programming or editing of the existing program in
the system shall be achieved without special equipment and without interrupting the alarm monitoring
functions of the fire alarm control panel
2.4 PANEL CONTROLS/ INDICATION
Display & Indication : The backlit LCD display shall atleast be of 168 characters that indicate all
information associated with the fire alarm condition, including the type of alarm point and its location
within the protected premises. It shall also provide Light-Emitting-Diodes (LEDs), that indicate the status
of the following minimum system parameters: POWER STATUS, TEST STATUS, FIRE ALARM, FAULT, CPU
FAILURE, POINTS DISABLED etc.,
Alarm Acknowledge: Activation of the control panel acknowledges function in response to new alarms
and/or troubles shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and the associated LED on the panel shall
be turned ON.
Signal Silence: Signal Silence function shall cause all programmed alarm notification appliances and relays
to return to the normal condition. The selection of notification circuits and relays that are silence able by
this switch shall be fully field programmable within the confines of all applicable standards.
System Reset: Depression of System Reset switch shall cause all electronically latched initiating devices to
return to their normal condition. And the system reset operation starts. The associated Yellow LED shall
flash during this operation to inform the user of the progress status of the reset cycle. The LED shall flash
fast during the smoke detector power down sequence, then it shall flash slowly during the restart phase,
and shall illuminate steadily for the restoral phase. The LED shall go out completely when the system is
back to normal mode.
Evacuation/ Fire drill: Depression of the Drill switch shall activate all programmed notification appliance
circuits. The drill function shall latch until the panel is silenced or reset.

Lamp Test: The Lamp Test function shall activate all local system LEDs, light each segment of the liquid
crystal display to check all the components are working OK..
2.5 PANEL FUNCTIONS
The FACP shall minimum perform the following functions

 Supervise and monitor all intelligent addressable detectors and monitor modules connected to
the system for normal, trouble and alarm conditions. System response to any alarm condition
must occur within 3 seconds, regardless of the size and the complexity of the installed system.
 Supervise all initiating signalling and notification circuits throughout the facility by way of
connection to monitor and control modules.
 Detect the activation of any initiating device and the location of the alarm condition. Operate all
notification appliances and auxiliary devices as programmed. Visually and audibly annunciate
any trouble, supervisory, security or alarm condition on operator's terminals, panel display, and
annunciators.
 Upon alarm activation of any area smoke detector, heat detector, manual pull station, sprinkler
water flow, the following functions shall automatically occur:
 The internal audible device shall sound at the FACP.
 Display the alarm event on the Fire graphic workstation.
 The LCD Display shall indicate all applicable information associated with the alarm condition
including: zone, device type, device location and time/date.
 Any remote or local annunciator LCD/LED's associated with the alarm zone shall be illuminated.
 The following audio messages and actions shall occur simultaneously:
 A pre-evacuation message shall be sounded on all floors (zones), Stair cases, Lifts. It is the intent
of this message to advise occupants hearing this message that they are near danger and await
further instructions for leaving the building via the stairs (nearest exit).
 Activate visual strobes /Sounders based on programmed sequence. The visual strobe shall
continue to flash or the sounders will hoot until the system has been reset.
 An alert message shall be transmitted thro a telephone line on a preprogrammed telephone
numbers.
 Activate automatic smoke control sequences such as AHU tripping
 All automatic events programmed to the alarm point shall be executed and the associated
outputs activated.
 All Access Controlled doors shall unlock throughout the building.
2.6 PANEL FEATURES

The system shall be fully supervised for all fault conditions with distinctive alarm operated for fault and
fire conditions. Test buttons and software features shall be provided to test the electronic circuits and
detector health
System Programming: Advanced Windows based software shall be used to configure the system during
system start-up or system commissioning. Time and Date Stamps of all modifications made to the
program must be included to allow full retention of all previous program version data. All System

operational software is to be stored in FLASH memory. Control Panel disassembly and replacement of
electronic components of any kind shall not be required in order to upgrade the operations of the
installed system to conform to future application code and operating system changes. It shall have the
ability to download all system applications programs and “firmware” from a computer through a single
point into the FACP.
The panel shall provide means for all SLC devices on any SLC loop to be auto programmed into the system
by specific address. The system shall recognize specific device type ID's and associate that ID with the
corresponding address of the device.
Event Buffer: The panel shall maintain a history file of at least the last 1000 events, each with a time and
date stamp. History events shall include all alarms, troubles, operator actions, and programming entries.
Early warning capability: To obtain early warning of incipient or potential fire conditions, the system shall
support a programmable option to determine system response to real-time detector sensing values
above the programmed setting.
It shall be possible to set individual smoke detectors for pre-programmed pre-alarm thresholds. If the
individual threshold is reached, the pre-alarm condition shall be activated and an alert displayed on the
panel.
When the detector reaches a level exceeding the pre-programmed level, the control panel shall indicate
an action condition. Sounder bases installed with either heat or smoke detectors shall automatically
activate on action Pre-Alarm level, with general evacuation on alarm level.
Alarm verification delay: The FACP shall provide means to cause alarm signals to only sound in specific
areas with a delay of the alarm after start of alarm processing. If the alarm is not acknowledged within
programmed delay, all local and remote outputs shall automatically activate immediately. The control
panel shall ignore the alarm verification timer if another alarm is detected during the verification period.
Enable/ Disable points: The FACP shall allow the operator to restore a disabled point (device) in the
system, allowing that point (device) to operate as originally intended by the application program of the
system. Additionally, the system shall allow the operator to restore any group function, function, Panel,
system module, “software - defined zone”, operator control, or time control function.
The FACP shall allow the operator to disable any point (device) in the system, inhibiting that point
(device) from operating as originally intended by the application program of the system. Additionally, the
system shall allow the operator to disable any group function, function, Panel, system module, “software
- defined zone”, operator control, or time control function within the system.
Check/Alter parameters: The system shall allow the operator to manually turn on any system output
point, or system function. Alter Smoke Detector sensitivity, message routing within the system shall be
modifiable with this simple command from the control panel.
The system shall allow the operator to restore the primary (application program defined) operation to
the Smoke Detector sensitivity and the message routing functions with this simple command from the
control panel.

The system shall allow the operator to manually command and control relays. Relays shall be able to be
commanded to “Latch”, to energize as a “High Priority”, or as a “Low Priority”, to “Energize”, or to “De-
Energize”.
AHU Shutdown: The panel shall be capable of shutting down the AHUs in the event of Fire Alarm. It shall
be possible to program the shut on zone basis
Sensitivity Adjust: The system shall provide Automatic Detector Sensitivity Adjust based on Day/Night
schedules.
Environment Drift Compensation: The system shall automatically compensate for the drift in the sensitivity that
can occur due to dust & environment changes. Environmental compensation shall mean that the sensing element
adapts to long-term changes caused by dirt, humidity, aging etc. It shall even compensate for small amounts of
normal ambient smoke. The detector shall periodically adjust and updates the sensitivity (% obscuration) baseline
for its photoelectric sensing element. Periodically this information shall be written to its permanent memory.
When the detector accumulates dust in the chamber above the allowed limit, the control panel shall indicate a
maintenance urgent warning.
2.7 SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY:

The system shall allow the operator to determine the status of individual system components, including
active points, disabled points, and active points by panel.
The LCD shall show the system time, and the number of active points and disabled points in the system in
this section of the LCD Display.
The LCD shall show the first active event of the highest priority. The text shall show the sequence
number in which the displayed event was received, as well as its event type. It shall also display an
identification message related to the displayed event.
The LCD shall show the total number of active events in the system, by event type. There shall be atleast
three different System Event Types that shall be displayed, “Alarm Events”, “Supervisory Events” and
“Active Trouble Events”. The Main LCD shall include queues for each of the System Event Types. The
Main LCD shall allow the operator to access to the System Status information contained within those
queues by pressing an associated select switch. Whenever there is an unacknowledged event in any of
the System Event queues, the associated Status LED shall flash. Viewing each event listed in a queue shall
acknowledge all events in that queue, and shall cause the associated LED to illuminate steady.
Passwords and Users: The system shall support at least two password levels, master and user. Passwords
shall be available, each of which may be assigned access to the programming change menus, the alter
status menus, or both. Only the master password shall allow access to password change screens.
Report Generation capability: The system shall have the capability to connect to a printer to print at least
the following
It shall give a detailed description of the status of certain system parameters for corrective action, or for
preventative maintenance programs. The system shall provide these reports via the Main LCD, and shall
be capable of being printed on any of the connected system printers.
The system shall provide a report that gives a sensitivity listing of all detectors that have less than 75%
environmental compensation remaining.

The system shall provide a report that provides a sensitivity listing of any particular detector or all detectors
The system shall provide a listing of all of the firmware revision listings for all of the installed network components
in the system.
One-Man Walk Test: The system shall provide walk test for testing the entire fire alarm system. The walk
test shall allow a single operator to run audible tests on the panel. When points are activated, each
initiating event shall latch the input. The test shall be audible and shall be used for pull station
verification, magnet activated tests on input devices, input and output device and wiring
operation/verification.
Response based on event: The panel software functions shall provide means to program a variety of
output responses based on various initiating events.
The system shall support at least 500 general purpose software zones for linking inputs to outputs. When
an input device activates, any zone programmed into that device's zone map will be active and any
output device.
Maintenance Menu: The Main LCD in the FACP shall also allow the System Operator to access system maintenance
functions through a multi level password system.
Enclosures: The control panel shall be housed in cabinet suitable for surface or semi-flush mounting. The
cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected, given a rust-resistant prime coat, and manufacturer's
standard finish.
The back box and door shall be constructed of steel with provisions for electrical conduit connections into
the sides and top.
The door shall provide a key lock and shall include a glass or other transparent opening for viewing of all
indicators. For convenience, the door may be site configured for either right or left hand hinging.
Power Supply: The Addressable Main / auxiliary Power Supply shall operate on 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz,
and shall provide all necessary power for the FACP and the notification appliances.
The Addressable Main Power Supply shall also incorporate a battery charger for 24 hours of standby
power for normal working & another ½ hour in alarm condition using dual-rate charging techniques for
fast battery recharge
The Addressable Main Power Supply shall provide a very low frequency sweep earth detect circuit,
capable of detecting earth faults.
Event Display: here shall be an event display field to display the current event. When there are no events
then it shall display an ALL CLEAR message. It shall be possible to manually scroll all the current events
both forwards & backwards. Facility shall be provided to add notes to the current event display. Each
type of event shall be represented in different colours It shall be possible to acknowledge the event
Status Bars shall be provided for events such as Fire, Fault, Disabled and warning. The Status Bar shall
flash in different colours when an event occur and shall revert back to its original status once the event is
acknowledged and are no other pending events for acknowledgement.

Graphic Screen Display: It shall be possible to view manually the events in graphic screens, to view the
site plan and also to view in graphics the current device in fault or in alarm
The scrolling of the current event display with corresponding graphics shall also be shown automatically.
It shall be possible to manually select, view the details of devices and zones by selecting the relevant sub
screens.
It shall also be possible to enable or disable any zone or device and the same shall be restricted to higher
level users only.
Control Functions: It shall be possible to mute the PC alarm sound and the fire Panel buzzer, activate &
silence all sounders and print automatically alarm events from the software. It shall be possible to
add/delete new users.
LOOP CONTROL MODULE

The Loop Control Module shall monitor and control addressable devices. This includes intelligent
detectors (Ionization, Photoelectric, or Thermal) and fault isolation / monitor / control / control relay modules.
The Loop Control Module shall contain its own microprocessor and shall be capable of operating in a
local/degrade mode (any addressable device input shall be capable of activating any or all addressable device
outputs) in the unlikely event of a failure in the main CPU.
The Loop Control Module shall provide power and communicate with all intelligent addressable detectors
and modules on a single pair of wires.
The loop interface board shall be able to drive an NFPA Style 4 twisted shielded circuit up to maximum
length. The loop Interface shall also be capable of driving an NFPA Style 4, no twist, no shield circuit up to
maximum length. In addition, loop wiring shall meet the listing requirements for it to exit the building or structure.
"T"-tapping shall be allowed in either case.
The loop interface board shall receive analog or digital information from all intelligent detectors and shall
process this information to determine whether normal, alarm, or trouble conditions exist for that particular device.
Each Loop shall be isolated and equipped to annunciate an Earth Fault condition. The loop interface board
software shall include software to automatically maintain the detector's desired sensitivity level by adjusting for
the effects of environmental factors, including the accumulation of dust in each detector. The analog information
may also be used for automatic detector testing and the automatic determination of detector maintenance
requirements.
FIELD WIRING TERMINAL BLOCKS
All wiring terminal blocks shall be the plug-in/removable type and shall be capable of terminating up to 1.5 sq.mm
wire. Terminal blocks that are permanently fixed to the PC board are not acceptable.
2.8. SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. ADDRESSABLE DEVICES - GENERAL
1. Addressable devices shall provide an address-setting means using rotary decimal switches.
2. Addressable devices shall use simple to install and maintain decade (numbered 0 to 9) type address
switches. Devices which use a binary address or special tools for setting the device address, such as a dip switch
are not an allowable substitute.
3. Detectors shall be Analog and Addressable, and shall connect to the fire alarm control panel's Signaling
Line Circuits.

4. Addressable smoke and thermal detectors shall provide single / dual (2)status LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash
under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control
panel, and both LEDs shall be placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm
condition has been detected. If required, the flashing mode operation of the detector LEDs can be programmed off
via the fire control panel program.
5. The fire alarm control panel shall permit detector sensitivity adjustment through field programming of the
system. Sensitivity can be automatically adjusted by the panel on a time-of-day basis.
6. Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust accumulation and other
slow environmental changes that may affect their performance.
7. The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a separate twist-lock base which includes a tamper
proof feature.
8. The following bases and auxiliary functions shall be available :
a. Sounder base rated at 85 DBA minimum.
b. Form-C Relay base rated 30VDC, 2.0A
c. Isolator base
9. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that
condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating a magnetic switch)
or initiated remotely on command from the control panel.
10. Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall use to identify the
type of device (ION, PHOTO, THERMAL).
B. TWO WIRE DETECTOR MONITOR MODULE

1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional 2-
wire smoke detectors or alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device).
2. The two-wire monitor module shall mount in a 4-inch square (101.6 mm square), 2-1/8 inch (54 mm) deep
electrical box or with an optional surface backbox.
3. The IDC zone shall be wired for operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal
conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel.
C. ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE
1. Addressable control modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation of one
conventional devices of compatible, 24 VDC powered, polarized audio/visual notification appliances. For fan
shutdown and other auxiliary control functions, the control module may be set to operate as a dry contract relay.
2. The control module shall mount in a standard 4-inch square (101.6 mm square), 2-1/8 inch (54 mm) deep
electrical box, or to a surface mounted backbox.
3. The control module shall be wired with up to 1 amp of inductive A/V signal, or 2 amps of resistive A/V
signal operation, or as a dry contact relay. The relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection
requirements, and to insure that 100% of all auxiliary relay may be energized at the same time on the same pair of
wires.
4. Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate supervised power circuit from the main fire alarm
control panel or from a supervised remote power supply.
5. The control module shall be suitable for pilot duty applications and rated for a minimum of 0.6 amps at 30
VDC.
D. ADDRESSABLE RELAY MODULE

1. Addressable Relay Modules shall be available to activate the motorized butterfly valve of water curtain
system. The relay shall be rated for a minimum of 2.0 Amps resistive or 1.0 Amps inductive. The relay coil shall be
magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection requirements, and to insure that 100% of all auxiliary relay may
be energized at the same time on the same pair of wires.
2.9. BATTERIES AND CHARGER
A. BATTERY:
1. Shall be 12 volt, Gell-Cell type.
2. Battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less than twenty-four hours
plus 15 minutes of alarm upon a normal AC power failure.
3. The batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are required. Fluid level checks refilling,
spills and leakage shall not be required.
B. EXTERNAL BATTERY CHARGER:
1. Shall be built in to FACP & completely automatic, with constant potential charger maintaining the battery
fully charged under all service conditions. Charger shall operate from a 120/240-volt 50/60 hertz source.
2. Shall be rated for fully charging a completely discharged battery within 48 hours while simultaneously
supplying any loads connected to the battery.
3. Shall have protection to prevent discharge through the charger.
4. Shall have protection for overloads and short circuits on both AC and DC sides.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION:
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, local and state codes and as recommended by
the major equipment manufacturer.
B. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and may be
exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be installed prior to the system programming and test
period. If construction is ongoing during this period, measures shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from
contamination and physical damage. Conduits shall be marked in color for easy identification OR colored conduits
shall be used.
C. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators shall be flush
mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas.
3.2. TEST
Provide the service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the
fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the
system.
1. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground
faults, continuity, and insulation.
2. Close each sprinkler system flow valve and verify proper supervisory alarm at the FACP.
3. Verify activation of all flow switches.
4. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.
5. Open signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.
6. Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates.
7. Ground initiating device circuits and verify response of trouble signals.
8. Ground loop circuits and verify response of trouble signals.
9. Ground notification appliance circuits and verify response of trouble signals.

10. Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices.
11. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors during a walk test.
12. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on the system.
Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the
control points.
13. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual should be consulted to
determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying controls performed by
individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar.
3.4. FINAL INSPECTION

At the final inspection a factory-trained representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall
demonstrate that the systems function properly in every respect.
3.5. INSTRUCTION
A. Provide instruction as required for operating the system. Hands-on demonstrations of the operation of all
system components and the entire system including program changes and functions shall be provided.
B. The contractor and/or the systems manufacturer's representatives shall provide a typewritten "Sequence
of Operation."
C. The contractor / supplier should furnish the Operation and maintenance manuals along
with as built drawings in six sets of hard copies and a soft copy in CD.
II. CONVENTIONAL FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM FOR TOWERS

GENERAL
The Fire Alarm system shall conform to IS 2189 in respect of design and installation, and it shall give Audio/visual
alarm signals when the Signals are transmitted form the Manual call points located at strategically at all escape
routes. The system shall give pin point location of fire with fore warning system zone or floor wise, two tone for
alert and voice communication for commands and instructions. Alternatively the main panel shall have the facility to
accommodate provision for (a) manual control of alarm (b) cut off facility of alarm in case of false alarm. The panel
shall also have selective audio facility for evacuation of particular zones and provision for floor/main control room
hook for communications.
The system shall be suitable to operate on 250 AC+10% or 24 volts DC. The design shall be modular so that
additional zones can be added to cater for large installations and to provide facility for future expansions up to 25%
more of present capacity. The system shall be fully supervised for all fault conditions with distinctive alarms operated
for fault and fire conditions. All audible alarms either for fire or fault conditions shall be push button cancellation
arrangement with reset feature, to ensure that no alarm is inadvertently switched off. The fire or fault lamp shall
however continue to glow until the fault condition has been corrected or the fire extinguished. Test push buttons
shall be provided to test the electronic circuits in each zone. These test push buttons to be provided on the Main
Control Panel. Dual lamps shall be provided to indicate fire condition and to ensure against lamp failure. Both
lamps shall be connected in parallel . A common electronic audible alarm shall be provided but the fire signal
shall be different from the fault signal by providing different tones for fire and fault conditions.
The system shall be supervised for the following conditions:
a. Open circuit in detector wiring
b. Short circuit in detector wiring
c. Normal conditions
d. Fire conditions

e. A.C.Mains Failure
f. Battery low alarm
g. For optical detectors, failure of Exeter lamp opens circuit
A common fault meter shall be provided to indicate each of the 1 to 4 conditions, on the panel with push
button selection.
Dual tone hooter shall be of electronic type and shall give discontinuous / intermittent audible alarm
automatically whenever smoke detector operates. Hooter shall be complete with electronic oscillations, magnetic
coil (Sound coil) and accessories, ready for mounting (fixing);
2.1 MANUAL CALL POINT
Manual call point shall be of break glass type unit completely encased in a CRCA M.S. Sheet housing, with
provision for cable or conduit coupling. It shall have facility for voice communications for commands if required.
The Manual push button shall have the word prescribed in clear bold letters on facia window "In case of Fire
Break Glass". Installation of Manual push button shall be as per IS 2189. It shall be provided with a push button of
30V, 3 AMP rating and with 2 sets of NO & NC contacts. The manual push button shall be wall mounting type
and shall be provided with chain and hammer attached to it and shall be of weather proof type. The area of
Glass shall not be less than 30 sqmm.
2.2 SMOKE DETECTOR
The smoke detector shall work on dual chamber ionization principle to detect the products of combustion during
the incipient stage of fire i.e, to detect in its early stage by sensing visible and invisible products of smoke. The
radioactive sources shall be Americium 241 with max radioactive of 0.9 U micro curie. Each zone shall be
connected to the zonal or main control panel as called for by a multi core cable. Under fire condition, presence of
smoke shall trigger the circuit of the detector and shall send a signal to the control panel. Number of detectors
shall be connected in parallel to form a zone to cover larger areas. Coverage of one detector shall not be less than
50 sq.mts, of floor area. as per list of Fire officers committee, U.K. or Under writer’s laboratory U.S.A, or any other
international Testing Agency and also as included in the local fire body list
2.3 HEAT DETECTORS
Heat Detectors shall be of Electro Pneumatic type working on two methods, ie., rate of rise and fixed
temperature. The rate of rise element shall be an air chamber, a flexible metal diaphragm and a moisture proof,
trouble proof vent, carefully calibrated to ignore any normal fluctuation in temperature, but to respond quickly
when the temperature rise is 9 degrees centigrade or more per minute. The fixed temperature feature should be
of bimetallic type. The operating temperature of fixed temperature element should be of bimetallic type. The
operating temperature of fixed temperature element should be factory set at 72 degrees C, +5 and respond to any
when the room temperature indicator facility and to be with two wire system on DC low voltage. It shall be
possible to loop the heat detectors with smoke detectors and Manual Push Button, in the same circuit. The area of
coverage per heat detector will depend upon structural configuration, but for flat ceiling and un-partitioned space.
It shall be 50 SQM. as per list of Fire officers committee, U.K. or Under writer’s laboratory U.S.A, or any other
international Testing Agency and also as included in the local fire body list.
2.4 RESPONSE INDICATOR
Response Indicator shall be provided in a weather proof box as shown on the drawings
2.5 CONTROL PANEL
Control panel in general shall conform to IS :2189. The panel shall be totally enclosed dust and vermin
proof type made of 16 gauge rust inhibited sheet with oven baked finish. The panel shall be of completely
solid state design. The primary function of control panel shall be to respond automatically to the operation of

one or more Manual call points to give fire alarm and to indicate area/areas, where the device has activated. The
operation of Manual call points shall result in alarm being given by the following :
a. The external alarm (hooters of Schedule A)
b. A visible indication on control panel.
c. Audible alarm on control panel itself (common to all zones)
d. Facilities as enumerated in "Fire Alarm System"
The secondary function on the control panel shall be to indicate the faults within the system. An
immediate fault warning shall be given by an audible and visual signal on the control panel. A fault warning
shall be given in case of any of the following occurring :
a. Failure or disconnections of normal supply or stand by battery or low batter voltage beyond 5%.
b. Failure of disconnections of leads to all zones of detectors
c. Short circuit or open fault
d. Failure of any fuss/protective device
There shall be one indicator for fire and one for fault in the control panel corresponding to each zone.
Each zone shall have two bulbs of fire fault indication. Each indicator shall be clearly labeled with zone no. and
inscribed with the "Code Name" i.e., words "FIRE" or "SERVICE". Separate indicator must be provided in green for
system stand by ON. etc. The control panel shall derive 230 volts power from normal supply. A stand by power
supply shall be immediately available in the event of failure of normal supply and shall automatically be
connected as to maintain the equipment in condition such that fire alarm zone can be subsequently given. The
standby battery of secondary storage type shall be of when charged by associated battery charging equipment for
a period of 48 hours. Suitable arrangements shall be incorporated to prevent secondary batteries from discharging
through the charging equipment in the event of its break down or a failure in the supply. Each floor shall be
divided suitably into one zone for better maneuverability.
2.6 PRODUCTS
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL, GENERAL
Please refer the clause D - I – 2.1 to 2.2 above section
2.10 POST CONTRACT MAINTENANCE
A. Complete maintenance and repair service for the fire alarm system shall be available from a factory
trained authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment for a period of five (5) years after
expiration of the guaranty.
B. As part of the bid/proposal, include a quote for a maintenance contract to provide all maintenance, tests,
and repairs described below. Include also a quote for unscheduled maintenance/repairs, including hourly rates for
technicians trained on this equipment, and response travel costs for each year of the maintenance period. Rates
and costs shall be valid for the period of five (5) years after expiration of the guaranty.
C. Maintenance and testing shall be on a semiannual basis or as required by the facility maintenance team. A
preventive maintenance schedule shall be provided by the contractor, describing the protocol for preventive
maintenance. The schedule shall include:
1. Systematic examination, adjustment and cleaning of all detectors, manual fire alarm stations, Sounders,
strobe lights, voice alarm speakers, control panels, power supplies, relays, water flow switches, modules and all
accessories of the fire alarm system.
2. Each circuit in the fire alarm system shall be tested semiannually.
3. Each smoke detector shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 72 Chapter 7.
2.11 POST CONTRACT EXPANSIONS

A. The contractor shall have the ability to provide parts and labour to expand the system specified, if so
requested, for a period of five (5) years from the date of acceptance.
B. As part of the Bid, include a quotation for all parts and material, and all installation and test labor of
intelligent or addressable devices for ten percent (10%) as mentioned under spare parts list. This quotation shall
include intelligent smoke detectors, intelligent heat detectors, addressable manual stations, addressable monitor
modules and addressable modules equal in number to one tenth of the number required to meet this specification
(list actual quantity of each type).
C. Do not include cost of conduit or wire or the cost to install conduit or wire.
2.12 BATTERIES AND CHARGER

Please refer clause D- 2.9 above section
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION:
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, local and state codes and as recommended by
the major equipment manufacturer.
B. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and may be
exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be installed prior to the system programming and test
period. If construction is ongoing during this period, measures shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from
contamination and physical damage. Conduits shall be marked in color for easy identification OR colored conduits
shall be used.
C. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators shall be flush
mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas.
D Manual Pull Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting or semiflush mounting and shall be installed
not less than 1200 mm above the finished floor.
E. Sounders cum strobes / strobes shall be suitable for surface / flush mounting and shall be installed at
2200 mm above the finished floor level.
F. All Voice alarm Speakers shall be ceiling mounted type round in shape (color / finish shall be as approved
by Architects / clients).
3.2. TYPICAL OPERATION

A. Actuation of any manual station, smoke detector / heat detector or water flow switch shall cause the
following operations to occur unless otherwise specified:
1. Actuate all strobe units until the panel is reset.
2. Return all elevators to the primary or alternate floor of egress.
3. A smoke detector in any elevator lobby shall, in addition to the above functions, return all elevators to the
primary or alternate floor of egress
4. Smoke detectors in the elevator machine room or top of hoistway shall return all elevators in to the
primary or alternate floor. Smoke detectors or heat detectors installed to shut down elevator (if any) power and be
coordinated with the electrical contractor
5. Duct type smoke detectors shall, in addition to the above functions shut down the ventilation system or
close associated control dampers as appropriate.
3.3. TEST

Provide the service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the
fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the
system.
1. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground
faults, continuity, and insulation.
2. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on the system.
Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the
control points.
3. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual should be consulted to
determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying controls performed by
individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar.
4. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.
5. Open signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.
6. Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates.
7. Ground initiating device circuits and verify response of trouble signals.
8. Ground loop circuits and verify response of trouble signals.
9. Ground notification appliance circuits and verify response of trouble signals.
10. Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices.
11. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors during a walk test.
3.4. FINAL INSPECTION
At the final inspection a factory-trained representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall
demonstrate that the systems function properly in every respect.
3.5. INSTRUCTION
A. Provide instruction as required for operating the system. Hands-on demonstrations of the operation of all
system components and the entire system including program changes and functions shall be provided.
B. The contractor and/or the systems manufacturer's representatives shall provide a typewritten "Sequence
of Operation."
C. The contractor / supplier should furnish the Operation and maintenance manuals along
With as built drawings in six sets of hard copies and a soft copy in CD.
E. PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
1.0 OBJECTIVES
The main objective of the Public Address System is to convey clear and audible instructions to all the
people on all floors / buildings incase of occurrence of fire / other emergency to reach a place of safety in
the open, outside the buildings. The sound output should not be so loud that people nearest to the
speakers feel uncomfortable, nor so weak that people away cannot discern what is being broadcast. This
is achieved by working the system at 60 to 75% power output and distributing speakers uniformly all over
floor area.
1.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE SYSTEM

The system will comprise of a microphone of suitable for voice communication / Announcements through
speakers on various floors/buildings. The system shall consist of :
a. Control consoles with Microphones

b. Amplifiers
c. Speakers
d. Connecting cables and Racks for mounting above.
The local control console shall be placed in the security blocks. Announcement shall be made from the security
room.
1.2 CONTROL DESK

The control desk fabricated of sheet metal and designed to be mounted on table top and shall be located at
security room.
a. ON/OFF switch for the PA system with LED indication.
b. One gooseneck type moving coil / cardoid / hyper cardiod or equivalent microphone with ON/OFF switch.
c. Push switch buttons calling all the buildings with LED Indicator.
d. Push switch buttons, calling individually selected buildings with led indication.
e. Electronic chime to draw attention of the people to announcements.
f. Push switch button/buttons to actuate standby amplifier/amplifiers with LED indicators.
g. Push switch button for selecting monitor with LED indicator.

h. Pre-amplifier with output connection to output transformer and a standby pre-amplifier should also be provided.
i. Monitor loudspeaker.
j. Volume unit meters (V.U.Meter) with red LED to flash if the input signal exceeds.
k. Push switch button for dual tone oscillator for testing the system
l. Terminal blocks for connecting to amplifier rack.
1.3 AMPLIFIER AND AMPLIFIER RACK

a. Amplifier shall necessarily have solid-state circuitry properly trivialized and capable of AC/DC operation.
This shall be able to drive low impendence speakers (2 to 16 ohms) and speakers with transformer for 100V/70V
systems. All amplifiers in the suitable racks located at respective Security rooms.
b. Amplifiers shall meet the following technical requirements
I. Power output - R.M.S ........Watts ( suitable )
ii. Distortion - less than 3% at the rated output power at 1 Khz.
iii. Hum and noise level below rated output. All volume controls minimum 68 db. One microphone volume
and master volume control maximum - 60 db.
iv. Sensitivity - impedance - for microphone 1.5MV 4.7 K - ohms.
v. Tone control-base +/- 10 db at 100Hz. treble +/-6 db at 10 Khz.
vi. Speech filter - microphone channel - 12 db at 200 Hz.
vii. Auxiliary inputs - for tape recorder or ceramic pickup.
viii. Frequency response - over the entire speech and music range.
c. Amplifiers should be in a module of suitable Watts R.M.S only. Maximum 75% capacity should be used.
Amplifiers should have standard concealed controls.
d. Mains AC power supply input, D.C output and standby automatically supplying power in case of mains
failure, shall be provided.
e. The amplifiers rack shall be of mild steel with suitable anticorrosion protective coating. The rack shall
have provision for fixing to floor/wall.

f. The racks shall have appropriate amplifier mounting rails.
g. The racks shall have lockable steel doors having proper ventilation slots for heat dissipation.
h. Cable entry parts should be provided at the bottom.
I. Terminal blocks for connecting to control desk shall be provided.
1.4 SPEAKERS
The following type of speakers shall be used in public address system.
Wall mounted talk back speakers of 6 watts power rating on landings of staircases on all floors
1.3.2 CONDUITS
These shall be 16 swg mild steel, welded, thread type and having perfectly circular tubing and capable of
being cleaned and tight fitting joints. Conduits shall be laid either surface or in recess as required. All
conduits / junction / fittings should be painted with approved color and shall be marked for easy
identification.
1.6 WIRES
The wiring shall be approved make and PVC insulated copper multi strand as specified.
1.7 SAMPLES
The contractor shall submit the samples of all equipments for approval by architects / consultants before
installation.
F. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Fire extinguishers shall be in such a way that the occupants shall not travel more than 15m to reach a Fire
extinguisher. Also there shall be a Fire extinguisher for every 300 sq.m of floor plate / rooms of suitable
type / size. Fire extinguishers shall be on each landing of every floor, inside Electrical room, D.G. rooms,
Meter rooms, RMU and parking areas. In addition to above mention areas Extinguishers to be provided at
Surface car parks, out door Transformers / electrical instillations.
All Fire extinguishers shall be portable and hand held, a operating instruction should be pasted on the
extinguisher body.
Portable Fire extinguishers should be BIS approved and valid ISI certificates to be furnished at the time of
delivery to site.
G. SIGNAGE
st
Required, as per Local fire force like exit signs & Floor indication (Eg: Ground floor, 1 floor..), size shall
200mm x 500mm & action chart ( size shall be 600mm x 1000mm) in case of fire / emergency, Staircase
location indication etc. The location / quantity shall be on each landing of every staircase on each floor.
Signs shall be made out of 3mm thick PVC foam board with PVC non – reflective self-adhesive vinyl foam
board OR equivalent material with Mirror fasteners for fixing complete.
Please refer the specimen BOQ format for the details to be printed on the Fire order boards.
SECTION - 6
MAKE OF EQUIPMENT

A. RECOMMENDED MAKES FOR MECHANICAL WORKS
1. FIRE PUMPS : HBD / KIRLOSKAR BROS. LTD / MATHER &

PLATT / GRUNDFOS / FLOWMORE / KSB
2. DIESEL ENGINES : HBD / KIRLOSKER OIL ENGINES /
ASHOK LEYLAND / GREAVES ENGINES
5. G.I./ M.S. PIPES : JINDAL( HISSAR) / TATA /
SURYA ROSHINI / ZENITH
6. PIPE FITTINGS : BHARAT FORGE / TUBE PRODUCTS /
M.S. FITTINGS / VS BRAND / GOYAL /
SANJAY FORGE / B & M
7. BUTTERFLY VALES : AUDCO / KEY STONE / BDK / FOURESS /
INTERVALVE
8. NON – RETURN VALVES : H. SARKER / CRESENT / UPADHAYA /
HAWA
9. GATE VALVES ( Screwed end) : LEADER / ZOLOTO / ITAP
10. BALL VALES ( Screwed end) : LEADER / ZOLOTO / ITAP/JAISONS
11. STRAINERS : GUJRAT OTO FILT / GRAND FRIX / TEL
FLOW
12. C.I. GATE VALVES : H. SARKER / CRESENT / UPADHAYA /
HAWA
13. FLOW METRE : FORBES MARSHALL / EUREKA
14. PRESSURE SWITCH : INDFOS / SWITZER / DELTA CONTROL
15. PRESSURE GAUGE : H. GURU / FIEBIG / PRICOL
/ BELLS CONTROL
16. ANTICORROSIVE MATERIAL : I W L / RUSTECH
17. HYDRANT VALVES : NEWAGE / WINCO / SHAHBHOGILAL /

MINIMAX / ARIHANT
18. BRANCH PIPE WITH NOZZLE : NEWAGE / WINCO/ SHAHBHOGILAL /
MINIMAX / ARIHANT
19. FIRE HOSES : NEWAGE / CRC
20. HOSE COUPLINGS : NEWAGE / WINCO/ SHAHBHOGILAL /
MINIMAX / ARIHANT
21. HOSE REEL : EVERSAFE / KIDDE /SAFEX
MINIMAX
22. HOSE BOX / FIRE DUCT SHUTTER : EVERSAFE / SAFEX / KIDDE /
MINIMAX
23. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS : SAFEX / CEASE FIRE / MINIMAX /
VIJAY / EVERSAFE
24. SPRINKLERS : TYCO / VIKING / KIDDE
25. SPRINKLER ALARM VALVE : HD / TYCO / VIKING / KIDDE
26. FLOW SWITCH : SYSTEM SENSOR / POTTER / SWITZER
/ LEVCON

27. PAINT : ASIAN / BERGER
28. AIR RELEASE VALVES : LEADER / BAJAJ / HAWA
29. WELDING ELECTRODES : ESAB 28/ ADVANI
30. WATER CURTAIN NOZZLE : HD
31. MOTORIZED BFV : HONEYWELL/JHONSONCONTROLS
B. RECOMMENDED MAKES FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS
1. ELECTRIC MOTORS : KIRLOSKAR ELECTRIC / CROMPTON

GREAVES / SIEMENS / ABB
2. BATTERY : EXIDE / STANDARD / AMAR RAJA/
MINIMAX
3. MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE : PRAGATHI CONTROLS / LOAD
CONTROLS / DYNAMO / BRIGHT
ENGINEERING/ELLINS / LOTUS
4. CONTROL / POWER CABLES : GLOSTER / UNIVERSAL / ASIAN / CCI/
FINOLEX
5. MCCB : GE/ L&T/ALSTOM/MERLINGERIN / ABB
6. CONTROL MCB : ABB/ MERLINGERIN / SIEMENS / MDS
7. VOLT METER SELECT SWITCH : SALZER / L & T / KAYCEE
8. VOLTMETER ( AC / DC) : MECO / AE
9. AMMETER ( AC / DC) : MECO / AE
10. POWER CONTACTORS : ABB / SIEMENS /L&T/ SCHNEIDER
11. INDICATING LAPS ( LED type) : BINAY / TEKNIC
12. PUSH BUTTONS : TEKNIC / SIEMENS
13. AUTO / MANUAL SELECTOR : SALZER / KAYCEE
14. TIMERS : EAPL / AE
15. TERMINAL BLOCKS : ELMEX / WAGO
16. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS : KALPA / VOLTAMPS / KAPPA
17. OVER LOAD RELAY : L & T / SIEMENS
18. SINGLE PHASE PREVENTORS : MINILEC / AE
19. ENGINE CONTROL SELECTOR : SALZER / KAYCEE / L&T
20. MAIN SUPPLY SELECTOR – DPMCB : SIEMENS / MERLINGERIN

21. BATTERY CHARGING SELECTOR : SALZER / L & T/ KAYCEE
22. BATTERY CHARGER : KAYBEE POWEREC / HBL-NIFE/ AFCO/CHABBI
23. SIREN / HOOTER : KHERAJ/EQUI.
24 TOGGLE SWITCH : JAY / EQUI.
25. END TERMINATIONS : DOWEWLS / MULTI
26. CABLE TRAY : STORACK / PAN / MAG
C. FIRE DETECTION & ALARM WITH P.A. SYSTEM

1. SMOKE DETECTORS : GST/HOCHIKI/ BOSCH
2. HEAT DETECTORS : GST/HOCHIKI/ BOSCH

3. MAIN CONTROL PANEL : GST/HOCHIKI/ BOSCH
4. MANUAL PULL STATIONS : GST/HOCHIKI/ BOSCH
5. HOOTERS : GST/HOCHIKI/ BOSCH
6. MODULES : GST/HOCHIKI/ BOSCH
7. BATTERY : HITACHI / DRYSIL / JOHNSON / EXIDE /
STANDRD / PABASONIC
8. COPPER CONDUCTOR CONTROL : POLYCAB / VARSHA/ ANCHOR
CABLE / WIRES
SHAKTHCAB / FINECORE
9. COMMUNICATION WIRES : POLYCAB / VARSHA / SHAKTICAB/
FINECORE / ANCHOR
10. M S CONDUITS : BHARATH / GB / PRINCE
11. PVC CONDUITS : VIP / PRECISION / NELCO
12. P.A. SPEAKERS : AHUJA / AKG / BOSCH / BPL
2
13. P.A.CONSOLE : TYCO / KIDDE / HARITHASA/ BOSCH / A
14. P.A. AMPLIFIERS : AHUJA / AKG / BOSCH

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION – HVAC
TENDER SPECIFICATION AND BASIS OF DESIGN REQUIRED FOR HIGHSIDE WORK

SECTION 1: BASIS OF DESIGN & SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.0 BASIS OF DESIGN:

 The system has been designed on the following basic design parameters, tenderer has to verifythe
design before quoting. Any discrepancy in the design, shall be discussed in the pre-bid meeting :
 Outdoor Conditions 110 °F D.B., 78 °F W.B.
 Room Conditions 75+/- 2 °F D.B., about 50% +/- 5% R.H.
 Fresh Air 10 CFM/ Person or 1 Air-change per hour, whichever is higher.
 Equipment Load 200W per work station
 Under deck Insulation No Underdeck insulation below terrace slab
3.0 DESCRITION OF THE SYSTEM:

The total calculated low side cooling load for the office space is estimated to be about 320 TR.
Outdoor Units will be installed at the terrace of the building.
Indoor units shall wall mounted type/ Ceiling Suspended Cassette type /Ceiling Mounted Ductable type
4.0 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS OF WORKMANSHIP:

All the equipment and ancillary work shall conform to the technical specifications and standardsof workmanship
described in section 9.
5.0 LIST OF WORKING DRAWINGS

The following is an indicative List of Working Drawings to be submitted by the Contractor:
1. Terrace level layout including outdoor units, ducts, refrigerant piping, fresh air & exhaust air, HVAC power
panels, etc.
2. SA & RA ducting layout for each floor/level including diffusers/grilles coordinated with lighting, false
ceiling & equipment layout, other services, etc. with indoor units details
3. HVAC plan & sections
4. Schematic refrigerant piping
5. Schematic electrical drawing
6. GA drawing of panel boards
7. Requirements of civil work (pedestals, foundations, cutouts, structural supports/platforms, etc),drain,
electrical power, etc.
8. Requirements of electrical power on schematic & layout drawings
Any other drawings required during execution

SECTION 2: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) SYSTEM
Supply of Air Cooled Inverter type VRF unit, comprising with Rotary Compressor Unit by using R-410A refrigerent.
Unit shall be provided with micro processor based panel for sequential starting of condensing units,coils, Electronic
expansion valves,fins with specially factory coated hydrophilic treatment for heat & rust corrossion.
1.1 Condensing Unit (Outdoor Unit):
The condensing unit shall be capable of assessing the requirement of liquid refrigerant volumetric flow of each
evaporating unit at all times by means of a sophisticated microprocessor controller and generating the required
total volume of refrigerant liquid for supply to the evaporator units. The condensing unit shall be a factory-
assembled unit housed in a sturdy weatherproof casing constructed from rust proof galvanized powder coated
steel panels. The noise level of the unit shall not be more than 70dB (A) measured horizontally 1 m away and 1.5 m
above base level.
The compressors shall be hermetically sealed Inverter driven variable speed type scroll or rotary type, capable of
changing the capacity in accordance to the cooling load requirement. The condenser coils shall be constructed out
of copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum fins. The surface of the condenser coil shall be coated with
suitable chemical coating to prevent deterioration due to coastal climate. All necessary safety devices shall be
provided to ensure safe operation of the system. Unit should be equipped with a highly efficient oil separation
system to ensure stable operation with long refrigerant piping. The VRF condensing unit shall be located in open
on a terrace with adequate clearance from nearby objects to ensure unobstructed air flow and easy approach for
maintenance.
1.2 Indoor Units (Evaporating Units):
Each unit shall be selected as the requirement of the cooling load and interior. layout in the respective space to be
air-conditioned as specified in the Tender BOQ. The unit shall be equipped with an electronic expansion valve,
which can communicate with the VRF controller in the condensing unit. The fan shall of the dual suction multi
blade type and statically and dynamically balanced to ensure low noise and vibration free operation. Each indoor
unit shall be equipped with cordless local control unit for setting the operating parameters. The address of the
indoor unit shall be set automatically in case of individual and group control. Option of centralized control should
also be achievable.
Controls shall be provided to maintain the set room temperature within close tolerance limits.
1.3 Remote Control Unit:
A Remote Control Unit shall be provided for the system, suitable to be mounted near the entrance door of the
premises. It should be possible to operate the entire air conditioning system and set working parameters of all
indoor units and the VRF outdoor unit from this control unit. The unit shall be equipped with self-diagnosis for easy
and quick maintenance and service. The remote controller shall memorize the latest malfunction code for easy
maintenance. The controller shall be equipped with a battery back-up and a real time clock. It should be possible
to control several number of indoor units and change fan speed and angle of swing flap individually and in group.
1.4 HEAT RECLAIM VENTILATION UNIT
HRV unit for Fresh air supply with heat recovery from exhaust, consisting of fresh air blower, exhaustblower, air to
air, non- flammable, cross- flow heat exchanger, all housed in a sheet metal cabinet dulyinsulated.
1.5 Electrical Panel
The panel shall be fabricated from high quality 14 gauge sheet, stiffened and suitably reinforced. Thesteel sheet
shall be painted with seven tank process& the final paint coat shall be stove enamelled. Thehousing shall be of
sectionalized construction with space provided for separate vertical bus droppers &cable alley of minimum 200
mm width for each panel section. The overall construction of the panelshall be dust & vermin proof.

All motor feeders above 7.5 KW shall be provided with ammeters. Indicating instruments shall be tautband type
only.
Minimum size of power wiring shall be 2.5 mm2 copper/4.0 mm2 aluminium. Control wiring shall bedone with 2.5
mm2 stranded copper conductor, PVC insulated wires. All overload relay shall be with built-in single phasing
preventer. All spare contacts shall be wired upto terminal block.
Circuit breakers and large isolating switches shall be positioned as far as possible below the bus-bar chamber to
allow for ease of cabling. All equipment such as meters and indicating lights shall be located adjacent or on the unit
with which these are connected to achieve a neat and symmetrical
arrangement. Facility shall be provided for termination of all normal types of cables entering from above and
clamps shall be provided to support the weight of cables. Name plates to indicate the equipment of circuit
controlled by the switches shall be fixed on the panels.
All Push Buttons shall have 2 NO & 2 NC contacts.
NOTES:
. The VRF system’s Indoor and outdoor units shall be tested in accordance the provision of ARIstandards, AHRI -
1230 2009 for VRF System.
SECTION : 03 APPROVED MAKES

Sr. Equipment/Material Makes
No.
1 VRF System Daikin/Toshiba/Mitsubishi/Hitachi
2 HRV Unit Daikin/Toshiba/Mitsubishi/Hitachi
SECTION 04: TECHNICAL DATA SHEETS

VRF SYSTEMS
(To be filled up by bidder and attached with the offer)
1.0
OUT DOOR UNITS (VRFSYSTEM) VRF -1 VRF -2 VRF – 3 VRF – 4
10 HP 12HP 16 HP 32 HP
Make
Country of Origin
Model/Series
Nominal Capacity
Exact Ref. Capacity(TR) under given design
conditions
No. of Modules and capacity of each
No. of Fixed capacity Compressors per module
No. of Variable capacity
Compressors per module
Compressor make

Compressor type
Compressor model no.
Method of capacity control
Maximum No. of Evaporating Units permitted
Noise level at 1m horiz. Dist

(dB)
Noise level at 1.5m vert Dist

(dB)
Indoor Unit Model nos and

qty:
Expansion device used

Safety devices provided
Type of oil recovery systemused.
Max. permissible dist between the condensing
unit and evaporator:
Vertical run (M):
Horizontal run (m):
Refrigerant
-Type (R-410)
-Qty. Charged
-Any additional control or
features provided
OUT DOOR UNITS (VRFSYSTEM) VRF -5 VRF -6 VRF – 7 VRF –8

36 HP 40 HP 48 HP 50 HP
Make
Country of Origin
Model/Series
Nominal Capacity
Exact Ref. Capacity(TR) under given design
conditions
No. of Modules and capacity of each
No. of Fixed capacity Compressors per module

No. of Variable capacity
Compressors per module
Compressor make
Compressor type
Compressor model no.
Method of capacity control
Maximum No. of Evaporating Units permitted
Noise level at 1m horiz. Dist

(dB)
Noise level at 1.5m vert Dist

(dB)
Indoor Unit Model nos and

qty:
Expansion device used

Safety devices provided
Type of oil recovery system
used.
Max. permissible dist between the condensing

unit and evaporator:
Vertical run (M):
Horizontal run (m):
Refrigerant
-Type (R-410)
-Qty. Charged
-Any additional control or
features provided
2.0
INDOOR UNITS (VRF SYSTEM)
1.6 TR 3.2 TR 4.0 TR 4.6 TR
Make
Model
Type
Cooling Capacity (TR) at
design conditions

Air flow (CFM)
Round-flow (air throw indiagonal
directions) provided? (in case of
cassettes)
Guaranteed max noise level

at 1m from the unit (dBA)
Unit Dimensions (L x W x
H)
Operating Weight
Drop-down panel provided for
routine maintenance (for Cassette)
Y/N
Filter cleaning-due lamp provided?
Y/N
Timer operation provided?
Y/N
Night mode function
provided?
Additional Special control
functions provided, if any
INDOOR UNITS (VRF SYSTEM)

6.4 TR 8.0 TR REF REF
Make
Model
Type
Cooling Capacity (TR) at
design conditions
Air flow (CFM)
Round-flow (air throw indiagonal
directions) provided? (in case of
cassettes)
Guaranteed max noise level

at 1m from the unit (dBA)
Unit Dimensions (L x W x
H)
Operating Weight
Drop-down panel provided for
routine maintenance (for Cassette)
Y/N
Filter cleaning-due lamp provided?

Y/N
Timer operation provided?
Y/N
Night mode function
provided?
Additional Special control
functions provided, if any
SECTION 05: GENERAL INFORMATIONS FILLED BY THE BIDDER

I. GENERAL INFORMATION
1. Name of Bidder : ___________________________________

2. Address of Bidder : ___________________________________
3. Bidder's Proposal No/Date : ___________________________________
4. Telex/Fax No. of Bidder : ___________________________________
5. Email ID / Mobile No. of Bidder : ___________________________________
6. Name and Designation of the Officer : ___________________________________
of the Bidder to whom all the
references shall be made for
expeditious technical coordination.
7. Nearest Service Center Available : ___________________________________
8. Nearest Spare Part store for routine : ___________________________________
maintenance spares
9. Proposal validity period : ___________________________________
10. Delivery Period : ___________________________________
11. Commissioning Period : ___________________________________
12. Payment Terms : ___________________________________
SIGNATURE __________________________
NAME __________________________
DESIGNATION __________________________
SEAL OF COMPANY DATE _________________________

06. LIST OF OFFERED MAKES
Sr. No. Equipment/Material Makes
1 VRF System
2 HRV Unit

3 Hi Wall Split /Ductable AC Units
4 Aluminum Grilles & Diffusers
5 G.I. Sheets
6 Nitrile Rubber Foam Insulation
7 Copper Piping
8 Metallic Grid Ceiling

9 G.S. Tiles for Grid Ceiling
SIGNATURE __________________________
NAME __________________________
DESIGNATION __________________________
SEAL OF COMPANY DATE _______________________

07. DEVIATION SCHEDULE
TENDER REQUIREMENT OFFERED

1. __________________________________ ________________________________
2. __________________________________ ________________________________
3. _________________________________ _______________________________
4. __________________________________ ________________________________
5. __________________________________ ___________________________
DECLARATION
I, _______________________, certify that all the furnished data and information pertaining to this offer are
correct and are true representation of the equipment offered by our proposal number_____________________
dated _____________.
I confirm that the plant offered has been designed to achieve performance as per the design
parameters and guarantee to achieve the same.
I confirm that I am duly authorized representative of the Bidder whose name appears below my signature.
SIGNATURE __________________________
NAME __________________________
DESIGNATION __________________________
SEAL OF COMPANY DATE ______________________

TENDER SPECIFICATION FOR LOWSIDE WORK FOR AIR CONDITIONING
SECTION 1: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 Refrigerant Piping:
The refrigerant piping interconnecting to indoor & outdoor units shall be made out of hard copper tubes, in brazed
construction. The refrigerant line sizing should be designed to achieve minimum pressure drop and avoid oil return
problem. The pipe sizes and connections shall be designed such that the evaporator units do not face back
pressure due to the functioning of the evaporator next to it. All suction piping shall be insulated with closed cell
elastomeric class ‘O’ nitrile rubber foam tubes of suitable diameter and thickness. All piping shall be neatly laid and
supported on galvanized perforated sheet metal trays and clamped firmly. Piping should be shrouded, where
necessary, to protect it from accidental damage/leaks during work by any agencies. All the wiring interconnecting
the indoor and outdoor units shall be PVC insulated copper conductor flexible wires of appropriate rating, and shall
be laid through PVC conduits. The refrigerant piping for the VRF system shall be of minimum wall thickness as per
Copper pipe- ASTM B88, L-Type standard HARD drawn copper pipes. The copper pipe shall be internally
chemically cleaned, free of dirt, dust, oxidation and any other deposits. All joints shall be made by brazing. Inert
gas purging shall be used during the brazing process to prevent oxidation Suction line shall be insulated with 19mm
thick sleeve made out of closed cell elastomeric nitrile rubber foam insulation of fire retardant ‘O’ class. Wiring
interconnecting the indoor and outdoor unit shall be done with PVC insulated copper conductor flexible wires of
appropriate rating. U-bends shall be provided for efficient oil return in suction line, at appropriate locations. All
piping shall be supported on GI perforated cable trays, and covered by GI sheet channels from the top, to prevent
accidental damage during work of other agencies. The GI covers and trays shall be fixed to MS angle supports by
bolting, to facilitate removal of the trays for verification of pipe leaks. All pipe supports/clamps shall be painted
with red oxide primer followed by 2 coats of synthetic enamel finish paint.
The piping and wiring shall be laid such that it does not spoil the aesthetics of the premises, and is safe, secure and
approachable for leak detection/repair/replacement.
1.2 AIR DISTRIBITION AND SHEET METAL DUCT WORK

TECHNICAL SPECIFICAITONS
1. SCOPE
The scope of this section will cover supply fabrication, installation and testing of all sheet metal ductsand diffusers
and balancing thereof in accordance with these specifications, general arrangement shownon the Drawings and
Bill of quantities.
2. MACHINE MADE RECTANGULAR DUCTS

All ductwork including straight sections, tapers, elbows, branches, shores, collars, terminal boxes andother
transformation pieces( except pieces to suit may be made at site ) must be factory fabricatedwithin the following
parameters :
Raw Material
1. Coil stock required to minimize longitudinal joints.

2. Material should be of the minimum gauge necessary to resist both deflection caused by internalpressure*
and vibration due to turbulent air flow
3. GI material in particular must be of Lock Forming Quality (LFQ) conforming to the standards ofASTM A653
and A924 or conform to grade D of IS 1079:1988 or IS 513:1986 as specified in IS277:1992.
4. Zinc coating may be of class VIII.
3. Dampers
All dampers shall be of robust construction and tightly fitting. The design, method of handling, andcontrol shall be
suitable for the location and service required. Dampers shall be provided with suitable links, levers and quadrants
as required for their proper operation. Control or setting devices shall be made robust, easily operable and
accessible through suitable access doors in the ducts. Every damper shall have an indicating device clearly showing
the damper position at all times. Dampers shall be placed in ducts and at every branch supply or return air duct
connection, whether or not indicated on the drawings, for the proper volume control and balancing of the system.
The entire air distribution system shall be balanced. Measured air quantities at fan discharge and atvarious outlets
shall be identical to or less than 5 percent in excess of those specified and quoted.
4.Acoustic Treatment
The material for acoustic treatment of ducts, shall be resin bonded fibre glass, as described earlier, conforming to
I.S. 8183 of 1976. The density of fibre glass shall be 32 kg/cub.m and the material shall be in the form of boards of
uniform density. The ‘k’ value at 10oC shall not be less than 0.03 W/mK. Facing shall be provided with 0.5 mm
perforated aluminium sheet held with G.I. Nuts bolts or nailed to the batten work as required.
5.Material Specifications
Ducts shall be made out of galvanized steel sheets of ducting quality. The galvanized sheet shall have thickness as
specified below and zinc coating of minimum 120 gms/sqm.
Fabrication of Ducts
The ducts shall be fabricated as per following specifications:
Max. Side (mm) Min. Thickness Weight Type of joints Bracing

of Sheet(mm) (Kg/Sqm.)
Up to 750 0.63 4.9 25mm x 3mm MS Angle None

Flange
751 to 1000 0.80 6.4 40mm x 3mm 25mm x 3mm MS

MS Angle Flange Angle
at 1.2m centers.
1001 to 1500 0.80 6.4 40mm x 3mm 40mm x 3mm MS

at 1.2m centers.
1501 to 2250 1.0 8.0 40mm x 6mm 40mm x 6mm MS

at 1.2m centers.
1.3 Installation of Ducts:

Ducts shall be supported on hangers as per following specifications:
Duct Size Spacing of Size of M.S. Dia. of
(mm) Supports (m) Angle (mm) Hanger Rod (mm)
Up to 750 2.4 40 x 40 x 3 10
751 to 1500 2.4 40 x 40 x 6 10
1501 to 2250 2.4 50 x 50 x 6 15
Duct hangers shall be fixed to R.C.C. slab of the roof by means of anchor fasteners and M.S. anglecleats. Hangers
for ducts running below pitched sheet roof shall be fixed to M.S. angle cleats weldedto roof structure. Soft
neoprene rubber gasket of uniform thickness and width shall be used as gasketbetween flange joints. The gasket
will be fixed with a suitable adhesive to the flange.
Galvanized hexagonal full threaded nut-bolts of minimum 6mm dia. shall be used for fastening theflanges. Spacing
between two nut-bolts shall not exceed 125mm.All ducts shall be rigid and shall be adequately supported and
braced where required with cross breaking of M.S. angle bracings of ample size to keep the ducts true to shape
and to prevent buckling, vibration or breathing.
Ducting over false ceiling shall be supported independently from the roof structure above. In no case a duct shall
be supported from the false ceiling hangers or be permitted to rest on a hung ceiling. Bottom level of all ducts
should be maintained as shown in the drawing. Leveling of ducts should be checked with a PVC tube water level
from a reference point.
Fans shall be connected to duct work by a double canvass sleeve. Each sleeve shall be minimum150mm long,
securely bolted to duct and units. Each sleeve shall be made smooth and the connectingduct work rigidly held in
line with unit inlet or outlet.
1.3.1The supply and return air grills and ceiling diffusers

The supply and return air grills and ceiling diffusers shall be made of powder coated extruded aluminium sections.
The supply air grills/ diffusers shall be provided with screw operated opposed blade volume control device made of
extruded aluminium in black anodized finish.
All grills/diffusers shall have soft continuous rubber/foam gasket between the periphery of the grills/diffusers and
surface on which it has to be mounted. The colour of grills/diffusers shall be as per the approval of the Engineer in
Charge
1.3.2 Linear supply and return grills

The linear continuous supply/return air grills shall be made of powder coated extruded aluminium construction
with fixed horizontal bars. The thickness of fixed bar louvers shall be 5mm in front and the flange shall be 20mm
wide with round edges. The register shall be suitable for concealed fixing and horizontal bars of the grills shall
mechanically crimp from the back to hold them.
The colour of grills shall be as per the approval of the Engineer in Charge. The volume control device made of
extruded aluminium construction in black anodized finish shall be provided in supply air duct collars only.
1.3.2 Fresh air intake louvers with bird screen

The fresh air intake louvers atleast 50 mm deep will be made of powder coated extruded aluminium construction.
Bird/inspect screen will be provided with the intake louvers. The blades shall be inclined at 45 degrees on a 40 mm
blade pitch to minimise water ingress. The lowest blade of the assembly shall be extended out slightly to facilitate
disposal of rain water.
1.4 INSULATION WORK

1.4.1 THERMAL INSULATION OF DUCTING
Insulation Material: Closed Cell elastomeric Nitrile Rubber foam, Fire retardant class’O’
Application Procedure:
Clean the surface of the duct to be insulated free from dust grease and other matter. Prepare the pieces of sheet
as per the dimensions of the duct and apply the adhesive on the duct surface, the sheet surface as well as the
edges of the sheets & leave it for 2-3 minutes for drying.Once the adhesive is half dry and tacky, bring both the
ends of insulation where the adhesive is applied in contact and stick them well. Ensure that both the surfaces are
matched properly. Apply self adhesive black cotton tape on all the joints. Before fixing the tapes it must be
ensured that all the joints are sealed properly.
1.4.2 THERMAL INSULATION OF REFRIGERANT PIPING
 Closed Cell elastomeric Nitrile Rubber sleeve, Fire retardant class’O’
 Clean the surface of the pipe to be insulated free from dust grease and other matter.
 Prepare the pieces of sleeve as per the dimensions of the pipe and slide the sleeve or pipe. Sleeve should
fit tightly over the pipe with no air gap.
 Apply the adhesive on the ends of rubber sleeves & leave it for 2-3 minutes for drying. Once the adhesive
is half dry and tacky, bring both the ends of sleeves where the adhesive is applied in contact and stick
them well. Ensure that both the surfaces are matched properly.
 Apply self-adhesive black cotton tape on all the joints. Before fixing the tapes it must be ensured that all
the joints are sealed properly.
1.5 ELECTRICAL WORK
1.5.1 Electrical Panel
 The panel shall be fabricated from high quality 14 gauge sheet, stiffened and suitably reinforced. Thesteel
sheet shall be painted with seven tank process& the final paint coat shall be stove enamelled. The housing
shall be of sectionalized construction with space provided for separate vertical bus droppers &cable alley
of minimum 200 mm width for each panel section. The overall construction of the panel shall be dust &
vermin proof.
 All motor feeders above 7.5 KW shall be provided with ammeters. Indicating instruments shall be
tautband type only.

 Minimum size of power wiring shall be 2.5 mm2 copper/4.0 mm2 aluminium. Control wiring shall be done
with 2.5 mm2 stranded copper conductor, PVC insulated wires.
 All overload relay shall be with built-in single phasing preventer. All spare contacts shall be wired upto
terminal block.
 Circuit breakers and large isolating switches shall be positioned as far as possible below the bus-
barchamber to allow for ease of cabling. All equipment such as meters and indicating lights shall
belocated adjacent or on the unit with which these are connected to achieve a neat and symmetrical
arrangement. Facility shall be provided for termination of all normal types of cables entering fromabove
and clamps shall be provided to support the weight of cables. Name plates to indicate theequipment of
circuit controlled by the switches shall be fixed on the panels.
 All Push Buttons shall have 2 NO & 2 NC contacts.
1.5.2 Cabling Work:

 The work shall be carried out in accordance with specification of Indian Electricity Rules as amendedup to
date and local Municipal Bye-Laws.
 The power wiring system shall be suitable for 415V, 3 phase, 50 cycles, 4 wire supply. Wiring for motors
shall be carried out in PVC sheathed and steel wire or tape armored cable.
 The control wiring shall be in PVC insulated and PVC sheathed, multi core, stranded copper cable
(minimum 1.5 mm2 Cu) with the required number of cores.
 Power cables and wire shall be of copper or aluminum of 1100 V grade, control wires of copper 660 V
grade and shall confirm to IS: 1554 / IS: 694.
 Cables shall be carried on walls or in racks or in cable trays suspended from hangers or laid in trenches as
required. Where more than one cable is running, proper spacing shall be provided to minimize the loss in
current carrying capacity.
 Special care shall be taken to ensure that cables are not damaged at bends. The radius of bends shall not
be less than minimum specified by the manufacturer to ensure that no undue stress is caused to cable.
 Where cables pass through pipes, PVC/Neoprene rubber bushes shall be provided at the ends. Where
cables pass through floors or walls, pipe inserts shall be provided and opening shall be sealed.
 Cables shall terminated using weather proof double compression brass nickel plated cable glands and
tinned copper crimped lugs shall be provided.
 Conduits, where used, shall be of heavy gauge PVC. Metal saddles of approved type shall be used for
fixing conduits on surface. Bends and elbows shall be of inspection type where required. All joints shall be
water tight. Conduits shall be secured to the switches, junction boxes etc., by threaded couplers. Flexible
PVC conduits shall be used for connections with vibrating equipment. Suitable means to isolate each
motor in case of emergency shall be provided as per IS:900.
1.5.3 Earthing Work:

The main panel shall be connected to the main earthing stations by means of G.I. Strips as per Indian electricity
rules and IS: 3043 - 1987.
All electrical equipment shall be provided with two separate earth connections. The current carryingcapacity of
earth conductors shall be as per IS: 3043-1987.
All earthing connections shall be visible for periodical checking.
Sizes of Earthing Conductors:

Equipment Earth Conductor Size
Motor up to 10 HP Copper Wire 10 gauge
Motor above 10 HP 25mm x 3mm Copper strip
1.6 Painting Work:

All equipment, ducts, pipes etc. shall be painted by the following colour code with 1 coat of primer and2 coat of
good quality enamel paint
Standard Colour Code
a) Hot Gas Line : PO Red
b) Liquid Line : Orange
c) Suction Line : Green / Blue
d) All Supports / Stands : Black
All painting works shall form part of the cost of equipment, piping etc. No separate payment shall beapplicable.
1.7 Parameters to be tested on Testing & Commissioning of HVAC System:

Before commissioning of the equipment the entire installation shall be tested in accordance withIndian Electricity
Rules and IS: 732 and the Test Report of a licensed electrical contractor shall befurnished.
On Commissioning of the HVAC System, the following parameters shall be tested by the HVACContractor under full
load conditions, to confirm compliance with the data furnished earlier andachievement of specified room
conditions. All readings to be taken every 2 hours during 12 hourscontinuous operation, for 4 days:
1. Balancing:
 Area-wise air balancing to establish air quantity as per design

2. Room Conditions:
 Room conditions in each A/C Area to be recorded under full load conditions.
 Corresponding ambient conditions should also be recorded.
 niformity of temperature
3. VRV Unit Parameters:


 Air Inlet / Outlet Temperature
 Power Consumption

 Suction Pressure
 Discharge Pressure
 Oil pressure

 Noise Level & Vibrations (should not be objectionable)
4. For Each Fresh Air And Exhaust Air Unit:


 SP

 Noise Level & Vibrations (should not be objectionable)
NOTES:
1. After completing air & refrigerant-side balancing, the HVAC Contractor shall carry out testing of the entire HVAC
System; and submit specified test results to Consultant in a Test Results Format pre approved by the HVAC
Consultant. After carrying out modifications/balancing/corrections (as required),the Contractor shall carry out final
testing in the presence of representatives of IPR & the Architect KGA.
2. The VRF system’s Indoor and outdoor units shall be tested in accordance the provision of ARI standards, AHRI
-1230 2009 for VRF System.
3. In addition to the initial testing of the System on commissioning, two subsequent tests shall be carried outonein
the following summer and the second in the following monsoon.
4. Noise level & vibrations of all equipment shall be within acceptable limits appropriate for the application& use
of the Area.
5. All the instruments, special test materials (e.g. Nitrogen gas, helium gas for VAC) required for Testing
6. If additional parameters are required to be tested/measured for the purpose of troubleshooting, or
forestablishing performance of the system/equipment, or if required by the Consultant; the same shall becarried
out by the Contractor, without additional cost to the IPR.
7. In addition to the above, tests & measurements specified in Technical Specifications of the respectiveequipment
shall also be performed, and test-results thereof submitted.
1.8 LIST OF WORKING DRAWINGS

The following is an indicative List of Working Drawings to be submitted by the Contractor:
1. Terrace level layout including outdoor units, ducts, refrigerant piping, fresh air & exhaust air,
HVAC power panels, etc.
2. SA & RA ducting layout for each floor/level including diffusers/grilles coordinated with lighting,
false ceiling & equipment layout, other services, etc. with indoor units details
3. HVAC plan & sections
4. Schematic refrigerant piping
5. Schematic electrical drawing
6. GA drawing of panel boards
7. Requirements of civil work (pedestals, foundations, cutouts, structural supports/platforms,
etc),drain, electrical power, etc.
8. Requirements of electrical power on schematic & layout drawings
Any other drawings required during execution

SECTION 02: LIST OF APPROVED MAKES
No.

1 Aluminum Grilles &Diffusers Caryaire/ Cosmos/ Airpro/Air
master/equivalent
2 G.I. Sheets SAIL/ Jindal/ Nippon/ National/ Uttam
3 Nitrile Rubber Foam Insulation Armacell/Vidoflex/ Aeroflex
4 Copper Piping Rajco/ Mandev
II. PRINCIPAL COMMERCIAL TERMS

1. Proposal validity period : ___________________________________
2. Delivery Period (For receipt at site) : ___________________________________
3. Installation/Commissioning Period : ___________________________________
4. Payment Terms : ___________________________________
SIGNATURE __________________________
NAME __________________________
DESIGNATION _______________________

III. ORGANIZATION CHART
Organization chart giving details of partners/executives and engineers, who will look after the sales, project
execution and site supervision for this project.
SIGNATURE __________________________
NAME __________________________
DESIGNATION __________________________
IV. LIST OF OFFERED MAKES

No.
1 VRF System
2 HRV Unit
3 Hi Wall Split AC Units
4 Aluminum Grilles & Diffusers
5 G.I. Sheets
6 Nitrile Rubber Foam Insulation
7 Copper Piping
8 Metallic Grid Ceiling
9 G.S. Tiles for Grid Ceiling
SIGNATURE __________________________
NAME __________________________

DESIGNATION __________________________
SEAL OF COMPANY DATE _______________________

V. DEVIATION SCHEDULE
TENDER REQUIREMENT OFFERED

1. __________________________________ ________________________________
2. __________________________________ ________________________________
3. __________________________________ ________________________________
4. __________________________________ ________________________________
5. __________________________________ ________________________________
6. __________________________________ ________________________________
DECLARATION
I, _______________________, certify that all the furnished data and information pertaining to this offer arecorrect
and are true representation of the equipment offered by our proposal number_____________________ dated
_____________.
I confirm that the plant offered has been designed to achieve performance as per the design parameters
andguarantee to achieve the same.
I confirm that I am duly authorized representative of the Bidder whose name appears below my signature.
SIGNATURE __________________________
NAME __________________________
DESIGNATION __________________________
SEAL OF COMPANY DATE ______________________

LIST OF INDIAN STANDARDS
Sl.
No. Short Title B.I.S Number
I. CEMENT
Specification
1 to ordinary Portland cement 33 grade (4th Rev) 269-1989
Specification
2 for Portland Pozzolana Cement 1489-1976
Portland
3 Slag Cement (Fourth revision) 455-1989
Method
4 for physical tests for hydraulic cement (Reaffirmed 1980) 4031-1968
Method
5 of Chemical analysis for hydraulic cement (First revision) 4032-1985
Rapid6 hardening Portland cement 8041-1978

Hydrophobic
7 Portland cement 8043-1978
High 8Strength ordinary Portland cement 8112-1976
II. AGGREGATES
Specification
1 for coarse and fine Aggregates from natural source for concrete 383-1970
(Second Revision)
Specification
2 for sand for masonry mortars 2116-1965
Method
3 of Tests for aggregates for concrete 2385-1969 (Part- I to
Part- VIV)
Standard
4 sand for testing of cement (First revision) with amendment 1 and 2 650-1966
Reaffirmed 1980
Methods
5 for sampling of aggregates for concrete 2430 -1969
Method
6 of test for determining aggregates impact value of soft coarse aggregates 5640-1970
III. STEEL
Code1of practice for bending and fixing of bars 2502-1963
Specification
2 for cold worked steel deformed bars for concrete reinforcement 1786-1979
Code3of practice for welding of MS Bars used for reinforced concrete construction. 2751-1966

Code4for practice for use of Metal are welding for general construction of mild steel 818-1989
Deformed
5 bars for concrete reinforcement hot rolled mild steel and medium 1139-1966
tensile steel (Revised)
Recommendations
6 for detailing of reinforcement in reinforced concreted works 5525-1969
Specification
7 for Mild Steel and medium tensile steel Bars for Concrete 432-1966(Part I)
reinforcement.
Code8for practice for safety and health requirement in Electric and Gas welding and 818-1968
cutting operations
Code9for practice for fire precautions in welding and cutting operation. 3016-1965
Measurement of building and Civil Engineering works, method part VIII steel work 1200-1974
and iron work (Part VIII)
Code of procedure for manual or metal ARC and welding of Mild steel 823-1964
Specification for filler rods and wires for gas welding 1278-1972
Recommendations for welding cold worked steel bars for reinforced concrete 9417-1979
construction
Hard1drawn steel wire fabrics for concrete reinforcement 1566-1982
IV. CONCRETE
Method
1 of Measurement of building and Civil Engineer work Part-II cement 1200-1968
concrete works. (Part-II)
Code2of practice for plain and reinforced concrete 456-2000
Specification
3 for pre cast concrete coping blocks. 5751-1969
Methods
4 of tests for strength of concrete 516-1959
Code5of practice for laying in situ cement concrete lining on canals 3873-1993
Specification
6 for Admixtures for concrete 9103-1979

Method
7 of Test for Autoclaved cellular concrete products. 6441-1972-73 (Part-I
to IX)
Method
8 of Sampling and Analysis of concrete 1199-1959
Specification
9 of Batch type concrete mixtures (Second Revision) 1791-1968
General requirements for Concrete Vibrators immersion type 2505-1980
Specification for concrete vibrating tables 2514-1963

Method of test for permeability of cement mortar & concrete 3085-1965
Specification for fly ash for use as pozzolana as admixture for Concrete 3812-1981
(Part-II)
Specification for Portable swing weigh batch for concrete (single and double bucket 2722-1964
type)
Code of practice for installation of joints in concrete pavements 6509-1972
Code of practice for general construction of plain and reinforced concrete for dams 457-1957
and other massive structures
General requirement for concrete vibrator screed board type (First revision) 2506-1985
Code of practice for concrete structures for shortage of liquids 3370 (Part-1 to 4)
Code of practice for use of immersion vibrator for consolidating concrete (First 3558-1983
revision)
Method for testing performance of batch type concrete mixer 4634-1968
Form vibrators for concrete 4656-1968

Concrete batching and mixing plant 4925-1968
Ready mixed concrete (Second revision) 4926-1976
Code of practice for sealing joints in concrete lining on canals 5256-1992
Vibrating plate compactor 5889-1970

Concrete transit mixer and agitator 5892-1970
Concrete pavers 7245-1974
Concrete slump test apparatus 7320-1974

Method of making curing and determining compressive strength of accelerated 9013-1978
cured concrete test specimens.
Specification for 43 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement (First Revision) 8112-1989
Specification for 53 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement (First Revision) 12269-1987
Specification
3 for admixtures for concrete (First Revision) 9103-1999
V. EARTH WORK
Method
1 of Measurement of building and Civil Engineering 1200-1969
Works Part I, Earthwork. (Part-I)

Safety
2 code for piling and other deep foundations 5121-1969
Code3of practice for Design installation, observation and Maintenance of uplift 6532-1972
pressure pipes for Hydraulic structures on permeable foundation.
Safety
4 code for excavation works 3764-1966
Code5of practice for protection of slope for Reservoir embankment 8237-1985
Code6of practice for earth work on canals 4701-1982

Guidelines
7 for lining of canals in expansive soils 9451-19
Method
8 of test for soils Part-II Determination of water concrete 2720-1973
(Part-II)
Method
9 of test for soils Determination of water content dry density relation using 2720-1974
light compaction. (Part-VII)
Method of test for soils determination of dry density of soils in place by the sand 2720-1974
replacement method (Part-XXVIII)
Method of test for soils determination of dry density of soils in place by the core 2720-1975
cutter method (Part-XXIX)
Classification and identification of soils for general 1498-1970
Safety code for blasting and related drilling operation with Amendment No. I 4081-1967
(Reaffirmed 1978)

Portable Pneumatic drilling machine (First revision) 5441-1986
General requirement for black hold drilling rigs 7209-1974
Safety code for working with construction machinery 7293-1974
Code of practice for stability analysis of earth dams 7894-1975
Guidelines for design of under seepage control measures for earth and rock fill 8414-1977
dams
Filtration media sand and gravel 8419-1977(Part-I)

Guidelines for design of large earth and rock fill dams 8826-1978
Under drainage arrangements of lined canals. 4558-1995
Pre-cast cement concrete stables for canal lining 3868-1966
Methods of tests of soils 2720 (Part-1 to X)

Ammonium nitrate for explosive 4668-1967
Method of test for commercial blasting explosives and accessories. 6609
(Part-1 to V)
Detonators 7632-1975
Method of load test on soils (Second revision) 1888-1982
Method for standard penetration test for soil (first revision) 2131-1981
Glossing of terms and symbolic relating to soil engineering. 2809-1972
Method of sampling and preparation of stabilized soils for testing 4332

(Part-I of 1967)
Test 3in over burden 5529
(Part-1 of 1969)
VI. OTHER SUBJECTS

Safety
1 code for scaffolds and ladders part I scaffolds 3696-1966
Safety
2 code for scaffolds and ladders Part 2 ladders. 3696-1966
(Part-II)

Recommendation
3 s on stacking and storage of construction materials at site. 4082-1977
Plywood
4 for general purposes ( Second revision amendment 1 to 3) 303-1975
Test 5Sieves 460-1985

Code6practice for under drainage of lined canals (2nd revision) 4558-1995
Code7of for practice for in situ permeability test 5529 (Part-1 & 2)
Structural
8 steel (Standard quality) (with amendment No.1 to 3) IS: 226-1975
Hard9drawn steel wires (Third revision) IS: 432-1982

(Part-II)
Concrete pipes (with and without reinforcement) (2nd revision) IS: 458-1971
Code of practice for laying of concrete pipes IS: 783-1959
Specification for mild steel tubes, tubular and other wrought Steel fittings Part-I IS:1239-1979
mild steel tubes (fourth revision) (With Amendments No. 1 to 5)
Hard drawn steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement (Second revision) IS: 1566-1982
cement pressure pipe (Second revision) IS: 1592-1980

Preformed filler for expansion test in concrete payment and structures (non IS: 1838-1961
extruding and resilient type)
Cast iron detachable joints for use with asbestos cement pressure pipes. IS:8794-1978
Structural steel (Fusion welding quality) (Second revision) IS: 2062-1980
Code of practice for laying of cast iron pipe (With amendment No. I) IS: 3114-1965
Methods of testing for concrete pipes IS 3597-1966

Rubber sealing rings for gas mains water mains and sewers IS: 5382-1969
Centrifugally cast (spun) iron low pressure pipes for water gas and sewage (First IS: 6163-1978
revision)

Code of practice for laying of asbestos cement pressure pipes IS: 6530-1972
Cast iron detachable joints for use with asbestos cement pressure pipes IS: 8794-1978
Other Publications: Ministry of shipping and transport Specification for Road and No. 7900
Bridge works
VII. ROAD WORK

Paving
1 bitumen (revised) (with Amendment No.1) IS: 73-1961
Cut back
2 bitumen (Revised) IS: 217-1982
Glossary
3 of terms relating to bitumen and tar(2nd revision) IS:454-1961
Digboi
4 type cut back bitumen (revised) IS: 454-1961
Distributors
5 for hot tar and bitumen (first revision) IS: 2093-1974
Heaters
6 for tar and bitumen (first revision) IS: 2094-1974
Hot asphalt
7 mixing plants (with amendment No.1) IS: 3066-1965
Bitumen
8 emulsion for roads (anionic type) IS: 3117-1965
Asphalt
9 pavers’ finisher (first revision with amendment No.1) IS: 3251-1965
Bitumen drums IS: 3575-1977

Recommendations on stacking and storage of construction materials at site (first IS: 4082-1977
revision)
Bitumen mastic for bridge decking and roads IS: 5317-1969
Method of test for determining aggregates impact value of soft coarse aggregates. IS: 5640-1970
Safety code for construction involving use of hot bituminous materials. IS: 5916-1970
Method of test for determination of stripping value of road aggregates. IS: 6241-1971
Coarse aggregates for water bound macadam (first revision) IS: 6579-1981
Adhesive, bitumen emulsion IS: 7393-1974

Code of practice for road gullies IS: 774-1975

Bitumen emulsion for roads (Cationic type) IS: 8887-1976
Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials IS: 9381-1976
Method for testing tar and bituminous materials Determination of effect of heat IS: 9382-1979
and air by thin film over test.

Technical Specification

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Technical Specification

Uploaded by

Copyright:

VOLUME - IX

Technical Specification Page 1

Sl. No. Description

3 PUBLIC HEALTH ENGINEERING

5 BOREWELL & WATER TREATMENT PLANT, UNDER GROUND TANK, STP

11 LIST OF RELEVANT INDIAN STANDARDS

Technical Specification Page 2

1.2 Subsurface Investigation

Technical Specification Page 3

1.3 Site Preparation

Technical Specification Page 4

1.8 Method of Excavation - Rates to Include:

1.9 Excavation and Preparation for Concreting:

Technical Specification Page 5

1.10 Stacking of Excavated Materials:

1.11 Disposal / Carting of Surplus Earth

Technical Specification Page 6

The excavation shall be kept free from water:

a. During inspection and measurement

1.13 Shoring and Strutting

Technical Specification Page 7

1.15 Earthwork – Fills

Technical Specification Page 8

1.15.7 Crushed stone:

Technical Specification Page 9

1.15.10 Treatment of formations generally:

Technical Specification Page 10

The following references shall be used to confirm compliance:

‘Determination of the moisture content – Standard”

Technical Specification Page 11

1.16 Rates to Include for Excavation Items

1.17 Measurement for Excavation

Technical Specification Page 12

1.19 Soling used as sub-base

Technical Specification Page 13

1.19.3 Preparation of the Sub-grade before laying soling

1.19.4 Laying and packing the soling stones

1.19.5 Consolidation of the soling

2. CAST IN-SITU CONCRETE

2.1. a Applicable Standards

Technical Specification Page 14

Technical Specification Page 15

Stacking and Storage of Cement

Technical Specification Page 16

Technical Specification Page 17

Expansion and Contraction Joints

Proportioning, Batching & Mixing of Concrete

Technical Specification Page 18

Batching and mixing of concrete

Technical Specification Page 19

Following issues are to be noted while planning of concrete pours:

Technical Specification Page 20

S No Proportion of concrete Preliminary tests Work tests

Reinforced Cement Concrete

Technical Specification Page 21

Design Mix and Trial Mixes

Technical Specification Page 22

Technical Specification Page 23

Grade of Concrete Assumed Standard

Standard Deviation Based on Test Results

Determination of Standard Deviation

Technical Specification Page 24

Technical Specification Page 25

Technical Specification Page 26

Technical Specification Page 27

Construction joints in ground slabs

Construction joints in suspended slabs